Manualzz
  1. Computers & electronics
  2. Computer cables
  3. Coaxial cables

Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual

Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual 
Preface
Industrial Communication
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet
Networking Manual
System Manual
Part A: Basics of
communication with
Industrial Ethernet
1
Part A: Network structures
and network configuration
2
Part B: The SCALANCE
generation of devices
3
Part B: Active components
and supported topologies
4
Part B: Passive components
and accessories
5
Part C: SCALANCE X
switches and media
converters
6
Part C: SCALANCE W
wireless network
components
7
Part C: SCALANCE S
security components
8
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9
Part C: Passive components
and accessories
10
Part C: Instructions for fitting
connectors, attachments and
devices
11
Part C: Installing network
components in cabinets
12
Appendix
06
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
A
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90327 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Ⓟ 02/2008
Copyright © Siemens AG 2008.
Technical data subject to change
Preface
Target group and motivation
The networking manual accompanies you through all phases of preparation and
implementation of network projects. It provides you with an overview of the structure and
configuration of Industrial Ethernet networks with the aid of SIMATIC NET.
On the one hand, the target groups are decision makers and planners; with this
documentation, they can gain an overview of the technical principles, the SIMATIC NET
product range and the most important practical applications. On the other hand, it provides
configuration engineers and commissioning personnel with extensive information and
reference data to which they can refer when setting up their network systems.
Structure of the document
The networking manual consists of three parts, structured as follows:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
3
Preface
Table 1
Structure of the Networking Manual
Part
Content and target group
Part A: Basics
This part is intended for decision makers and planners.
The basics of network communication technology, the
special features of Industrial Ethernet and the essential
characteristics of SIMATIC NET products are presented in a
readily understandable form. Particular emphasis is placed
on the SCALANCE generation of devices.
This part closes with a chapter introducing the most
common network topologies and practical applications along
with the components required for them. The chapter is not
only instructive; you can also use it as a practical starting
point for planning your own systems.
Chapters 1 and 2
Part B: Product overview
Chapters 3 to 5
Part C: Technical specifications and reference
Chapters 6 to 12
The second part is also intended for decision makers and
planners.
This part introduces the entire product ranges of SIMATIC
NET. Here, you will find the main characteristics of the
SCALANCE generation of switches, security and wireless
components - the emphasis being on their technical
properties. OSM and ESM devices, passive components
(such as cables and connectors) and accessories are also
described.
The last part is intended for configuration engineers and
commissioning personnel.
You will find extensive reference data as required in the
planning and commissioning of a system. The document
contains dimension drawings, specifications, certifications
and much more helpful information on SIMATIC NET
components that will support you when setting up an actual
plant or network.
Topics such as product properties or supported network topologies are therefore described
more than once at various points in this book. The various aspects that are in the foreground
for the reader at a particular point are then highlighted.
Operating Instructions and other documents
Despite every effort being made to provide a complete and thorough picture, the Industrial
Ethernet Networking Manual cannot replace the Operating Instructions and reference
documents of the individual devices and components. You will find the detailed
documentation of the individual components on the Manual Collection DVD.
4
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1
2
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet ........................................................................ 17
1.1
Terminology .................................................................................................................................17
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
1.2.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
Industrial Ethernet........................................................................................................................19
Basics of Industrial Ethernet ........................................................................................................19
PROFINET ...................................................................................................................................21
Basics of PROFINET ...................................................................................................................21
PROFINET communication services ...........................................................................................23
SIMATIC NET ..............................................................................................................................25
Transmission procedures and real-time response.......................................................................26
Fault tolerance and redundancy ..................................................................................................28
Access Methods...........................................................................................................................29
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
Technologies of Industrial Ethernet .............................................................................................31
Communications media ...............................................................................................................31
Active and passive network components.....................................................................................33
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Network security ..........................................................................................................................36
Basics...........................................................................................................................................36
Firewalls .......................................................................................................................................36
"Virtual Private Networks" (VPNs) ...............................................................................................37
1.5
Switches and switched LANs.......................................................................................................38
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
Wireless LAN ...............................................................................................................................40
What are WLANs? .......................................................................................................................40
Differences between wireless LAN and wired networks..............................................................40
Preferred areas of application for WLANs ...................................................................................41
The standards of the "IEEE 802.11" series .................................................................................41
Encryption and data security........................................................................................................42
Avoiding collisions in wireless networks ......................................................................................43
1.7
The SCALANCE generation of devices .......................................................................................44
Part A: Network structures and network configuration ............................................................................. 45
2.1
Note..............................................................................................................................................45
2.2
2.2.1
Electrical networks .......................................................................................................................46
Twisted-pair cable runs................................................................................................................46
2.3
2.3.1
Optical networks ..........................................................................................................................48
FOC links .....................................................................................................................................48
2.4
Web Based Management for configuring networks .....................................................................50
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
Basic structures............................................................................................................................52
Network topologies ......................................................................................................................52
Linear structure ............................................................................................................................54
Star structure................................................................................................................................55
Redundant ring structure .............................................................................................................59
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
5
Table of contents
3
4
6
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
Optical linear structure ................................................................................................................ 61
Optical redundant ring structure.................................................................................................. 62
Redundant linking of network segments with electrical and FO components ............................ 63
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.1.1
2.6.1.2
2.6.1.3
2.6.1.4
2.6.1.5
2.6.1.6
2.6.2
2.6.2.1
2.6.2.2
2.6.2.3
2.6.3
Advanced network configurations ............................................................................................... 66
Configuring an IWLAN ................................................................................................................ 66
Structure of an IWLAN ................................................................................................................ 66
Structuring wireless networks ..................................................................................................... 67
IWLAN application example: Bottling plant ................................................................................. 73
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control ............................................................ 75
Wireless networks under extreme climatic conditions ................................................................ 76
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation ................................................. 77
Secured networks ....................................................................................................................... 79
Protection of the production network when networking with the office network ......................... 79
Automation network with protection from office network influences ........................................... 81
Data protection for mobile communication.................................................................................. 83
Mesh networks ............................................................................................................................ 84
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices........................................................................................ 89
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
The SCALANCE X family of switches......................................................................................... 89
Switches in the Industrial Ethernet environment......................................................................... 89
Device series of the SCALANCE X switches.............................................................................. 90
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks ............................................... 92
Wireless components for Industrial Ethernet .............................................................................. 92
Device series of the SCALANCE W components ....................................................................... 95
3.3
The SCALANCE S family of security modules............................................................................ 97
3.4
FastConnect (FC): The fast assembly system for SCALANCE components ........................... 100
Part B: Active components and supported topologies............................................................................ 103
4.1
Common properties of all SCALANCE devices ........................................................................ 103
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.3
4.2.2.4
4.2.3
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.2
4.2.3.3
4.2.3.4
4.2.4
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.2
4.2.4.3
4.2.4.4
4.2.4.5
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
4.2.5.2
4.2.5.3
SCALANCE X switches and media converters......................................................................... 105
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices......................................................................... 105
Entry level SCALANCE X005 ................................................................................................... 109
X005 area of application ........................................................................................................... 109
Design of the SCALANCE X005 ............................................................................................... 110
Functions of the X005 ............................................................................................................... 110
Topologies with the SCALANCE X005 ..................................................................................... 111
SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 devices ..................................................................................... 111
Overview of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 devices ........................................................... 111
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged ................................................................................................ 114
SCALANCE X-100 media converters ....................................................................................... 116
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT................................................................................................... 121
SCALANCE X-300 .................................................................................................................... 128
Area of application of the X-300................................................................................................ 128
X-300 design ............................................................................................................................. 129
Functions of the X-300 .............................................................................................................. 129
Compatibility with other devices................................................................................................ 129
Overview of the product characteristics .................................................................................... 131
SCALANCE X-400 modular ...................................................................................................... 132
SCALANCE X-400 .................................................................................................................... 132
Overview of the media modules................................................................................................ 136
Overview of extender modules ................................................................................................. 137
4.3
SCALANCE W wireless network components .......................................................................... 139
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Table of contents
5
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
4.3.2.3
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3
4.3.4.4
4.3.4.5
4.3.5
4.3.5.1
Versions of the SCALANCE W devices.....................................................................................139
Access points W-780 .................................................................................................................143
SCALANCE W-788 ....................................................................................................................143
SCALANCE W-786 ....................................................................................................................145
SCALANCE W-784 ....................................................................................................................148
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules ...........................................................................................150
Special functions of SCALANCE W devices..............................................................................151
Access control: Encryption and authentication ..........................................................................151
Logging ......................................................................................................................................152
SCALANCE W devices as bridges ............................................................................................153
Functions for improving performance ........................................................................................155
Filter functions............................................................................................................................155
Other active WLAN components................................................................................................156
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO ...............................................................................................................156
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
SCALANCE S Security Module .................................................................................................158
Area of application of SCALANCE S .........................................................................................158
SCALANCE S design.................................................................................................................163
SCALANCE S functions.............................................................................................................165
SOFTNET Security Client ..........................................................................................................168
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.3.1
4.5.3.2
4.5.3.3
4.5.3.4
4.5.3.5
4.5.3.6
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
4.5.4.2
4.5.4.3
OSM/ESM and ELS ...................................................................................................................170
Introduction ................................................................................................................................170
Overview of the functions...........................................................................................................170
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM) .....................................................................171
Area of application of OSMs/ESMs ...........................................................................................171
OSM/ESM functions...................................................................................................................172
Bus (linear) topologies with OSMs/ESMs ..................................................................................174
Redundant ring structure with OSMs/ESMs ..............................................................................174
Redundant linking of subnets using the OSM/ESM...................................................................176
OSM/ESM network management ..............................................................................................176
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)......................................................................................................179
Area of application of the ELS ...................................................................................................179
ELS functions .............................................................................................................................180
Topologies with the ELS ............................................................................................................181
Part B: Passive components and accessories ....................................................................................... 183
5.1
Product overview of "passive IE components" ..........................................................................183
5.2
Contacts for special cables and special lengths ........................................................................185
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.3
5.3.2.4
5.3.2.5
5.3.2.6
5.3.3
5.3.3.1
5.3.3.2
5.3.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.5.1
Components for electrical networks...........................................................................................186
Overview of twisted-pair cables .................................................................................................186
Individual cable types.................................................................................................................188
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet........................................188
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet ............................................188
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) .............................................................................188
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet).........................................................................189
IE Hybrid Cable ..........................................................................................................................189
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP) ...........................................................................................190
Preassembled cable types.........................................................................................................190
Preassembled twisted-pair cords...............................................................................................190
IE M12 connecting cable............................................................................................................193
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables ............................................................................194
Twisted pair interface converters ...............................................................................................196
Cable connectors .......................................................................................................................196
IE FC RJ-45 Plug .......................................................................................................................196
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
7
Table of contents
6
8
5.3.5.2
5.3.5.3
5.3.5.4
5.3.6
5.3.6.1
5.3.6.2
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug................................................................................................................. 197
IE M12 Plug PRO...................................................................................................................... 197
IP65 plug ................................................................................................................................... 198
Outlets ....................................................................................................................................... 198
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45.......................................................................................... 198
IE FC Modular Outlet ................................................................................................................ 199
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.2
5.4.2.3
5.4.2.4
5.4.3
5.4.4
Components for optical networks.............................................................................................. 201
Optical transmission technology ............................................................................................... 201
Glass FO cables........................................................................................................................ 202
Properties of glass FO cable 50/125 µm................................................................................... 202
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm.................................................................................................... 203
Overview of the glass fiber-optic cables 62.5/125 μm .............................................................. 204
Note on using preassembled glass FO cables ......................................................................... 205
Overview of plastic FO cable and PCF FO cable ..................................................................... 205
Special cables ........................................................................................................................... 207
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
5.5.4.3
5.5.4.4
Components for wireless networks ........................................................................................... 209
Antennas ................................................................................................................................... 209
IWLAN RCoax Cable (leaky feeder cable)................................................................................ 213
Various WLAN accessories....................................................................................................... 214
SINEMA E ................................................................................................................................. 215
SINEMA E ................................................................................................................................. 215
SINEMA E application............................................................................................................... 216
Range of functions of SINEMA E.............................................................................................. 217
Expanded functions of SINEMA E Standard............................................................................. 221
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 222
Accessories for SCALANCE X-400 switches............................................................................ 222
C-PLUG configuration memory ................................................................................................. 223
IP65 power supply..................................................................................................................... 224
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters .......................................................................... 229
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
Basic information on the use of SCALANCE X devices ........................................................... 229
General information on the use of SCALANCE X devices ....................................................... 229
General information on approvals and certifications................................................................. 230
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices .............................................. 230
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
SCALANCE X005 ..................................................................................................................... 233
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X005 .......................................................... 233
Installation instructions and guidelines X005 ............................................................................ 233
Operator control and display elements of the X005.................................................................. 234
Connector pin assignments X005 ............................................................................................. 234
Dimension drawing X005 .......................................................................................................... 235
X005 technical specifications .................................................................................................... 236
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
6.3.2.4
6.3.3
6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
6.3.3.4
SCALANCE X-100 .................................................................................................................... 237
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-100......................................................... 237
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines ........................................................................... 237
Installation on a DIN rail ............................................................................................................ 237
Installation on a standard rail .................................................................................................... 238
Wall mounting ........................................................................................................................... 239
Grounding.................................................................................................................................. 239
X-100 operator controls and displays ....................................................................................... 240
SCALANCE X-100 button ......................................................................................................... 240
Fault indicator (red LED) ........................................................................................................... 241
Power display............................................................................................................................ 241
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)................................................................................. 242
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Table of contents
6.3.4
6.3.4.1
6.3.4.2
6.3.5
6.3.6
Connector pin assignments .......................................................................................................242
Power supply..............................................................................................................................242
Signaling contact........................................................................................................................243
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings.....................244
X-100 technical specifications....................................................................................................247
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
SCALANCE X-100 media converters ........................................................................................251
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-100 media converters.............................251
X-100 media converter installation instructions and guidelines.................................................251
X-100 media converter operator controls and displays .............................................................252
Connector pin assignments X-100 media converters ................................................................253
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X-100 media converters ........................................................254
X-100 media converter technical specifications.........................................................................258
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.3.1
6.5.3.2
6.5.3.3
6.5.3.4
6.5.3.5
6.5.3.6
6.5.3.7
6.5.3.8
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT....................................................................................................260
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-200..........................................................260
X-200 installation instructions and guidelines............................................................................261
X-200 operator controls and displays ........................................................................................261
SCALANCE X-200 button ..........................................................................................................261
Fault indicator (red LED)............................................................................................................262
Power display.............................................................................................................................264
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)..................................................................................265
Redundancy manager indicator (green LED) ............................................................................266
Standby functions (yellow LED) .................................................................................................267
FOC diagnostic display (yellow LED) ........................................................................................268
LED display during startup.........................................................................................................269
Connector pin assignments X-200.............................................................................................269
Dimension drawing X-200..........................................................................................................270
X-200 technical specifications....................................................................................................272
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.3.1
6.6.3.2
6.6.3.3
6.6.3.4
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
SCALANCE X-300 .....................................................................................................................278
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-300..........................................................278
X-300 installation instructions and guidelines............................................................................279
X-300 operator controls and displays ........................................................................................280
LED display ................................................................................................................................280
LED display - Fault and Power ..................................................................................................281
LED display - System.................................................................................................................282
LED display of the ports (DMode A through DMode D).............................................................283
Connector pin assignments X-300.............................................................................................287
Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................288
X-300 technical specifications....................................................................................................289
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.4.1
6.7.4.2
6.7.4.3
6.7.5
6.7.5.1
6.7.5.2
6.7.5.3
6.7.6
6.7.6.1
6.7.6.2
SCALANCE X-400 .....................................................................................................................293
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-400..........................................................293
Overview of X408-2 ...................................................................................................................294
Overview of the X414-3E ...........................................................................................................295
X-400 installation instructions and guidelines............................................................................297
Installing / uninstalling the SCALANCE X-400...........................................................................297
Installing / uninstalling with a 35 mm DIN rail ............................................................................299
Fitting / removing a cover/dummy cover....................................................................................301
X-400 operator controls and displays ........................................................................................303
X-400 display elements..............................................................................................................303
SELECT / SET button ................................................................................................................304
DIL switches of the SCALANCE X-414-3E................................................................................304
Connector pin assignments X-400.............................................................................................308
Connectors for the twisted pair cables.......................................................................................308
Connectors for fiber-optic cables ...............................................................................................311
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
9
Table of contents
6.7.6.3
6.7.6.4
6.7.6.5
6.7.6.6
6.7.7
6.7.7.1
6.7.7.2
6.7.8
6.7.8.1
6.7.9
6.7.9.1
6.7.9.2
6.7.9.3
6.7.10
6.7.10.1
6.7.10.2
6.7.10.3
7
8
10
Connectors of the power supply (X1) of the SCALANCE X-400 .............................................. 313
Connectors of the signaling contact and grounding strap (X2) of the SCALANCE X-400 ....... 314
Connectors of the digital inputs (X2) of the SCALANCE X414-3E ........................................... 315
Note........................................................................................................................................... 316
Dimension drawings X-400 ....................................................................................................... 317
SCALANCE X408-2 .................................................................................................................. 317
SCALANCE X-414-3E............................................................................................................... 319
X-400 technical specifications................................................................................................... 321
SCALANCE X414-3E and X408-2 - technical specifications.................................................... 321
Media modules.......................................................................................................................... 324
Installing / removing a media module ....................................................................................... 324
Display elements of the media modules ................................................................................... 326
Technical specifications of the media modules......................................................................... 326
Extender modules ..................................................................................................................... 328
Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 328
Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 333
Technical specifications of the extender modules .................................................................... 336
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components ........................................................................... 339
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.3.1
7.1.3.2
7.1.4
7.1.4.1
7.1.4.2
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
SCALANCE W access points and client modules .................................................................... 339
Designation of the SCALANCE W product lines....................................................................... 339
Certifications and approvals of the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR........................... 340
Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 343
Securing the housing ................................................................................................................ 343
Installation instructions for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR ................................. 343
Display elements of SCALANCE W.......................................................................................... 347
LEDs on the W-788................................................................................................................... 347
LEDs of the W-740PRO/RR clients .......................................................................................... 349
Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients ............... 349
Dimension drawing W-788/W-740PRO/RR .............................................................................. 351
Technical specifications for the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR and W74x-1PRO/RR .............. 351
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.1.1
7.2.1.2
7.2.2
7.2.2.1
7.2.2.2
7.2.2.3
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
SCALANCE W-786 Access Points ........................................................................................... 354
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection ................................................................... 354
Certifications and approvals for the SCALANCE W786 ........................................................... 354
Degree of protection.................................................................................................................. 355
Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 355
Removing / fitting the housing cover......................................................................................... 355
Connecting up cables................................................................................................................ 357
Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only) ................................................................... 360
LED display ............................................................................................................................... 362
Connector pin assignment W-786............................................................................................. 365
SCALANCE W786 technical specifications .............................................................................. 365
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.3.1
7.3.3.2
7.3.3.3
7.3.3.4
7.3.3.5
7.3.3.6
SCALANCE W-784 Access Points ........................................................................................... 369
Certifications for SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1................................................................... 369
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1............................................. 371
Installation instructions and guidelines ..................................................................................... 372
Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only) ................................................................... 372
Lightning protection, power supply, and grounding .................................................................. 374
Connectors for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1............................... 376
Connection for Industrial Ethernet ............................................................................................ 378
Connectors for external antennas............................................................................................. 379
Mounting with adapter plate ...................................................................................................... 380
Part C: SCALANCE S security components .......................................................................................... 383
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Table of contents
9
10
8.1
SCALANCE S certifications and approvals, degree of protection .............................................383
8.2
SCALANCE S installation and setup instructions ......................................................................383
8.3
Display elements SCALANCE S................................................................................................384
8.4
Connector pin assignments SCALANCE S ...............................................................................386
8.5
Dimension drawings for SCALANCE S .....................................................................................386
8.6
SCALANCE S technical specifications ......................................................................................386
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS .................................................................................................................. 389
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.3.1
9.1.3.2
9.1.3.3
9.1.3.4
9.1.4
9.1.4.1
9.1.5
9.1.5.1
9.1.5.2
9.1.6
9.1.7
Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM) .........................................389
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection OSM/ESM ..................................................389
Installation instructions and guidelines for OSM/ESM ...............................................................391
Operator control and display elements of the OSM/ESM..........................................................393
"Status" LED display ..................................................................................................................393
"Power" LED display ..................................................................................................................394
Port LEDs...................................................................................................................................395
Operator controls .......................................................................................................................396
Connector and outlet pin assignment ........................................................................................397
Interface pin assignments ..........................................................................................................397
Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................402
Optical Switch Module (OSM)....................................................................................................402
Electrical Switch Module (ESM).................................................................................................405
Components supplied with the OSM/ESM.................................................................................407
Technical specifications .............................................................................................................408
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)......................................................................................................412
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection ELS ............................................................412
Installation instructions and guidelines ELS ..............................................................................412
Operator control and display elements of the ELS ....................................................................414
Connector pin assignments .......................................................................................................415
Dimension drawings of the ELS.................................................................................................416
Technical specifications of the ELS ...........................................................................................419
Part C: Passive components and accessories ....................................................................................... 421
10.1
Overview: Media, cables and connectors ..................................................................................421
10.2
Contacts for special cables and special lengths ........................................................................422
10.3
Notes on installation of electrical and optical bus cables ..........................................................422
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.1.1
10.4.1.2
10.4.2
10.4.2.1
10.4.2.2
10.4.2.3
10.4.2.4
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.5.1
10.4.5.2
10.4.5.3
Components for electrical networks...........................................................................................423
Twisted Pair Cord ......................................................................................................................423
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) .............................................................................423
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet).........................................................................426
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables .......................................................................................428
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet........................................428
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet ............................................438
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2...................................................................................................441
IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2 and IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2...................................................443
IE Hybrid Cable ..........................................................................................................................445
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP) ...........................................................................................448
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables ................................451
Preassembled twisted-pair cords...............................................................................................451
Twisted pair interface converters ...............................................................................................457
IE M12 connecting cable............................................................................................................458
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
11
Table of contents
11
12
10.4.5.4
10.4.6
10.4.6.1
10.4.6.2
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables ........................................................................... 459
Cable connectors ...................................................................................................................... 461
RJ-45 plugs and IE M12 Plug PRO .......................................................................................... 461
IE FC Modular Outlet and IE FC Outlet RJ-45.......................................................................... 470
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.1.1
10.5.1.2
10.5.1.3
10.5.1.4
10.5.1.5
10.5.2
10.5.2.1
10.5.2.2
10.5.3
10.5.3.1
10.5.3.2
10.5.3.3
10.5.3.4
10.5.4
10.5.4.1
10.5.4.2
10.5.5
10.5.5.1
10.5.5.2
10.5.5.3
10.5.5.4
Components for optical networks.............................................................................................. 481
Glass FO cables 50/125............................................................................................................ 481
Properties of glass FO cable 50/125 µm................................................................................... 481
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 µm........................................................................................... 487
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm.................................................................................................... 488
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL) ................................... 489
FO FRNC Cable 50/125............................................................................................................ 490
Glass FO cables 62.5/125......................................................................................................... 492
Overview of the glass fiber-optic cables 62.5/125 μm .............................................................. 492
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable 62.5/125 μm ...................................................... 495
Plastic FO cable POF and PCF ................................................................................................ 497
POF Standard Cable and POF Trailing Cable .......................................................................... 497
PCF Standard Cable ................................................................................................................. 499
PCF trailing cable...................................................................................................................... 501
PCF trailing cable GP................................................................................................................ 503
Cable connectors for FO cables ............................................................................................... 505
Cable connectors for glass FO cables ...................................................................................... 505
Cable connectors for plastic and PCF FO cables ..................................................................... 506
Preassembled FO cables.......................................................................................................... 508
Preassembled FO standard cable GP ...................................................................................... 508
Preassembled FO Ground Cable.............................................................................................. 508
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable.............................................................................................. 509
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable GP........................................................................................ 510
10.6
10.6.1
10.6.1.1
10.6.1.2
10.6.1.3
10.6.1.4
10.6.2
10.6.2.1
10.6.3
10.6.4
Components for wireless networks ........................................................................................... 511
Antennas ................................................................................................................................... 511
Characteristics of omnidirectional antennas ............................................................................. 511
Characteristics of directional antennas ..................................................................................... 511
Technical specifications for antennas ....................................................................................... 512
Dimension drawings for the antennas....................................................................................... 514
RCoax leaky feeder cable ......................................................................................................... 519
Technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 519
Various WLAN accessories....................................................................................................... 521
SINEMA E ................................................................................................................................. 522
10.7
10.7.1
10.7.2
Accessories ............................................................................................................................... 525
C-PLUG configuration memory ................................................................................................. 525
IP65 power supply..................................................................................................................... 526
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices ...................................................... 527
11.1
Note on the installation instructions .......................................................................................... 527
11.2
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool ........................................................................ 527
11.3
Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug ..................................................................................................... 530
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.2
11.4.3
Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45..................................................................................... 532
Connecting the RJ-45 Modular Outlet....................................................................................... 532
Connecting the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34.......................................................................... 533
Connecting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP / IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2 GP ........... 535
11.5
Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector.................. 538
11.6
Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid connector ........................ 544
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Table of contents
12
A
11.7
11.7.1
11.7.2
Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors ........................................................................548
Assembling Industrial Twisted Pair Connectors ........................................................................548
Fitting the D-sub male connector ...............................................................................................549
11.8
11.8.1
11.8.2
11.8.3
11.8.4
11.8.5
11.8.6
11.8.6.1
11.8.6.2
11.8.6.3
11.8.6.4
11.8.7
11.8.7.1
11.8.7.2
11.8.7.3
11.8.7.4
11.8.7.5
11.8.8
11.8.8.1
11.8.8.2
Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings ......................................555
General notes on networking bus cables...................................................................................555
Protection from electric shock....................................................................................................555
Mechanical protection of bus cables..........................................................................................556
Electromagnetic compatibility of fiberoptic cables .....................................................................558
Connecting fiber-optic cables.....................................................................................................559
Electromagnetic compatibility of bus cables ..............................................................................560
Equipotential bonding system ....................................................................................................560
Requirements of the AC power distribution system...................................................................564
Shielding devices and cables.....................................................................................................567
Special noise suppression measures ........................................................................................569
Arrangement of devices and cables ..........................................................................................570
The influence of power distribution systems (EN 501742, 6.4.4.2) ...........................................571
Cable categories and clearances...............................................................................................571
Cabling within closets ................................................................................................................573
Cabling within buildings .............................................................................................................573
Cabling outside buildings ...........................................................................................................574
Laying bus cables ......................................................................................................................574
Installation instructions for electrical and optical bus cables .....................................................574
Additional instructions on installing fiberoptic cables.................................................................576
Part C: Installing network components in cabinets................................................................................. 579
12.1
IP degrees of protection.............................................................................................................579
12.2
SIMATIC NET components........................................................................................................580
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 583
A.1
Overview of the standards relevant for network installation ......................................................583
A.2
Content of the standards............................................................................................................585
A.3
Application of the standards.......................................................................................................586
Glossary: Terms and acronyms ............................................................................................................. 587
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 603
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
13
Part A:
Target group and content
This part is intended for decision makers and planners.
The basics of network communication technology, the special features of Industrial Ethernet
and the essential characteristics of SIMATIC NET products are presented in a readily
understandable form. Particular emphasis is placed on the SCALANCE generation of
devices.
This part closes with a chapter introducing the most common network topologies and
practical applications along with the components required for them. The chapter is not only
instructive; you can also use it as a practical starting point for planning your own systems.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
15
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial
Ethernet
1.1
1
Terminology
"Industrial Ethernet"
The term "Industrial Ethernet" covers a series of expansions to the Ethernet standard (IEEE
802) with which communication suitable for an industrial environment is implemented. The
main aims are as follows:
● Deterministic data transmission (guaranteed response times and data rates)
● Safeguarding against component failure
● Network topologies adapted to a particular plant with the emphasis on linear (bus),
redundant network structures.
The components must meet the following requirements:
● Equipment designed for industry (signaling contacts, protected cables and cable
connectors),
● Resistant to extreme conditions (temperature, vibration, pollution, electromagnetic
interference etc.)
Figure 1-1
Industrial Ethernet Logo
"PROFINET"
PROFINET is the name of the standard for Industrial Ethernet developed and maintained by
the PROFIBUS user organization. PROFINET unites protocols and specifications with which
Industrial Ethernet meets the requirements of industrial automation technology.
These include, for example:
● Real-time conditions,
● Environment strongly affected by EMI,
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
17
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.1 Terminology
● Demanding requirements for safety, reliability and availability.
This world is in stark contrast to an office environment where high data throughput and largearea networking are the main objectives. Further differences between the two network types
can be found in the numbers and heterogeneity of the nodes and their intermeshing.
Figure 1-2
PROFINET Logo
SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET stands for a wide range of network components grouped under the motto
"Totally Integrated Automation" to reflect the modern fully integrated implementation of
automation solutions. PROFINET is the protocol used by SIMATIC NET components within
the framework of Industrial Ethernet.
18
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
1.2
Industrial Ethernet
1.2.1
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
The special features of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet was developed for the office environment and is subject to certain restrictions due
to its origins. Industrial Ethernet therefore offers significant expansions of the Ethernet
technology for the industrial environment:
● Protected investment due to continuous and compatible further development
● Network components for use in a tough industrial environment
● Fast assembly and commissioning on site with cabling technology suitable for industry
● High transmission performance even with large numbers of nodes thanks to the end-toend availability of components with 100 Mbps transmission rates complying with Fast
Ethernet and 1000 Mbps with Gigabit Ethernet (see below) on all network components
● Fulfillment of the most stringent real-time requirements due to software and hardware
adaptation
● Integrated security concepts to protect against unauthorized access
● High availability of the networks due to redundancy functionality (for example ring
redundancy) and redundant power supply
● Permanent monitoring of the network components with simple and effective signaling
concept
● Almost unlimited communication performance with scalable performance available when
necessary with switching technology.
● Networking of different areas of application such as office and production
● Data reservation in Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN)
● "Rapid Roaming" in Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) for extremely fast handover of
mobile nodes between different access points and therefore fast cyclic data
communication (iPCF)
● Communication throughout the enterprise with the options of linking over WAN (Wide
Area Network) such as ISDN or Internet
● Precise time stamping of events in the entire system with plant-wide timekeeping
By using switching technology, the network span is almost unlimited. Industrial Ethernet also
provides the option of wireless communication that can be integrated seamlessly in the
network structure. This means that information is available everywhere and at any time and
mobile access via Industrial Wireless LAN to the intranet/Internet is possible. Security
modules protect the network reliably from sabotage and espionage.
Industrial Ethernet uses data communication to exchange data between automation systems
or between automation system and intelligent partners (for example PCs).
High-speed communications networks can be set up with Industrial Ethernet in linear bus,
ring or start structures with large spans.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
19
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Fast Ethernet is the further development of the Ethernet technology with data rates of 100
Mbps. The Fast Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3 u is based essentially on the classic Ethernet
standard.
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet have the following common features:
● Data format
● Access Methods (Page 29)
They differ from each other in the following respects:
● Network span
● Rules for network design
● Autosensing, the automatic detection of the transmission rate
● Higher data rate (see below)
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet is an expansion of the Ethernet specifications to increase the data
transmission rate to 1000 Mbps or 1 Gbps. The relevant standards are IEEE 802.3z for
transmission over glass fiber and IEEE 802.3ab for electrical cable. An even faster standard
with 10 Gbps (IEEE 802.3an for electrical cable, IEEE 802.3 ae for fiber-optic cable) is
currently being introduced.
Apart from making adaptations to the protocol, the increase in transmission speed is also
achieved by the network nodes having suitably powerful ports and by the use of highly
immune category "5e" twisted-pair cables on the electrical connections.
Restrictions of Industrial Ethernet
Despite these adaptations, Industrial Ethernet in this form would still be lacking certain
properties that are of major significance for industrial applications. These include:
● Transmission mode and real-time response; in other words, it is guaranteed that frames
are transferred within a specified time,
● Determinism; put simply: The same preconditions always lead to the same results and
there are no undefined statuses,
● Fault-tolerance and redundancy with redundancy mechanisms that can compensate the
failure of components.
These restrictions are overcome with PROFINET.
See also
Transmission procedures and real-time response (Page 26)
Fault tolerance and redundancy (Page 28)
20
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
1.2.2
PROFINET
1.2.2.1
Basics of PROFINET
The special features of Industrial PROFINET
G_D211_EN_00051
Process
Real-Time
Communication
Safety
IT-Standards
& Security
PROFINET
NetworkInstallation
Distributed
Field Devices
Motion
Control
Distributed
Intelligence
Figure 1-3
PROFINET overview
PROFINET is the innovative and open Industrial Ethernet standard (IEC 61918, for
PROFINET also IEC 61784-5-3) for industrial automation.
PROFINET uses the existing IT standards and allows end-to-end communication from the
field level to the management level as well as plant-wide engineering.
Real-time communication
PROFINET is based on Industrial Ethernet and uses the TCP/IP standard (Transport Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) for parameter assignment, configuration and diagnostics. Realtime communication for the transfer of user/process data uses the same cable. PROFINET
can support the following real-time properties:
● With the option of prioritizing the bus nodes, Real Time (RT) uses the optimization or the
communications stack in the switch. This allows high-speed data transfer with standard
network components in automation.
● Isochronous Real Time (IRT): Hardware-supported real-time communication allows,
among other things, isochronous data transfer with very short update times for highly
dynamic motion control applications.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
21
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
Distributed field devices
PROFINET allows the integration of distributed field devices (IO devices, for example signal
modules) directly in Industrial Ethernet.
During the familiar configuration with STEP 7, these field devices are assigned to a central
control unit (known as the IO controller). Existing modules or devices can continue to be
used with PROFINET-compliant interface modules or links, guaranteeing the investments of
PROFIBUS users: Fieldbus integration is simplified.
Fieldbus integration
PROFINET allows the simple integration of existing fieldbus systems. To allow this, a proxy
is used; on the one hand this is the master of the PROFIBUS or AS-Interface system, on the
other hand it is a node on Industrial Ethernet and supports PROFINET communication. This
protects the investment of plant operators, machine and plant assemblers and device
manufacturers.
Motion control
Based on PROFINET, isochronous real time (IRT) can be used to implement extremely fast
isochronous mode drive controls for high-speed motion control applications without great
effort.
The standardized drive profile PROFIdrive allows vendor-independent communication
between motion controllers and drives, regardless of the bus system - Industrial Ethernet or
PROFIBUS.
Standard IT functions can be used at the same time on the same cable without impairing
real-time communication.
Distributed intelligence and machine-machine communication
PROFINET offers distributed automation on the basis of Component Based Automation – the
modular solution for machine and plant assembly and installation. Machines and plants can
be broken down into reusable, intelligent modules. Such modules include the mechanical
parts, the electrical/electronic parts and the user program of a plant unit.
Network installation
With PROFINET, the network can be installed without any specialist knowledge. At the same
time, the open standard based on Ethernet meets all the requirements relevant to an
industrial environment. PROFINET allows the simple setup of the usual network topologies
such as star, tree, linear bus and ring for increased availability using cabling designed for
industry.
Wireless networks
PROFINET provides new functions and applications for wireless communication with
Industrial Wireless LAN. This makes is possible to replace technologies subject to wear and
tear such as slip rings and allows the use of automated guided vehicle systems or
personalized operator control and maintenance devices. Industrial WLAN is based on
standards but also offers additional features to allow high-speed linking of field devices to
controllers:
22
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
● "Data reservation" is used to reserve bandwidth between an access point and defined
clients. This guarantees high and reliable performance for this client regardless of the
number of clients operating with the access point.
● "Rapid Roaming" for extremely fast handover of mobile nodes between different access
points and therefore fast cyclic data communication (iPCF).
IT standards
Within the framework of Web integration, the data of PROFINET components are
represented in HTML or XML format.
Regardless of the tool used, information at the automation level can be accessed with one of
the commonly used Internet browsers from any location greatly simplifying commissioning
and diagnostics. ("Web Based Management")
Security
PROFINET defines a graduated security concept that can be used without specialist
knowledge and that largely excludes operator error, unauthorized access and manipulation
without any detrimental effect on production. This functionality is provided by the
SCALANCE S product family with software and hardware modules.
Safety
The safety profile PROFIsafe (complying with safety standard IEC 61508) that was tried and
tested with PROFIBUS and that allows the transmission of standard and safety-oriented data
on one bus cable can be used regardless of the bus medium. PROFIsafe is the first profile
certified by the German TÜV for failsafe communication for Ethernet. This also allows
wireless communication for failsafe applications with Industrial Wireless LAN.
PROFINET therefore allows the implementation of failsafe applications with end-to-end
configuration in the entire network – whether planning new systems or upgrading existing
systems.
Process
PROFINET is the standard for all applications in automation. With its integration in
PROFIBUS, it also covers the process industry - even including hazardous areas.
See also
PROFINET communication services (Page 23)
1.2.2.2
PROFINET communication services
PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA
PROFINET supports the PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA communications services as
well as various profiles such as PROFIsafe and PROFIdrive.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
23
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
The PROFINET IO and PROFINET CBA communications services provide the functionality
required by automation systems.
PROFINET IO
● PROFINET IO allows the direct connection of distributed field devices (IO devices, for
example signal modules) to Industrial Ethernet. To further support failsafe applications,
the devices communicate over PROFINET IO with the PROFIsafe profile.
● With PROFINET IO, you use the familiar SIMATIC software tools, for example STEP 7 for
engineering and diagnostics at the field level and SIMOTION Scout for configuring motion
control applications.
● With IRT communication (IRT: Isochronous Real Time), part of the transfer time is
reserved for cyclic (deterministic) data transfer. This divides the communication cycle into
a deterministic part and an open part.
● You can run both IRT and TPC/IP communication over the same network at the same
time without one impairing the other.
● By supporting isochronous real-time communication, PROFINET provides the short and
deterministic update times decisive for motion control applications.
PROFINET CBA
● With PROFINET CBA (Component Based Automation), you can implement a modular
solution for your distributed automation system. With the component-based functionality
of PROFINET CBA, you divide the automation system into independent modules. You
implement the connections between the modules with the graphic engineering tool
SIMATIC iMap. This tool supports you when interconnecting modules right through to
complete plants and entire systems.
● PROFINET CBA supports cyclic and acyclic communication and with update times up to
10 ms is particularly suitable for data transmission between controllers.
● PROFIdrive is the functional interface between controllers and drives in PROFINET and
PROFIBUS. PROFIdrive is defined by the PROFIdrive profile of the PROFIBUS user
organization (PNO). The PROFIdrive profile specifies the device behavior and the
mechanism for accessing drive data for electrical drives, from a simple frequency
converter to high-performance servo controllers.
● PROFIsafe is the profile of PROFINET and PROFIBUS for safety-oriented
communication. PROFIsafe uses the conventional standard automation of PROFINET
and PROFIBUS and is certified for safety levels up to SIL 3 (Safety Integrated Level) of
the IEC 61508 and category 4 of EN954-1.
● PROFINET defines requirements regarding information integrity for automation systems
and supports the user with possible safety solutions specifically for an industrial
environment.
24
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
1.2.3
SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET in the automation world
SIMATIC NET is the name of an entire family of networks. The various networks meet the
widest possible range of performance and application requirements:
They can exchange data at various levels, between various parts of a plant or between
various automation stations. SIMATIC NET components also have uniform system interfaces
and are extremely well coordinated with each other. In addition to the previous wired
solutions, wireless communication is gaining ground in industry. SIMATIC NET provides
products for enterprise-wide transmission of data over local area networks, intranet, Internet
or wireless networks.
Mobiltelefon
PC
Internet Pad
Fernwirk- und
Stationsleittechnik
PC
Bedien- und
Beobachtungssysteme
Motion Control
Systems
Controller
Controller
PC/PG
Fernwirkund Stationsleittechnik
WLAN Controller
Numeric
Control
Security
Teleservice
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Controller
Notebook
Feldgerät für Ex-Bereich
Bedien- und
Beobachtungssysteme
Controller
Numeric
Control
PC/PG
Access
Point
Notebook
IWLAN
RCoax Cable
Controller
Link
Koppler
PROFIBUS PA
Mobile Panels
Access
Point
Link
PROFIBUS
Link
Machine
Vision
Link
PROFINET
Mobile
Panel
Motormanager
Motion Control
Systems
Feldgeräte
Feldgeräte
Link
RFID
System
Drives
Access
Point
Link
Aktor
AS-Interface
KNX
Sensoren
Figure 1-4
Client
Module
Controller
Netzteil
Sensoren
Feldgerät
Netzteil
Sensoren
G_IK10_XX_50187
Drives
Industrial Ethernet and PROFINET in the SIMATIC NET environment
SIMATIC NET is characterized by the following features:
● Complete integration from the field level to the enterprise level,
● Coverage of the field area with Industrial Ethernet,
● Promotion of mobile communication,
● Integration of the IT technologies.
These communication network options allow SIMATIC products and intelligent devices to be
combined locally according to your requirements. Flexibility and openness of the standards
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
25
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
of SIMATIC communications networks make it possible to link different systems and to
implement extensions.
Thanks to its scalable performance, SIMATIC NET allows the implementation of enterprisewide communication – from the simplest device to the complex system. The SIMATIC NET
components used with Industrial Ethernet are particularly powerful. The devices of the
SCALANCE product family represent the latest and most advanced generation of active
SIMATIC NET network components.
Technical requirements
Communications networks are a central component of modern automation solutions.
Industrial networks have to fulfill special requirements, for example:
● Linking of automation systems, PCs as well as simple sensors, actuators and computers,
● Correct transfer of information and at the right time,
● Robust against electromagnetic interference, mechanical stress and pollution
● Flexible adaptation to the production requirements.
Industrial networks belong to the LANs (Local Area Networks) and allow communication
within a limited area.
Industrial networks fulfill the following communications functions:
● Process and field communication of the automation systems including sensors and
actuators,
● Data communication between automation systems,
● IT communication to integrate modern information technology.
SIMATIC NET and TIA
The network solutions of SIMATIC NET are an integral component of Totally Integrated
Automation (TIA). With Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), Siemens is the only
manufacturer to provide a totally integrated basis for implementing customer-specific
automation solutions.
1.2.4
Transmission procedures and real-time response
Overview
Industrial Ethernet uses the protocol family TCP/IP or UDP/IP for data transfer. These are
essentially defined in the following RFCs (RFC: Request For Comment):
● RFC 768: UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
● RFC 791: IP (Internet Protocol)
● RFC 792: ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
● RFC 793: TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
26
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
However, Industrial Ethernet is unsuitable for cyclic data exchange due to its telegram
overhead. An optimized Layer-2 protocol conforming to IEEE 802.3 that makes real-time
communication on the basis of Industrial Ethernet possible is therefore used.
Real-time communication (RT) and determinism
"Real time" means that a system guarantees the processing of external events within a
certain time. A high data rate alone is no guarantee for real-time response, since delays are
possible at "bottlenecks" in the network. Instead, the network protocol must ensure that time
critical frames are given preferential treatment.
This is achieved by defining real-time classes:
● RTC 1: Suitable for transfer of cyclic data. There are no special requirements for the
switches used.
● RTC 2: Suitable for transfer of alarms and cyclic data. Special switches must be used
here. There is, however, not yet any need for particular communication planning in the
form of a special configuration.
● RTC 3: ("Isochronous real time", see below) suitable for transfer of cyclic data for motion
control applications. RTC 3 also means not only that special switches are necessary but
also that explicit communication planning is required.
"Determinism" means that a system's reaction is predictable, in particular that the same input
data always result in the same reactions. One requirement, for example, would be that
frames must not be able to overtake each other; in other words, input values read later must
be arrive at the controller before others that were read earlier.
Both requirements are important for industrial networks. PROFINET fulfills these
requirements with the following transfer characteristics:
● Transfer of time-critical data takes place at guaranteed time intervals.
To achieve this, PROFINET provides an optimized communication channel for real-time
communication.
● The time of transfer can be accurately determined.(forecast).
● Problem-free communication using other standard protocols is guaranteed within the
same network.
Isochronous Real-Time Communication, IRT
In PROFINET with IRT, communication over Ethernet is divided into individual cycles. Each
cycle consists of two phases, an IRT channel reserved for extremely time-critical data, and
an "open channel", within which RT and non-time critical frames can be sent.
This allows time-critical and uncritical data to be sent on the same connection. At the same
time, however, a certain data rate (and therefore a transmission time) is reserved for the
critical data and real-time capability can therefore be guaranteed.
When this transmission method is implemented in ERTEC-ASICs (Enhanced Real-Time
Ethernet Controller), cycle times of 0.25 ms and jitter accuracy below 1 µs are achieved.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
27
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
Applications for IRT
IRT is used in areas with particularly stringent requirements for response times that cannot
be exceeded. This is the case, for example, for motion control applications, which require
response and update times in the range of a few milliseconds.
IRT Communication / Real-Time and TCP/IP Communication
Alongside IRT communication for which a bandwidth is reserved within the update time, RT
and TCP/IP communication is also permitted within a transfer cycle.
In RT communication the cyclic data are transferred between the IO controller and IO device,
however, without the "best possible synchronicity".
Unsynchronized IO devices automatically exchange data using RT communication.
Other procedures
Other procedures used in the S5/S7 environment to meet real-time requirements are known
under the names "ISO (H1)" or "ISO on TCP/RFC 1006".
1.2.5
Fault tolerance and redundancy
Overview
Fault-tolerant systems are designed to reduce production downtime. Availability can be
enhanced, for example, by means of component redundancy. Communication systems are
thus extended to automation systems.
Redundant systems in industrial Ethernet are characterized by the multiple (redundant)
presence of important automation components. When a redundant component fails,
processing of the program is not interrupted.
Redundancy is achieved by duplicating the part components such as CPU, network, CP, etc.
Monitoring and synchronization mechanisms ensure that if the active redundant connection
path fails, the previously passive (redundant) connection path takes over the communication
automatically. The connection itself remains established.
Redundant connection of several rings
The following graphic illustrates the principle of fault tolerance based on a network consisting
of several optical (yellow) and electrical (yellow) rings. The interconnection of the rings is
redundant.
28
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
Server
Operator Station
Engineering Station
Company network
PC
PC
Industrial Ethernet
1000 Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Standby connection
SCALANCE
X408-2
ESM TP80
SCALANCE
X308-2
S7-300
S7-300
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE
X204-2
SCALANCE
X204-2
100 Mbit/s
S7-300
S7-400
S7-400
PG
Figure 1-5
G_IK10_XX_10217
SCALANCE
X208
Optical and electric ring linked redundantly by SCALANCE X
The secondary rings (at the bottom) are connected redundantly with the main ring (at the
top): Of the two connections, one is inactive and is only activated when the other fails.
See also
SCALANCE X-400 (Page 293)
1.2.6
Access Methods
Switching mechanisms
Industrial Ethernet and therefore also PROFINET use switched Ethernet for data transfer.
The data traffic on the network is channeled and prioritized by dedicated devices known as
switches. A switch enables communication to take place simultaneously in both directions
(sending and receiving). This provides a network capacity of 200 Mbps, or twice the
bandwidth of Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps).
Switches of the SCALANCE X device family support real-time capability in the network with
two mechanisms: "Store and Forward" in general, and "Cut through" for "hard" real-time
requirements (IRT).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
29
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.2 Industrial Ethernet
The advantage of the switching mechanism is that nodes or network areas that do not need
a particular frame are not subjected to any load by irrelevant data. The resulting free network
capacities can be used by further devices. In contrast to hub-based shared medium
solutions, with switching technology it is possible to communicate in different network
sections at the same time and so increase the effective bandwidth.
Store and forward
With the store and forward mechanism, the switch stores the frames and then queues them.
The frames are then forwarded selectively to the specific port that can access the addressed
node (store and forward).
Advantages of store and forward
)UDPHD
)UDPHE
)UDPHD
5HFHLYLQJ
6HQGLQJ
3RUW$
)UDPHE
3RUW%
5HFHLYLQJ
3RUW&
4XHXHIRUSRUW
$
6ZLWFK
Figure 1-6
Store and Forward at Industrial Ethernet
Store and forward optimizes data traffic. With this function, the switch can check the formal
correctness of frames and prevent bad or corrupted frames being distributed any further over
the network.
Cut through
In the Cut Through process not the entire data package is stored temporarily in a buffer, but
is passed directly onto the target port as soon as the first 6 bytes (target address) have been
read. The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal.
The data is only stored temporarily using the store and forward mechanism when the section
between the target part and the port of the next switch is in use.
In PROFINET switches, cut through is implemented by using ERTEC-ASICs.
See also
Switches and switched LANs (Page 38)
30
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
1.3
Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
1.3.1
Communications media
Selection of media
Industrial Ethernet provides you with three different technologies to solve your automation
task:
● Electrical cabling: "Twisted pair"
● Fiber-optic cable: "Fiber optic"
● Wireless/radio
Configuration limits
For a basic application, the various media typically have the following configuration limits:
Table 1-1
Typical configuration limits for media with Industrial Ethernet
Medium
Typical numbers of nodes per
segment
Network span
Electrical cabling (twisted pair,
copper)
approx. 100
up to 5 km
Fiber optic
more than 1000
up to 150 km
Wireless/radio
approx. 10,
more when using RCoax cables
up to 1000 m per segment
Note that by using switches or access points, the actual network installations can be much
larger.
With PROFINET and suitable gateway modules, you can also integrate existing subnets (for
example PROFIBUS, ASi) in the Industrial Ethernet architecture.
Guide to selection
The following table shows with of the three communications media is best suited to which
requirements:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
31
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
Twisted-pair network
Fiber optic network
Wireless link
Flexibility of the network topology
Suitability for high data rates
1)
1)
Networking between buildings
EMC
Simple cable laying
Range of cables for special applications
Cables for indoor area;
trailing cable; marine cable;
FastConnect cables
Cables for indoor and
outdoor area; trailing cable;
halogen-free cables
Effect of power failure
Failure of a subnet
Failure of a subnet
Effect of connection failure
Network breaks down into
two subnets that function 3)
in isolation
4)
2)
Network breaks down into
two subnets that function
in isolation
Failure of a subnet
2)
3)
5)
1000 m per segment
100 m
3000 m
50 m POF
100 m PCF
multimode
26000 m singlemode
30 m indoor per segment
100 m outdoor per segment
100 m
3000 m
multimode
50 m POF
100 m PCF
26000 m singlemode
100 m feeder cable to
access point
Pre-assembled cables
yes
yes
On-site assembling
without special tool;
FastConnect system
with special tool
with trained staff
Integrated diagnostics support
LEDs; signal contact;
SNMP network management;
Web-based management,
PROFINET diagnosis
LEDs; signal contact;
SNMP network management;
Web-based management,
PROFINET diagnosis
LEDs;
SNMP network management;
Web-based management
Redundant network structures
Electrical ring or doubling of
the infrastructure
(linear bus, star, tree)
Optical ring or doubling of the
infrastructure
(linear bus, star, tree)
multiple coverage
Max. distance between two
network nodes/Access Points
Max. length of connection cable
Well-suited
suitable
not suitable
Figure 1-7
5000 m
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Suitable for 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s
Protection against subnet failure using redundant voltage supply
no effect in ring structure
depending on the network components used
depending on the antenna used
G_IK10_XX_10013
up to 150 km:
over 150 km observe
signal runtime
Max. length of the network
32
2)
Overview: Criteria for selecting the network configuration
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
1.3.2
Active and passive network components
Active and passive network components
Industrial Ethernet networks are created using active and passive network components:
● Active network components are for example switches, access points, client modules,
media converters and link modules.
● Passive network components are, for example, power cables and plug connectors.
The following tables contain a selection of network components for PROFINET/Industrial
Ethernet.
Table 1-2
Active network components for PROFINET
Medium
Components
Remark
Copper
(electrical)
SCALANCE X switches
To interconnect nodes on Industrial
Ethernet and to set up networks with more
complex topologies
ESM
"Electrical Switch Module"
ELS
"Electrical Lean Switch"
PN/IO Link
Used to couple PROFINET to PROFIBUS
SCALANCE S
"Security Module" to secure networks
against unauthorized access
Media and extender modules
To expand the functionality of
SCALANCE X switches
Fiber-optic cable
(optical)
SCALANCE X switches
see above
OSM
Optical Switch Module
Radio
(wireless)
SCALANCE W access point and
client modules
For close-range wireless transfer
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
For wireless coupling of Industrial Ethernet
to PROFIBUS DP
Table 1-3
Passive network components for PROFINET
Medium
Connector technology
Cable type / transmission medium
Standard
Copper
(electrical)
RJ-45 cable connector 100Base-TX
ISO/IEC 61754-24
Two-pair, symmetrical and shielded copper cable
IE FC RJ-45 Plug
IEC 61158
90/145/180
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2x2
M12 cable connector
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 2x2
D-coded
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2x2
IE TP torsion cable GP 2x2
IE FC TP trailing cable 2x2
IE FC TP marine cable 2x2
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
33
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
Medium
Connector technology
Cable type / transmission medium
Standard
Fiber-optic cable
(optical)
SC RJ Plug
ISO/IEC 61754-24
POF-LWL (Plastic Optical Fiber)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-40
PCF-LWL (Plastic Cladded Fiber)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-30
PCF standard cable GP
PCF trailing cable
PCF trailing cable GP (for SC RJ Plug)
BFOC (Bayonet Fiber
Optic Connector)
ISO/IEC 60874-10
SC Plug
ISO/IEC 60874-14
Glass fiber cable - multimode fiber (62.5/125 µm)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-10
Fiber-optic standard cable
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
SIENOPYR shipping duplex FO cable (for BFOC
connectors)
Glass fiber cable - multimode fiber (50/125 µm)
ISO/IEC 60793-2-10
FO standard cable GP
FO Trailing Cable
FO Trailing Cable GP
FO Ground Cable (for BFOC and SC connectors)
Radio
(wireless)
IWLAN RCoax N
connector
IEEE 802.11
IWLAN RCoax cable 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
Note
Cable assembly
FastConnect cables can be assembled particularly fast and simply on site. This means that
RJ-45 cabling technology, an existing standard, is also available in a version suitable for
industry.
Product overview
For a detailed overview of the available modules and accessories, refer to Part "B" of this
document, "Product overview". (Sections 3 -- 5)
Reference data
You will find reference data, installation instructions etc. for the individual modules in the
reference section "C" of this document. (Sections 6 -- 12)
See also
Part B: Active components and supported topologies (Page 103)
34
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.3 Technologies of Industrial Ethernet
Part B: Passive components and accessories (Page 183)
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 105)
SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 139)
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
OSM/ESM and ELS (Page 170)
Components for electrical networks (Page 186)
Components for optical networks (Page 201)
Components for wireless networks (Page 209)
Accessories (Page 222)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
35
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.4 Network security
1.4
Network security
1.4.1
Basics
Security in automation technology
In principle, the security of every network with a connection to the outside world is at risk of
being compromised. Attacks from the outside can take the form of widespread viruses or
other malware, but may also involve sabotage or data espionage with an attacker
deliberately attempting to take control of a network or to access relevant information.
The potential damage caused by such an attack (if it succeeds) is high and can involve not
only serious production and machine downtimes but also a loss of customer confidence.
Security of the networks should therefore always be given high priority, even more so today
because island solutions are no longer practicable and automation networks normally also
require access to the Internet.
1.4.2
Firewalls
"Gatekeeper" function
Put simply, a firewall is a device or a software application inserted between the network and
the outside world as a "gatekeeper" to protect the network. The firewall represents the only
access to the local area network from outside and the entire data traffic crossing the
boundaries of the network is directed via the firewall. This means that the firewall can block
unwanted and potentially dangerous access from the outside. Various techniques are
available.
Packet filter
A packet filter inspects data packets entering or leaving the network, their sender and
receiver addresses and the "port", or service, to which the data packet will be transferred.
Such services might be E-mail, file transfer with FTP, database access, SSH for encrypted
transfer etc.
Filter rules stored in the firewall now block the access to certain addresses or certain
services. Firewalls can implement complex filter rules in which, for example, service "A" is
available only for IP addresses "B" and "C" but is not allowed for other communications
partners.
"Stateful Inspection"
"Stateful Inspection" goes a step further than the packet filter and takes into consideration
the "context" within the communication in addition to the addresses and ports.
In concrete terms, this means, for example, that Web pages sent be an external server to an
internal computer can only pass through the firewall if the internal computer has actually
requested this page.
36
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.4 Network security
Such techniques are, for example, relevant for preventing "Denial of Service" attacks (DoS)
in which an external intruder sends queries to the computer under attack from numerous
computers at the same time in the hope of overloading and paralyzing the network. Since,
however, the stateful inspection detects these illegitimate queries at the boundary of the
local area network, local traffic continues unaffected by the DoS attacks.
"Network Address Translation" (NAT)
"Network Address Translation" ("NAT") is a function with which a router (or, in our case, the
firewall) replaces the addresses of the local nodes involved in data traffic with its own IP
address whenever the traffic goes beyond the network boundaries. Incoming replies are only
assigned to the actual addressees with their IP addresses after passing the firewall.
This mechanism can be used for ergonomic reasons since to the outside only one single IP
address is required for any number of local nodes.
It does, however, also provide a certain protection from attacks since only one single
address is visible to the outside namely that of the firewall. A "naive" attack would always be
aimed at the firewall directly and not at the local computers being protected behind it.
"Personal firewalls"
For professional applications, the firewalls normally used are separate devices. The
alternative to these devices are "personal firewalls" in the form of software running on the
target computers themselves.
Personal firewalls cannot, however, provide the same security as dedicated devices. Errors
in the operating system or badly programmed or configured personal firewalls allow an
attacker to avoid the "gatekeeper" filter function and to attack the target computer or target
network despite the firewall.
1.4.3
"Virtual Private Networks" (VPNs)
The function of Virtual Private Networks
A VPN means that a public network is used to transfer private data by "embedding" the
private communication in the traffic of the public network.
The nodes of the VPN have the impression that they are connected directly to each other.
They are not aware of the intermediate steps inserted in the transmission via the public
network. For this reason, the mechanisms are known as "tunneling" through the public
network. Using VPNs, for example, two subnets at a considerable physical distance from
each other can be connected so that the users can address them as one unit.
Security of VPNs
The term "private" relates primarily to the use of VPNs and not to the confidentiality of the
data: VPNs are not automatically secure since it is not essential for the data traffic to be
encrypted. If, however, suitable encryption techniques are used, communication via the VPN
is practically safe from eavesdropping.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
37
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.5 Switches and switched LANs
See also
Encryption and data security (Page 42)
1.5
Switches and switched LANs
Switches and hubs
If a network needs to be divided into several (logical and physical) subunits, switches are
used at the connection points of the network sections.
Switches are active components that can receive and send at several ports independently.
There are equipped with intelligence that allows them to forward received messages only via
the port connected to the segment in which the actual addressee is located. This can be
connected directly to the port or via a further switch.
Since all direct connections are point-to-point and since the medium used allows full duplex
communication, it is no longer possible for collisions to occur.
● Hubs also connect network sections but only establish physical contact without controlling
the traffic. In contrast to switches, all the subnets connected via hubs form a single
collision domain.
Switched connection paths: "Shared LANs" and "Switched LANs"
"Shared LANs" are networks on which a message being transmitted blocks the network for
all other nodes; in other words, there can only be one sender at any one time. A wireless
network is a simple example of such a shared LAN.
"Switched LANs" are set up using switches and are characterized by the connection paths
for each data packet being switched based on the target address. Different data packets can
be in transit in the network at the same time on different connection paths. The data packets
only run through segments that lead to the recipient. All the SCALANCE X products and the
OSMs and ESMs belong to the products that use switching mechanisms and are therefore
used to set up switched LANs.
Functions of switches
Essentially, switches have the following functions:
● Connecting sublets
In contrast to hubs, switches connect several collision domains. This means that switches
can be used to set up networks with a far greater span and much higher number of nodes
than is possible with hubs. The distances achieved depend on the fiber-optic interfaces
used in the devices and the FOR fibers used. (For achievable spans, check the reference
section of this manual.)
● Containing load
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data traffic
remains local. In contrast to repeaters or hubs, which distribute data unfiltered to all ports
/ network nodes, switches operate selectively. Only data intended for nodes in other
sublets is switched from the input port to the appropriate output port of the switch. To
make this possible, a table assigning Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output ports is
created by the switch in a "teach-in" mode.
38
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.5 Switches and switched LANs
● Limitation of errors to the network segment affected
By checking the validity of a data packet on the basis of the checksum which each data
packet contains, the switch ensures that bad data packets are not transported further.
Collisions in one network segment are not passed on to other segments.
● Increase in the number of connectable end devices compared with classic Ethernet
Advantages of switched LANs
The advantages of such switched LANs are:
● Improved performance (since the messages only block the sections of cable actually
between the sender and receiver),
● Avoidance of data collisions (because the sender does not block the entire network),
● Increased availability particularly in topologies that include redundancy,
– If a connection path is blocked in a redundant topology (due to a cable break or
component failure), switches can still redirect the messages over an alternative path
and maintain communication. A network with a ring topology (see below) is a classic
example of using switches in this way.
● Option of forming subnets and network segments,
● Simple rules for network configuration,
● Network topologies with 50 switches in the ring and a total span of up to 150 km can
implemented without any problems and without needing taking the signal delay into
account,
● Unlimited expansion of the network span by connecting individual subnets (upwards of
150 km, signal delay must be taken into account),
● Simple, expansion is possible without affecting the existing network.
Application example: Redundant ring
Using an IE switch as the redundancy manager in a ring with redundancy manager provides
greater availability. If there is an interruption on the connection between these switches, the
IE switch used as redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very short time creates a
line from the ring with redundancy manager. As a result, a functional, end-to-end structure is
restored.
See also
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
39
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.6 Wireless LAN
1.6
Wireless LAN
1.6.1
What are WLANs?
WLAN
A WLAN is a "Wireless Local Area Network".
IWLAN
An IWLAN is an "Industrial WLAN", in other words, a wireless network "hardened" to cope
with the wireless complications of an industrial environment.
"Hardening" measures
Conventional wireless connections are not well suited to an industrial environment, on the
one hand because the production and automation level include numerous sources of EMI,
and on the other hand, automation has strict demands in terms of real-time requirements
and deterministic data transmission. The very nature of wireless networks also increases the
risk of eavesdropping or manipulation by unauthorized third parties. For this reason, wireless
networks need to be "hardened".
The "hardening" measures include, on the one hand robust and immune modules, and on
the other, the use of special protocols and security measures to ensure a deterministic
response and data protection.
1.6.2
Differences between wireless LAN and wired networks
Cable as opposed to radio waves
The use of cables and wires for communication has certain advantages because this makes
an exclusive medium available: The transmission characteristics of this medium are welldefined and constant (as long as cables, routers or similar are not replaced) and it is clear at
all times which nodes are connected to a local area network and which are not.
On the other hand, the effort and cost of cabling increases with the number of nodes (and at
the same time the potential for broken cables and other hardware faults). Finally,
communication with freely moving nodes using wired methods is practicable only in
exceptional situations. Wireless links also allow areas to be covered that would present
problems using cables (across streets, over water).
In such situations, the advantages of wireless-supported networks come to the fore
(essentially the breaking of ties with any fixed location). In such cases, the possibly higher
required investment can be compensated by the customer benefits.
In networks with large numbers of nodes, however, it must not be forgotten that the space in
which wireless propagates is effectively a "shared medium" so that the effective data rate
decreases as the number or nodes increases.
40
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.6 Wireless LAN
Complexity of the RF field
Radio waves propagate through space, are diffracted by obstacles or attenuated passing
through objects. This means that they form a complex RF field that changes yet again if the
obstacles move. Obviously, the area illuminated by one or more transmitters is not sharply
defined. There is also no clear delineation of the RF field and the transmission
characteristics of the individual nodes in the wireless network fluctuate depending on their
position. Lastly, it is also practically impossible to detect a "silent listener" in a wireless
network.
These characteristics are fundamental when it comes to connection reliability, security and
immunity of a network. With responsible administration, careful planning and the use of
trained employees aware of the particular requirements of a wireless network, they can
nevertheless be as reliable, secure and robust as wired networks.
1.6.3
Preferred areas of application for WLANs
Preferred areas of application
In many environments, their special qualities make wireless networks the preferred, and in
some cases only practical medium.
These areas of application predestined for wireless networks include:
● Connection of mobile nodes both among themselves and with stationary nodes,
● Connection of mobile nodes with wired networks (Ethernet etc.),
● Contact with rotating nodes (cranes, carousels, ...),
● Connection of nodes with restricted mobility (monorail suspension tracks, high-bay
storage racks, ...), as a replacement for slip contacts or trailing cables,
● Establishing wireless bridges between physically separate wired subnets (different
buildings, across streets, over water, ...),
● Communication with nodes in inaccessible areas.
See also
Configuring an IWLAN (Page 66)
1.6.4
The standards of the "IEEE 802.11" series
Standardization of WLANs
IEEE
The acronym "IEEE" stands for the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, an
organization that has taken on the task of developing, publishing and promoting electronic
and electrotechnical standards and that can be compared in some ways with DIN.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
41
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.6 Wireless LAN
The IEEE 802.11 group
Under the project number "802", a number of working groups were given the task of
developing standards for setting up and operating networks. Group "802.3" is responsible,
for example, for the standards relating to Ethernet connections.
The "802.11" working group developed the specification for wireless LANs, and the most
important variants of this specification "802.11 a/h" and "802.11 b/g" currently represent the
de facto standard for wireless networks.
Versions of the "802.11" standard
The following table provides an overview of the features of the individual versions.
802.11 "a"/"h"
802.11 "b"
802.11 "g"
Frequency band
5 GHz
2.4 GHz
2.4 GHz
Gross data rate
54 Mbps
11 Mbps
54 Mbps
OFDM
DSSS
OFDM
Modulation
Expansions of the 802.11 standard include the following:
● 802.11 "e": Introduces QoS to provide better support for real-time applications (VoIP,
streaming),
● 802.11 "i": Replaces the no longer tenable WEP encryption mechanism with WPA or
WPA2.
1.6.5
Encryption and data security
WEP ("Wired Equivalent Privacy")
WEP is the oldest and at the same time the least secure encryption method with which
WLAN transmission is protected against unauthorized intruders according to the 802.11
standard.
With this method, a user password is used as a key from which a series of pseudo random
numbers is generated. Each character of the frame to be transmitted is then encoded with
next number of this series and decoded at the receiver.
WEP is generally considered to be inadequately secure today.
WPA ("Wi-Fi Protected Access")
WPA is the further development of WEP and still counts as the standard today despite
several weaknesses. Apart from technical modifications in the actual encryption algorithm,
the protocol was also adapted:
● Passwords for network access (authentication) are stored on a central server
("RADIUS"),
● The key for frame transmission changes dynamically making statistical attacks more
difficult,
42
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.6 Wireless LAN
● The MAC address is worked into the key (in other words, unique hardware identification)
of the sender making it more difficult to falsify the sender of the message.
WPA2 and AES ("Advanced Encryption Standard")
The major difference between WPA2 and WPA is the encryption method: The weaknesses
identified in WPA no longer exist in the AES method used in WPA2.
If a "sensible" passwords are selected that it are adequately long and cannot be guessed,
messages encrypted with AES are considered proof against eavesdropping with the current
state of the art (Spring 2007).
EAP ("Extensible Authentication Protocol")
The acronym EAP covers a wide framework of different authentication mechanisms for
network access. In other words, EAP is not an authentication method itself but describes the
mechanism according to which the client and server can agree on a method.
MAC filter
MAC addresses ("Media Access Control A.") are codes with which hardware elements (for
example network cards, modules, motherboards) can be uniquely identified worldwide.
The addresses are normally encoded in 6 bytes (48 bits) and hardwired in the relevant
components; on request, the components identify themselves by returning their MAC
address.
Filter tables with MAC addresses can be created in network management that permit or
forbid access for certain addresses. This allows simple although comparatively unsecured
access protection for the network to be implemented.
Manipulation of MAC addresses (spoofing) cannot be excluded which means that MAC filters
only provide adequate security for a network in conjunction with other measures.
1.6.6
Avoiding collisions in wireless networks
CSMA/CA with RTS/CTS
Ethernet uses the bus access method CSMA/CD. This acronym stands for Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Collision Detection. In this method a node that wants to send listens to
the common bus line (Carrier Sense) and sends if it is not occupied. If the bus line is
occupied by another node, the node that wants to send postpones its wish to send and tries
to transfer again later on (Multiple Access). This functions, however, only on media on which
the node can send and receive at the same time (for example Ethernet); in other words, not
in WLANs.
For this reason, a different mechanism is used in wireless networks. CSMA/CA ("Collision
Avoidance") attempts to avoid the occurrence of collisions in advance. This is achieved, for
example, using the RTS/CTS method in which the sender sends a short test signal ("Ready
To Send" -- RTS). The actual transmission only begins after the recipient has replied to this
with "Clear To Send" (CTS). If a collision occurs, the retransmission follows after a pause not
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
43
Part A: Basics of communication with Industrial Ethernet
1.7 The SCALANCE generation of devices
selected at random but according to priority. With this strategy, communication remains
deterministic.
1.7
The SCALANCE generation of devices
The SCALANCE generation of devices
The name SCALANCE stands for the current generation of SIMATIC NET network
components for simple setup, management and operation of Industrial Ethernet LANs. The
three product families are as follows:
● SCALANCE X is the new product family of Industrial Ethernet switches. Switches are
active network components that distribute data to specific addressees, control network
traffic and ensure that the load on network connections is optimally distributed.
SCALANCE X switches are available in a wide range of variants with electrical and/or
optical ports, and in some cases with special functionalities to meet strict real-time
requirements.
● SCALANCE W is the family of components and accessories for wireless local area
networks ("WLANs"). The use of access points,clients and accessories allows the
connection of mobile nodes and the establishment of networks in exacting environments.
SCALANCE W components are distinguished by their robustness, security and reliability.
Wireless transmission can be implemented using conventional antennas, directional
antennas or over short distances with leaky feeder cables (RCoax cable).
● SCALANCE S security modules protect automation networks from unauthorized access
and unnecessary communication load. Both eavesdropping and attacks by outsiders are
prevented reliably. Even if there are disturbances in the external network, data traffic in
the automation cell remains unaffected. Communication is protected regardless of the
application protocol used.
You will find a detailed introduction to the members of the SCALANCE generation of devices
in Part "B" of this document.
See also
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices (Page 89)
44
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.1
2
Note
Note
Please note the following:
You will find further use cases and information on configuration of various network topologies
in Part "B" in the descriptions of the individual components.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
45
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.2 Electrical networks
2.2
Electrical networks
Products
The following components and cables are used in a 100 Mbps switched LAN:
● Components
– SCALANCE X switches
– OSM/ESM
● Cables
– Twisted-pair cable
– TP Cord
See also
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 105)
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM) (Page 171)
Components for electrical networks (Page 186)
2.2.1
Twisted-pair cable runs
100BASE-TX
The twisted pair interfaces of the SCALANCE X products comply with the
IEEE 802.3u: 100BASE-TX standard. Depending on the particular variant, the switches have
one or more RJ-45 or M12 jacks.
46
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.2 Electrical networks
Requirements of twisted-pair cables
The twisted-pair cables inserted between two adjacent SCALANCE X modules must not
exceed the following maximum lengths:
Table 2-1
Maximum runs with twisted-pair cables
Cabling structure
Cable type
Max. length
Max. total of the patch
cables (TP cord)
In one piece
ITP standard 2x2
100 m
-
In one piece
IE FC standard cable GP
100 m
-
(without using patch
cable)
IE FC flexible cable GP
85 m
-
IE FC torsion cable GP
55 m
-
IE FC trailing cable GP
85 m
-
IE FC trailing cable
85 m
-
IE FC marine cable
85 m
-
(with D-sub connectors)
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP
85 m
-
Structured
IE FC standard cable GP
90 m
10 m
(with patch cable and
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 or
IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet)
IE FC flexible cable GP
75 m
10 m
IE FC torsion cable GP
45 m
10 m
IE FC trailing cable GP
75 m
10 m
IE FC trailing cable
75 m
10 m
IE FC marine cable
75 m
10 m
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP
75 m
10 m
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
47
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.3 Optical networks
2.3
Optical networks
Products
The following components and cables are used in an optical 100 Mbps switched LAN:
● Components
– SCALANCE X products with FO interfaces
– OSM (I)TPnn (switches with multimode glass fibre-optic cables) or OSM (I)TPnn-LD
(switches with single mode glass fibre optic cables)
● Cables
– Multimode glass fiber-optic cable type 50/125 µm
– Single mode glass fiber-optic cable type 10/125 µm
– Twisted-pair cable, TP Cord
See also
SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 105)
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM) (Page 171)
Components for optical networks (Page 201)
2.3.1
FOC links
Standard Fast Ethernet
The switches equipped with interfaces for 100BASE-FX comply with the standard
IEEE 802.3u. They operate at a wavelength of 1300 nm.
Multimode glass fibers of the type 50/125 µm are suitable for the connection.
Switches or media modules equipped with an optical interface for single mode glass fibers of
the type 10/125 µm have the supplement LD in their names (Long Distance).
The length of an insertable FOC link is decided by:
● The fiber type multimode/ single mode
● The FO cable attenuation at the wavelength used
● The bandwidth distance product of the fiber-optic cable
48
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.3 Optical networks
Requirements of multimode glass fiber-optic cables
Table 2-2
Max. length of a link with multimode FO cables between two switches:
Fiber-optic cable type
FO power loss
at 1300 nm
Bandwidth distance
product
Max. length
50/125 µm
<= 0.7 dB/km
>= 1200 MHz * km
3,000 m
Requirements of single mode glass fiber-optic cables
Single mode glass fiber-optic cables between two switches with suitable interfaces must
meet the following requirements in terms of power loss and the bandwidth distance product:
Table 2-3
Max. length of a link with single mode FO cables between two suitable equipped
switches:
Fiber-optic cable type
FO power loss
at 1300 nm
Bandwidth distance
product
Max. length
10/125 µm
<=0.5 dB/km
No info
26,000 m
SIMATIC NET multimode glass fiber-optic cables
The SIMATIC NET product range for Industrial Ethernet includes various types of multimode
glass fiberoptic cables with 50/125 µm fibers (see "Passive components for optical
networks").
● FO Standard Cable
● FO Ground Cable
● FO Trailing Cable
● FO Trailing Cable GP
● SIENOPYR duplex marine fiberoptic cable
When connecting SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet switches using SIMATIC NET multimode
glass fiberoptic cables, distances of 0 to 3000 m are permitted between two adjacent
components.
Note
Single mode glass fiberoptic cables with fiber type 10/125 are available in customized
lengths. You will find contacts in the "Support and training" section of this manual.
Standard 1 Gbps Ethernet
In Gbps Ethernet, a distinction is made in much the same way as in Fast Ethernet between
two versions both of which are described in the IEEE 802.3z standard.
1000BASE-SX is the name of the version for multimode glass fiber. A wavelength of 850 nm
is used. Due to their properties, the same 50/125 µm fiber from the SIMATIC NET product
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
49
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.4 Web Based Management for configuring networks
range can be used as for 100BASE-FX. The range between two points is 750 m. As long as
this range is not exceeded, it is possible to upgrade from 100 Mbps Ethernet to 1
Gbps Ethernet over existing installed cable of this type without needing to install new cables.
The version for single mode glass fibers is 1000BASE-LX. A wavelength of 1300 nm is used
here. A single mode glass fiber-optic cable 10/125 µm may be up to 10,000 m long.
In terms of the FO link length that can be included, the dependencies are basically the same
as for 100 Mbps Ethernet.
Table 2-4
Maximum link length with multimode glass fiber-optic cables with 1 Gbps Ethernet:
Fiber-optic cable type
FO power loss
Bandwidth distance
product
Max. length
50/125 µm
Multimode
≤ 2.7 dB/km at 850 nm
≥ 600 MHz * km
750 m
9/125 µm
Single mode
≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm
10,000 m
≤ 0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm
See also
Components for optical networks (Page 201)
2.4
Web Based Management for configuring networks
Configuration over a Web interface
All SCALANCE devices that have management functions can be configured using "Web
Based Management" (WBM).
The devices have an integrated Web server that can be accessed by the configuration
engineer with a browser over every Ethernet connection. The server provides a series of
pages like those familiar from the Internet. On these pages, the configuration engineer can
make all important settings and can also run diagnostics and report functions.
50
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.4 Web Based Management for configuring networks
Figure 2-1
Web Based Management based on the example of configuring a W-788 access point
Advantages
● Access is possible from any PC with a Web browser installed on it and with an Ethernet
connection to the target device. (With SCALANCE W devices, this connection can also
be over a wireless network.)
● The installation of special software is not necessary and no specialist knowledge is
required to navigate through and work with WBM.
● Access is, of course, password protected.
For more detailed information on the functions of the WBM, refer to the operating instructions
of the individual devices.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
51
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
2.5
Basic structures
2.5.1
Network topologies
Topologies
"Topology" means the spatial arrangement and interconnection of the nodes of a wired
network.
Which topology is preferable depends on the position of the nodes relative to each other and
what is required of the network. If it is required that the network remains working in the event
of a failure, a ring structure is an advantage in which each node can reach the others over
both branches of the ring. A linear bus topology in which the nodes follow on from each other
like a chain is, on the other hand, more adversely affected by the failure of a component or a
cable break which causes the network to break up into separate sections.
In many cases, networks do not have a "pure" topology but rather a hybrid configuration; or
the full network consists of several subnets with different topologies.
The elementary topologies: Linear bus, star, tree and ring
In principle, wired networks with more than two nodes can be configured in three basic
structures: As a linear bus, a star and as a tree or ring.
52
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
Operator Station (OS)
OS
SIMATIC IT
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
SIMATIC Batch
OS
Engineering Station (ES)
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Terminal bus 1 Gbit/s
OS Server
(Redundant)
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Plant bus 1 Gbit/s
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Switch
SCALANCE
X414-3E
IE FC
Outlet
RJ45
IE TP Cord
s
POWER
TEMP
SIMATIC PANEL PC
A
G
M
S
V
Y
B
H
N
T
W
Z
C
I
D
E
J
O
F
K
P
L
Q
R
U
7
X
8
4
A
9
5
1
2
.
0
6
3
+/-
INS
DEL
ESC
TAB
ACK
HELP
SHIFT
S7-400
S7-300
FN
CTRL ALT
ENTER
MP 370
Switching cabinet
Switch
SCALANCE
X108
IE FC
Outlet
RJ45
IE TP Cord
SIMATIC
Field PG
with
CP 1512
s
POWER
TEMP
SIMATIC PANEL PC
A
G
M
S
V
Y
B
H
N
T
W
Z
C
I
O
D
E
J
F
K
P
L
Q
R
U
X
A
7
4
8
5
1
2
.
0
9
6
3
+/-
INS
DEL
ESC
TAB
ACK
HELP
SHIFT
S7-400
S7-300
CTRL ALT
ENTER
Switching cabinet
Switch
SCALANCE
X208
S7-400 with
CP 443-1
Advanced
S7-300/
MP 370
IE/PB
Link
s
POWER
TEMP
SIMATIC PANEL PC
A
G
B
D
E
F
J
K
L
N
O
P
Q
R
T
U
V
Y
H
C
I
M
S
W
Z
X
A
7
8
4
5
1
2
.
0
9
6
3
+/-
INS
DEL
ESC
TAB
ACK
HELP
SHIFT
FN
CTRL ALT
ENTER
Switch
SCALANCE
X208
IE FC
RJ45
Plug
0
ET 200X
1
PROFIBUS
FC Standard Cable
MP 370
Star structure
Figure 2-2
FN
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
SIMATIC
Field PG
with
CP 1512
S7-300
with CP 343-1
Line structure
G_IK10_XX_10004
Switch
SCALANCE
X108
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
Switching cabinet
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
Ring structure
Selection of various network topologies (schematic): Ring (top center), star (bottom left) and linear bus
(bottom right)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
53
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Configuring an IWLAN (Page 66)
2.5.2
Linear structure
Linear bus
The linear bus is the simplest network structure. It is characterized by a network backbone to
which the individual nodes are connected directly or over a branch (only one node is
permitted per branch).
● The advantage of the linear bus topology is its simple setup and low hardware
investment. It is suitable, for example, for networking of rigidly linked machines over a
wide area as found in assembly lines.
● The disadvantage of the linear bus topology is the inefficient use of resources and the
lack of redundancy: A break on the cable at any point cannot be bridged. Connecting the
ends of the linear bus, on the other hand, creates a ring with which these disadvantages
can be avoided.
SIMATIC S7-300
with CP 343-1
SCALANCE
X101-1POF
media converter
Control & Monitoring
ET 200pro
POF FO
IE Standard Cable
POF FO
POF FO
POF FO
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X204IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2P IRT
SCALANCE
X200-4P IRT
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
G_IK10_XX_10176
PROFINET
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
Figure 2-3
Linear bus network topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet
A further restriction for networks with a linear bus structure is the physical arrangement of
the network nodes. Depending on their position, the backbone may need take long detours
which may, in turn, lead to problems with frame delay times.
In a linear network topology, the network components such as switches typically have only
one or few connection points for network nodes. Linear bus structures can also be created
with devices with two integrated network interfaces.
54
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
Example: 100 Mbps switched LAN with a bus structure
SCALANCE X devices/Industrial Ethernet ESMs allow the setup of 100 Mbps switched LANs
with a bus structure. There may be a maximum distance of 100 m between two of these
devices. Any TP ports can be use to cascade and form a linear bus. The number of
SCALANCE X devices/Industrial Ethernet ESMs that can be cascaded depends on the
response times of the applications operating over this linear bus.
S7-400 with
CP 443-1
Advanced
Switch
SCALANCE
X108
S7-300 with
CP 343-1/MP 370
Switch
SCALANCE
X104-2
IE FC
RJ45
Plug
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
electric linear topology
optical linear topology
Figure 2-4
ET 200X
S7-200
with CP 243-1
Switch
SCALANCE
X104-2
IE/PB
Link
Switch
SCALANCE
X104-2
PROFIBUS
FC Standard Cable
G_IK10_XX_10090
Switching cabinet
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
S7-300
with CP 343-1
Linear structure (electrical)
See also
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged (Page 114)
Optical linear structure (Page 61)
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 260)
2.5.3
Star structure
"Star"
The difference between the star topology and linear bus topology is that one switch functions
as the central node from which the spokes branch off to the individual nodes. The individual
nodes of the network therefore have separate point-to-point links with the active network
component (i.e. with the switch).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
55
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
The immediate effect is that the messages only run via the spokes between sender and
recipient, in other words network performance improves significantly because several nodes
can communicate at the same time.
In practice, these may be a mixture of fiber-optic and twisted-pair cables depending on what
is required of the individual links. Typical applications are Ethernet office networking or the
networking of production cells in manufacturing with Industrial Ethernet.
SCALANCE X-400
S7-300 with CP 343-1
SCALANCE
X101-1 or
X101-1 LD
Industrial
Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Access Point
SCALANCE
W-788-1PRO
Industrial
Ethernet
SCALANCE
X206-1
SCALANCE
X101-1 or
X101-1 LD
SCALANCE
X101-1 or
X101-1 LD
Field PG with
CP 7515
ET 200S
ET 200S
ET 200S
ET 200S
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_10056
Figure 2-5
Star topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with a gateway to Industrial Wireless LAN
● The use of a switch optimizes data throughput in the network. Messages are transferred
only on the star segments between sender and recipient and the segments of the other
nodes remain unaffected by them. If a node fails, the communication between the other
network nodes remains intact.
● Compared with ring or linear bus structures, however, the investment in cabling increases
considerably due to the long distances back to the star center.
Typical use cases for star networks are switching cubicles, individual machines or
manufacturing cells.
56
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
Examples of simple star structures
PC with
CP 1613 A2
SCALANCE
X005
S7-300 with
CP 343-1 Lean
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
Figure 2-6
Panel PC
G_IK10_XX_30039
S7-200 with
CP 243-1
Star structure with SCALANCE X005
The number and technology of the connections to the end nodes (electrical/optical) depends
on the number of relevant ports on the switch: In the example above, the SCALANCE X005
can support five 10/100 Mbps cables with RJ-45 connectors and no fiber-optic connections.
The cable lengths listed in the linear bus topology example apply; with an FC TP Standard
Cable, the end nodes can be installed up to 100 m from the switch.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
57
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
Switching cabinet
S7-400 with
CP 443-1 Advanced
MP 370
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
IE FC
Outlet
RJ45
IE TP Cord
SIMATIC Field PG
S7-400
with CP 443-1
Figure 2-7
S7-300
with CP 343-1
MP 370
IPC with
CP 1613 A2
G_IK10_XX_10205
Switch
SCALANCE X124
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2
S7-300 with CP 343-1
Star network structure with SCALANCE X124
More complex network structures can be set up by using switches with a higher number of
ports. (In the example above, a SCALANCE X124 with 24 electrical ports.) In terms of the
numbers of nodes and the physical span of the network, this is practicable only up to a
certain limit.
If more extensive networks need to be configured, it is advisable to use more switches and
the extra subnets that result.
Tree structure
If several start networks, for example manufacturing cells, need to be interconnected in a
network, a tree-shaped network results.
See also
Entry level SCALANCE X005 (Page 109)
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged (Page 114)
58
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
2.5.4
Redundant ring structure
"Redundant rings"
The simple ring topology (Page 52) results from connecting the two ends of an active linear
bus topology to form a physical ring. A special redundancy mechanism ensures that the
redundant ring structure (Page 62) remains a logical bus in normal situations and prevents
frames from circulating. If a section of the ring fails, the mechanism quickly makes a
substitute path available in ring: The message now travels the long way round via the intact
network section instead of over the direct interrupted path and reaches its recipient via this
detour. The network does not break down into two segments.
Operator
Stations
OS Server
redundant
SCALANCE
X414-3E
Operator
Stations
SCALANCE
X414-3E
S7-200
Industrial
Ethernet SCALANCE
X308-2
GigabitServer
1000
Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X408-2
Non-Siemens
device
10/100
Mbit/s
S7-300
H-System
Figure 2-8
H-System
G_IK10_XX_10202
S7-400
Ring topology based on the example of Industrial Ethernet with glass fiber-optic cables
● The effects of a network component being disrupted are restricted to the failed
component and to the end devices connected to it. If a ring section is interrupted, for
example by a cable break, communication continues without any disruption.
The reconfiguration time is faster here than in the office world and meets the requirements of
the automation world.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
59
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
Creating a ring from a linear bus
A simple ring structure is created from a linear bus by connecting the ends together.
This arrangement does, however, require a switch operating in redundancy manager mode
at the end of the line.
Example: Structure of a redundant network with SCALANCE X-200IRT switches
To increase availability, optical or electrical linear bus topologies made up of SCALANCE X200/X-200 IRT (Page 260) switches and a SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 260) ,
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 278) , SCALANCE X-400 (Page 293) , OSM version 2 (Page 389)
or ESM version 2 (Page 389) configured as redundancy manager, can be closed to form a
ring. The SCALANCE X-200 switches are first connected over their ring ports to form a linear
bus. The two ends of the line are closed to form a ring by a switch operating in redundancy
manager mode. Devices of the SCALANCE X-200, X-300, X-400 product families, or OSMs /
ESMs can be used as redundancy managers. When a switch is used as the redundancy
manager, the ring ports are isolated from each other if the network is operating problem-free.
S7-400
Operator Station
PC
S7-400
S7-300
Industrial Ethernet
Switch
SCALANCE
X-400
PC
S7-400
Twisted Pair
S7-300
PC
Switch
SCALANCE X208
PC
S7-400
PC
S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10101
S7-400
S7-400
Figure 2-9
SCALANCE X: Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the electrical ring
The SCALANCE switch or OSM / ESM operating in the redundancy manager mode monitors
the connected linear bus over its ring ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an
interruption on the connected bus; in other words, it restores a functioning line over this
60
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
substitute path. Reconfiguration takes place within 0.3 seconds. As soon as the problem has
been eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other words, the ring ports in the
redundancy manager are once again disconnected from each other.
See also
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 229)
2.5.5
Optical linear structure
Structure of a fiber-optic linear bus structure
The Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X devices/OSMs allow the setup of 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps
or mixed switched LANs with a linear bus structure. At 100 Mbps, the maximum distance of a
link between two devices is 3000 m or 26 km with LD variants. At 1 Gbps, the maximum
distance of a link between two devices is 750 m or 10 km with LD variants. Devices are
cascaded over the FO ports. Up to 50 devices can be cascaded.
Fiber Optic
SCALANCE
X414-3E
S7-400
S7-300
SCALANCE
X414-3E
S7-400
ET 200S
Figure 2-10
S7-300
ET 200S
SCALANCE
X414-3E
S7-400
S7-300
ET 200S
SCALANCE
X414-3E
ET 200S
S7-300
ET 200S
Linear structure (optical)
See also
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
61
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
2.5.6
Optical redundant ring structure
Redundant optical ring
With the aid of a redundancy manager (RM), the ends of an optical linear bus can be
connected together to form a redundant optical ring. All media converters, SCALANCE X100/-200/300 and -400 devices as well as OSMs can be used. The SCALANCE X-200
devices, all SCALANCE X-300/-400 devices and OSMs can take on the role of RM.
The RM monitors the line connected to it. If it detects a break on the line, it interconnects the
ends of the line to reestablish a functioning linear bus configuration.
A maximum of 50 of the listed SCALANCE X/OSMs are permitted in an optical ring. This
strategy achieves a reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 seconds. The RM mode is activated
on the OSM using a DIP switch. SCALANCE X devices that can operate as the RM, no
longer have a DIP switch for setting this function, but are configured by the software.
The maximum length of the fiberoptic cable between two devices is 3,000 m. This means
that an optical ring including 50 switches can have a maximum span of 150 km.
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no components (for
example switches from other vendors) other than ring-compliant SCALANCE X switches /
OSMs are used in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy manager mode.
PC
S7-400
ET 200S
ET 200S
Switch
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
PC
Fiber
Fiber Optic
Optic
S7-400
Switch
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
S7-300
IPC
S7-300
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_10102
Figure 2-11
Redundant ring structure with optical ring, example with SCALANCE X-202IRT
The interconnected switches in this ring do not need to be connected only with FO cables or
only with electrical cables. A mixed electrical and optical ring is also permitted.
62
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
S7-400
Operator Station
S7-400
S7-300
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X400 IRT
PC
S7-400
SCALANCE
X206-1
SCALANCE
X206-1
Industrial Ethernet
S7-300
IPC
SCALANCE X208
PC
S7-400
S7-400
Maximum cable length for 100 Mbit/s:
electrical ring circuit: 100 m
optical ring circuit
(multimode): 3000 m
Figure 2-12
S7-300
S7-400
G_IK10_XX_10113
IPC
High-speed redundancy in a mixed ring
See also
SCALANCE X-100 media converters (Page 116)
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 128)
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
OSM/ESM and ELS (Page 170)
2.5.7
Redundant linking of network segments with electrical and FO components
General
SCALANCE X switches support not only ring redundancy within a ring but also redundant
linking of several rings or open network segments (linear bus). In the redundant link, two
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
63
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
rings are connected together over two Ethernet connections. This is achieved by configuring
a master/slave device pair in one ring so that the devices monitor each other and, in the
event of a fault, redirect the data traffic from the normally used master Ethernet connection
to the substitute (slave) Ethernet connection.
Standby redundancy
Operator
Station
S7-300
Operator
Stations
SCALANCE
X204IRT
SCALANCE
X208
100
Mbit/s
S7-300
S7-200
SCALANCE
X208
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
100
Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X204-2
Figure 2-13
IPC
S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10173
S7-400
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
Example of redundant linking of two SCALANCE X-200 IRT rings
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two devices must be configured as standby
redundancy switches within a network segment. Here, network segments are rings with a
redundancy manager (RM, in the example, the SCALANCE X202-2IRT switches). Instead of
rings, network segments might also be linear.
The two X202 devices connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other
to synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there
are no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this
link fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as
long as the problem persists.
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
64
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.5 Basic structures
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 128)
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
OSM/ESM and ELS (Page 170)
Redundant linking of subnets using the OSM/ESM (Page 176)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
65
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
2.6
Advanced network configurations
2.6.1
Configuring an IWLAN
2.6.1.1
Structure of an IWLAN
Basic structure of a WLAN
WLANs do not have a physical topology like traditional wired networks. There are no "linear
bus", "ring" or "star" structures, instead wireless networks are unstructured (ad hoc) or
divided into individual cells.
S7-300 mit PROFINET-CPU
oder CP 343-1
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
IWLAN RCoax Cable
ET 200S
ET 200pro
Figure 2-14
IWLAN/
PB Link
PN IO
PROFIBUS
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_30115
Client Module
SCALANCE
W747-1RR
Simple WLAN structure with two access points/wireless cells, RCoax cable and IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
gateway
Here, access points take over the role of switches. End nodes are connected to the network
by activating clients. Larger networks can be achieved by setting up several wireless cells
each under the control of an access point. The connection between individual cells is also
via access points.
The cells have the function of subnets between which the mobile nodes can move.
("Roaming")
66
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Shared medium instead of switched medium
It must be remembered that wireless networks always operate according to the shared
medium principle; in other words, only one node can send at any one time. As the number of
nodes increases, the achievable data rate inevitably falls for the individual nodes.
See also
Structuring wireless networks (Page 67)
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
Various WLAN accessories (Page 214)
IWLAN RCoax Cable (leaky feeder cable) (Page 213)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation (Page 77)
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control (Page 75)
2.6.1.2
Structuring wireless networks
Ad hoc networks
If wireless networks are set up without any further structuring, they are known as ad hoc
networks.
In such networks, each node can contact any other node at any time. The achievable data
rate sinks quickly because every active sender blocks all others. At the same time, there are
serious security and reliability problems because no control entity is controlling the data
traffic.
Ad hoc networks can only operated according to the 802.11 "b" standard.
For reasons of data security, transmission reliability and optimum performance, it is not
advisable to operate an industrial wireless network as an ad hoc network. With ad hoc
networks, protection against unauthorized intrusion and eavesdropping is difficult while the
uncoordinated data traffic is not ideal for optimum performance. Response time and data
rates cannot be guaranteed.
As an alternative, wireless networks can be configured in "infrastructure mode".
Use of access points and clients in infrastructure mode
A wireless network can be structured by using one node as an access point that manages
communication with other nodes, the clients. When a network is structured in this way, this is
known as infrastructure mode. The access point can manage access authorization for the
nodes and assign them time slots for communication to ensure real-time response and
deterministic communication.
Coordination by an access point: Standalone networks
The simplest form of an infrastructure network is a single wireless cell that is coordinated by
an access point.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
67
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
In this case, a central access point functions like a switch receiving the frames from the
individual nodes (clients) and forwarding them.
Figure 2-15
Wireless network in standalone mode Normally, SCALANCE W clients take the place of PROFIBUS links.
This mechanism has several advantages:
● It is not necessary for all nodes to be within the range of the others; it is adequate if all
nodes have a connection to the access point.
● The access point can control and coordinate data traffic. Assigning time slots during
which the individual clients are permitted to send, means, for example, that cycle times
and data rates can be guaranteed.
Structuring of wireless networks with wireless cells
It is also more economical to divide a WLAN into several cells since only one node can
transmit on one channel at any one time. If several cells are available, there can be an active
sender in every cell and the actual data throughput is increased.
Connecting individual wireless cells
If the network has a larger span, the wireless network is divided into cells. All clients within
the cell are within the range of a central access point (AP). The other nodes, the clients, only
ever communicate with their access point and not directly with other clients.
68
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
The actual users of the network, CPUs, HMI devices etc. are also connected over wired
Ethernet with the second interface of the client.
The setting up of a network with more than one cell may be necessary due to the span
involved: It is practically impossible to predict the range that can be covered by an access
point. (This is influenced by shadowing and reflections caused by stationary or mobile
objects and interference from other transmitters.) In closed rooms, omnidirectional antennas
typically cover distances between 30 m and 100 m.
Industrial
Ethernet
Industrial
Ethernet
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO
S7-400
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO
S7-200
SIMATIC S5
ET 200S
Field PG/
Notebook
with CP 7515
Automated guided
vehicle systems
Figure 2-16
PROFIBUS
Mobile diagnosis and service
Wireless SPS
Separate radio network
G_IK10_XX_30017
IE Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
IE Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
Structure of a WLAN with several wireless cells
In the illustration above, the access points are interconnected by wired Industrial Ethernet.
Each access point spreads a wireless cell (light shaded area) within which it communicates
with its (stationary) clients. Communication between cells is handled over Industrial Ethernet.
If a network with several cells is necessary, the APs have to communicate with each other
over a separate channel. To allow this, all W-780 access points have a wired Ethernet
interface; the W788-1PRO and W788-2PRO access points also have a second wireless
interface that serves the same purpose. This means that the connection between the cells
can be established over cable or over wireless.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
69
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Communication between a client located in cell "A" and a client in cell "B" is always handled
via the APs in cells "A" and "B" even if the two clients are theoretically within each other's
range.
Clients moving between wireless cells: "Roaming"
The situation becomes more complicated if clients are allows to move: What happens when
the leave the area of one wireless cell and enter another? This is known as roaming and the
control of the mobile client must then be passed from one access point to another.
S7-400
Radio cell 1
Radio cell 2
Industrial Ethernet
Field PG/
Notebook
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
SIMATIC HMI
SIMATIC HMI
PC
SCALANCE
X208
S7-300
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
SIMATIC HMI
PC
SCALANCE
X208
S7-300
SIMATIC HMI
PC
SCALANCE
X208
S7-300
G_IK10_XX_30004
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS)
Figure 2-17
Roaming between wireless cells
The figure above shows how a moving node (in this case an automated guided vehicle
system) is handed over between two wireless cells: The access point of the first cell in which
the AGVS is originally located hands over the router function of the AGVS when this reaches
the boundary between its own cell and the cell of the next access point. As of this point, the
second access point is responsible for managing the client AGVS.
Roaming causes problems
One problem associated with roaming is the time required
● to detect that the old wireless cell is being exited and
● to establish the connection to a new wireless cell.
70
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
This handover typically takes several hundred milliseconds; and this time is too long for
many industrial applications. To speed up the handover, "rapid roaming" with the iPCF
method ("industrial Point Coordination Function") is used to reduce the interruption to a
length of time acceptable for industrial requirements. SCALANCE W access points and
clients with the supplement "RR" in the device name have the rapid roaming function that
reduces the interruption to only a few milliseconds.
Complex structures
Depending on the requirements of the automation task and the performance of the devices,
even more complex structures are possible:
● Multichannel configuration: Adjacent wireless cells communicate on different frequencies.
This ensures that nodes in cell "A" cannot disrupt cell "B" and that communication can
continue reliably.
● Wireless Distribution System ("WDS"): An infrastructure network in which the connection
between the cells (the backbone) is not over cable but over a second wireless interface of
the access point.
● Redundant Wireless LAN ("RWLAN"): In this case, there are two frequencies available for
the backbone. If one of these frequencies is disrupted, the APs can change to the other
frequency. This means that the availability and reliability of the network is retained even
in a disrupted environment.
Leaky feeder cable
In environments that make the use of wireless difficult (for example in tunnels), or when the
node only moves along predefined rails (for example automated guided vehicle systems), it
is sometimes preferable to replace the omnidirectional antennas with an RCoax leaky feeder
cable.
The leaky feeder cable is a special antenna in the form of a thick, flexible cable that
produces an RF field with high intensity but only over a very limited range. As long as it can
be guaranteed that the communication partner moves in an area close to the RCoax cable,
the leaky feeder cable provides a reliable RF field and an excellent connection to the nodes.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
71
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Radio cell
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2RR
RCoax Cable
Antenna
ANT792-4DN
Figure 2-18
G_IK10_XX_30007
Suspension
gear 5
Suspension
gear 4
Suspension
gear 3
Suspension
gear 2
Field PG/Notebook
Suspension
gear 1
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
Function of the RCoax leaky feeder cable
The distance between the end node and the leaky feeder cable can be up to approx. 1 m.
Several leaky feeder cable elements can be combined up to a total length of approx. 100 m.
They create individual antenna wireless cells and the node roams between them. Refer to
IWLAN application example for a use case. Power screwdriver control.
Connecting PROFIBUS segments: IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
To connect PROFIBUS nodes to an Industrial WLAN, the IWLAN/PB Link PNIO can be
used. This provides the gateway between IWLAN and a PROFIBUS network and can be
equipped with omnidirectional antennas or with a special antenna for communication with a
leaky feeder cable.
72
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
Industrial Ethernet
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS
Industrial Ethernet
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
Industrial Ethernet
IWLAN RCoax Cable
Figure 2-19
PROFIBUS
G_IK10_XX_30037
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
IWLAN/PROFIBUS gateway
Refer to Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation (Page 77) for a use
case.
See also
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control (Page 75)
SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 139)
Components for wireless networks (Page 209)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
RCoax leaky feeder cable (Page 519)
2.6.1.3
IWLAN application example: Bottling plant
Task
An optimum solution is required for a filling machine with moving bottles. The valves on the
moving part of the filling machine need to open and close in real-time.
The wired solution used up to now had too many downtimes because the slip ring contacts
were subject to wear and tear and the communication system suffered from a lot of
disruptions.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
73
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Solution
Alternative wireless solutions such as the use of infrared over the AS-Interface and
PROFIBUS did not match up to the required performance and reliability. The final decision is
a PROFINET solution with IO communication.
A SIMATIC ET 200S is installed as the control unit on the moving parts of the filling machine
along with a SCALANCE W788-1RR access point and a SCALANCE
W747-1RR as client module to control the fast opening and closing of the valves.
'DWD$FFHVV
Figure 2-20
IWLAN: System solution for bottling plants
The wireless PROFINET communication allows the common use of real-time and TCP/IPbased communication on one cable and permits the integration of controller, distributed I/O
and other Ethernet-based devices in one communications structure. The cyclic transfer of I/O
data along with the process image of the corresponding controller makes for precise and
very fast opening and closing of the valves.
With the wireless access to the moving parts of the machine, there is no longer any wear
and tear costing long downtimes and high costs.
This interface can, in future, also be used for service making programming much simpler.
Benefits
● Costs saved by reduction of the downtimes with reliable communication in real time and
savings on slip rings
● Significant improvement in performance
● Protection of investment by integrating PROFIBUS field devices in an IWLAN wireless
network
● Cost-effective solution even compared with AS-Interface or PROFIBUS
● Option of wireless programming for service purposes
● Future-proof solution due to the use of the PROFINET standard and due to the option of
integrating further applications such as a weighing system with SIWAREX
74
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
2.6.1.4
IWLAN application example: Power screwdriver control
Task
The aim is to reduce the number of power screwdrivers in motor vehicle assembly. The
previous solution has a power screwdriver for each cycle and every bar code acquisition.
Since the wired solution with slip rings required maintenance, a reliable wireless
communications solution is intended to increase efficiency and reduce tooling times.
The products should be suitable for industry and be available worldwide. Investment should
be protected by components that will be available in the long term.
S7-300 with
CP 343-1
Access Point
Segment 1
Power screwdriver
control
Switch
Operator control
and monitoring
Suspension
Figure 2-21
IWLAN: System solution for screwdriver controller with RCoax cable and SCALANCE
W747-1RR
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
75
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Solution
To set up the wireless data transmission, the silicon-free leaky feeder cable IWLAN RCoax
cable will be used along the coding bar. This generates a defined, cone-shaped and reliable
RF field and can be moved easily. The RCoax cable is therefore ideal for use in
environments in which wireless is otherwise difficult and whenever rail-guided vehicles are
involved.
For the feed-in stations for the RCoax Cable, IWLAN access points SCALANCE W788-1RR
to IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz) with data rates up to 54 Mbps will be used. The client module
SCALANCE W747-1RR will be installed as the mobile node. This allows the same mobile
unit to be used for all applications so that a mobile power screwdriver can be used for
several cycles.
With this implementation with SCALANCE W747-1RR, there is also the option of using up to
eight end devices
Benefits
● Lower investment costs due to the savings on power screwdrivers
● Reduction of maintenance costs and downtimes with a reliable wireless and therefore
non-wearing data transmission to mobile communications partners
● Reduction of downtimes in the event of faults by using the C-PLUG (configuration plug);
devices can be replaced without a programming device and without needing specialist
personnel
● Reduction of operator activity, for example scanning, cycle transfer, travel time
● Changing models is straightforward and depends only on materials logistics
● Integration of further applications for quality control is possible
● Full screwdriver data can be loaded over the IWLAN link
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 223)
2.6.1.5
Wireless networks under extreme climatic conditions
The W-786 access points
SCALANCE W-786 products are particularly suitable in areas with extreme climatic
conditions. Even at temperatures down to -40 °C or up to +70 °C, SCALANCE W-786
devices can be installed and operated with no problems.
With their resistance to UV and salt spray, they are suitable for installation in areas with hard
requirements such as harbors. When antennas are necessary in exacting environmental
conditions, the variants of the SCALANCE W-786 product line with internal antennas are
available.
76
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Figure 2-22
Harbor installation as an example of wireless networks in hostile climatic conditions
The SCALANCE W-786 is only an access point but it can nevertheless be configured as a
client module using Web-based management.
If SCALANCE W-786 devices are configured as client modules, then depending on the
selected variant, a maximum of one wireless module is available as client.
See also
SCALANCE W-786 (Page 145)
2.6.1.6
Connecting a PROFIBUS network to a PROFINET installation
Task
In a brick works, during production the green bricks are transported to the drying chamber by
a trolley or shuttle conveyor. The shuttle conveyor not only runs back and forth between the
two stations, but also fulfills other tasks. When the shuttle conveyor arrives, the doors or the
drying chamber open or close automatically.
The original solution used a trailing cable for communication between the conveyor and the
plant control, however this turned out to require too much maintenance. The plant then
converted to wireless PROFIBUS modems:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
77
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Figure 2-23
PROFIBUS/PROFINET gateway, 1st stage
The results were, however, not satisfactory. The maintenance was no longer required but
communication was liable to disruption and was interrupted time and again for short periods.
The reason turned out to be that the cycle time and transmission rate via wireless
PROFIBUS were inadequate to meet the requirements of the plant.
Solution
The system was replaced by a PROFINET IWLAN. Instead of the wireless PROFIBUS
modem, an IWLAN/PB Link PN/IO took over communication between the ET 200M head
modules, the HMI operator station and the S7 plant controller that in turn communicate over
SCALANCE W access points or clients.
Figure 2-24
78
PROFIBUS/PROFINET gateway, 2nd stage
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
This solution combines PROFINET IO and wireless industrial technology. The plant therefore
has real-time PROFINET communication based on Ethernet with a high data rate and is
transparent to the PROFIBUS network.
Benefits
● Maintenance-free communications medium (no more moving parts),
● Transparent network with wireless PROFINET/PROFIBUS gateway,
● More user friendliness with wireless PCs for diagnostics, process visualization etc.,
● High data rate, reliable communication,
● Elimination of downtimes due to disruptions,
● Operating costs, particularly for maintenance, significantly lower,
● Increased productivity,
● Installation of a flexible, expandable system with system reserves.
See also
Access points W-780 (Page 143)
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules (Page 150)
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Page 156)
2.6.2
Secured networks
2.6.2.1
Protection of the production network when networking with the office network
Task
● The production network needs to be protected from unauthorized attacks from the office
network and the automation cells from mutual influence.
● Total integration from the management level to field level should be possible to allow
comprehensive diagnostics for field devices and network components.
● Cells with predominantly the same structure (same private IP addresses) should be
protected from illegal access.
– A Syslog server should log all attacks, for example by hackers, or overload.
– Process data such as numbers produced, fabrication numbers, type designations
should be logged.
● The configuration should be simple since personnel without special training in security will
be used for commissioning and service.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
79
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Solution
Remote
access
Office environment
Office PC
ROBCAD
PC
Test
systems
Process
Virus
data
protection
recording
server
File
server
archive
DHCP
DNS
server
SCALANCE X414-3E
with layer 3-functions
(IP routing)
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE S602
Plant PC
Adhesive bead
monitoring
Bolt PC
Laser PC
Plant PC
SCALANCE S602
Bolt PC
Adhesive bead
monitoring
Laser PC
Plant cells
Vehicle body production network
Print
server
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE X414-3E
with layer 3-functions
(IP routing)
Figure 2-25
Syslog
server
Robot
S7-400 with
CP 443-1
Bolt
Programming Screwdriver
controller device
Welding
controller
Robot
S7-400 with
CP 443-1
Programming Screwdriver
Bolt
controller device
Welding
controller
G_IK_XX_30043
Factory network
Printer
Factory computer center
Plant network protected with SCALANCE S
The use of SCALANCE S602 as a firewall serves to filter data packets and to allow
communication connections according to the firewall rules. Incoming and outgoing
communication can be filtered as well as IP and MAC addresses or communications
protocols (ports). It is also possible to set an overload limit.
The firewall integrated in the security modules can be configured so that only a certain
number of stations are permitted access.
The logging functionality allows access monitoring and logs attacks and attempted access to
allow preventive measures to be taken.
80
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
An IP address conversion is necessary for effective protection of the established cells. The
SCALANCE S602 security modules with NAT/NAPT functionality are used to achieve this.
Syslog information such as process data is automatically sent to the Syslog server.
This means that the production network is protected effectively and reliably from
unauthorized access from the office network, but that the office network is also protected
from influence from the production network.
Benefits
● Protecting the plant from unauthorized attacks and communication overload by using
SCALANCE S
● Effective protection from mutual influence between production and office network
● Continuous monitoring of access to the production network
● Cost saving by saving on public IP addresses
● Simple maintenance and diagnostics, since all protected cells can be set up identically.
Note
The SCALANCE S602 security modules do not work in conjunction with the SOFTNET
security client.
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
2.6.2.2
Automation network with protection from office network influences
Task
● Automation systems should be protected within the automation cell even without their
own security functionality.
● Existing network settings such as topology, addresses or protocols used should remain
unchanged by implementing security.
● Mechanisms for authentication and data encryption should be used to prevent falsification
of IP addresses or manipulation and espionage
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
81
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
Solution
Visualization with
WinCC flexible Runtime
Field PG
STEP 7
configuration,
diagnosis
SOFTNET Security Client
SCALANCE
S612
SCALANCE
S612
Transfer of
productivity data
via VPN
Switch
SCALANCE
X208
SIMATIC Station 1
with CP 343-1
5
ET 200S with
IM151-3 PN
Automation cell 1
SIMATIC Station 2
with CP 343-1 Lean
Automation cell 2
secure network
insecure network
Figure 2-26
G_IK10_XX_10071
5
Protection of automation cells via a VPN tunnel
VPNs (Virtual Private Networks) allow the secure authentication of communication nodes
and the encryption of data transmission.
The SCALANCE S security modules are used to protect automation networks and for the
secure exchange of data between automation systems.
They only allow communication between authenticated and authorized devices. This protects
from operator errors, prevents unauthorized access and avoids disruptions and
communication overload.
The data transmission is also encrypted providing protection from espionage and
manipulation.
The SOFTNET security client software is used to set up secure VPN connections from
PGs/PCs with network segments. This allows secure VPN client access by PCs/notebooks
to automation systems or cells protected by SCALANCE S.
Benefits
● Enhanced protection of the plant from unauthorized access, manipulation, espionage and
communication overload by the SOFTNET security client using VPN technology with
SCALANCE S
● Simple configuration of security mechanisms is possible without specialist knowledge
82
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
● No modification or adaptation of the existing network structure, applications or nodes
necessary and therefore simple integration in existing systems
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
2.6.2.3
Data protection for mobile communication
Task
● Mobile access for commissioning, maintenance and service of field devices, control
technology and mobile operator control and monitoring should only be possible for
authorized personnel.
● Personnel should be able to move around freely and have access within the RF field to
data from the machine room and control components.
● This should minimize downtimes and personnel requirements.
● It should be possible to use the components both in the indoor and outdoor areas.
● The configuration of restricted access should be as simple as possible to set since the
plant will only be operated by automation technicians.
PC/IPC with
Software
SOFTNET
Security Client
IPC
PC/PG/Notebook
with CP 7515
and Software
SOFTNET Security Client
Access Pooint
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
Industrial Ethernet
Automation cell 1
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Automation cell 2
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Automation cell 3
protected access (VPN tunnel)
Figure 2-27
G_IK10_XX_10083
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Secure access to automation cells protected by SCALANCE S with SOFTNET security client
Solution
To achieve the optimum coverage with the RF field, a preliminary illumination is performed
and the RF field planned.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
83
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
A W788-1PRO access point is used to illuminate the space involved. With its robust IP65
metal housing, it can be used both indoors and outdoors. Thanks to the roaming function of
Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN), the nodes can move freely in the wireless network.
A field PG is used as the mobile end device.
Use the SCALANCE S security modules and the SOFTNET Security Client software
achieves secure authentication of the communications nodes and encryption of the data
transmission through the VPN tunnel, operator errors and unauthorized access are
prevented as well as espionage and manipulation.
Benefits
● Mobile communication is protected from unauthorized access, manipulation, espionage
and communications overload
● Simple integration of other mobile nodes even in existing automation systems
● Savings in resources for service and maintenance
● Simple configuration of the security mechanisms without specialist knowledge
See also
SCALANCE S Security Module (Page 158)
2.6.3
Mesh networks
Mesh networks
In a mesh network, every network node is connected to one or more of the other nodes.
Information is passed from node to node until it reaches its destination. If every node is
connected to every other node, this is known as a fully connected network.
● Mesh networks are normally self-healing: If a node or a connection is blocked, the
network can reconfigure itself around the problem. The data is redirected and the network
is then operational again.
● The reconfiguration time can, however, be a problem for industrial applications.
The concept of mesh networks can be used both for wired and wireless networks. Powerful
switches such as the SCALANCE X-300 and X-400 devices are capable of setting up and
controlling mesh networks. These topologies are used in particular when setting up networks
over large areas and at the transition to enterprise networks.
Example: Connecting a redundant ring to a mesh network
From any SCALANCE X-200 / X-300 / X-400 in the ring, a connection can be established to
a component in a mesh network. This connection is not redundant. However, by using the
spanning tree protocol, an alternative route can switched to the component in the ring. From
the perspective of the mesh network, the redundant ring is treated as a hub or switch. Each
connection to a switch in the ring is like a connection to the port of a switch without STP
capability that forwards STP frames transparently. This means that a redundant ring in a
manufacturing process can be connected to a network in the office world.
84
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part A: Network structures and network configuration
2.6 Advanced network configurations
With a SCALANCE X-400, the simultaneous use of STP and ring redundancy is not possible.
A SCALANCE X-400 cannot use more than one method at one time. If (R)STP is disabled, a
SCALANCE X-400 works in the (R)STP listening mode. In this mode, the switch forwards
(R)STP configuration frames transparently even when (R)STP is disabled for it. If it
recognizes a topology change frame, it reduces the aging time for a limited period or deletes
the address table so that the node list is updated more quickly.
IT network (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP)
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Ethernet
SCALANCE
X-400
Industrial
Ethernet
100/1000
Mbit/s
Ring structure in industrial fields
Figure 2-28
G_IK10_XX_10066
SCALANCE
X-400
Integration of an optical ring in a mesh network
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 121)
SCALANCE X-400 modular (Page 132)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
85
Part B:
Target group and content
This part is intended for decision makers and planners.
This part introduces the entire SIMATIC NET product lines. Here, you will find the main
characteristics of the SCALANCE generation of switches, security and wireless components
- the emphasis being on their technical properties. OSM and ESM devices, passive
components (such as cables and connectors) and accessories are also described.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
87
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.1
The SCALANCE X family of switches
3.1.1
Switches in the Industrial Ethernet environment
3
Overview of the SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet switches
Figure 3-1
SCALANCE X device overview
SCALANCE X is the current family of Industrial Ethernet switches from SIMATIC NET. It is
made up of various product lines each complementing the other that are also available for
PROFINET applications and are tailored to specific automation tasks.
Switched network
The transmission media used between the switches are fiber-optic cables (optical) or
twisted-pair cables (electrical). End devices or network segments are connected over
twisted-pair cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
89
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.1 The SCALANCE X family of switches
Highlights of the Industrial Ethernet switches SCALANCE X
● Graduated portfolio of complementary products from the entry level to modular high-end
device,
● Use as redundancy manager for setting up redundant network structures,
● Seamless integration of automation and existing office networks,
● Routing functions at layer 3 level for communication between IP subnets,
● Robust, innovative and space-saving housing concept; extremely good integration in
SIMATIC automation solutions; free choice between 35 mm DIN rail, S7-300 standard rail
or direct wall mounting,
● Securing collar concept; with the PROFINET-compliant connector Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 180 from SIMATIC NET provides additional tensile and bending
strain relief for the RJ-45 port,
● High-speed redundancy allows very fast reconfiguration (< 0.3 seconds) with up to
50 SCALANCE X-200, SCALANCE X-300 or SCALANCE X-400 switches in the ring.
3.1.2
Device series of the SCALANCE X switches
SCALANCE X005 entry level
Unmanaged switch with five RJ-45 ports for use in machine and plant islands.
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged
Switches with up to twenty-four electrical and up to two optical ports and on-site diagnostics
for use in applications in the immediate vicinity of machinery.
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged media converters
Media converters are used to convert electrical to optical signals and to connect existing
networks, for example AUI networks.
The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet media converters are ideally suited for converting
various transmission media in 10/100 Mbps Industrial Ethernet networks in linear bus, star
and ring structures. They are all designed for industry and equipped with a compact housing.
SCALANCE X-200 managed
Configuration and remote diagnostics are integrated in the SIMATIC STEP 7 engineering
tool. This increases plant availability. Devices with a high degree of protection allow
installation without a cabinet.
Universally use from machine-oriented applications to networked units.
90
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.1 The SCALANCE X family of switches
SCALANCE X-200IRT managed
For use in unit networks with hard real-time requirements (isochronous real time) and
maximum availability. Data traffic without real-time requirements can be handled on the
same network. Dual network structures are therefore not necessary.
SCALANCE X-300 managed plus
The main area of application of the SCALANCE X-300 switches is in high-speed plant
networks with an interface to the Enterprise network. The SCALANCE X-300 managed plus
product line combines the firmware functionality of the SCALANCE X-400 product line
(without routing functions at the layer 3 level) with the compact design of the SCALANCE X200 product line. The "managed plus" attribute means both enhanced management
functions compared with the SCALANCE X-200 and enhanced firmware functionality.
SCALANCE X-400 modular
For use in high-speed plant networks that will also be capable of meeting future
requirements (for example high-speed redundancy). The partially modular design concept
provides optimum flexibility to allow this switch to be adapted to the task in hand. Support of
numerous standardized IT functions makes the smooth integration of automation networks in
existing office networks possible.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
91
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.2 The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
3.2
The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
3.2.1
Wireless components for Industrial Ethernet
Industrial mobile communication with SCALANCE W
Figure 3-2
Industrial mobile communication
The key to market success tomorrow is the availability of information at any location and at
any time. Processes can be much more efficiently designed using mobile devices networked
over standardized and available wireless networks. The advantage of wireless solutions is
primarily the simple and flexible accessibility of mobile nodes.
92
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.2 The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
SCALANCE W – wireless communication
Figure 3-3
SCALANCE W wireless group
The SCALANCE W products offer a unique combination of reliability, robustness and
security in one product. With the basic technology of Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN), they
offer an enhancement of the IEEE 802.11 standard that is particularly attractive to industrial
customers requiring determinism and redundancy. For the first time, a single wireless
network is available both for process-critical data, for example alarm messages (IWLAN), as
well as for non-critical communication (WLAN), for example for service and diagnostics. The
outstanding features of SCALANCE W products are the reliability of the wireless channel
and the dust- and waterproof design (IP65) of the metal housing along with the high degree
of mechanical stability familiar in SIMATIC products. To protect them from unauthorized
access, the products provide modern standard mechanisms for user authentication and
encryption of data, which does not prevent them from being easily integrated into existing
security concepts.
Wireless infrastructure
In contrast to copper and fiber-optic cables, wireless transmission makes use of radio waves.
The propagation characteristics of the electromagnetic waves can differ considerably and
depend on the spatial environment and the installed wireless infrastructure.
To achieve better reception, SIMATIC NET modules use techniques such as antenna
diversity, top-quality receivers and fault-tolerant modulation techniques to improve signal
quality and to prevent the wireless traffic being interrupted. To ensure reliable wireless links,
it is even possible to activate data reservation on the access points to achieve a reliability
similar to that of wired links.
Industrial mobile communication uses the various wireless networks, for example WLAN,
GSM or GPRS together in harmony. First and foremost, this relates to the various frequency
ranges for different applications, the restrictions regarding the maximum transmit power and
the selection of specific transmission techniques.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
93
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.2 The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
Wireless LAN.
IEEE 802.11
depending on surroundings
GSM, HSCSD,
GPRS, UMTS
from approx. 30 m to approx. 300 m
Personal Area
Network (PAN)
Figure 3-4
Local Area
Network (LAN)
from 300 m
Wide Area
Network (WAN)
G_IK_XX_30604
up to
approx.
10 m
Using different wireless networks
Network solution with Industrial Mobile Communication (IMC)
Mobile end devices allow an uninterrupted flow of information from the enterprise level right
through to the production level.
To simplify planning and configuration of an IWLAN network, the SINEMA E software is
available providing a series of simulation functions. It can visualize wireless and device
properties clearly and in detail and therefore reduce configuration and commissioning effort
and help to avoid configuration errors. It can also be used to detect and precisely evaluate
existing wireless networks to avoid unnecessary coverage ranges or possible wireless dead
spots.
For wireless communication in a PROFIBUS environment, a wireless-based solution is
available with the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO.
This allows fast, mobile, secure and simple availability of information at the right place and at
the right time.
Reliability
Using redundancy mechanisms and packet repetitions, the SCALANCE W access points
create a reliable wireless link that can also resist the interference found in the industrial
sector.
The reservation of the data rate makes wireless traffic plannable and prevents delays or
even production downtimes when accessing data.
The C-PLUG exchangeable medium stores project engineering and configuration data
making it possible to replace devices quickly and without specially trained personnel. This
minimizes downtimes and saves training costs.
With "rapid roaming", mobile nodes can be handed over quickly from one RF field to the next
avoiding any interruption in PROFINET IO communication. Several PROFINET IO devices
can also be operated simultaneously over wireless links in real time.
94
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.2 The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
Robustness and suitable for industry
Depending on their degree of protection, SCALANCE W products can be subjected to
temperature fluctuations from -20 °C to +60 °C or come into constant contact with dust and
water. With a metal housing and constructed to withstand shock and vibration, they can be
used in a tough industrial environment.
Accessories such as the antennas, power supply unit and the cabling are included in this
concept and manufactured for industrial use.
Power and data are transferred over one cable with Power-over-Ethernet saving investment
and maintenance costs.
Security of the data
Defined transmission times and a net bit rate for the data packets are implemented with the
"reservation of the data rate" function and make cyclic wireless traffic available. Even real
time can be used in a wireless network.
Redundant network concepts can also be implemented over wireless: Wireless channels are
designed redundantly with a switchover in milliseconds so that the application is not affected
by packet repetitions or disruptions on the wireless channel.
The latest encryption mechanisms make the data safe from unwanted access.
Dedicating data transfer rate
Data trans- IEEE 802.11
fer rate
dedicated
Data trans- IEEE 802.11
fer rate
dedicated
Data trans- IEEE 802.11
fer rate
dedicated
Time
Client 1
Client 2
Client 3
Client 4
Client 5
Nodes with
critical data
Nodes 1,2 and 3 have predictive
access to the radio channel,
controlled by SCALANCE W-780
Figure 3-5
Reserving the data rate
3.2.2
Device series of the SCALANCE W components
Node 4 can "only" access the
radio channel in the third cycle
G_IK10_XX_10181
Client 6
Access points and clients
The SCALANCE W product family includes access points that can handle coordination and
routing functions in the wireless network and pure clients that only establish the connection
between wired end devices and the wireless network.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
95
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.2 The SCALANCE W family of components for wireless networks
The functionality of all access points can be reduced so that they can also be used purely as
clients; a client cannot, however, be upgraded to become an access point.
SCALANCE W-788: Standard access points
The W-788 access points are the "workhorses" of the SCALANCE W product range. Robust,
compact and powerful, they all have two antenna interfaces with which even wireless
problem areas can be illuminated.
Web-Based Management and wide range of administrative and date protection functions is
common to all models. Some devices also have rapid roaming capability or have two
wireless interfaces for redundant connections.
SCALANCE W-744: Clients
In terms of their hardware and most technical specifications, the clients of the W-744 series
correspond to the W-788 access points but have a reduced range of software that does not
allow them to be used as access points.
SCALANCE W-786: Access points for difficult external conditions
With degree of protection IP65 and a particularly robust vandal-proof housing no parts
accessible from the outside, the W-786 access points are particularly suited for use in tough
climatic conditions (harbor installations with salt spray etc.) or public places and facilities.
SCALANCE W-784: Access points reduced to the basics
The W-784 access points are a less expensive variant compared with the other access
points. In these devices, the extras have been reduced to a minimum so that their extremely
compact design makes them suitable for installation in switching cubicles or other
environments in which cost containment is more important than resistance to external
influences.
See also
SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 139)
96
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.3 The SCALANCE S family of security modules
3.3
The SCALANCE S family of security modules
Industrial security with SCALANCE S
Figure 3-6
SCALANCE S picture of the product
Modern automation engineering is based on communication and the increasing networking
of individual manufacturing cells. The integration of all manufacturing components with
continuous networking through to the office network or the company intranet is gaining in
importance all the time. This also applies to remote access options for service, the
increasing use of IT mechanisms such as Web servers and E-mail in programmable
controllers and the use of wireless LANs. This brings industrial communication and the IT
world closer together and subjects it to the known risks from the office and IT environment,
such as hackers, viruses, worms or trojans.
The existing security concepts were developed for the office world and require constant
upkeep and specialist knowledge. Moreover, they are not normally capable of dealing with
the special protocols of industrial communication or the special environmental conditions.
With its Industrial Security concept, Siemens offers a security solution specifically for
industrial automation engineering to meet the requirements of this application environment.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
97
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.3 The SCALANCE S family of security modules
Production service computer
with SOFTNET Security
Client software
Host computer with
SOFTNET Security Client software
WAN
PC
Firewall
Router MD740-1
PC with
SOFTNET
Security
Client
software
Server
Security Module
SCALANCE S
MES level
Office level
PC
SINAUT ST7sc/cc
Switch SCALANCE X414-3E
Automation network
PROFINET
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Panel
PC
Control & Monitoring
Figure 3-7
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Security Module
SCALANCE S
Robot cells
Robot cell
Automation cell
G_IK10_XX_30010
Secure access (VPN tunnel)
Switch SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE S application scheme
Advantages of the Industrial Security concept:
● Protection from data espionage and data manipulation
● Protection against overload of the communications system
● Protection against mutual influence
● Protection against incorrect addressing
● Reliable remote access even via the Internet
● User-friendly and simple configuration and administration without specialist IT security
knowledge
● No changes or adaptation of the existing network structures necessary
● No changes or adaptation of the existing applications or nodes necessary
● Robust design, suitable for industry
SCALANCE S security modules provide scalable security functions:
● Stateful inspection and firewall to protect automation devices from unauthorized access
regardless of the size of the network to be protected.
98
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.3 The SCALANCE S family of security modules
● Alternatively or additionally with VPN (Virtual Private Network) for secure authentication
of the communications nodes and encryption of the data transmission
● SOFTNET Security Client for secure access from PCs/notebooks to automation systems
protected by SCALANCE S (in bridge mode).
SOFTNET security modules
The SOFTNET Security Client software serves as a VPN client for programming devices,
PCs and notebooks in an industrial environment. It allows secure VPN client access to
automation systems protected by SCALANCE S.
PC/PG withSOFTNET
for Industrial Ethernet
Industrial
Ethernet
S7-400 with
CP 343-1
S7-200
with CP 243-1
S5-115U to -155U
with CP 1430 TF
Figure 3-8
S7-300
with CP 443-1
System configuration SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE S models
● SCALANCE S602
– Protects with the stateful inspection firewall, address translation (NAT/NAPT), DHCP
server and Syslog.
● SCALANCE S612
– Protects with stateful inspection firewall
– Up to 64 VPN tunnels simultaneously with up to 32 devices
● SCALANCE S613
– Protects with stateful inspection firewall
– Up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously with up to 64 devices
– Expanded temperature range from -- 20 °C to + 70 °C
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
99
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.4 FastConnect (FC): The fast assembly system for SCALANCE components
Advantages of SCALANCE S
Security modules of the SCALANCE S family are intended specifically for use in automation
engineering but nevertheless fit in seamlessly with the security structures of the office and IT
world. They provide security and meet the special requirements of automation engineering,
such as simple upgrading of existing plants, simple installation and minimized downtimes in
the event of faults.
Various security measures can be combined depending on the security requirements.
See also
Part C: SCALANCE S security components (Page 383)
3.4
FastConnect (FC): The fast assembly system for SCALANCE
components
The FastConnect connector technology
Figure 3-9
IE FastConnect product group
When installing cables, problems are often encountered stripping the cables, there are too
many connector bits to get lost, wires are incorrectly connected or mistakes are made during
assembly. To avoid this, SCALANCE devices are designed for the use of the fast assembly
system FastConnect (FC).
Components
The FastConnect system covers FC cables, preset stripping tools and specially developed
connectors and includes the following:
100
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: The SCALANCE generation of devices
3.4 FastConnect (FC): The fast assembly system for SCALANCE components
● Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables (IE FC Cable 2x2) specially designed for fast
assembly (PROFINET-compliant, silicone free, halogen free, UL and CAT5e certified) for
a variety of applications as FC TP Standard Cable, FC TP Flexible Cable, FC TP Trailing
Cable and FC TP Marine Cable, and with FRNC jacket.
● Convenient stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool for Industrial Ethernet cables,
with which the outer jacket and braid shield can be removed to the perfect length in one
step.
● Cables prepared in this way are connected to the FastConnect using the insulation
piercing technique.
● Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45 Plugs with 90°, 145° and 180° cable outlet (PROFINETcompliant) or IE FC Modular Outlet for gigabit cabling
See also
Components for electrical networks (Page 186)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
101
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.1
4
Common properties of all SCALANCE devices
Properties shared by all SCALANCE devices
All SCALANCE devices have the following properties. If there are exceptions, this will be
pointed out in the description of the relevant device.
Autocrossover function
All SCALANCE devices have an integrated MDI/MDIX autocrossover function on their
electrical ports making it possible to use straight-through cables. This prevents malfunctions
resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation much easier for
the user.
Autonegotiation
All SCALANCE devices also have the autonegotiation function. Autonegotiation means the
automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite end. Using autonegotiation,
repeaters or end devices can detect the functionality available at the port of a partner device
allowing automatic configuration of different types of device. With autonegotiation, two
components connected to a link segment can exchange parameters and set themselves to
match the supported communication functionality.
The SCALANCE devices are therefore plug-and-play devices that require no settings when
they are put into operation.
Please note that devices not supporting autonegotiation must be set to 100 Mbps/ half
duplex or 10 Mbps half duplex.
Fault mask
On all SCALANCE devices with a button on the front panel, it is possible to set a specific
configuration as the desired status (good status). Deviations from this setting occurring
during operation are treated as errors.
Monitored error statuses include, for example, the status of the power supply or link down to
a communications partner, to which the SCALANCE device reacts with a fault LED and by
opening the signaling contact.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
103
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.1 Common properties of all SCALANCE devices
Formation of loops
The typical configuration of a network with the SCALANCE products is a tree structure. The
direct connection of two ports on the switch or accidental connection over several switches
causes an illegal loop. Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
When configuring the network with SCALANCE X400, meshing is possible since, in this
case, the spanning tree algorithm can eliminate the loop. Other SCALANCE products can
also be used in this loop if they cannot form a loop with each other.
Cable length at the electrical ports
A maximum of two IE-TP cords or IE-TP-XP cords with a total length of max. 10 m can be
used between two adjacent SCALANCE devices.
With the IE FC cables and IE FC RJ-45 plug, an overall cable length of a maximum of 100 m
is permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
Table 4-1
104
Maximum runs with twisted-pair cables
Cabling structure
Cable type
Max. length
Max. total of the patch
cables (TP cord)
In one piece
(without IE TP cords)
IE FC standard cable GP
100 m
-
IE FC flexible cable GP
85 m
IE FC torsion cable GP
55 m
IE FC trailing cable GP
85 m
IE FC trailing cable
85 m
IE FC marine cable
85 m
Structured
IE FC standard cable GP
90 m
(with IE-TP cords and
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 or
IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet)
IE FC flexible cable GP
75 m
IE FC torsion cable GP
45 m
IE FC trailing cable GP
75 m
IE FC trailing cable
75 m
IE FC marine cable
75 m
10 m
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2
SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.1
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices
Overview of the performance classes of the SCALANCE X devices
SCALANCE X
Real-Time
Isochronous Real-Time
X414-3E
Figure 4-1
X-400
X-300
X308-2
X308-2 LD
X208 X216
X224
X108 X116
X124
X005
X204-2/ X206-1/ X212-2/
X204-2LD X206-1LD X212-2 LD
X104-2
X106-1
X201-3P IRT
X202-2IRT
X202-2P IRT
X204IRT
X200-4P IRT
X112-2
G_IK10_XX_10212
X005
Unmanaged
X310
X208PRO
X-200
Managed
Performance
range
Managed plus
X-100
Modular
Entry Level
X408-2
Overview of Industrial Ethernet switches
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
105
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
SCALANCE X
Leistungsbereich
Redundancy
Managed
X101-1LD
X101-1POF
X101-1AUI
X101-1FL
OMC TP11 /
OMC TP11LD
G_IK10_XX_10199
Entry Level
Figure 4-2
X101-1
SCALANCE X005
Unmanaged
SCALANCE X-100
Modulare Gigabit
Office-Standards
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-400
Media converter (MC)
Performance range of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Overview table
You will find a table with an overview of the product features of the various SCALANCE X
devices at the end of this section.
Electrical and optical interfaces
SCALANCE devices can be used as switches in both optical and electrical Industrial
Ethernet networks. Each performance class therefore includes a mixture of devices with
varying numbers of electrical and optical interfaces. The optical interfaces also include
versions specially designed to cover long distances. These are available in devices that have
LD in the device designation.
Management functions
A further distinction between the devices is that the SCALANCE X200, SCALANCE X300
and SCALANCE X400 devices have management functions whereas the SCALANCE X100
and SCALANCE X005 do not. While unmanaged devices are less expensive, managed
106
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
devices provide numerous configuration and diagnostics functions that make the operation of
an Industrial Ethernet network much more convenient.
Fault-tolerance due to redundancy
The SCALANCE X-200, X-300 and X-400 switches have functions that allow the setup and
management of redundant networks in a ring structure. These networks can handle the
failure of individual nodes or cable sections and "divert" the data traffic so that the network
remains available.
IRT for strict real-time requirements
Devices with the IRT supplement (Isochronous Real Time) are particularly suitable for
applications in which a data transmission must be guaranteed at fixed intervals. To allow
this, all devices in an Industrial Ethernet have the same timebase. The messages of the
preferred nodes are transmitted together at previously configured times. Frames of other
nodes are held back by the IRT switches and sent later.
SCALANCE X-100 media converters
The media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 line are particularly suitable for applications
in which two Industrial Ethernet networks implemented with different media need to be
linked. These have only two interfaces and therefore fit into an extremely narrow casing.
They can also be used in a redundant ring.
The media converters have electrical and optical interfaces to link optical media with
electrical networks and to link existing network segments or individual end devices via
10BaseFL, AUI drop cable, etc.
SCALANCE X-400 modular switches
To achieve the greatest possible flexibility in terms of interfaces, the use of the modular
devices SCALANCE X414-3E and SCALANCE X408-2 is recommended. By making use of
media modules, these provide the maximum possible variability. Apart from numerous
management functions, these devices can also be used to link redundant electrical and
optical rings.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
107
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Table showing an overview of the functions
Type and number of ports
2
2 4)
X408-2
4
4
4)
X310
3
5)
7
7
20 3)
4
12 3)
12 3)
4
4
2
1
2 5)
X204IRT
4
X202-2IRT
2
Layer 3 switching
IGMP
RSTP IT features
VLAN
Digital inputs
Modular design
Gigabit technology
IRT capability
Standby redundancy
Ring redundancy
with RM
C-PLUG slot
PROFINET diagnostics
Diagnostics: Web, SNMP
Local display
(set button)
2
X202-2P IRT
2
2
X201-3P IRT
1
3
X200-4P IRT
24
X216
16
X212-2
12
X212-2LD
12
X208
8
X208PRO
X-200
4
X224
2
2
8
X206-1
6
X206-1LD
6
X204-2
4
X204-2LD
4
X124
24
X116
16
X112-2
12
X108
8
X106-1
6
1
X104-2
4
2
X005
5
108
8
X-300
1
X308-2LD
Figure 4-3
2)
7
X308-2
well suitable
1)
X-400
X414-3E
Fiber Optic
M12 POF/ Multi- SinglePCF mode mode
BFOC BFOC
Signal contact
TP
RJ45
2 x 24 V DC
FO
Type of
module
100 Mbit/s
SIMATIC environment
TP
10/100 Mbit/s
LED diagnostics
10 / 100 /
1000 Mbit/s
Fast Ethernet
Compact housing
Gigabit Ethernet
Features
1
1
2
1) can be additionally plugged in via multimode media modules
2) can be additionally plugged in via singlemode media modules
1) and 2) a total of max. 2 media modules 100 MBit/sec can be plugged in
X005
2
X-100
2
3) with extender module
4) can additionally be plugged with singlemode or multimode media modules with SC interface
5) singlemode or multimode with SC interface
G_IK10_XX_10216
SCALANCE X product table
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Diagnostics options
The individual SCALANCE X devices provide the following diagnostics options:
Possibilities of diagnostics with switches
LED
Module type
Error signal Signal screen PROFINET Web-based Diagnostics
contact
form
diagnostics manage- via SNMP
ment
VLAN
IGMPSnooping/
-Querier
RSTP
Multicast-/
Layer 3
broadcast- (IP-Routing)
limitation
1)
SCALANCE X414-3E/X408-2
G_IK10_XX_10138
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-200/X-200IRT/
X-200P IRT
SCALANCE X-100
SCALANCE X005
OSM
ESM
1)
Figure 4-4
with SCALANCE X414-3E
Diagnostics options of the SCALANCE X switches
See also
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters (Page 229)
4.2.2
Entry level SCALANCE X005
4.2.2.1
X005 area of application
Overview
Figure 4-5
SCALANCE X005
The SCALANCE X005 switch allows the cost-effective installation of small Industrial Ethernet
linear bus or star structures with switching functionality. The devices are designed for
installation in a switching cubicle.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
109
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
The SCALANCE X005 has five RJ-45 jacks for connection of end devices or other network
segments.
See also
SCALANCE X005 (Page 233)
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices (Page 105)
4.2.2.2
Design of the SCALANCE X005
Design of the SCALANCE X005
The SCALANCE X005 Industrial Ethernet switch with its robust metal casing is ideal for
installation on a DIN rail and an S7 standard rail. It is also possible to install the device
directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to its S7-300 housing dimensions, the device
is ideal for integration in an automation solution with S7-300 components.
The SCALANCE X005 has five RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X pin assignment, automatic detection
of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and autocrossing function for connecting
Industrial Ethernet FC cables.
No power supply redundancy, no signaling contact
To accommodate as many TP interfaces as possible in the smallest possible space, it was
decided not to include a redundant power supply or a signaling contact.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
4.2.2.3
Functions of the X005
Functions
The SCALANCE X005 supports the MDI / MDIX autocrossover function. This makes it
possible to use straight-through cables.
The SCALANCE X005 also has the autonegotiation and auto polarity exchange functions.
This makes the SCALANCE X005 a plug-and-play device that does not require settings to be
made for commissioning.
Please note that ports of partner stations requiring a fixed configuration must be set to 100
Mbps/ half duplex or 10 Mbps half duplex.
110
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.2.4
Topologies with the SCALANCE X005
Network topologies
Switching technology allows extensive networks to be set up with numerous nodes and
simplifies network expansion.
With the SCALANCE X005 device, linear bus and star topologies can be implemented.
It is not possible to use a SCALANCE X005 switch in a redundant ring because it does not
support redundancy.
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
4.2.3
SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 devices
4.2.3.1
Overview of the SCALANCE X-100 and X-200 devices
Comparison of the features of the SCALANCE X100 and 200 devices
This section compares the major features of the SCALANCE X100 and 200 devices to help
you to find the most suitable device for a given application.
The devices of the SCALANCE X100 product line are unmanaged Industrial Ethernet
switches with up to 24 ports and on-site diagnostics for applications in the vicinity of the
machinery.
The devices of the SCALANCE X-200 product line are managed Industrial Ethernet switches
also with a maximum of 24 ports that can be used universally for applications ranging from
those in the vicinity of the machinery to networked plant subunits. Configuration engineering
and remote diagnostics are integrated in the SIMATIC STEP 7 engineering tool increasing
the plant availability. Devices with a high degree of protection allow installation without a
cabinet.
With the SCALANCE X200-4P IRT, X201-3P IRT, X202-2P IRT, X202-2IRT and X204IRT
(isochronous real time), SIMATIC NET offers the first Industrial Ethernet real-time switches
from the new SCALANCE series with innovative housing concept and integrated ERTEC
(Enhanced Real-Time Controller). By using the "cut through" switching mechanism, the
switches are ideal to meet the real-time requirements of PROFINET. This reduces the delay
in an IRT switch from approximately 10 us to approximately 3.5 us (best case).
The following SCALANCE X-100/200 devices are available with optical interfaces. The
transmission mode of these 100Base-FX connectors conforms to the IEEE 802.3 standard.
● SCALANCE X204-2LD, SCALANCE X206-1LD, SCALANCE X212-2LD
These devices have FO interfaces that are particularly suited to the use of single mode
FO cables with a core diameter of 10 µm. The light source is an LED that emits light with
a wavelength of 1310 nm.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
111
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 26 km.
The cables are connected over BFOC sockets.
● SCALANCE X104-2, SCALANCE X106-1, SCALANCE X112-2, SCALANCE X204-2,
SCALANCE X206-1, SCALANCE X212-2, SCALANCE X202-2IRT
Data transmission is over multimode fiber-optic cable (FOC). The wavelength is 1310 nm.
Multimode FO cable is used with a core diameter of 50 or 62.5 µm. The light source is an
LED. The outer diameter of the FO cable is 125 µm.
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 3 km.
The cables are connected over BFOC sockets.
● SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE X200-4P IRT
Data is transferred using plastic optical fiber (POF) or polymer cladded fiber (PCF). The
wavelength is 650 nm. POF cables with a core diameter of 980 µm as well as PCF cables
with core diameter of 200 µm are used. The light source is an LED.
The minimum cable length is 1 m. The maximum transmission range (segment length) is
50 m for POF and 100 m for PCF cables.
The cables are connected over SC-RJ sockets.
Features common to all X-100/X-200 switches
All SCALANCE switches of the X-100/X-200 series have the following features:
● They are robust and suitable for use in an industrial environment,
● Diagnostics LEDs,
● Redundant 24 V DC power supply,
● Compact housing (securing collars, etc.)
● Signaling contact and local operation.
112
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Features of the specific products
The following table provides an overview of the features of the individual switches.
Table 4-2
Overview of the product characteristics
Device type SCALANCE X
104-2
106-1
108
112-2
116,
124
204-2
206-1
208
208PRO
204-2LD
206-1LD
212-2
216
224
212-2LD
200-4PIRT
201-3PIRT
202-2IRT
202-2PIRT
204IRT
Fast learning
-
+
+
+
+
+
Passive
listening
-
+ 1)
+
+
+
+
Log table
-
+ 1)
+
+ 2)
+
+
SNTP +
SICLOCK
-
+ 1) 2)
+
+ 2)
+
+
Cut through
-
-
-
-
-
+
Fast learning: Quick recognition of MAC addresses on the device that change during
operation (for example, when an end node is reconnected).
1) Except 208PRO
2) As of hardware/firmware version V2
Cut through is not possible
● between a port set to 10 Mbps and a port set to 100 Mbps
● when two packets are to be sent at the same time on one port.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
113
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.3.2
SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged
Area of application of the X-100
Overview
Figure 4-6
Product pictures of the SCALANCE X-100 series
The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 series allow costeffective setup of Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbps linear bus or star structures with
switching functionality. They are particularly suitable for applications in the immediate vicinity
of machines and have a robust metal housing for space-saving installation in a cubicle on a
DIN rail, S7-300 standard rail or for wall mounting.
The node or network connectors are robust, designed for industry and have electrical or
optical interfaces depending on the model. The cable connectors conform to PROFINET and
lock into the housing providing additional strain and bending relief.
Simple diagnostics is possible on the device with the LEDs (power LED, fault LED, LED for
link status or data traffic) and signaling contact.
The use of a redundant power supply is also possible.
See also
SCALANCE X-100 (Page 237)
Product features of the SCALANCE X devices (Page 105)
114
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
X-100 design
Design
The SCALANCE Industrial Ethernet switches with their robust metal IP30 housing are ideal
for installation on a DIN rail and an S7-300 standard rail. It is also possible to install the
device directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to its the housing dimensions that
match those of the S7-300, the devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution
with S7-300 components.
All SCALANCE X-100 switches have the following connectors:
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
The following are available depending on the device:
● 10/100BaseTX, RJ-45 connector:
RJ-45 jack, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and
autocrossing function for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables via Industrial Ethernet
FC RJ-45 Plug 180 up to 100 m
● 100BaseFX, ST connectors, for multimode fiber-optic cables
ST sockets for direct connection to the Industrial Ethernet FO cables up to 3000 m to set
up linear bus and star structures. Wavelength: 1310 nm
With the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ-45 Plug and Industrial Ethernet FastConnect
standard cable, installation is possible without a patch panel.
Functions of the X-100
Functions
The integrated switch functionality results in a distribution of network load.
Diagnostics
LEDs display the following information locally:
● Power
● Port status
● Data traffic
● Signaling contact
Signaling contact
X-100 switches can indicate the following errors/faults via the floating signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port,
● The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies,
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
115
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status by Web Based Management or using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
Topologies with X-100
Network topology and network configuration
SCALANCE X-100 switches are particularly suitable for setting up electrical and optical
Industrial Ethernet linear bus or star structures. These are normally installed in a switching
cubicle along with the nodes to be connected.
When the switches of the SCALANCE X-100 family are cascaded, there is no restriction to
the network span. This makes network configuration simple and the delay time does not
need to be calculated. The network can be expanded at any time without problems.
During network configuration, however, the following constraints must be remembered:
● Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X switches:
– Max. 100 m via Industrial Ethernet FC cable with Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45 Plug
– Max. 10 m via patch cables with TP Cord
– Max. 100 m via Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 or Industrial Ethernet FC modular
Outlet RJ-45, IE FC standard cable and TP Cord (total portion via TP Cord max. 10 m)
● Length of the optical cables:
– Max. 3000 m with Industrial Ethernet FO cables
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
4.2.3.3
SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Overview of the media converters
Comparison of the features of the media converters
Media converters are used to link two Industrial Ethernet networks. The major advantage of
the converters is their compact construction and cost-effective design.
This section provides an overview of the features of these unmanaged Industrial Ethernet
media converters.
116
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Product features
The media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 series allow the cost-effective installation of
Industrial Ethernet linear (bus) and star structures with transitions from one media to
another.
Type and number of ports
SCALANCE X101-1LD
SCALANCE X101-1POF
SCALANCE X101-1AUI
OMC TP11
1
OMC TP11LD
1
Figure 4-7
Ring redundancy
without RM
Local display
(SET button)
1
1
1
1
Multimode
BFOC
1
1
SCALANCE X101-1FL
AUI
1
1
1
10 Mbit/s
Singlemode
BFOC
1
1
1
G_IK10_XX_10137
SCALANCE X101-1
Multimode
BFOC
Signal contact
Type of module
100 Mbit/s
POF / PCF
2 x 24 V DC
RJ45
SIMATIC evironment
Fast Ethernet
10 / 100 Mbit/s
LED diagnostics
Fiber Optic
Compact housing
Twisted Pair
Features
Overview of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters
See also
SCALANCE X-100 media converters (Page 251)
X-100 media converter design
Design
The SCALANCE X-100 media converters with their robust metal housing are ideal for
installation on a DIN rail and an S7 standard rail. It is also possible to install the device
directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to their S7-300 housing dimensions, the
devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution with S7-300 components.
The SCALANCE X-100 media converters have
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
and directly below this
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
All media converters have two interfaces for connecting to an Industrial Ethernet network as
shown in the table in the previous section.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
117
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
See also
Overview of the media converters (Page 116)
Functions of the X-100 media converters
Network connection and media transition
The unmanaged media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 product line allow the costeffective connection of network segments or nodes with different transmission media
(optical/electrical) within Industrial Ethernet linear bus, star and ring structures. They are
designed for installation in a switching cubicle.
Individual end devices or network segments located at a distance from the main network can
be connected via the optical link of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters. It is also
possible to integrate an optical link into a redundant ring and to install the SCALANCE X-100
media converters in a standby link.
SIMATIC S7-400
with CP 443-1
IE Standard Cable
Industrial Ethernet
Switch
SCALANCE
X108
Industrial
Ethernet
OLM
Industrial
Ethernet
OLM
Industrial
Ethernet
OLM
Fiber Optic
Media-Converter
SCALANCE
X101-1FL
PC with
CP 1413
HMI
Figure 4-8
118
PC with
CP 1413
SIMATIC S5
with CP 1430
HMI
PC with
CP 1413
SIMATIC S5
with CP 1430
HMI
G_IK10_XX_10175
SIMATIC S5
with CP 1430
Example of using the X101-1FL media converter: Connection of an optical network segment to copper
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
SIMATIC S7-200
with CP 243-1
IE Standard Cable
Switch
SCALANCE
X108
10Base5-Segment
Connecting cable
727-1
(AUI Dropcable)
Media-Converter
SCALANCE
X101-1AUI
Figure 4-9
Bus coupler
incl. Medium
Attachment
Unit
G_IK10_XX_10174
Industrial
Ethernet
Example of using the X101-1AUI media converter: Connection of existing network
segments to IE networks
Cascading (series connection) two media converters
In this mode, two media converters are connected in series via their FO ports. This mode is,
for example, useful when two electrical Industrial Ethernet networks located at some
distance from each other need to be linked together.
Topologies with the X-100 media converters
Network topologies
Linear bus and star topologies can be implemented with an Industrial Ethernet media
converter of the SCALANCE X-100 series. It is also possible to link rings and to use two
identical media converters in a ring structure.
Depending on the local conditions, the transition from electrical to optical media using media
converters may be a cost-effective way of bridging longer distances.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
119
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
S7-400
SCALANCE X-400
S7-300
PC
Fiber Optic
SCALANCE
X204-2
S7-400
Twisted
Pair
S7-300
PC
SCALANCE
X101-1 LD
PC
S7-400
Figure 4-10
G_IK10_XX_10052
PC
Optical ring with SCALANCE X-100 media converters
The passive use of two identical media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 series within a
redundant ring is possible. In this case, the media converters behave "like a section of
cable".
120
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
S7-400
S7-300
S7-400
S7-300
SCALANCE
X204IRT
Industrial Ethernet
PC
S7-400
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X208
S7-300
SCALANCE
X208
IPC
PC
S7-400
IPC
Figure 4-11
G_IK10_XX_10054
SCALANCE
X101-1 or
X101-1LD
Electrical ring with SCALANCE X100 media converters
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
4.2.3.4
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Area of application of the X-200
Overview
SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches allow the cost-effective installation of 10/100
Mbps Industrial Ethernet linear (bus), star and ring structures with switching functionality,
where availability of the network or remote diagnostics options are required. The devices
have degree of protection IP30 and are designed for installation in a switching cubicle. With
IP65, the SCALANCE X208PRO is intended for installation outside a cubicle.
SCALANCE X-200 switches vary in terms of the functions they provide and the number and
type of electrical and optical IE interfaces.
The SCALANCE X-200IRT switches form a special class by using the "cut through"
switching mechanism, the optimum solution to meet the real-time requirements of
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
121
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
PROFINET. SCALANCE X-200IRT switches allow the installation of isochronous mode
real-time Industrial Ethernet linear bus, ring and star structures with switching functionality.
The special requirements for automation solutions in terms of linear topology, hard real time
and unrestricted IT openness are incorporated in one technology.
Figure 4-12
SCALANCE X-200 managed switches
See also
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT (Page 260)
X-200 design
Design
The SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE X-200IRT Industrial Ethernet switches with their
robust metal housing are ideal for installation on a DIN rail and an S7-300 standard rail. It is
also possible to install the device directly on a wall in various positions. Thanks to their S7300 housing dimensions, the devices are ideal for integration in an automation solution with
S7-300 components.
The modules have a 4-pin terminal block, the SCALANCE X208PRO has two 4-pin M12
interfaces for connecting to the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC). They also have a 2pin terminal block to allow the use of the signaling contact. On the SCALANCE X208PRO,
the signaling contact is connected to a 5-pin M12 socket.
Status information is indicated by a row of LEDs (power, link status, data traffic, power
supply, signaling contact).
The SCALANCE X-200 modules and SCALANCE X-200IRT are available with the following
port types for communication:
● RJ-45 connector; 10/100BaseTX:
Automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and autocrossing
function for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables via Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 180 or Industrial Ethernet RJ-45 Plug up to 100 m.
122
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
● 4-pin M12 connector, d-coded; 10/100BaseTX:
Automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps), autosensing and autocrossing
function for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables with 4-pin M12 connectors up to
100 m.
● BFOC (Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector) plug for multimode glass fibers; 100BaseFX:
For direct connection of preassembled Industrial Ethernet FO standard cables with a core
diameter of 50 or 62.5 µm and a maximum segment length up to 3000 m for setting up
linear bus and star structures; wavelength approx. 1310 nm.
● BFOC Plug for single mode glass fibers; 100BaseFX:
For direct connection of preassembled single mode glass fibers with a core diameter of
10 µm and a maximum segment length up to 26 km for setting up linear bus and star
structures; wavelength approx. 1310 nm.
SCALANCE X-200 devices with one or more of these interfaces have the letters LD
appended to the designation. Example: SCALANCE X204-2 LD
● SC-RJ sockets for connecting Plastic Optical Fiber cable (POF) or Polymer Cladded Fiber
cable (PCF); 100BaseFX:
For direct connection of a preassembled POF standard cable with a core diameter of 980
µm or PCF standard cable with a core diameter of 200 µm. The minimum cable length for
POF and PCF cables is 1 m. The maximum segment length for POF is 50 m and 100 m
for PCF. Wavelength approx. 850 nm.
SCALANCE X-200 devices with one or more of these interfaces have the letter P
appended to the designation. Example: SCALANCE X201-3P IRT
The connector technology is the same for multimode and single mode fibers. The devices
themselves, however, have transmitter/receiver modules specially adapted to the type of
fiber.
Table 4-3
TP and FO interfaces of the SCALANCE X200 devices
IE FO single
mode
connectors
(BFOC)
IE FO
POF/PCF
Connectors
(SC-RJ)
RJ-45
connectors
M12
Connectors
IE FO
multimode
connectors
(BFOC)
SCALANCE X224
24
-
-
SCALANCE X216
16
-
-
-
-
SCALANCE X208
8
-
-
-
-
SCALANCE X208 PRO
-
8
-
-
-
-
-
SCALANCE X212-2
12
-
2
-
-
SCALANCE X206-1
6
-
1
-
-
SCALANCE X204-2
4
-
2
-
-
SCALANCE X212-2 LD
12
-
-
2
-
SCALANCE X206-1 LD
6
-
-
1
-
SCALANCE X204-2 LD
4
-
-
2
-
SCALANCE X204 IRT
4
-
-
-
-
SCALANCE X202-2 IRT
2
-
1
-
-
SCALANCE X202-2 PIRT
2
-
-
-
2
SCALANCE X201-3 PIRT
1
-
-
-
3
SCALANCE X200-4 PIRT
-
-
-
-
4
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
123
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Connectors
The pin assignment of the 10/100BaseTX RJ-45 connectors, the power supply terminals and
the signaling contact terminals are the same on all SCALANCE X200 devices except for the
SCALANCE X208 PRO. They are described in the section Common connector pin
assignments.
Functions of the X-200
Signaling contact
The following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port,
● The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies,
● The C-PLUG (see below) is also monitored. If a C-PLUG is in the device when you press
the button, this is also stored and monitored,
● Redundancy manager connected through,
● Monitoring the POF connectors on the SCALANCE X200-P IRT devices (maintenance
request or maintenance required)
POF cables age significantly faster than glass fibers. SCALANCE X200-PIRT devices
monitor the quality of the signals received via POF cables. If the signals become too
weak, this is indicated by the signaling contact. This means that maintenance can be
performed in good time before there is a breakdown in communication.
The SCALANCE X-200IRT variants have the following additional monitoring functions:
● Switchover of standby connection
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status by Web Based Management or using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
C-PLUG
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the base device. When replacing the base device, it can be used to
transfer the data it contains to the new device without requiring a programming device.
During operation, the C-PLUG is supplied with energy by the base device. It retains all data
permanently when the power is turned off.
If an empty C-PLUG (factory settings) is inserted, all configuration data of the SCALANCE X200 is saved to it when the device starts up. Changes to the configuration during operation
are also saved on the C-PLUG without any operator intervention being necessary.
A basic device with an inserted C-PLUG automatically uses the configuration data of the CPLUG when it starts up. This is, however, only possible when the data was written by a
compatible device type.
124
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Inserting a C-PLUG that does not contain the configuration of a compatible device type,
inadvertently removing the C-PLUG, or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by
the diagnostic mechanisms of the SCALANCE X-200 (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, WBM,
etc.).
This allows fast and simple replacement of the basic device. If a device is replaced, the CPLUG is taken from the failed component and inserted in the replacement. The first time it is
started up, the replacement device has the same configuration as the failed device except
for the MAC address set by the vendor.
Configuration and diagnostics over the Industrial Ethernet network
SCALANCE X-200 devices provide various functions that can be started or executed via the
Industrial Ethernet network. Before the SCALANCE X-200 can be addressed via the
network, it must first be given an IP address. There are three ways of doing this:
● Configuration with the Primary Setup Tool (PST) V3 or higher;
● To be able to use the setup tool to assign the IP address, the SCALANCE X-200 must be
accessible over Ethernet.
● Configuration with DHCP
● Configuration with STEP 7 V 5.3 plus SP 1
After an IP address has been assigned, data such as diagnostics and configuration data can
be called up from components that have Web Based Management (WBM -- see below).
This, for example, allows port information to be queried such as the transmission speed
being used, transmission mode (full, half duplex), autonegotiation, link status and whether or
not a port is active.
The data stored on the C-PLUG can also be read.
Using WBM, various settings can be made on the SCALANCE X-200. It is possible, for
example, to specify whether or not messages are sent by E-mail or using an SNMP trap.
Port mirroring can also be enabled or disabled. Port mirroring means that all the frames sent
and received via a port are also sent via a different port to a connected monitoring device. It
is also possible to set the port to be monitored and the port via which the frames are
mirrored (the monitor port).
Any statistical data recorded by the SCALANCE X-200 can also be read out. This means, for
example, that the number of frames sent or received per port and the number of bad frames
can be queried.
The Primary Setup Tool (PST)
The Primary Setup Tool is used mainly to assign an IP address to a SCALANCE X-200. This
is available on the CD that ships with the SCALANCE X-200.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a protocol that allows the dynamic
configuration of IP addresses and provides additional information.
This allows the use of a limited number of existing IP addresses by managing the address
assignment centrally. When a PC is first turned on in a LAN, the PC logs on at a server with
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
125
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
this service. The server assigns a free IP address so that at the next startup, a connection is
not absolutely necessary.
The use of DHCP is not restricted to the startup phase. DHCP can also be used during
operation.
The IP address remains valid for a selectable period known as the "lease time". When this
expires, it must be renewed or extended.
Generally, there is no fixed address assignment; in other words, when a client requests an IP
address again, it is normally assigned a different address. It is, however, possible to
configure the DHCP server so that it makes a fixed address assignment.
Web Based Management (WBM)
With Web Based Management, the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200
product line provide various diagnostic functions that can be controlled using an Internet
browser (for example the Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape). The functions are
controlled using a Java script stored on the Industrial Ethernet switches of the
SCALANCE X-200 product line that can be loaded by the browser. To access Industrial
Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200 product line, the IP address of the device must
be entered in the address box of the browser.
Topologies with X-200
Linear and star structure
All SCALANCE X-200 products can be used in electrical, optical and mixed linear and star
structures. Networks are also possible in which these structures are interlinked. These are
known as tree structures.
Ring structures
SCALANCE X-200 products can be used in electrical, optical and mixed ring structures.
There can be up to 50 switches in a ring.
In a ring structure, the SCALANCE X-200 switches are initially connected via their ring ports
to form a linear bus. The two ends of the line are closed to form a ring by a switch operating
in redundancy manager mode. When the network is functioning correctly, the ring ports of
the redundancy manager are disconnected.
The switch operating in redundancy manager mode monitors the connected line over its ring
ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an interruption on the connected line; in
other words, it restores a functioning line over this substitute path. Reconfiguration takes
place within 0.3 s.
As soon as the problem has been eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other
words, the ring ports in the redundancy manager are once again disconnected from each
other.
Only one switch can be configured as redundancy manager (RM) in a ring.
The redundancy function of the SCALANCE X-200 is enabled and disabled by pressing a
button on the front of the device or with Web Based Management (WBM) (cannot be set via
PNIO). After the RM function has been enabled or after the RM has been switched through,
this is indicated by the RM LED on the housing.
126
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Redundant coupling of network segments
The redundant coupling of two rings is handled by the standby manager mechanism. This
function can only be configured with Web Based Management (WBM).
The redundant coupling of two network segments shown here as an example is only
possible between SCALANCE X-200IRT devices, since this requires the standby function of
the SCALANCE X-200IRT.
Operator
Stations
Operator
Station
S7-300
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
100
100
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
S7-300
S7-200
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
100
100
Mbit/s
Mbit/s
SCALANCE
X202-2IRT
Figure 4-13
IPC
S7-300
G_IK10_XX_10134
S7-400
Redundant coupling of two optical rings with SCALANCE X202-2IRT
The SCALANCE X-200IRT can be operated either as RM or in standby mode. It cannot,
however, handle both functions at the same time. When standby or redundancy manager
function is activated, this is signaled by the RM-LED. The standby manager is configured
using WBM.
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
Star structure (Page 55)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Optical redundant ring structure (Page 62)
Optical linear structure (Page 61)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
127
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.4
SCALANCE X-300
4.2.4.1
Area of application of the X-300
Area of application of the SCALANCE X-300 switches
Figure 4-14
SCALANCE X-300 product group
The IE Switches SCALANCE X-300 from SIMATIC NET are designed for use in high-speed
plant networks that will also meet future requirements. With the HSR redundancy function
and standby coupling of rings, high network availability can be achieved. Support of IT
standards such as VLAN, RSTP, IGMP, and GARP makes seamless integration of
automation networks in existing office networks possible.
The IE Switches SCALANCE X-300 are designed for use in switching cubicles and cabinets.
Technical options (network topologies)
The IE Switches SCALANCE X-300 simplify the expansion of a network regardless of the
network topology.
You can use an IE Switch SCALANCE X-300 in the following network topologies:
● Linear structure
● Star/tree structure
● Ring with redundancy manager (standby function)
The maximum cable length is 10 km for single mode gigabit transmission. A mixed topology
between IE Switch SCALANCE X-300 devices and OSMs/ESMs is possible only via the
electrical ports. Mixed operation in the topology between SCALANCE X308-2 and an OSM
over the optical ports is not possible because the SCALANCE X308-2 only supports gigabit.
128
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Using an IE Switch SCALANCE X-300 as the redundancy manager in a ring with
redundancy manager provides greater availability. If there is an interruption on the
connection between these switches, the IE Switch SCALANCE X-300 used as the
redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very short time creates a line from the ring
with redundancy manager. As a result, a functional, end-to-end structure is restored. For
information on this topic, refer to the Configuration Manual "SIMATIC NET; Industrial
Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400".
Relationship with X-400 switches
The essential technical features of X-300 switches are the same as those of SCALANCE X402-2 devices.
Refer to the compatibility overview in the section below (Page 129)!
See also
SCALANCE X-300 (Page 278)
4.2.4.2
X-300 design
Design
SCALANCE X-300 devices have the same functionality as the devices of the SCALANCE X400 series, however, they have the compact design of the SCALANCE X-200 devices.
See also
X-200 design (Page 122)
4.2.4.3
Functions of the X-300
Functionality of the X-408-2
Functionally, SCALANCE X-300 switches are identical to the X-408-2 devices. (No layer 3
functionality on the X-300)
See also
Functions of the X-400 (Page 133)
4.2.4.4
Compatibility with other devices
Compatibility list
The following products and devices are compatible with IE Switches X-300:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
129
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
● End devices
All SIMATIC NET products with a TP port can be connected to the ports of IE Switches X300.
● Network components in linear or star structure
ESM/OSM
OMC (TP cable max. 6 m long)
SCALANCE X005
SCALANCE X-100
SCALANCE X-100 medium converter
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE S-600
SCALANCE W-700
● Network components in a ring structure with IE Switches X-300 as RM
– Ring structure electrical
(All IE Switches X-300 possible, it may be necessary to reconfigure ring ports):
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
– Optical ring structure
(possible only with SCALANCE X308-2 and X308-2LD):
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
● Redundant coupling of networks.
– In the network segment with the master-slave pair of devices to be configured:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
on the standby link also to SCALANCE X-200
– In the network segment to be coupled:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
Note
All compatibility information assumes the correct use of the TP and FOC cables.
130
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.4.5
Overview of the product characteristics
Table 4-4
Overview of the product characteristics
Device type SCALANCE
X310
X308-2
X308-2 LD
SIMATIC environment
+
+
+
Diagnostics LED
+
+
+
24 V DC
+
+
+
Compact housing (securing collar, etc.)
+
+
+
2x 24 V DC
+
+
+
Signaling contact + on-site operation
+
+
+
Diagnostics: Web, SNMP, PROFINET
+
+
+
C-PLUG
+
+
+
IRT capability
-
-
-
Fast learning1
+
+
+
Passive listening
+
+
+
Log table
+
+
+
SNTP + SICLOCK
+
+
+
Cut through
-
-
-
Use in ring possible (not as RM)
+
+
+
Redundancy manager
+
+
+
+
+
+
Standby manager
1Fast
learning:
Fast recognition of MAC addresses on the device that change during operation (for example,
when an end node is reconnected).
Table 4-5
Overview of the connection options
Fast Ethernet
Device type SCALANCE
10/100 Mbps
X310
X308-2
X308-2 LD
TP (RJ-45)
10
8
8
Fiber
multimode
(SC)
-
2
-
Fiber
single mode
(SC)
-
-
2
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
131
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.5
SCALANCE X-400 modular
4.2.5.1
SCALANCE X-400
Area of application of the X-400
Overview
Figure 4-15
SCALANCE X414-3E
The SCALANCE X-400 product line consists of modular Industrial Ethernet switches, media
modules, and extenders. 100 Mbps and 1000 Mbps technology is supported for different
transmission media (twisted pair, fiber-optic) and increased port requirements. The main
areas of application are high-performance plant networks (control level). Due to its modular
structure, the X-400 product line is designed to meet future demands and can be adapted to
meet the requirements of a particular task.
The integrated redundancy manager allows fast medium redundancy even for large
networks both for Gigabit Ethernet (SCALANCE X-300 and X-400 switches in the ring) and
for Fast Ethernet (SCALANCE X-400 switches in the ring combined with SCALANCE X-200
switches or OSMs/ESMs).
To set up optical Gigabit Ethernet rings, the integrated Gigabit Ethernet ports can be
converted to fiber-optic cable via a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet media module. Module variants
for multimode (up to 750 m FO cable) and single mode (up to 10 km) are available.
Using a plug-in 2-port Fast Ethernet media module for multimode or single mode FO cable,
SCALANCE X-400 switches can also be integrated in 100 Mbps rings with
SCALANCE X204-2 or OSMs. A second plug-in 2-port Fast Ethernet FO cable media
module allows distant nodes to be connected optically.
Remote diagnostics is possible using PROFINET diagnostics, a Web browser or SNMP.
Switches of the SCALANCE X-400 product line support office standards and therefore allow
seamless integration of automation networks into existing office networks. Virtual networks
(VLANs) can be set up. The support of standardized redundancy methods (Rapid
Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol) allows redundant interfacing to higher-level
Enterprise networks.
132
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Interfaces
The SCALANCE X408-2 switch has four integrated gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair interfaces
(10, 100 or 1000 Mbps) to interconnect multiple switches and to connect end devices. The
nodes are connected over 4 Fast Ethernet ports integrated in the switch (10 or 100 Mbps).
The X414-3E switch has two integrated gigabit Ethernet twisted pair ports (100 or 1000
Mbps) to interconnect multiple switches. The nodes are connected over 12 Fast Ethernet
twisted-pair ports integrated in the switch (100 Mbps or even 10 Mbps).
A further eight nodes can be connected over an 8-port Fast Ethernet twisted-pair extender
docked to the right of the switch.
See also
Accessories for SCALANCE X-400 switches (Page 222)
SCALANCE X-400 (Page 293)
X-400 design
SCALANCE X-400 design
The base device consists of a basic module, the power supply and a switch CPU. The
SCALANCE X414-3E also has 8 digital inputs. On the SCALANCE X408-2, the CPU is
integrated in the basic module. Unused slots or slots in which nothing can be inserted, are
protected by covers.
SCALANCE X-400 provides a modular structure for the required ports. This modularity
simplifies setup and subsequent expansion of complex network topologies to meet current
needs.
SCALANCE X-400 provides electrical ports that can be used as gigabit and ring ports.
Expanding with media modules provides additional optical ports.
On the SCALANCE X414-3E, attaching the extender module EM495-8 can increase the
number of ports by a maximum of eight. Attaching the EM496-4 extender module makes two
further slots available for media modules.
The SCALANCE X-400 devices have numerous LEDs and a selection button with which a
range of mode and status information can be displayed.
The SCALANCE X-400 is powered by a 24 V DC supply. To protect the device from failure
of the external power supply, two power supplies can be connected. To use 110/220 V AC
line power, S7-300 power supplies are suitable that convert to 24 V DC. These must
guarantee a current of at least 2 A to supply the 24 V side of a SCALANCE X414-3E. They
must also meet the requirements of SELV to NEC Class 2.
Functions of the X-400
Functions
● Increased network performance
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) address of the end devices, local
data traffic remains local, only data intended for nodes in another network segment is
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
133
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
forwarded by the switch. With DHCP support, the IP address can be assigned by a
central DHCP server.
● Simple network configuration and network expansion:
The switch stores the data received at the ports and then forwards it to the destination
address. The restriction of the network span resulting from collision detection (CSMA/CD)
ends at the port.
● Restricting errors to the network segment affected:
SCALANCE X-400 switches only forward data with a valid checksum (CRC).
● Integration of existing network segments operating at 10 Mbps in Fast Ethernet networks
operating at 100 Mbps:
At its twisted-pair ports, the X-400 switch automatically detects the send and receive
pairs (autocrossover), the data rate 10 or 100 Mbps and full and half duplex operation
(autonegotiation).
● High-speed connection of SCALANCE X-400 switches operating at 1 Gbps:
X-400 switches have several gigabit Ethernet ports for interconnecting switches.
● Fast redundancy in the ring (reconfiguration time of the ring max. 0.3 seconds):
By interconnecting the ends of an optical line using X-400 switches to form a ring, reliable
communication can be achieved. The X-400 switch has an integrated redundancy
manager (RM) that permanently monitors the functioning of the network. It recognizes the
failure of a section in the ring or of a SCALANCE X-400 switch and activates the
substitute path within a maximum of 0.3 seconds. Rings consisting of SCALANCE X400
switches can be operated at 1000 Mbps. In rings with SCALANCE X-200 or OSMs/ESMs,
it is possible to integrate X400 switches at 100 Mbps.
● Layer 3 routing with the SCALANCE X414-3E allows communication between different IP
subnets:
– Static routing
– Dynamic routing OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) and RIPv1/2 (Routing Information
Protocol)
– Redundant routing VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol)
● Redundant connection to company networks:
X-400 switches support the standardized redundancy mechanism Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP). This allows a subnet to connected redundantly to a higher-level
company network with reduced requirements for the reconfiguration time (in the seconds
range).
● Support of virtual networks (VLAN):
To structure Industrial Ethernet networks with a with a growing number of nodes, an
existing physical network can be divided into several virtual subnets.
● Load limitation when using multicast protocols (for example Voice over IP, video):
By learning the multicast sources and destinations (IGMP snooping), X-400 switches can
also filter multicast data traffic and therefore limit load in the network.
● Time synchronization:
Diagnostics messages (log table entries, E-mails) are given a time stamp. The local time
is uniform throughout the network due to synchronization with a SICLOCK time
transmitter making it easier to assign diagnostics messages to several devices.
● Simple device replacement:
All settings are automatically stored on the C-PLUG exchangeable storage medium. If a
switch of the X-400 series needs to be replaced, these settings are simply transferred by
inserting the C-PLUG.
134
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Topologies with X-400
Network topology and network configuration
With X-400 switches, the network topology can be adapted easily to the structure of the
plant. The following network structures and combinations of them can be implemented:
● Fast Ethernet and gigabit rings with fast medium redundancy:
An electrical ring with redundancy manager can be set up without media modules.
An optical ring with redundancy manager requires the use of media modules. Which
slots or ports should be used, depends on the selected transmission rate.
● Star structure with X-400 switches:
Each X-400 represents a point of the star. The cascading depth and total span of a network
are limited only by the signal propagation times of the communication connections.
● Linear bus structure with X-400 switches:
Linear structures can also be implemented with the SCALANCE X-400. The cascading depth
and total span of a network are limited only by the signal propagation times of the
communication connections.
● Redundant coupling of network segments
In this case, network segments are rings with a redundancy manager (RM). The rings can
also be interrupted at one point (linear topology).
During network configuration, however, the following constraints must be remembered:
General configuration rules
Maximum cable length with multimode FO cable between two modules:
● 3000 m at 100 Mbps
● 750 m at 1 Gbps
Maximum cable length with single mode FO cable between two modules:
● 26 km at 100 Mbps
● 10 km at 1 Gbps
Maximum cable length for twisted pair:
● 100 m
Network configuration rules such as "delay equivalents" and "variability value" end at the port
of the switch and are meaningless for the cascading of switches such as those of the
SCALANCE X-400 series.
Application examples
Detailed application examples can be found in the section on network topologies.
See also
Basic structures (Page 52)
Advanced network configurations (Page 66)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
135
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
4.2.5.2
Overview of the media modules
Overview of the media modules
The Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X400 devices can be equipped with media modules to
allow FO cables to be used. Media modules are available both for multimode FO cables and
for single mode FO cables. They can be added or changed during operation. SCALANCE
X414-3E supports two optical gigabit Ethernet ports and up to four extra optical Fast
Ethernet ports.
e.g. for use in optical gigabit ring with
single mode for a distance of up to
10 km, connecting two separate optical
nodes and up to four electrical nodes.
Figure 4-16
MM491-2LD
or
Fast
Ethernet
MM491-2
MM492-2LD
or
MM492-2
or
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MM492-2
Example 2
e.g. for use in optical gigabit ring,
connecting up to six electrical nodes
or
for redundant connection of optical gigabit
rings via electrical gigabit segments,
connecting up to four electrical nodes.
G_IK10_XX_10201
Slot
number 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Gigabit
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MM492-2LD
MM491-2
Example 1
optionally
Gigabit or
Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X408-2
Examples of using the MM491-2x media modules
The following media modules are available:
Table 4-6
Overview of the properties of the media modules
Module type
Procedure
Cabling
Connectors
Segment
length
Wavelength
MM491-2
100Base-FX
Multimode
2x2 BFOC
3 km
1310 nm
MM491-2LD
100Base-FX
Single mode
2x2 BFOC
26 km
1310 nm
MM492-2
1000Base-SX
Multimode
2 SC duplex
750 m
850 nm
MM492-2LD
1000Base-LX
Single mode
2 SC duplex
10 km
1310 nm
An inserted media module for gigabit Ethernet converts the two gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair
ports to optical, the onboard ports are disabled. Media modules can be added or replaced
during operation.
Media modules can be inserted in the following slots:
136
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
Table 4-7
Options for inserting media modules
Media module
In device
Slot
MM491-2
SCALANCE X414-3E
6, 7
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
EM496-4
12 - 15
SCALANCE X414-3E
6, 7
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
EM496-4
12 - 15
SCALANCE X414-3E
5
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
SCALANCE X414-3E
5
SCALANCE X408
5, 6
MM491-2LD
MM492-2
MM492-2LD
See also
Media modules (Page 324)
4.2.5.3
Overview of extender modules
Overview of the extender modules
The SCALANCE X414-3E has an expansion interface on the right-hand side of the device.
An optional extender module can be attached to this interface.
The SCALANCE X408-2 cannot be extended with an extender module.
The following extender module variants are available:
● EM495-8:
This has 8 twisted-pair 10/100 Mbps ports (RJ-45 jacks). This allows the twelve onboard
Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports of the SCALANCE X414-3E to be extended to a total of
20 ports.
Figure 4-17
Twisted pair extender EM495-8
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
137
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.2 SCALANCE X switches and media converters
The twisted pair extenders can also be installed during operation. No media module is
required for data transfer with this extender module.
For slots 12 and 13 of the twisted pair extender EM495-8, you can use the cover that can
also be used on slots 9 to 11 on the basic device. Two CV490 4x100 covers are supplied
with the twisted pair extender.
● EM496-4:
This has 4 media module slots for the Fast Ethernet media modules MM491-2 and
MM491-2LD so that the SCALANCE X414-3E can be extended by up to 8 optical Fast
Ethernet ports (100 Mbps).
Figure 4-18
Empty media module extender EM496-4 without protective caps for the media module
terminal strips and without cover
Installation of the media module extender and removal or insertion of the media modules is
possible during operation. You require at least one media module for data transfer over this
extender module.
Mixed operation in slots 12 through 15 with MM491-2 and MM491-2LD modules is possible.
The media module plug connectors are protected by protective caps.
Four CV490 2x100 covers are supplied with the twisted media module extender EM496-4.
The media module plug connectors are also protected from damage by protective caps.
See also
Extender modules (Page 328)
138
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3
SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3.1
Versions of the SCALANCE W devices
Overview of the features of the individual SCALANCE W devices
Table 4-8
Overview of the SCALANCE W700 product range
Functionality
Device name
Special features
Access points
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
"Standard" access points
W788-1RR
W788-2RR
Access points with "Rapid
Roaming" functionality
W786-1PRO
W786-2PRO
W786-3PRO
Particularly robust devices for
use in tough mechanical and
climatic environments
W784-1
W784-1RR
Cost-effective access points
with small dimensions and
reduced hardware features,
"RR" with "Rapid Roaming"
W744-1PRO
Client for connecting an end
node
W746-1PRO
Client for up to eight end nodes
*)
W747-1RR
Client for up to eight end nodes
*) with "Rapid Roaming"
functionality
W744-1
W746-1
W747-1
As the "PRO"/"RR" models
however with the hardware of
the W784-1 access points
Clients
The access points can also be configured as clients
*) including one PROFINET I/O client
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
139
1
65
2048 RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO
2
65
2048 RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W788-1RR
1
65
2048 RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W788-2RR
2
65
2048 RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W786-1PRO
1
65
RJ45/
2048 BFOC
internal/
external
SCALANCE
W786-2PRO
2
65
RJ45/
2048 BFOC
internal/
external
SCALANCE 1)
W786-2HPW
2
65
RJ45/
2048 BFOC
internal/
external
SCALANCE
W786-3PRO
3
65
RJ45/
2048 BFOC
external
SCALANCE
W784-1
1
30
2048 RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W784-1RR
1
30
2048 RJ45
external
Figure 4-19
1) Firmware from Hipath Wireless Controller
SNMP
Forced Roaming
Syslog
NAT/PAT (Client-Mode)
STP/RSTP (IEEE 802.1d/w)
VLANs (Multi-SSID)
Client-Mode
C-PLUG
PRESET-PLUG
Interference redundancy
SSH / HTTPS / Admin password
Use in Ex zones
IEEE 802.1x (RADIUS)
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP
WEP / WPA / WPA2
IEEE 802.11i, Hidden SSID
Antennae connections
IEEE 802.11e (QoS/WMMM)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
Conducted interface
Number of addresses
Rapid Roaming
-40°C to +70°C
Rugged design
Resistant to UV
0°C to+60°C
Resistant to saltwater
Resistant to condensation
-20°C to +60°C
Wall mounting
IP protection class
redundant power supply
WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
suitable
140
PoE (Power-over-Ethernet) 802.3af
Number of radio interfaces
Antennae diversity
with HiPath Wireless Controller
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
G_IK10_XX_30183
Functional overview of SCALANCE W access points
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Figure 4-20
Conducted interface
SCALANCE
W744-1PRO
1
65
1
RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
1
65
8
RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W747-1RR
1
65
8
RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W744-1
1
30
1
RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W746-1
1
30
8
RJ45
external
SCALANCE
W747-1
1
30
8
RJ45
external
IWLAN/PB
Link PN IO
1
20
8
PB
Master
external
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
suitable
1) no HTTPS
SNMP
Syslog
NAT/PAT
PRESET-PLUG
PROFINET IO diagnosis
C-PLUG
Use in Ex zones
SSH / HTTPS / Admin password
IEEE 802.1x (RADIUS)
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP
WEP / WPA / WPA2
IEEE 802.11i, Hidden SSID
Antennae connections
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h
Rapid Roaming
Resistant to condensation
Rugged design
0°C to +60°C
-20°C to +60°C
IP protection class
Wall mounting
redundant power supply
PoE (Power-over-Ethernet) 802.3af
Antennae diversity
Number of radio interfaces
Number of addresses
with HiPath Wireless Controller
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
1)
G_IK10_XX_30184
Functional overview of SCALANCE W clients
141
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
Overview of the communications options (schematic)
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
Access Point
SCALANCE
W788-2PRO
Client Module
SCALANCE
W746-1PRO
PROFIBUS
ET 200S
Field PG /
Notebook
S7-300
Mobile diagnostics and services
Figure 4-21
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_30180
SIMATIC S5
with CP 1430
Pocket Loox
Mobile
Panel
277
IWLAN
S7-400 with
CP 443-1
and
CP 443-5
IWLAN product schematic
See also
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components (Page 339)
142
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3.2
Access points W-780
4.3.2.1
SCALANCE W-788
The W-788 product line
Figure 4-22
SCALANCE W788-1PRO access point
The access points are used to set up wireless networks complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h
up to 54 Mbps both at 2.4 GHz and at 5 GHz in a rough industrial environment. Existing
LANs and WLANs can be expanded simply with Industrial Wireless LAN using the
SCALANCE W-780 access points.
All SCALANCE W78x devices are equipped with an Ethernet interface and a wireless LAN
interface (SCALANCE W788-2PRO and SCALANCE W788-2RR: two WLAN interfaces).
This makes them suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W78x forwards data within its transmission range from one node to
another without a connection to wired Ethernet being necessary.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks at
different locations.
● The SCALANCE W78x can be used as a wireless bridge between nodes operating on
two different channels.
Other properties
● High availability and reliable wireless communication for productive operation in the plant
by reserving bandwidth and cyclic monitoring of the connection to the clients,
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
143
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
● Protection of investments by using the industrial standard IEEE 802.11 that is recognized
worldwide,
● Four devices in one: Access point or point-to-point connection at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz,
● Designed for tough everyday industry thanks to robust construction, protection from
vibration and shock and operation at -20 °C to 60 °C,
● Simple installation and flexible power supply with one cable for data and power with
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) complying with IEEE 802.3af,
● High data security to protect from hackers and operator errors with the latest security
mechanisms such as WPA or 128-bit encryption (AES),
● Silicone and halogen-free along with ATEX approval for hazardous areas,
● Simple device replacement in the event of a fault with C-PLUG (configuration plug),
● Simple and fast configuration with installation wizard,
● High degree of system reliability with Totally Integrated Automation (TIA),
● Automatic roaming when the connection to Industrial Ethernet is lost.
Additional functions of the SCALANCE W788-1PRO and SCALANCE W788-2PRO
● Second IEEE 802.11a/b/g/h wireless card with up to 54 Mbps at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
● Redundancy mode (WDS) for extremely reliable point-to-point operation using both
wireless cards
Additional functions of the SCALANCE W788-1RR and SCALANCE W788-2RR
● "Rapid roaming" for extremely fast handover of mobile nodes between different access
points
Table 4-9
Type
Differences between the SCALANCE W-788 access points
Quantity
WLAN interfaces
1
W788-1PRO
W788-2RR
2
1
iPCF mode
(1)
several
X
W788-2PRO
W788-1RR
Number supported
IP nodes
x
x
x
X
x
x
X
x
x
(1) The iPCF mode provides an optimized data throughput and minimum handover times.
See also
SCALANCE W access points and client modules (Page 339)
144
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3.2.2
SCALANCE W-786
Basics: Extremely robust
The three devices SCALANCE W786-1PRO/-2PRO/-3PRO are access points with the same
construction having one, two or three wireless interfaces and standardized electrical RJ-45
or fiber optic cable ports. With the fiber-optic connectors, sections of up to 3000 m can be
covered through areas of high EMI.
The access points are designed for maximum robustness. The important features include:
● All destructible parts are kept inside the product,
● High resistance to dropping and tension compression with impact-resistant and
shockproof housing,
● Salt spray and UV resistant,
● Temperature range in operation: - 40 °C through + 70 °C
● Resistant to dew and condensation,
● Degree of protection: IP65
With these features, the access points are ideal for use outdoors and under difficult
conditions (harbor installation, public places/public transport).
SCALANCE W786-3PRO
Figure 4-23
SCALANCE W-786 access point
The SCALANCE W786-3PRO access point equipped with three wireless modules uses two
modules to provide communication between the access points themselves while the third
wireless module is used to establish the RF field for the nodes, for example an automated
guided vehicle system. This also allows mesh networks to be implemented.
Possible applications of the SCALANCE W-786
A SCALANCE W-786 is equipped with an Ethernet port and up to three wireless LAN ports.
This makes the device suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W-786 forwards data within its transmission range from one node to
another without a connection to wired Ethernet being necessary.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
145
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks.
● The SCALANCE W-786 can be used as a bridge between two cells operating at different
frequencies.
With a SCALANCE W-786 with more than one WLAN interface, you can also implement a
redundant wireless connection to a SCALANCE W78x with at least two WLAN interfaces.
The SCALANCE W-786 is only an access point but it can nevertheless be configured as a
client module using Web-based management. In this case, depending on the selected
model, only one wireless module is available as client.
Properties of the SCALANCE W-786
● The Ethernet interface supports 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps, both in full and half duplex as
well as autocrossing and autopolarity.
● Operating the wireless interface in the frequency bands 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
● The wireless interface is compatible with the standards IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11h,
IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g. In the 802.11a, 802.11h and 802.11g mode, the gross
transmission rate is up to 54 Mbps. In turbo mode, the transmission rate is up to 108
Mbps (not permitted in all countries and modes).
● As an expansion of the 802.11a mode, it is also possible to operate according to the
IEEE 802.11h standard. In 802.11h mode, the procedures Transmit Power Control (TPC)
and Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) are used in the range 5.25 - 5.35 and 5.47 5.75 GHz. In some countries, this allows the frequency subband of 5.47 - 5.725 GHz to
be used outdoors even with a higher transmit power.
TPC is a technique of controlling the transmit power by reducing it to the strength actually
required. With dynamic frequency selection (DFS), the access point searches for primary
users (for example radar) on a randomly selected channel before starting communication.
If signals are found on the channel, this channel is disabled for 30 minutes and the
availability check is repeated on another channel.
● Support of the authentication standards WPA, WPA-PSK, WPA2, WPA2-PSK and
IEEE 802.1x and the encryption methods WEP, AES and TKIP.
● Suitable for inclusion of a RADIUS server for authentication.
● Device-related and application-related monitoring of the wireless connection.
● The interoperability of SCALANCE W786 devices with Wi-Fi devices of other vendors
was tested thoroughly.
Overview table
The following table illustrates the differences between the various variants of the
SCALANCE W786:
146
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
Type
Number Number and type Number of
of WLAN of Ethernet ports internal
antennas
ports
Number of RSMA sockets
for external
antennas
Order no.
W786-1PRO
1
—
6GK5786-1BA602AA0
1 RJ-45
1
(diversity(2))
6GK5786-1BA602AB0 (1)
W786-1PRO
1
1 RJ-45
—
2
6GK5786-1AA602AA0
6GK5786-1AA602AB0 (1)
W786-1PRO
W786-1PRO
W786-2PRO
1
1
2
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
1
(diversity(2))
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
1 RJ-45
2
(diversity(2))
—
6GK5786-1BB602AA0
6GK5786-1BB602AB0 (1)
2
6GK5786-1AB602AA0
6GK5786-1AB602AB0 (1)
—
6GK5786-2BA602AA0
6GK5786-2BA602AB0 (1)
W786-2PRO
2
1 RJ-45
—
4
6GK5786-2AA602AA0
6GK5786-2AA602AB0 (1)
W786-2PRO
W786-2PRO
W786-3PRO
2
2
3
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
2
(diversity(2))
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
1 RJ-45
—
—
6GK5786-2BB602AA0
6GK5786-2BB602AB0 (1)
4
6GK5786-2AB602AA0
6GK5786-2AB602AB0 (1)
6
6GK5786-3AA602AA0
6GK5786-3AA602AB0 (1)
W786-3PRO
3
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
6
6GK5786-3AB602AA0
6GK5786-3AB602AB0 (1)
(1) US variant
(2) There are two internal antennas per WLAN port. The antenna used is always the one that
provides the best possible data transmission (diversity).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
147
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
You will find more information on the configuration parameters of the particular device in the
SCALANCE W786 online help of Web Based Management.
See also
SCALANCE W-786 Access Points (Page 354)
4.3.2.3
SCALANCE W-784
Basics
Figure 4-24
SCALANCE W784 Access Point
SCALANCE W-784 Access Points are produced in two variants:
● SCALANCE W784-1 with an integrated wireless card,
● SCALANCE W784-1RR with an integrated wireless card and additional functions.
The access points can also be operated as clients.
The following table illustrates the differences between the various variants of the
SCALANCE W784:
148
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
Type
Number of
WLAN ports
Number of
Number of
supported IP nodes supported MAC
nodes (3)
(3)
iPCF mode (1)
Order no.
W784-1
1
several
several
No
6GK5784-1AA30-2AA0
W784-1RR
1
several
several
Yes
6GK5784-1AA30-6AA0
6GK5784-1AA30-2AB0 (2)
6GK5784-1AA30-6AB0 (2)
(1) The iPCF mode provides an optimized data throughput and minimum handover times.
(2) US variant
Cost-optimized installation variant
Due to its compact and space-saving design, the SCALANCE W-784 device line is
particularly suitable for applications in which IWLAN is used in the switching cubicle or needs
to be integrated in device or machine.
SCALANCE W-784 access points have an IP30 aluminum housing to provide mechanical
and electromagnetic protection.
They are suitable for industry-related applications in which the environment does not create
any increased demands. An optimum price-performance ratio is achieved because no
unnecessary hardware is used for indoor applications.
Rapid roaming with SCALANCE W784-1RR
The SCALANCE W784-1RR Access Point with rapid roaming , just like the SCALANCE W788 product line, provides an expanded range of functions such as iPCF mode. This allows
applications with real-time requirements and deterministic response times to be implemented
for wireless networks as well -- even during roaming.
This means that wireless PROFINET IO is supported.
See also
Structuring wireless networks (Page 67)
SCALANCE W-788 (Page 143)
PROFINET communication services (Page 23)
SCALANCE W-784 Access Points (Page 369)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
149
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3.3
SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules
SCALANCE W744-1PRO, SCALANCE W746-1PRO and SCALANCE W747-1RR
Figure 4-25
SCALANCE W744-1PRO Client Module
The client modules serve as the wireless interface between a client with an Industrial
Ethernet interface, for example, an S7-300 with CP 343-1 or ET 200pro, and the wireless
network complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h at up to 54 Mbps both at 2.4 GHz and at 5 GHz
in a tough industrial environment.
SCALANCE W-740 clients are equipped with an Ethernet port and a wireless LAN port. This
makes these devices suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W-740 is used to connect a device with an Ethernet port (for example, a
SIMATIC PLC with Industrial Ethernet communications processor) to a WLAN.
● The SCALANCE W-740 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
Depending on the device, one or eight nodes are supported on the wired network
segment.
Other properties
● High availability and reliable wireless communication for productive operation in the plant
by reserving bandwidth and cyclic monitoring of the connection to the clients.
● Protection of investments by using the industrial standard IEEE 802.11 that is recognized
worldwide
● Two devices in one: Operation at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
● Designed for tough everyday industry thanks to robust construction, protection from
vibration and shock and operation at -20 °C to 60 °C
● Simple installation and flexible power supply with one cable for data and power with
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) complying with IEEE 802.3af, even with 24 V DC
● High data security to protect from hackers and operator errors with the latest security
mechanisms such as WPA or 128-bit encryption (AES)
● Silicone and halogen-free along with ATEX approval for hazardous areas
● Simple device replacement in the event of a fault with C-PLUG (configuration plug)
150
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
● Simple and fast configuration with installation wizard
● High degree of system reliability with Totally Integrated Automation
Extra for SCALANCE W746-1PRO and W747-1RR
● Establishment of connections to up to 8 IP devices
Extra for SCALANCE W747-1RR
● "Rapid roaming" for the fast handover of mobile nodes from one RF field to the next in
iPCF mode
Table 4-10
Differences between the SCALANCE W740 devices
Type
Quantity
WLAN interfaces
1
Number supported
IP nodes
2
1
iPCF mode
(1)
several
W744-1PRO
X
x
W746-1PRO
X
x
W747-1RR
X
x
x
(1) The iPCF mode provides an optimized data throughput and minimum handover times.
See also
SCALANCE W access points and client modules (Page 339)
4.3.4
Special functions of SCALANCE W devices
4.3.4.1
Access control: Encryption and authentication
Control of WLAN access
With wireless LANs, the a danger of unwanted eavesdropping or unauthorized intervention in
communication is much greater than with wired communication. Measures to protect the
networks from misuse should therefore be implemented.
the relevant settings can be made with Web Based Management (WBM) or using the
Command Line Interface (CLI).
Authentication
Authentication protects the network from unwanted access. This is normally achieved by an
exchange of keys or certificates between client and server. There are various methods
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
151
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
available and these are described in the operating instructions of the SCALANCE W78x or
SCALANCE W74x.
If no authentication is required, this is possible by configuring the network as an "Open
System".
Encryption
Encryption protects the transferred data from eavesdropping and corruption. Encryption can
only be disabled if open system was selected as the authentication setting. All other security
methods include both authentication and encryption.
Various encryption methods are possible.
If you have selected Open System including encryption or Shared Key as the authentication,
you will need to define a key in the Keys menu.
● WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
A weak, symmetrical stream encryption method with only 40- or 104-bit long keys based
on the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4).
If the WPA-PSK or WPA (RADIUS) authentication method is selected, the following
alternatives are available:
● TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical encryption method with the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4). In contrast to
the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing keys derived from a main key. TKIP can
also recognize corrupted packets.
● AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that further
improves the functions of TKIP.
4.3.4.2
Logging
Information on system events
With WBM, it is possible to read out information on system events and the behavior of the
protocols (IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, SNMP). A log table records the type of event and the time
at which it occurred. The events to be logged can be configured.
Several events that can be recorded are listed below:
● Authentication attempts
With all SCALANCE W devices, a table can be read out with information on successful or
failed authentication attempts.
● Ethernet and WLAN interface
Information on the current settings of the Ethernet interface and the WLAN interface and
their current operating data is displayed.
The statistics of the transferred data of the WLAN interface in particular provide
information on the quality of the wireless connection. A large number of transmission
errors indicates a bad connection.
● Overlap AP
152
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
To evaluate the transmission quality of the SCALANCE W78x operating as the access
point, the Overlap AP function can provide interesting information. This shows all access
points that are visible on the set or adjacent channels (at 2.4 GHz). If entries exist here,
the maximum data throughput of the access point will be restricted.
For optimum data throughput, the set wireless channel must not be used by other access
points. In the 2.4 GHz band (802.11b or 802.11g), there is overlapping of the wireless
channels so that an access point occupies not only the set channel but also the two or
three adjacent channels. Care should therefore be taken the ensure that there is
adequate channel spacing to neighboring access points.
● Signal recorder
All SCALANCE W devices can record or display the signal strength of the connected
access point with the Signal Recorder function. Using this data, areas with an inadequate
signal strength can be located. The Signal Recorder can be particularly advantageous
when the client moves along a fixed path (for example suspension track).
The Signal Recorder can, however, only be controlled using the Command Line Interface.
● List of access points
The list of access points displays all available access points to which a SCALANCE W74x
can establish a wireless connection. To achieve this, the client runs a background scan
(possible only when iPCF mode is enabled). If, for example, the security settings do not
match up, the access point would not be included in the list.
Each wireless LAN has a configurable SSID (Service Set Identifier) to be able to identify
the wireless network uniquely. This is the network name and is configured on the access
point. All clients with access to this access point adopt this SSID. The SSID is displayed
in the list of access points.
● Client list
All the clients logged on at the SCALANCE W78x along with certain additional
information (wireless channel, status etc.) are displayed in the client list. This list is
available only in access point mode of the SCALANCE W78x. The list contains the
following information:
– MAC address of the client
– The wireless interface via which the client is connected
– The signal strength specified in RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator from 0% to
100%); the higher the value, the better the signal
– which encryption is activated
– the current channel over which the client communicates with the SCALANCE W78x
– the current state of the clients
4.3.4.3
SCALANCE W devices as bridges
SCALANCE W as bridge
A bridge is a network component that connects two networks. A bridge is not dependent on
the protocol; management of the data packages is based on the physical address of the
network nodes (MAC address). The SCALANCE W provides bridge functionality because it
handles data exchange between wired and wireless Ethernet.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
153
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
Learning Table
The SCALANCE W saves the information about which MAC address can be reached over
which port in a learning table. Entries in this list are deleted automatically when there is no
further data transfer for the corresponding MAC addresses. The time after which addresses
are deleted if there is no data traffic is set in the Aging Time parameter.
The learning table contains the information about whether a MAC address can be reached
over the wired Ethernet interface or over the wireless interfaces. The SCALANCE W obtains
this information from the active data exchange.
ARP protocol (Address Resolution Protocol)
If the IP address of a node is known, the ARP protocol can be used to find out the
corresponding MAC address.
NAPT (Network Address Port Translation)
In Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) or Port Address Translation (PAT), several
internal source IP addresses are translated into the same external source IP address. To
identify the individual source nodes, the port of the source device is also stored in the
translation list of the NAT gateway and translated for the external address.
If several local clients send a query to the same external destination IP address over the
NAT gateway, the gateway enters its own external source IP address in the header of these
forwarded frames. Since the forwarded frames have the same global source IP address, the
NAT gateway assigns the frames to the clients using different port number.
The NAT/NAPT functions are only available in the SCALANCE W746-1PRO,
SCALANCE W747-1RR and SCALANCE W78x (only in client mode).
NAT/NAPT is possible only on layer 3 of the ISO/OSI reference model. To use the NAT
function, the networks must use the IP protocol. When using the ISO protocol that operates
at layer 2, it is not possible to use NAT.
IP mapping table
It is possible to allow WLAN access to several devices in a wired network via a
SCALANCE W746-1PRO, SCALANCE W747-1RR and SCALANCE W78x operating as
client. This makes it unnecessary to equip every device with its own wireless client. This socalled IP mapping is possible only if the connected devices are addressed only by IP frames.
Communication with a component at the MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) is possible
only if its MAC address is configured on the client.
The client maintains a table (the IP mapping table) with the assignment of MAC address and
IP address to be able to send incoming IP frames to the correct MAC address. In principle,
any number of device is can be reached downstream from a client using IP. The client can
manage up to eight devices. When a new device is added, the oldest entry is deleted from
the table to make space is for the new entry. Since the data throughput of a wireless
connection cannot be increased indefinitely, a maximum of eight devices should be
managed by one client.
154
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
4.3.4.4
Functions for improving performance
iPCF (industrial Point Coordination Function)
iPCF ensures that the entire data traffic of a cell is ordered, controlled by the access point.
By avoiding collisions, the throughput can be optimized even with large numbers of nodes.
iPCF also allows fast cell changes.
The basic principle of iPCF is that the access point scans all nodes in the cell cyclically. The
same time, the scan includes the downlink traffic for this node. In the reply, the node sends
the uplink data. The access point scans a new node at least every 5 ms.
The scan of a node can be seen by all other nodes in the cell. This allows a client to detect
the quality of the link to the access point even when it is not communicating with the access
point itself. If it does not receive a frame from the access point for a certain time, it starts to
search for a new access point.
In iPCF mode, both the search for a new access point and the registration with this new
access point have been optimized in terms of time. This handover time is significantly below
50 ms.
iPCF can be recommended, in particular, when a high data throughput is required despite a
large number of nodes or when extremely short handover times from cell to cell are required.
("Rapid roaming")
WDS (Wireless Distributed System)
In normal operation, the SCALANCE W78x is used as an interface to a wireless network and
communicates with clients. There are, however, situations in which several
SCALANCE W78x devices need to communicate with each other, for example to extend
wireless coverage or to set up a wireless backbone. This mode is possible with WDS.
WDS is available only when the SCALANCE W78x is used in access point mode and iPCF is
not activated.
4.3.4.5
Filter functions
Filter
If a SCALANCE W78x is used as an access point, various filter functions can be set using
the WBM.
MAC filter
If the MAC filter is activated, communication with clients on the Ethernet side is possible only
when their source MAC addresses are entered in the table. As an alternative, there is a
possible setting with which access is denied for all specified MAC addresses. A maximum of
50 MAC addresses can be entered in the table.
With IP mapping of a SCALANCE W78x in client mode, only the MAC address assigned to
this device is relevant, the MAC addresses of the devices downstream from it on the
Ethernet side are irrelevant for filtering.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
155
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
MAC Dir filter; restriction of the data traffic between MAC addresses
It is possible to filter the data traffic intended for wireless clients linked to the SCALANCE
W78x access point. This filter is used to permit a specified MAC address access only to
other specified MAC addresses. You can specify several source addresses or entries for one
destination address. The communication of the destination address is then restricted to
these entries. If a destination address is not entered in the filter, it is not subjected to any
restrictions.
Protocol filter
Without protocol filtering, the SCALANCE W78x processes all data packets regardless of the
protocol being used. To increase data security and to reduce load, it can nevertheless be
useful to prevent communication using certain protocols.
4.3.5
Other active WLAN components
4.3.5.1
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
Figure 4-26
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO gateway module
The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is a compact gateway between Industrial Wireless LAN and
PROFIBUS.
● PROFIBUS master interface for flexible integration of systems from the field level in an
IWLAN wireless infrastructure complying with IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/h at up to 54 Mbps at
2.4 GHz or 5 GHz, for example with SCALANCE W access points
156
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.3 SCALANCE W wireless network components
● PROFINET IO proxy;
Connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to a PROFINET IO controller according to
PROFINET standard:
From the perspective of the IO controller, all DP slaves are treated like IO devices with an
Ethernet interface, in other words, the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is their proxy.
● Can be used flexibly by connecting an IWLAN antenna or alternatively an antenna for
operation with RCoax cable (leaky feeder cable)
● Communication with automation systems in mobile applications, such as automated
guided vehicle systems (AGVS), storage bay conveyor systems or monorail suspension
tracks
● Increased plant availability with wireless and therefore wear-free data transmission to
mobile communications partners, for example the controller of an automated guided
vehicle systems (AGVS)
● Non-touch technology with RCoax as a substitute for slip rings, for example monorail
suspension tracks
● Integration of PROFIBUS field devices in an IWLAN wireless network (protection of
investment)
● Design to match power rail booster ideal for mounting on monorail suspension tracks
along with ET 200S
● Device replacement without PG by using the C-PLUG exhangeable medium to store
configuration, engineering and application data.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
157
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
4.4
SCALANCE S Security Module
4.4.1
Area of application of SCALANCE S
Area of application of SCALANCE S devices
The SCALANCE S devices protect nodes connected to the protected network with a
combination of different security measures. SCALANCE S602 and SCALANCE S612/S613
have different protective functions. Individual devices or even entire automation cells can be
protected by all SCALANCE S devices.
Figure 4-27
SCALANCE S product family
The range of devices is expanded by the SOFTNET Security Client; a sofware application
that allows secure access to automation systems protected by SCALANCE S devices.
SCALANCE S602
Figure 4-28
158
SCALANCE S602
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
The SCALANCE S602 device provides flexible protection without complicated handling with
a combination of different security measures:
● Data espionage;
● Unauthorized access;
SCALANCE S602 is configured with the Security Configuration Tool.
External network
SCALANCE S
SCALANCE S
SCALANCE S
External
External
External
Internal
Internal
Internal
• Firewall
• Router
• NAT/NAPTrouter
IE/PB
Link
ET 200X
HMI
0
1
OP 270
"internal" HMI
Figure 4-29
S7-400
"internal" Automation cell
S7-300
"internal" Automation cell
Setting up a system with SCALANCE S602
The SCALANCE S602 provides the following security functions:
● Firewall
– IP firewall with stateful packet inspection
– Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3 (layer 2 frames;
does not apply to S602 if router mode is used)
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a SCALANCE S are
protected by its firewall.
● Router mode
By operating the SCALANCE S as a router, you separate the internal network from the
external network based on the analysis of the IP addresses. The internal network
detached by SCALANCE S therefore becomes a separate subnet; SCALANCE S must
be addressed explicitly as a router using its IP address.
● Protection for devices and network segments
The firewall protective function can be applied to the operation of single devices, several
devices, or entire network segments.
● No repercussions when included in existing networks
If a SCALANCE S602 is included in bridge mode in an existing network infrastructure,
this does not mean that new settings need to be made for the end devices; in other
words, division into IP subnets is not necessary.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
159
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
SCALANCE S612/S613
Figure 4-30
SCALANCE S612
The security functions of the SCALANCE S612/S613 provide flexible protection against the
following, without system repercussions, protocol-independent (as of Layer 2 according to
IEEE 802.3) and without complicated handling:
● Data espionage
● Data manipulation
● Unauthorized access
The SCALANCE S612 / S613 and SOFTNET Security Client are also configured with the
Security Configuration Tool.
160
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Service computer
with SOFTNET
Security client
External
VPN over
IPSec tunnel
Internal
Host computer
External network
SCALANCE S
• Firewall
• Router
• NAT/NAPT
Router
SCALANCE S
SCALANCE S
External
External
External
Internal
Internal
Internal
IE/PB
Link
ET 200X
HMI
0
1
OP 270
"internal" HMI
Figure 4-31
S7-400
"internal" Automation cell
S7-300
"internal" Automation cell
Setting up a system with SCALANCE S612/S613
The SCALANCE S612/S613 provide the following security functions:
● Firewall
– IP firewall with stateful packet inspection
– Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3 (Layer 2 frames)
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a SCALANCE S are
protected by its firewall.
● Communication made secure by IPSec tunnels
SCALANCE S612 / S613 devices can be configured to form groups. IPSec tunnels are
created between all SCALANCE S612 / S613 devices of a group (VPN, Virtual Private
Network). All internal nodes of this SCALANCE S can communicate securely with each
other through these tunnels.
● Protocol-independent
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
161
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Tunneling includes all Ethernet frames according to IEEE 802.3 (Layer 2 frames). Both IP
and non-IP frames are transmitted through the IPSec tunnel.
● Protection for devices and network segments
The firewall and VPN protective function can be applied to the operation of single
devices, several devices, or entire network segments.
● No repercussions when included in existing networks
Internal network nodes can be found without configuration. If a SCALANCE S612 / S613
is included in an existing network infrastructure, this does not mean that new settings
need to be made for the end devices; in other words, division into IP subnets is not
necessary.
Internal and external network nodes
SCALANCE S602/S612/S613 divides networks into two areas:
● Internal network: Protected areas with the "internal nodes"
Internal nodes are all the nodes secured by a SCALANCE S
.
● External network: Unprotected areas with the "external nodes"
External nodes are all the nodes located outside the protected areas.
The internal network is considered to be secure (trustworthy). Connect an internal network
segment to the external network segments only over SCALANCE S.
There must be no other paths connecting the internal and external network!
Configuration and administration
A CD ships with the SCALANCE S containing not only the manual but also the Security
Configuration Tool.
The Security Configuration Tool is used for the following tasks:
● Configuration of SCALANCE S;
● Configuration of SOFTNET Security Client; (S612/S613)
● Test and diagnostics functions, status displays.
To operate the SCALANCE S, you must download a configuration created with the Security
Configuration Tool. A SCALANCE S configuration includes the IP parameters and the setting
for firewall rules and, if applicable, the setting for IPSec tunnels (S612 / S613) or router
mode (S602).
The Security Configuration Tool has two modes:
● Offline - configuration view
In offline mode, you create the configuration data for the SCALANCE S modules and
SOFTNET Security Clients. Prior to downloading, there must already be a connection to
a SCALANCE S.
● Online
The online mode is used for testing and diagnostics of a SCALANCE S.
162
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Before putting the device into operation, you can first create the entire configuration offline
and then download it. For the first configuration (device with factory settings), use the MAC
address printed on the device.
The Security Configuration Tool provides two operating views in offline mode:
● Standard mode
Standard mode is the default mode in the Security Configuration Tool. It allows fast,
uncomplicated configuration of SCALANCE S operation.
● Advanced mode
Advanced mode provides extended options allowing individual settings for the firewall
rules and security functionality.
In advanced mode, a further distinction must be made between local firewall rules and
global firewall rules for modules:
– Local firewall rules are always assigned to a module. They are configured in the
properties dialog of the modules.
– Global firewall rules can be assigned to several modules at the same time. This option
simplifies configuration in many situations.
Consistency checks are running even while you make the entries in the dialogs. You can
also start a project-wide consistency check for all dialogs at any time. Only consistent project
data can be downloaded.
The saved project and configuration data are protected by encryption both in the project file
and on the SCALANCE S.
On the SCALANCE S, they are in a plug-in exchangeable medium, the C-PLUG. The
C-PLUG an exchangeable medium that allows the device to be replaced in the event of a
fault without requiring a programming device.
Each project can be protected from unauthorized access by assigning passwords.
To ensure security of administrative communication, the settings are made on the
SCALANCE S via an SSL encrypted channel.
The SSL protocol is located between the TCP (OSI layer 4) and the transmission services
(such as HTTP, FTP, IMAP etc.) and is used for a secure transaction. With SSL, the user is
sure that it is connected to the required server (authentication) and that the sensitive data is
transferred over a secure (encrypted) connection.
See also
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 223)
Part C: SCALANCE S security components (Page 383)
4.4.2
SCALANCE S design
SCALANCE S design
The SCALANCE S has a robust metal housing ideal for installation on a DIN rail and an S7
standard rail. It is also possible to install the device directly on a wall in various positions.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
163
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Thanks to their S7-300 housing dimensions, the devices are ideal for integration in an
automation solution with S7-300 components.
Configuration and engineering data is stored in internal non-volatile memory on the
SCALANCE S. A C-PLUG can also be inserted to store this data. The compartment for the
C-PLUG is below a screw cover on the back of the device. If a SCALANCE S needs to be
replaced, the stored data can be transferred simply to the new device.
SCALANCE S devices have the following connectors:
● A 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC)
● A 2-pin terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact
● Two Industrial Ethernet connectors in the form of RJ-45 jacks with standard pinning for
connecting two separate Industrial Ethernet networks
The two Industrial Ethernet connectors, port 1 and port 2, are handled differently by the
SCALANCE S and must not be swapped over when connecting to the communication
network.
● Port 1 - external network
Upper RJ-45 jack, marked red = unprotected network area;
● Port 2 - internal network
lower RJ-45 jack, marked green = network protected by SCALANCE S;If the ports are
reversed, the device loses its protective function.
Both connectors support autonegotiation and the MDI / MDIX autocrossing function.
The advantage of the MDI /MDIX autocrossing function is that straight-through cables can be
used throughout and crossover Ethernet cables are unnecessary. This prevents
malfunctions resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This greatly simplifies
installation.
IE TP cords or IE TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can be connected to the two
IE TP ports. In conjunction with the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect IE FC Standard Cable
and IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, a total cable length of maximum 100 m is possible between two
devices.
164
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
4.4.3
SCALANCE S functions
SCALANCE S functions
The SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612 and SCALANCE S613 differ from each other
mainly in their firmware. The differences are shown in the following table.
Table 4-11
Overview of the functions
Function
S602
S612
S612 V2
S613
S613 V2
Firewall
x
x
x
x
x
NAT/NAPT router
x
-
x
-
x
DHCP server
x
-
x
-
x
Network Syslog
x
-
x
-
x
IPSec tunnel (VPN, Virtual Private
Network)
-
x
x
x
x
Softnet Security Client
-
x
x
x
x
Legend:
x function supported
- function not supported
Firewall
The firewall functionality of SCALANCE S has the task of protecting the internal network
from influences or disturbances from the external network. This means that; depending on
the configuration, only certain previously specified communication relations between network
nodes from the internal network and network nodes from the external network are allowed.
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a SCALANCE S are protected
by its firewall.
The firewall functionality can be configured for the following protocol levels:
● IP firewall with stateful packet inspection;
● Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3; (Layer 2 frames)
Stateful Inspection (also known as Stateful Packet Filter or Dynamic Packet Filter) is a
firewall technology that operates both on the network and at the application layer. The IP
packets are accepted on the network layer, inspected according to their state by an analysis
module and compared with a status table.
For the communication partner, a firewall with stateful inspection appears as a direct cable
that only allows communication according to the rules.
Firewall rules for data traffic in the following directions:
● from the internal to the external network and vice versa;
● from the internal network into an IPSec tunnel and vice versa (S612/S613 only).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
165
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
SCALANCE S in routing mode (S602)
By operating the SCALANCE S602 in routing mode, you separate the internal network from
the external network based on the analysis of the IP addresses. The internal network
separated by SCALANCE S602 therefore becomes a separate subnet.
You have the following options:
● Routing - can be set in both standard and advanced mode
Packets intended for an existing IP address in the subnet (internal or external) are
forwarded. The firewall rules for the direction of transmission also apply.
For this mode, you must also configure an IP address for the internal subnet.
Note: In contrast to the bridge mode of the SCALANCE S, VLAN tags are lost in routing
mode.
● NAT/NAPT routing - can be set in advanced mode
In this mode, the IP addresses are also converted. The IP addresses of the devices in the
internal subnet are mapped to external IP addresses and are therefore not "visible" in the
external network.
For this mode, you configure the address conversion in a list. You assign an external IP
address to an internal address.
Depending on the method you want to use, the following applies to the assignment:
– NAT (Network Address Translation)
The following applies here: Address = IP address
– NAPT (Network Address Port Translation)
The following applies here: Address = IP address + port number
NAT (Network Address Translation) is a routine with which an IP address in a frame is
replaced on the router by another.
With NAPT (Network Address Port Translation), not only an IP address is replaced in the
frame on the router by another address but also the port number by another port number.
By configuring address translation in the "Router Mode" dialog, you operate the SCALANCE
S as NAT/NAPT router. With this technique, the addresses of the nodes in the internal
subnet are not known in the external network; the internal nodes are visible in the external
network only under the external IP addresses defined in the address conversion list (NAT
table and NAPT table) and are therefore protected from direct access.
SCALANCE S as DHCP server (S602)
A DHCP server assigns an IP address to each client throughout the network. DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) in conjunction with a suitable server, allows the
dynamic assignment of an IP address and other configuration parameters to computers in
the network.
SCALANCE S602 can be operated in the internal network as a DHCP server. This allows IP
addresses to be assigned automatically to the devices connected to the internal network.
The IP addresses are assigned either dynamically from an address band you have specified
or you can select a specific IP address for a particular device.
166
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Test, diagnostics, logging, network Syslog (S602)
For test and monitoring purposes, all SCALANCE S devices have various diagnostics and
logging functions. Only the SCALANCE S602, however, supports network Syslog.
● Diagnostic functions
These include various system and status functions that you can use in online mode.
● Logging functions
This involves the recording of system and security events. The events are logged in the
buffer area of the SCALANCE S or a server. These functions can only be assigned
parameters and evaluated when there is a network connection to the selected
SCALANCE S module.
The events to be logged are selected in the log settings for the relevant SCALANCE S
module. The following variants can be configured for logging:
● Local log
In this variant, events are recorded in the local buffers of the SCALANCE S module.
These logs can then be accessed, displayed and archived on the service station in the
online dialog of the Security Configuration Tool.
● Network Syslog (S602)
Network Syslog uses the Syslog server in a network. This records the events in log files
according to the configuration in the log setting for the relevant SCALANCE S module.
SCALANCE S602 can be configured so that it sends Syslog information as a client to a
Syslog server. The Syslog server can be in the internal or external subnet. The
implementation corresponds to RFC 3164.
In both logging procedures, SCALANCE S recognizes the three following types of events:
● Packet filter events (firewall) / packet filter log
The packet filter log records certain packets from the data traffic. Data packets are only
logged if they match a configured packet filter rule (firewall) or to which the basic
protection reacts (corrupt or invalid packets). This is only possible when logging is
enabled for the packet filter rule.
● Audit events / audit log
The audit log automatically logs successive security-relevant events. This would include,
for example, enabling or disabling packet logging or actions when users did not
authenticate themselves correctly with a password.
● System events / system log
The system log automatically logs successive system events, for example the start of a
process. The logging can be scaled based on event classes.
Line diagnostics can also be configured (S602). Line diagnostics returns messages as
soon as the number of bad packets exceeds a selectable limit.
IPsec tunnel (S612/S613)
IPsec (IP Security Protocol) is a layer 3 tunneling protocol and is an expansion/addition to IP.
IPSec (currently), however, only allows encryption of IP packets, does not transfer multicasts
and only supports static routing.
This protocol is used only by SCALANCE S612/S613.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
167
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
In the internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612/S613, the IPsec tunnel provides
the nodes with a secure data connection through the unsecured external network to other
internal networks protected by the SCALANCE S612/S613. Data exchange between devices
through the IPSec tunnel in the VPN (Virtual Private Network) has the following properties:
● Confidentiality
The data exchanged is safe from eavesdropping.
● Integrity
The data exchanged is safe from corruption/counterfeiting.
● Authenticity
Only those with the appropriate rights can set up a tunnel.
With the Security Configuration Tool, the SCALANCE S612/S613 and SOFTNET Security
Client modules that are intended to belong to an internal network can be configured to form
groups or VPNs (Virtual Private Network).
IPSec tunnels are established automatically between all SCALANCE S612/S613 modules
and SOFTNET Security Client modules that belong to the same group. All internal nodes of
this SCALANCE S612/S613 can communicate securely with each other through these
tunnels.
Tunneling includes all Ethernet frames according to IEEE 802.3 (Layer 2 frames). Both IP
and non-IP frames are transmitted through the IPSec tunnel.
4.4.4
SOFTNET Security Client
Function
The SOFTNET Security Client is a software application and an integral part of the industrial
security concept that is used to protect automation systems and secure data exchange
between automation systems:
● Fully integrated intuitive configuration without specialist security knowledge
● A common configuration tool with a common database for SCALANCE S and SOFTNET
Security Client
– Automatic generation of certificates by the Security Configuration Tool
– Automatic learning of the nodes of the internal network and detection of the
SCALANCE S modules in the external network
● Use of the tried-and-tested IPsec mechanisms for setting up and operating VPNs
● Allows secure access by programming devices, PCs and notebooks to automation
systems or automation cells protected by SCALANCE S.
Principle of application
The SOFTNET Security Client PC software provides VPN services on the PG or notebook.
This allows secure IP-based access from a PC/PG to automation systems in subnets
protected by SCALANCE S612/S613.
168
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.4 SCALANCE S Security Module
Area of application - access over VPN
With the SOFTNET Security Client, a PC/PG is configured automatically so that it can
establish IPsec tunnels to one or more SCALANCE S modules.
Thanks to this IPsec tunnel communication, it is possible to access devices or networks
located in an internal network protected by SCALANCE S securely using PG/PC applications
such as NCM Diagnostics or STEP 7.
Remember that you can only use the SOFTNET Security Client in groups with modules in
bridge mode.
Automatic communication over VPN
For your application, it is important that the SOFTNET Security Client automatically detects
access to the IP address of a VPN node. You address the node simply using the IP address
as if it was located in the local subnet to which the PC/PG with the application is attached.
How it works
The SOFTNET Security Client reads in the configuration created with the Security
Configuration Tool and gets the required information on the certificates to be imported from
the file. The root certificate and the private keys are imported and stored on the local PG/PC.
Following this, security settings are made based on the data from the configuration so that
applications can access IP addresses downstream from the SCALANCE S modules.
If a learning mode for the internal nodes or programmable controllers is enabled, the
configuration module first sets a security policy for the secure access to SCALANCE S
modules. The SOFTNET Security Client then addresses the SCALANCE S modules to
obtain the IP addresses of the relevant internal nodes. SOFTNET Security Client enters
these IP addresses in special filter lists belonging to this security policy. Following this,
applications such as STEP 7 can communicate with the programmable controllers over VPN.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
169
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5
OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5.1
Introduction
Basics
The OSMs/ESMs ("Optical Switch Module", "Electrical Switch Module") and ELS ("Electrical
Lean Switch") are an older generation of Industrial Ethernet Switches from SIMATIC NET.
4.5.2
Overview of the functions
Overview of the functions of the individual modules
Type and number of ports
2
4
6
2
8
OSM ITP62
6
2
8
OSM ITP53
5
3
8
OSM
ITP62-LD
6
OSM BC08
2
8
ESM TP40
4
4
ESM TP80
8
8
8
2
2
ELS TP40M
2
2
ELS TP80
8
8
ELS
ELS TP40
suitable
Figure 4-32
170
Layer 3 switching
8
8
ESM ITP80
Office features
(VLAN, RSTP, IGMP, ...)
Digital inputs
Modular design
Gigabit technology
IRT capability
Standby redundancy
Ring redundancy
with RM
C-PLUG
Ring redundancy without RM
PROFINET diagnosis
Diagnosis: Web, SNMP
Local display
(set button)
2
OSM
OSM TP62
POF/ Multi- SinglePCF mode mode
BFOC BFOC
ESM
OSM TP22
Fiber Optic
Fast ITP
Connect
Signal contact
Module type
TPTP
RJ45 M12
2 x 24 V DC
TP / FO
100 Mbit/s
SIMATIC environment
10 / 100 Mbit/s
LED diagnosis
10 / 100 /
1000 Mbit/s
Fast Ethernet
Compact housing
Gigabit Ethernet
Features
G_IK10_XX_10208
OSM/ESM and ELS - overview of the functions
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5.3
Optical and electrical switch module (OSM/ESM)
4.5.3.1
Area of application of OSMs/ESMs
Properties
Figure 4-33
ESM and OSM
The version 2 OSMs/ESMs (Optical/Electrical Switch Modules) allow cost-effective setup of
100 Mbps switched networks.
By creating segments (dividing a network into subnets/segments) and
attaching these segments to an OSM/ESM it is possible to contain the load in existing
networks and to achieve an improvement in network performance.
The OSM/ESM allows the creation of redundant Industrial Ethernet ring structures using
switching technology with fast medium redundancy (reconfiguration time maximum 0.3
seconds).
To create an optical ring, OSMs with two FO ports are required.
To create an electrical ring, ports 7 and 8 of the ESM are interconnected using Industrial
Twisted Pair cables.
The data rate in the ring is 100 Mbps; a maximum of 50 OSMs/ESMs can be used.
In addition to the two ring ports, OSMs/ESMs have a further six ports (optionally D-sub or
RJ45 ports), to which both end devices and network segments can be attached.
Several rings can be interconnected redundantly using the integrated standby function.
There are three ways of signaling errors:
● via the signal contact
● via SNMP (traps)
● by Email
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
171
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
See also
Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM) (Page 389)
4.5.3.2
OSM/ESM functions
Functions
Improving network performance
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) address of the end devices, local
data traffic remains local, only data intended for nodes in another subnet is forwarded by the
OSM or ESM.
Simple network configuration and network expansion
A total network span of up to 150 km (OSM) or 5 km (ESM) presents no problem.
The OSM/ESM stores the data received at the ports and then forwards it to the destination
address. The restriction of the network span resulting from collision detection (CSMA/CD)
ends at the OSM/ESM port.
Error containment
The OSM/ESM limits the propagation of errors in a network to the subnet involved because it
forwards only valid data.
Integration of Ethernet networks operating at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps
The OSM/ESM is suitable for the integration of existing subnets operating at 10 Mbps in Fast
Ethernet networks operating at 100 Mbps.
The OSM/ESM automatically detects the data rate (10 or 100 Mbps) at the twistedpair ports
as well full or half duplex mode.
Fast redundancy in the ring
By interconnecting the ends of an optical bus using OSMs/ESMs to form a ring, reliable
communication can be achieved. With an OSM/ESM in the ring, the integrated redundancy
manager is activated using a DIL switch. The redundancy manager constantly monitors the
operation of the network.
It recognizes the failure of a section in the ring or of an OSM/ESM and activates the
substitute path within a maximum of 0.3 seconds.
Redundant linking of networks.
The standby function integrated in the OSM/ESM allows the redundant linking of two
networks (ring or bus structure). To achieve this, two OSMs/ESMs are set as the standby
master/slave using a DIL switch in one network and their standby ports connected to
172
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
partners in the other network. These partners can be OSMs/ESMs or SCALANCE X
switches.
Priority for forwarding timeofday frames
OSMs/ESMs recognize a SIMATIC NET timeofday frame by its multicast address
09:00:06:01:FF:EF H and forward it with priority over other frames. Giving priority to
forwarding of timeofday frames minimizes their delay time in the network and keeps this
as low as possible regardless of the network load.
Interfaces
All modules have the following connectors and operator controls:
● A 6pin terminal block for connecting the power supply (redundant 24 V DC power supply)
and the floating signal contact.
● A row of LEDs and a selection button to display the mode and status information.
● The StandbySync port is used to synchronize two modules when linking redundant
networks.
● The OSMs/ESMs can be upgraded to new firmware revisions and can be assigned
parameters via the serial port.
The OSM/ESM has a total of eight LAN ports. Depending on the particular variant, they have
the following ports:
● Twistedpair port (D-sub): 10/100Base-TX
9pin D-sub socket (ITP port), automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbps) for
connection of TP cables (max. length 100 m)
● Twistedpair port (RJ-45): 10/100Base-TX
RJ45 jack, automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbps) for connection of TP Cords
(max. length 10 m, in conjunction with FC Outlets RJ45 and Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect cable (patch cabling) up to 100 m)
● Glass FOC: Multimode (MM); 100Base-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of multimode FOC in
environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 3000 m between two OSMs
● Glass FOC: Single mode (SM); 100Base-FX BFOC
2 BFOC sockets per port, data rate 100 Mbps, for connection of single mode FOC in
environments with high EMI levels and for distances up to 26 km between two OSM
ITP62LD modules.
For an overview of the number of interfaces available on the various models, refer to the
Overview of the functions.
See also
Overview of the functions (Page 170)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
173
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5.3.3
Bus (linear) topologies with OSMs/ESMs
Bus (linear) topologies with the OSM/ESM
Linear bus topologies can be implemented with OSMs/ESMs. The maximum cascading
depth is 50 OSMs/ESMs in series.
The entire segment lengths permitted for a port type (TP, FO) can be used.
See also
Linear structure (Page 54)
4.5.3.4
Redundant ring structure with OSMs/ESMs
Redundant ring structure with OSMs
With the aid of an OSM functioning as the redundancy manager (RM), the ends of an optical
bus made up of OSMs can be connected together to form a redundant optical ring. The
OSMs are connected together using ports 7 and 8.
The RM monitors the line of OSMs connected to it at ports 7 and 8 in both directions. If it
detects a break on the line, it interconnects the ends of the line to reestablish a functioning
linear bus configuration. A maximum of 50 OSMs are permitted in an optical ring. This
strategy achieves a reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 seconds.
The RM mode is activated on the OSM using a DIP switch.
174
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
S7-400
S7-300
OSM
OSM
OSM
OSM
10/100 Mbit/s
LWL
OSM
OSM
100 Mbit/s
OSM
OSM
PC
OSM
OSM
OSM
OSM
G_IK10_XX_10059
OSM
OSM
10/100
Mbit/s
Figure 4-34
Redundant ring structure with OSMs (switched network)
Redundant ring structure with ESMs
A redundant electrical ring can also be set up with ESMs. To achieve this, the ESMs are
connected together using ports 7 and 8. One device must be switched to the redundancy
manager mode. With ESMs and a maximum of 50 devices in the ring, a reconfiguration time
of less than 0.3 s can also be achieved.
Note
The reconfiguration time of less than 0.3 s can only be achieved when no components (for
example switches from other vendors) other than SCALANCE X switches OSMs or ESMs
are used in the redundant ring.
In a ring, one device and one device only must operate in the redundancy manager mode.
End devices or complete network segments can be attached to ports 1 - 6 of an OSM/ESM
operating in the RM mode.
See also
Optical redundant ring structure (Page 62)
Redundant ring structure (Page 59)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
175
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5.3.5
Redundant linking of subnets using the OSM/ESM
Redundant linking of subnets using the OSM/ESM
Using an OSM/ESM, fast, redundant links between two Ethernet subnets or networks can be
implemented. These networks can, for example, consist of redundant OSM/ESM rings.
The redundant link as shown in the figure below is established on separate paths via the two
TP ports (default port 1) of an OSM/ESM pair. The standbysync ports of both OSMs/ESMs
must be connected using an ITP XP standard cable 9/9 with a maximum length of 40 m.
How standby redundancy works
One of the two OSMs/ESMs must be set to the standby mode by setting the DIP switch. This
OSM/ESM forms the redundant link that only transfers data when the other path (main link)
fails. The OSM/ESM in the standby mode receives information about the state of the main
link via the synchronization connection between the standbysync ports. If the main link fails,
the redundant OSM/ESM activates the standby link within 0.3 seconds.
If the problem is eliminated on the main link, this also causes a signal on the synchronization
connection. The main link is enabled again and the standby link disabled.
Faults managed by the redundancy function
The following problems on the main link activate the standby link:
● Main OSM/ESM without power
● Cable break at a cascaded port of the main OSM/ESM
● Defective or deactivated partner on a cascaded port of the main OSM/SM.
Port assignment in OSM/ESM standby mode
On the standby master and standby slave, only port 1 (standby port) can be used for the link
to the neighboring ring. Ports 2 to 6 can be used just as normal OSM ports.
The port assignment is the default setting of an OSM when shipped.
With network management, it is also possible to configure ports other than port 1 or several
ports as standby ports (see also OSM/ESM Network Management Manual).
Simultaneous standby and redundancy manager operation
A standby master or standby slave can act as a redundancy manager in a redundant ring at
the same time.
4.5.3.6
OSM/ESM network management
Functions
Network management provides the following functions:
176
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
● Password protected login for administrators (write and read rights) and users (read rights
only),
● Reading out version and status information
● Setting the message and standby mask and address information,
● Fixed parameter settings for ports and filter tables,
● Output of statistical information,
● Diagnostics of data traffic,
● Selectable mirror port,
● Downloading new firmware versions via the network.
If problems occur in the network, the OSM/ESM can send error messages (traps)
automatically to a network management system or Emails to a network administrator.
Remote monitoring
Remote monitoring (RMON) provides the following functions:
The OSM/ESM is capable of visualizing statistical information according to the RMON
Standards 1 to 3. These include, for example, error statistics maintained for each port
separately.
WebBased management functions
The management level of the OSM is accessible using a web browser. Masks, filters, and
ports can be configured. Diagnostics of the device and the ports is possible via the Web.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
177
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
Figure 4-35
178
Network management with Web browser
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
4.5.4
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
4.5.4.1
Area of application of the ELS
Overview
Figure 4-36
ELS TP40M
The Electrical Lean Switch ELS product generation allows powerful Fast Ethernet networks
with a small number of interfaces to be set up in industry. Nodes are connected solely over
twisted-pair interfaces, in other words, electrical interfaces.
Figure 4-37
ELS TP80
The Electrical Lean Switches (ELS) allow the cost-effective installation of Industrial Ethernet
bus or star structures with switching functionality. The ELS are designed for installation in a
switching cubicle.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
179
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
The following ELS variants are available:
● ELS TP40
● ELS TP40M
● ELS TP80
Compared with the other devices, the ELS TP40M has the following extra features:
● Additional integrated Web server
● SNMP access
● E-mail function for remote diagnostics and signaling over the network
See also
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS) (Page 412)
4.5.4.2
ELS functions
General
The ELS TP devices are plug-and-play devices that require no settings when they are put
into operation.
All ELS TP devices provide the following functions:
● Autonegotiation,
● MDI/MDIX autocrossover function
Additional functions of the ELS TP40M
The ELS TP40M alone has the following functions.
Diagnostics functions:
● Display of the current state of the port (link up/down, transmission rate and duplicity)
● Display of the MAC address, the IP address, the subnet mask, the gateway, and the type
of configuration (manual or using DHCP).
● Trap and E-mail monitoring unit: Cold start events and status changes at the port can be
sent to E-mail and/or trap recipients,
● Display of statistical values of errors that have occurred on the network and that were
detected by the ELS (CRC, defective frames, collisions etc.).
● Display of the system up time and the hardware and firmware version.
Configuration functions:
● Configuration of the IP address, the subnet mask and the gateway using the Primary
Setup Tool (PST),
● Reset of all values to the factory settings using the PST.
● Configuration of E-mail and trap recipients.
180
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Active components and supported topologies
4.5 OSM/ESM and ELS
● Configuration of individual events that will trigger the sending of E-mails and/or traps.
The ELS TP40M includes integrated Web-Based Management; in other words, it can be
operated using an Internet browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape). The
modules are operated using a Java applet stored on the ELS that is loaded by the browser.
For the browser to be able to load the applet, a Java virtual machine (JVM) is required. As of
Version 6.x, Netscape provides a JVM integrated in the browser that can be used for Web
Based Management. For the Microsoft Internet Explorer, the JVM Plugin must be installed
separately. On the CD supplied with the ELS TP40M, you will find a suitable JVM from Sun
Microsystems. The latest JVM versions can also be downloaded free from the Web pages of
Sun Microsystems.
4.5.4.3
Topologies with the ELS
Topologies with the ELS
The ELS TP40 and ELS TP40M are optimized for installation in 10/100 Mbps
Industrial Ethernet networks with a linear structure but they can also be used as a single
start point. The ELS TP40 themselves are interconnected using IE FC 2x2 cables. These are
connected to the devices using insulation piercing contacts. One or two nodes or one node
and a programming device can be connected via two RJ-45 jacks.
The ELS TP80 also allows a star network to be set up with up to 8 nodes via RJ-45 jacks or
the expansion of the number of ports for OSM/ESM applications.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
181
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.1
5
Product overview of "passive IE components"
Table of available passive IE components
See following page.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
183
IE devices
with SC RJ
connection
Figure 5-1
184
G_IK10_XX_10007
o p t i c a l
e l e c t r i c a l
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE TP Cord 4x2
ITP cables
ITP connecting
cables
Hybrid cables
Energy cables
Fiber-optic (FO)
cables
50/125 µm
Fiber-optic cables
62,5/125 µm
PCF FO cables
200/230 µm
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15
IE TP XP Cord 9/9
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45
ITP Standard Cable
ITP FRNC Cable
ITP Standard Cable 9/15
ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15
ITP FRNC Cable 9/15
Hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0,34
Energy Cable 2 x 0,75
FO Standard Cable GP
FO Trailing Cable
FO Trailing Cable GP
FO Ground Cable
Fiber Optic Standard Cable
INDOOR Fiber Optic Indoor Cable
Flexible Fiber Optic Trailing Cable
SIENOPYR Marine Duplex Fiber Optic Cable
PCF Standard Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable
Prefabricated fiber-optic cables
with SC RJ connector
POF Standard Cable GP
POF Trailing Cable
Prefabricated fiber-optic cables
with SC connector
Fiber-optic cables
with
BFOC connector
Fiber-optic cables
with
SC connector
POF FO cables
980/1000 µm
Fiber-optic cables
with
SC RJ connector
IE FC Cable 2x2
IE FC Standard Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Torsion Cable GP 2x2
IE FC Trailing Cable 2x2
IE FC Marine Cable 2x2
Prefabricated fiber-optic cables
with BFOC connector
IE FC Cable 4x2
IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.1 Product overview of "passive IE components"
Industrial Ethernet (IE)
IE FC RJ45
Modular
Outlet
IE FC Outlet
RJ45
IE FC RJ45
Plug
90/145/180
M12A coded
power
connector B coded
IP67 hybrid
connector
ITP connector
9-pin/
15-pin
IE devices
with Sub-D
connection
Devices
with RJ45
connection
BFOC
connector
IE devices
with BFOC
connection
SC
connector
IE devices
with SC
connection
SC RJ
connector
Product overview of "passive IE components"
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.2 Contacts for special cables and special lengths
5.2
Contacts for special cables and special lengths
Contacts for special cables and special lengths
If you require special cables and special lengths of the cable types, please contact:
Jürgen Hertlein
SIEMENS A&D SE PS 1
E-mail: juergen.hertlein@siemens.com
Tel.: + + 49 (911) 750-4465
Telefax: + 49 (911) 750-9991
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
185
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
5.3
Components for electrical networks
5.3.1
Overview of twisted-pair cables
Properties
This section describes the technical properties of the Industrial Twisted Pair and twisted-pair
cables. The unassembled cables are described first. Following this, the available assembled
cables will be introduced.
Fast Connect (FC) Twisted Pair
For structured cabling within a factory, the FC twistedpair cabling system is ideal. Using the
FastConnect (FC) system for Industrial Ethernet, structured cabling from the office
environment has been further developed for use in the factory.
FastConnect cables can be assembled fast and simply on site. This means that RJ-45
cabling technology, an existing standard, is also available in a version suitable for industry
and making such cabling possible in an industrial environment.
With the IE RJ-45 Plug and FastConnect cables, runs of up to 100 m cable length are
possible without patching.
Twisted Pair Cord
The TP Cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling system. It
is intended for use in switching cubicles. It is used mainly as a patch cable.
The maximum total length of the two TP Cords in a point-to-point connection is 10 m.
ITP ("Industrial Twisted Pair" with D-sub connectors)
To establish a direct link between nodes and network components, the ITP Standard Cable
preassembled with robust D-sub male connectors is available.
This allows a cable length of up to 100 m without patch cables.
Standards
The EN 50173 standard describes the structured cabling of office buildings. IEC 24702
describes the structured building networking of an industrial building. The description of the
automation system within an industrial building can be found in IEC 61918 and the
communications-specific part of PROFINET is in IEC 61784-5-3.
See also Appendix (Page 583)
Structured cabling
Structured cabling describes the cabling of building complexes for information technology
purposes regardless of the applications used. A building is divided into the following areas:
186
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
● Primary area
(interconnection of buildings of a campus)
● Secondary area
(interconnection between floors of a building)
● Tertiary area (information technology connectors for the end devices of a floor)
TP Cords can be used as patch cables between devices and on patch panels.
The structured cabling that can be implemented with the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect
system complies with the tertiary cabling described in EN 50173.
Active distributor,
e.g. SCALANCE X-400
Terminal device,
e.g. S7-300
Patch cable,
e.g. IE TP Cord
Connection cable,
e.g. IE TP Cord
A+B < 10 m
A+B+C < 100 m
Connection socket,
e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45
IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet
Connection socket,
e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45
IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet
Figure 5-2
Structured cabling to EN 50173
Table 5-1
Cables for structured cabling to EN 50173
G_IK10_XX_10061
Installation cable, e. g.
FC TP Standard
Cable 4 x 2
Uses
SIMATIC NET cable
Maximum length
Patch cable
IE TP Cord
A+C max. 10 m
Tertiary cable
IE FC standard cable GP
B max. 90 m
IE FC flexible cable GP
B max. 75 m
IE FC torsion cable GP
B max. 45 m
IE FC trailing cable GP
B max. 75 m
IE FC trailing cable
B max. 75 m
IE FC marine cable
B max. 75 m
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP
B max. 75 m
Note
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (IE FC Standard Cable) are intended for indoor use.
Twisted Pair cables (TP Cord) are intended for use in switching cubicles.
See also
Components for electrical networks (Page 423)
Appendix (Page 583)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
187
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
5.3.2
Individual cable types
5.3.2.1
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet
General
When installing Industrial Ethernet (IE) networks, there are various cable types available for
different applications.
The Industrial Ethernet FC cables listed should be used.
The symmetrical radial structure of the FastConnect (FC) twistedpair cables allows the use
of the IE FC stripping tool. This allows fast and straightforward assembly of the IE FC RJ45 Outlet or IE FC RJ-45 Plug.
See also
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet (Page 428)
5.3.2.2
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet
General
To operate 1 gigabit Ethernet networks, 8-wire cables are required. The available
FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cable is category 6 (CAT6) according to the
international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173. This cable is also suitable for
lower data rates such as 100 Mbps.
The symmetrical radial structure of the FastConnect (FC) twistedpair (TP) cable allows the
use of the IE FC stripping tool. This allows fast and straightforward assembly of the
IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet.
Note: The user may need to readjust the IE FC stripping tool 6GK1 901-1GA00 for the 4x2
cable variant. The two setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be
opened by approximately half a turn.
Cabling with 8-wire cables is always advisable if there is any plan to change over to 1 gigabit
in the foreseeable future.
See also
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet (Page 438)
5.3.2.3
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet)
General
The IE TP 2 x 2 Cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling
system. It is intended for use in switching cubicles. The cable is now only used as an adapter
cable to connect devices with a D-sub port to devices with an RJ45 port.
188
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
The cable is suitable for a transmission rate of 10/100 Mbps.
A maximum of 10 m of twistedpair cord can be used between two devices. With structured
cabling using two IE TP Cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables together.
The TP interface converter is used to connect an end device with an RJ45 port to the
Industrial Twisted Pair cabling system with a D-sub port.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 423)
5.3.2.4
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet)
General
The IE TP 4x2 Cord is used to connect end devices to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling
system. It is intended for use in switching cubicles. This cable is only available
preassembled.
The cable is suitable for a transmission rate of 10/100/1000 Mbps.
A maximum of 10 m of twistedpair cord can be used between two devices. With structured
cabling using two IE TP Cords, this length is the maximum for both patch cables together.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet) (Page 426)
5.3.2.5
IE Hybrid Cable
General
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 in conjunction with the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet is the
ideal solution when a device such as the SCALANCE W needs to be supplied with power at
the same time. The cable includes
● 2 x 2 wires for data transmission according to CAT 5e
● 2 x 2 wires each with a core diameter of 0.76 mm to supply power
Power supply according to the Power over Ethernet standard (PoE) can also be carried on
the power wires; in other words up to 57 V.
Application
With the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with power
insert, distant nodes such as the SCALANCE W can be supplied with data (10/100 Mbps)
and power at the same time. Having both data and power on one cable leads to a significant
reduction of installation costs.
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 is halogen-free for universal use in industry and office. It is
UV resistant to UL 1581 Sec. 1200.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
189
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
The maximum cable length between the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet and the SCALANCE W
access point is 80 m with an additional 6 m patch cable to the Modular Outlet. An IP67
hybrid cable connector is recommended for connection to the SCALANCE W.
See also
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 445)
5.3.2.6
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP)
General
Two cable types are used for the Industrial Twisted Pair cable (ITP cable):
● ITP Standard Cable for Industrial Ethernet
● ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet
Compared with the standard cable, the FRNC cable has a jacket of thermoplastic copolymer
that is extremely flame retardant and halogen-free. The electrical properties are largely the
same.
Both ITP cables can be ordered either in meters or preassembled with connectors. They
allow connection of a single end device or the connection of two active network components
(SCALANCE X / OSM / ESM).
See also
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP) (Page 448)
5.3.3
Preassembled cable types
5.3.3.1
Preassembled twisted-pair cords
General
The preassembled Twisted Pair Cords (patch cables) can be used inside switching cubicles
and for transmission links up to 10 m. Compared with the Industrial Twisted Pair cables, the
Twisted Pair Cords are much thinner and more flexible. The connectors are standardized
RJ-45 plugs and D-sub male connectors for connection to Industrial Twisted Pair
components.
The IE TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 and IE TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45 have 4 x 2 wires. They
therefore comply with category 6 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173 and are therefore suitable for 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet.
The other cables have 2 x 2 wires. They comply with Cat 5e and are suitable for 10/100
Mbps Ethernet.
190
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Application
The following schematics show the available cables and their applications.
Network
component
NC
S7-400
S7-300
Prepared IE TP Cord 2x2
PC
Plug
Network
component
Plug
Sub-D-9
RJ45
NC
Sub-D-9
RJ45
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord 9/9
Sub-D-15
RJ45
NC
Sub-D-9
RJ45
S7-400
S7-300
Plug
Network
component
Plug
S7-400
S7-300
Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2
PC
Figure 5-3
Sub-D-15
RJ45
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45
IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15
IE TP XP Standard Cable 15/15
Sub-D-15
RJ45
Plug
G_IK10_XX_10109
Plug
Use of TP Cord for direct connection of individual components (10/100 Mbps)
From top to bottom:
● Direct connection between an end device and a network component
● Direct connection between two network components
● Direct connection between two end devices
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
191
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Network component e.g. OSM
Plug
Plug
NC
Sub-D-9
RJ45
IE FC Outlet RJ45
IE FC TP Cable 2x2
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
Network component
NC
Sub-D-9
RJ45
IE TP Cord 2x2
S7-300
Sub-D-15
RJ45
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
S7-300
IE FC Outlet RJ45
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
IE FC TP Cable 2x2
Sub-D-9
RJ45
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE FC TP Cable 2x2
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (Type A)
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (Type B)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC Torsion Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2x2 (Type B)
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
Plug
NC
IE FC Outlet RJ45
PC
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (Type A)
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (Type B)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC Torsion Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2x2 (Type B)
Plug
Sub-D-15
RJ45
IE TP Cord RJ45/15
G_IK10_XX_10110
Plug
If at least one network component with autocrossover function is used,
prepared TP cords can also be used.
Figure 5-4
Sub-D-15
RJ45
IE TP Cord 2x2
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (Type A)
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (Type B)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC Torsion Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (Type C)
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2x2 (Type B)
IE TP Cord 9/RJ45
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45
Plug
S7-400
PC
Use of TP Cord as a patch cable with IE FC Outlets RJ-45 (10/100 Mbps)
From top to bottom:
● Structured cabling between an end device and a network component
● Structured cabling between two network components
● Structured cabling between two end devices
192
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Network
component
NC
NC
prepared IE TP Cord 4x2
e.g. SCALANCE X-400
Network
component
e.g. SCALANCE X-400
G_IK10_XX_10092
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
If components not supporting Autocrossing are used it is required
to use IE TP XP Cord between two network components or two terminals.
Figure 5-5
Use of TP Cord for direct connection of individual components (10/100/1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE X-400
PC
IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet
IE FC TP Cable 4x2
Insert 1GE
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
IE TP Cord
Insert 1GE
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2
IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45
G_IK10_XX_10091
IE TP Cord
If components not supporting Autocrossing are used it is required
to use IE TP XP Cord between two network components or two terminals.
Figure 5-6
Use of TP Cord as a patch cable with IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlets (10/100/1000 Mbps)
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair cords (Page 451)
5.3.3.2
IE M12 connecting cable
General
The preassembled IE M12 Connecting Cables are ideally suited for connecting Industrial
Ethernet nodes (for example SCALANCE X208PRO) with degree of protection IP65. They
are suitable for transmission rates of 10/100 Mbps. These is IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP
with D-coded M12 male connectors at both ends.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
193
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Figure 5-7
IE M12 connecting cable
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 197)
IE M12 connecting cable (Page 458)
5.3.3.3
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables
General
The preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables use the robust 9 or 15-pin D-sub male
connectors on an ITP standard cable. These cables have the supplement "ITP". These
cables require end devices and network components with Industrial Twisted Pair ports.
The connection between an active network component and the end device is established
with an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with a 9pin (network component end) and a 15pin D-sub
connector at the end device end.
To connect two active network components, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with two 9pin Dsub connectors is used. The two wire pairs are crossed over. Crossover cables have the
additional "XP" marking (crossed pairs).
To connect two end devices to each other, an Industrial Twisted Pair cable with two 15pin Dsub connectors is used. The wire pairs are again crossed over and this cable also has the
additional "XP" marking.
194
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Network component
NK
S7-400
S7-300
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Connectors
Connectors
Sub-D-9
Sub-D-15
ITP Standard
Cable 9/15
Network component
NK
Network component
Konfektionierte Industrial Twisted Pair-Leitung
Connectors
Sub-D-9
NK
Connectors
ITP XP Standard
Cable 9/9
Sub-D-9
S7-400
S7-400
S7-300
S7-300
Preassembled crossover
Industrial Twisted Pair cable
Connectors
Sub-D-15
Figure 5-8
Connectors
ITP XP Standard
Cable 15/15
Sub-D-15
Use of preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables for direct connection of individual components
See also
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables (Page 459)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
195
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
5.3.4
Twisted pair interface converters
General
Interface converters are used to connect an end device with an RJ-45 port to the Industrial
Twisted Pair cabling system.
At one end, the interface converter has an RJ-45 plug to connect the end device, at the other
end it has a 15-pin D-sub female connector with slide locking mechanism. Plug and female
connector are connected by a short TP Cord. This converts the RJ-45 jack of the end device
into an Industrial Twisted Pair end device interface. Double-shielded ITP standard cables up
to 90 min length can be connected to the 15-pin D-sub female connector. These cables can
also be installed in areas with strong EMI.
See also
Twisted pair interface converters (Page 457)
5.3.5
Cable connectors
5.3.5.1
IE FC RJ-45 Plug
General
Figure 5-9
IE FC RJ-45 Plug with IE FC TP Standard Cable
IE FC RJ-45 Plugs are compact and robust cable connectors that can be used both in an
industrial environment as well as in the office world. The connectors have a robust metal
casing suitable for industry that provides ideal protection from interference for the data
communication.
The cable connectors allow point-to-point connections (10/100 Mbps) to be implemented for
Industrial Ethernet between two end devices/network components up to 100 m without patch
cables.
The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ-45 Plugs allow simple and fast assembly of the
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect installation cables 2 x 2 (4-wire twisted-pair cables) on site.
196
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool for preparing the end of a cable (stripping
the jacket and shield in one step) allows simple stripping and fast fitting of the cable
connector to the cable. Since the cable connector does not have any loose parts, it can be
fitted in difficult conditions.
See also
IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 463)
5.3.5.2
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug
General
The IP 67 hybrid cable connector is used to connect a SCALANCE W-700 to Industrial
Ethernet. In conjunction with the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet with power insert, power can also be supplied to the target device alongside the data
transmission. The connection of a power supply for Power over Ethernet (PoE) is possible.
The IP 67 hybrid cable connector cannot be ordered separately. It ships with the
SCALANCE W-700.
See also
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug (Page 466)
5.3.5.3
IE M12 Plug PRO
General
The IE M12 Plug PRO is a 4-pin, D-coded M12 male connector with degree of protection
IP67. It is particularly suitable for use with devices with the relevant degree of protection
such as the SCALANCE X208PRO. It can fitted to cables with an outer diameter of 6 mm to
8 mm. It is suitable for assembling IE FC cables with a transmission rate of up to 100 Mbps.
This allows the IE FastConnect Stripping Tool to be used. By using the insulation piercing
technique, assembly is simple and fast and requires no additional special tools.
With IE FC cable 2 x 2 and IE M12 Plug PRO, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is
permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
Figure 5-10
IE M12 Plug PRO
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
197
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
5.3.5.4
IP65 plug
Overview
The previous section IE M12 Plug PRO introduced the IE M12 Plug PRO and the
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug. These plugs are used to connect IE FC cables to IP65 devices. Power
can also be supplied via the IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug.
For devices such as the SCALANCE X208PRO, other cable connectors are required:
● The Power M12 Cable Connector PRO (female), a 4-pin M12 cable connector, A-coded,
to supply the 24 V operating voltage; the power cable 2 x 0.75 is recommended as the
cable.
● The Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO (female), a 5-pin M12 cable
connector, B-coded, for the signaling contact.
See also
IP65 plug (Page 467)
5.3.6
Outlets
5.3.6.1
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
General
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 is used to implement the transition from the robust
Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables used in the industrial environment to preassembled TP
Cord cables using an RJ45 jack. When used with FC TP cables and preassembled TP
Cords, the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 saves considerable time during installation.
198
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Figure 5-11
TP Cord with FC Outlet RJ-45 (top)
Color coding prevents errors when connecting the wires. The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet
RJ45 corresponds to category 5e of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173.
Design
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 consists of a robust metal casing. The screw-on
cover ensures reliable shield contact and strain relief for the Industrial Ethernet FC cable.
The Outlet RJ45 has the following terminals:
● 4 insulationpiercing contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC cable (contacts
colorcoded)
● RJ45 jack with dust protection cap for connecting various TP Cord cables.
See also
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 (Page 474)
5.3.6.2
IE FC Modular Outlet
General
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet is designed for use in industry and is suitable for
transmission links with data rates of 10/100/1000 Mbps according to ISO/IEC 11801 and
EN 50173.
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet basic module can be equipped with various optional inserts
without changing the wiring (permanent wiring):
● Insert 2 FE: Two Fast Ethernet connections for attachment of two 10/100 Mbps end
devices/network components
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
199
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.3 Components for electrical networks
Figure 5-12
Modular Outlet 2xLAN
● Insert 1 GE: One gigabit Ethernet connection for attaching a 10/100/1000 Mbps end
device/network component
Figure 5-13
Insert 1GE
● Power insert: For power supply
Figure 5-14
Modular outlet with power insert
See also
IE FC Modular Outlet (Page 470)
200
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
5.4
Components for optical networks
5.4.1
Optical transmission technology
Fiber-optic cables (FO cables)
On fiber-optic cables (FO) data is transmitted by modulating electromagnetic waves in the
range of visible and invisible light. The materials used include the following:
● For high-quality FO cables: Glass fibers
● For robust FO cables: Plastic; known as POF cables
● PCF fibers with a glass core and plastic fiber cladding
A distinction is made between
● Step-index fibers and
● Graded-index fibers
Basically, the step-index fiber consists of a glass fiber surrounded by a glass tube with
different refractive indices. The light used to transmit the message propagates only through
the glass fiber. Simple step-index fibers have a relatively large diameter. The light launched
into the glass fiber is refracted (and is no longer available for message transmission) or
reflected so that it remains inside the glass fiber. Beams that are reflected often on their way
to the receiver travel a greater distance than those that are reflected less often or not at all.
This results in different delays. At the receiver, the edges of the coded signal become
blurred. As a result, the maximum transmittable frequency and the maximum length of the
fiber-optic cable are restricted.
Monomode FO cables have a very thin glass fiber with a diameter of around 10 µm and a
cladding diameter 125 µm. Since the core diameter is only is only approximately 6 times the
wavelength, the light propagates without blurring the edges of the coded light.
Graded-index fibers consist of many layers with the refractive index reducing from the center
of the core towards the outside. The speed of propagation increases as the refractive index
reduces. This means that the differences in the delay times on the possible paths through
the FO cable caused by reflection are much less than in step-index fibers. The blurring of the
edges of the coded light is therefore also significantly reduced so that cable lengths of
several kilometers are possible at 100 Mbps depending on the wavelength of the light.
One point to note is that as the fiber diameter reduces, the more important it is to assemble
connectors precisely. The actual maximum length possible with a FO cable also depends on
the power loss budget resulting from the transmit and receive elements used and the
attenuation of the FO cable itself including the coupling loss between the sending and
receiving elements.
Only the fiber-optic cables intended for SIMATIC NET for Industrial Ethernet are described
below. These are all graded-index fibers. The various FO cable types allow solutions for
connecting the components with each other adapted to the operating and environmental
conditions.
Compared with electrical cables, fiber-optic cables have the following advantages:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
201
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
Advantages
● Electrical isolation of nodes and segments
● No grounding problems,
● No shield currents,
● Transmission path immune to external electromagnetic noise,
● No lightning protection required,
● No noise emission along the transmission path,
● Light weight,
● Depending on the fiber type, cables several kilometers long can be used even at higher
transmission rates.
Point-to-point link
Fiber-optic technology only allows the implementation of point-to-point links; in other words,
one transmitter is connected to only one receiver. The transmission path between two nodes
therefore requires two fibers (one for each transmission direction). All SIMATIC NET
standard fiber-optic cables are therefore designed as duplex cables.
Fiber diameter: 50 µm and 62.5 µm fibers
Previously not only 50 µm fibers Properties of glass FO cable 50/125 µm (Page 202) but also
62.5 µm fibers Overview of the glass fiber-optic cables 62.5/125 μm (Page 204) were
widespread. In the meantime, 50 µm fibers have improved considerably and their values are
in some cases better than the previous 62.5 µm fibers. For this reason, 50 µm fibers are now
used in the SIMATIC NET standard FO cables. Only the SIENOPYR marine duplex FO
cable still uses 62.5 µm fibers.
See also
Overview of plastic FO cable and PCF FO cable (Page 205)
5.4.2
Glass FO cables
5.4.2.1
Properties of glass FO cable 50/125 µm
Designed for Industry
SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables (FO) are available in various designs allowing
optimum adaptation to a wide range of applications.
Application
FO Standard Cable
202
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
● Universal cable for use indoors and outdoors
FO Ground Cable
● Longitudinally and laterally watertight cable for use outdoors with non-metallic rodent
protection for direct underground installation
FO Trailing Cable
● Cable for use in drag chains and for high mechanical strain, PUR outer jacket, no UL
approval
FO Trailing Cable GP
● Cable for use in drag chains and for lower mechanical strain, PVC outer jacket, UL
approval
SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
● Hybrid cable consisting of two fibers and two additional copper wires
for fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities
SIMATIC NET standard fibers
In glass fiber-optic cables, SIMATIC NET uses a fiber with 50 µm core diameter as its
standard fiber. SIMATIC NET bus components are ideally matched to these standard fibers
allowing large distances to be covered while keeping the configuration rules simple.
Simple configuration
All the descriptions and operating instructions for SIMATIC NET bus components contain
information about the distances that can be covered with the standard fibers described
above. You can configure your optical network without complicated calculations using simple
limit values (refer to chapter 3 "Network structures and network configuration").
See also
Glass FO cables 50/125 (Page 481)
5.4.2.2
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm
Application
The FO Ground Cable is a longitudinally watertight and laterally water protected cable with
non-metallic rodent protection that is suitable for direct installation underground. It is suitable
for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850 nm and 1300
nm.
Properties
The FO Ground Cable has the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
203
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
● Suitable for direct connector assembly
It is available with and without connectors as follows:
● In meters up to 3000 m,
● With 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 300 m,
● With 4 SC connectors in lengths up to 300 m,
● With 2 SC duplex connectors.
5.4.2.3
Overview of the glass fiber-optic cables 62.5/125 μm
Designed for Industry
SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables (FO) are available in various designs allowing
optimum adaptation to a wide range of applications.
Application
Fiber-optic standard cable
● Universal cable for use indoors and outdoors
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
● halogen-free, can be walked on, flame retardant FO cable
for use in buildings
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
● for situations in which the cable must be capable of moving
SIENOPYR Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
● Hybrid cable consisting of two fibers and two additional copper wires
for fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities
SIMATIC NET standard fibers
In glass fiber-optic cables, SIMATIC NET uses a fiber with 62.5 µm core diameter as its
standard fiber. SIMATIC NET bus components are ideally matched to these standard fibers
allowing large distances to be covered while keeping the configuration rules simple.
Simple configuration
All the descriptions and operating instructions for SIMATIC NET bus components contain
information about the distances that can be covered with the standard fibers described
above. You can configure your optical network without complicated calculations using simple
limit values (refer to chapter 3 "Network structures and network configuration").
See also
Glass FO cables 62.5/125 (Page 492)
204
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
5.4.2.4
Note on using preassembled glass FO cables
General
Special tools are necessary to fit connectors to glass FO cables. This should also only be
performed by trained personnel. If users keep to certain rules when handling and laying
preassembled glass FO cables, they can be very useful if the users do not have the
personnel required for such tasks.
You will find information on handling fiber-optic cables in the sections Connecting fiber-optic
cables and Laying bus cables.
When connecting cables with BFOC connectors to the devices, remember that these must
be crossed over so that there is a connection between transmitter and receiver and receiver
and transmitter. If the cables have SC connectors, this is guaranteed by the connector
coding.
See also
Connecting fiber-optic cables (Page 559)
Laying bus cables (Page 574)
Preassembled FO cables (Page 508)
5.4.3
Overview of plastic FO cable and PCF FO cable
Properties of plastic FO cables
Plastic fibers have several properties that differ from those of glass fibers. For example, the
maximum possible cable length is shorter with glass fibers due to the higher attenuation and
the bandwidth is smaller.
Plastic fibers are, however, easier to work with than glass fibers and on-site connector
assembly is more straightforward.
In particular when networking production cell solutions, such as when using the ET200, the
maximum length of plastic cables is often not required. In such situations, plastic fibers may
the ideal solution.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
205
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
Figure 5-15
Plastic optical fiber (POF) and plastic cladded fiber (PCF) cables
Plastic FO cable also known as POF cable (Plastic Optical Fiber) can be installed with a
cable length of up to 50 m. In SIMATIC NET, POF cables with a fiber diameter of 980 µm are
used. PCF and POF cables work at a light wavelength of 650 nm.
If the cable length is not adequate, PCF (Plastic Cladded Fiber) can be used instead. The
maximum length of a PCF cable is 100 m.
Examples of application
PROFIBUS module
e.g. CP 5613 FO
CP 342-5 FO
(IM 153-2 FO, IM 151, BM 143 DESINA)
PROFIBUS PCF - or plastic FO cable
Figure 5-16
206
G_IK10_XX_50061
FO cable with
simplex connector
Connection example: Optical networking of two components with plastic FO cable (here in a PROFIBUS
installation)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
SIMATIC S7-300
with CP 343-1
SCALANCE
X101-1POF
media converter
Control & Monitoring
ET 200pro
POF FO
POF FO
IE Standard Cable
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
POF FO
POF FO
Industrial Ethernet
SCALANCE
X204IRT
SCALANCE
X202-2P IRT
SCALANCE
X200-4P IRT
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
G_IK10_XX_10176
PROFINET
ET 200S with
IM 151-3 PN FO
Figure 5-17
Application example: Setup of a network using POF cables in Industrial Ethernet
Available plastic FO cables
The following variants of plastic FO cables are currently available:
Cable
Installation
Use
Jacket
POF standard cable GP Stationary
Indoor
PVC
POF trailing cable
Indoor
PUR
PCF standard cable GP Stationary
As trailing cable
Indoors and outdoors
PVC
PCF trailing cable
As trailing cable
Indoors and outdoors
PUR
PCF trailing cable GP
As trailing cable
Indoors and outdoors
PVC
See also
Plastic FO cable POF and PCF (Page 497)
5.4.4
Special cables
Special cables
In addition to SIMATIC NET standard FO cables described in the IK PI catalog, there are
numerous special cables and installation accessories available. Listing all would exceed the
scope of both the catalog and this manual.
The technical specifications of the SIMATIC NET bus components contains the SIMATIC
NET FO cables used as standard cables for connections and also lists additional fiber types
that can be used.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
207
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.4 Components for optical networks
Note
Remember that the distances that can be covered change if you use fibers with a different
core diameter or attenuation properties from those listed as standard in the operating
instructions.
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 185)
208
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
5.5
Components for wireless networks
5.5.1
Antennas
Antennas
Figure 5-18
Antennas for SCALANCE W
Antennas for use with SCALANCE W devices are distinguished by the following
characteristics:
● Omnidirectional antennas emit and receive in all directions; Directional antennas cover
greater distances and increase the link quality in environments with multiple sources of
EMI interference but provide no significant area coverage.
● Detached antennas increase the reliability of wireless connections by optimizing the
transmission and reception conditions; connection to access point/client over cable;
antennas directly on the device allow a compact, low-maintenance design.
● Frequency band: The antennas can communicate in the 2.4 GHz band, in the 5 GHz
band or in both bands.
● RCoax leaky feeder cables can be used in special environments as an alternative to
conventional antennas.
● Antenna diversity stabilizes wireless links
The individual antenna types are as follows:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
209
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
ANT795-4MR, ANT795-4MS
Figure 5-19
ANT795-4MR
Figure 5-20
ANT795-4MS
With these omnidirectional antennas, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz in
the vertical plane of the antenna. Both antennas have a beamwidth of 30° and an antenna
again of 4 dB. They are mounted directly on the R-SMA connector on the SCALANCE W
housing.
The ANT795-4MR antenna can only be turned around one axis and is normally used due to
its IP65 degree of protection primarily with the SCALANCE W-788 access points and the
SCALANCE W744-1PRO, W746-1PRO and W747-1PRO client modules. Two of these
antennas ship with these access points or client modules.
The ANT795-4MS has an additional joint and is therefore suitable for the SCALANCE W7841 and W784-1RR access points and the SCALANCE W744-1, W746-1 and W747-1 client
modules.
210
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
ANT792-6MN, ANT793-6MN
Figure 5-21
ANT792-6MN
Figure 5-22
ANT793-6MN
With these omnidirectional antennas, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz (ANT792-6MN)
and 5 GHz (ANT793-6MN) in the vertical plane of the antenna. The antennas have an
antenna gain of 6 dB or 5 dB respectively.
The N-Connect connector is used that can be connected to a SCALANCE W over a variety
of IWLAN extension cables. Both antennas ship with a mounting bracket that allows wall or
mast mounting. This makes the antennas particularly suitable, for example, for illuminating a
space with a mounting mast in the middle.
The TI795-1R terminator also ships with both antennas. This is required to terminate the
radio waves of the second antenna connector on a SCALANCE W when only one antenna is
being used.
ANT795-6MN, Antenna Mounting Tool (ANT795-6MN)
Figure 5-23
ANT795-6MN
With this omnidirectional antenna, the RF field is concentrated at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz in the
vertical plane of the antenna. The antenna has an antenna gain of 6 dB or 8 dB.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
211
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
The N-Connect connector is used that can be connected to a SCALANCE W over a variety
of IWLAN extension cables. The antenna characteristics are such that transmission
properties are good even directly below or above the antenna. It is designed for roof
installation but can be installed on or under a roof and is therefore suitable for mobile
application, for example in an automated guided vehicle system. If it needs to be installed on
ceiling below a roof, the optional antenna mounting tool (ANT795-6MN) is used.
ANT795-6DN
Figure 5-24
ANT795-6DN
This wide-angled antenna aligns the RF field at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
The antenna is suitable, for example, for illuminating the space located in front of a wall.
ANT792-8DN, ANT793-8DN
Figure 5-25
ANT792-8DN
Figure 5-26
ANT793-8DN
These antennas genuinely radiate the RF field in a specific direction at 2.4 GHz (ANT7928DN) or 5 GHZ (ANT793-8DN). Due to the restricted beamwidth, the RF field is concentrated
into a narrow cone. This achieves high passive gain and long distances.
With their high passive gain, the antennas are suitable for covering long distances with
IWLAN.
212
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
See also
Antennas (Page 511)
5.5.2
IWLAN RCoax Cable (leaky feeder cable)
IWLAN RCoax Cable
Figure 5-27
RCoax cable
IWLAN RCoax leaky feeder cables when operated as the antennas of SCALANCE W access
points, provide a reliable wireless connection in areas in which it would be difficult to install
traditional antenna technology.
The defined cone-shaped RF field that develops along the leaky feeder cable allows reliable
transmission of data in all systems in which the mobile nodes move on defined paths. The
IWLAN RCoax cable is therefore not subjected to wear and tear and requires little
maintenance.
● Reliable illumination in areas otherwise difficult for wireless, for example in cranes, highbay storage stackers/retrievers, transfer lines, tunnels or monorail suspension tracks
● Generation of a wedge-shaped RF field
● Low interference or mutual disturbance with low transmit power
● Cost saving by direct replacement slip rings and trailing cable
● Highly flexible application
See also
RCoax leaky feeder cable (Page 519)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
213
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
5.5.3
Various WLAN accessories
Antenna cables
Figure 5-28
Antenna ANT 793-8 DR with extension cable
● Antennas are fitted with antenna cables and R-SMA connectors; as an option, an
extension cable is available,
● All cables provide flame protections, are chemically resilient and silicone free. ("FRNC"
cable)
Termination Impedance TI795-1R
● The cable terminator TI795-1R must be used with SCALANCE W-700 products if only
one antenna is installed.
Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO
● The lightning protector LP798-1PRO expands the possible uses of separate antennas
used outdoors,
● Flexible industrial use due to protection against water and dust with class of protection
IP65,
● Operation outdoors with expanded temperature range,
● This accessory is suitable for use with SCALANCE W-700 including national approvals.
Power Supply PS791-1PRO
See alsoIP65 power supply (Page 224)
See also
Antennas (Page 511)
Various WLAN accessories (Page 521)
214
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
5.5.4
SINEMA E
5.5.4.1
SINEMA E
SINEMA E as planning and configuration tool
SINEMA E (SIMATIC Network Manager Engineering) is software for planning, simulating,
configuring and measuring (site survey) for Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) applications
complying with the 802.11 a/b/g standard.
It is used for the following purposes:
● Visualization of IWLAN networks, for example according to coverage, data transfer rate,
signal/noise ratio and overlapping taking into account environmental and device
characteristics
● Prognosis/simulation of proposed RF fields and recording of existing RF fields (site
survey)
● Configuration of individual and multiple devices as well as upload/download of IWLAN
device parameters
● Integrated and expandable catalog entries for WLAN devices, antennas and wireless
obstacles as well as standard graphics formats for importing floor plans
● Report function for documenting the configured IWLAN environment and device
properties
Figure 5-29
Sinema Lean 2006 screenshot
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
215
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
A whole range of customer benefits
SINEMA E brings many benefits to the customer in all phases of network planning and
commissioning:
● Simplified planning and configuration of IWLAN applications with the aid of simulation
functions
– to detect the number, location and parameters of the IWLAN devices
– for industrial and office environment including outdoor areas
– for specialists and first time users, for example creating offers with the Sales Wizard
● Clear and detailed visualization of wireless and device properties
● Minimization of the configuration and commissioning effort with grouped configuration
and online functions and support during initial commissioning
● Reduction of configuration errors with integrated validation function
● Reports for creating offers, device installation instructions and plant documentation
● Flexible and open architecture for the integration of further WLAN devices (according to
802.11 a/b/g/h standard) for modeling and simulation of obstacles that could influence the
RF illumination
Versions "Lean" and "Standard", along with "PowerPack" license
SINEMA E is marketed in a "Lean" and a "Standard" version. Compared with the "Lean"
version, the "Standard" version provides an expanded range of functions.
Along with the two versions, a "PowerPack" license is also available with which a "Light"
version can be upgraded to the "Standard" version.
See also
Expanded functions of SINEMA E Standard (Page 221)
SINEMA E (Page 522)
5.5.4.2
SINEMA E application
Use of SINEMA E in the planning and configuration phase
SINEMA E is the generic term for the engineering of network products such as
SCALANCE W.
The SINEMA E software application includes the following functions for engineering IWLAN
networks:
● Offer phase
– Simple Sales Wizard
– Report on creation of offer
● Planning, simulation and configuration
– Planning and simulation of a WLAN Infrastructure
216
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
– Simultaneous configuration of device groups
– Acquisition of an existing RF field (site survey)
– Creation of a report with installation rules
● Central detection, upload/download and modification of device parameters
● Report for completion documentation
● Measures if faults occur or service is necessary
Engineering
Customer
Installation
personnel
Planner
Configuration
engineer
Offline
Figure 5-30
Schematic representation of the use of SINEMA E
5.5.4.3
Range of functions of SINEMA E
Installation
& Comissioning
Commissioning
engineer
Maintenance
& Service
Service
Online
G_IK10_XX_10135
Technical clarification
& Planning
Modeling the environment and the RF field
To achieve the simulation, the user models the environment within which the WLAN will be
set up. This includes walls, windows, doors, ceilings and flooring of the building for which the
thickness, composition etc. can be taken into account as well as larger obstacles such as
machines.
In a later step, the active components are placed in position; in other words, the access
points and clients within the modeled office or industrial environment.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
217
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
Figure 5-31
SINEMA E in the modeling phase
Above, you can see a screenshot of the SINEMA E application showing the modeling of a
building. The simulation acquires a three-dimensional arrangement of the building parts and
equipment as well as the active and passive components of the wireless network.
Devices, antennas and wireless obstacles can be selected from a component catalog and
adapted to the actual situation. The simulation that follows soon provides the configuration
engineer with a picture of the signal qualities that can be expected in individual configured
areas. An integrated consistency check ensures the validity of the configuration and reduces
possible errors before the network is installed.
With the graphic user interface, even complex environments can be simulated with little
effort.
Simulation of the resulting RF field
Based on the access points and clients distributed in the modeled building by the user,
SINEMA E simulates the resulting RF field and displays it graphically so that the user can
see at a glance whether the illumination and data rate of the wireless cell are adequate. The
frequency of the transmitters used and the characteristics of the antennas or RCoax cables
are also taken into account.
218
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
Figure 5-32
SINEMA E simulation
In the area configured in the previous step, the expected signal strengths are calculated for
each point and represented in a pseudo color image.
Three-dimensional evaluation of indoor and outdoor areas
The simulation is three-dimensional and therefore allows evaluation of the effects of ceilings
and floorings and the transmission characteristics over several floors. SINEMA E is not
restricted to the interior of office or industrial premises but can also be used in outdoor areas.
This is relevant, for example, to evaluate possible wireless leaks outside the buildings or the
connection between two buildings.
Product catalogs
This simulation is made particularly user-friendly by the comprehensive product catalogs
supplied with the tool. These allow simulated hardware based on SIEMENS own products
and third-party products to be included in the simulation. Modules shown with a precise list of
their technical characteristics are simply taken from the catalog and placed in the simulated
building.
The catalog can also be expanded by the customer to include new models and
functionalities.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
219
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
In the simulation mode shown above, a building floorplan can be seen with RF fields
generated by several access points. The signal strengths achieved at various points in the
room are shown by different color intensities.
Note how the geometry of the room (for example the corridor bottom center) is also taken
into account and included in the realistic prognosis.
Report module
A report module is integrated in both the simulation and diagnostics functions of both
SINEMA E versions, Lean and Standard.
Based on the configuration that develops through the stages of simulation, this generates a
parts list including the ordering data of all the devices used from the module catalog. This
simplifies the creation of an offer, planning and cost predictions for a project.
When setting up the wireless network, the coordinates at which the individual devices should
be installed can also be taken from the report. This simplifies fast, problem-free and reliable
installation of the individual components.
The report also contains the simulations performed in the form of informative graphics
containing the signal strength and data rate along with interference. This report is therefore
also the acceptance document for commissioning and can be used in questions involving
warranties and service situations.
Figure 5-33
SINEMA E screenshot of the generated report
Other properties
Using the materials/regions builder, a further component of the SINEMA E module, complex
obstacles and other building parts (such as large transformers or turbines) can be measured
as they stand, stored and then used in the current or future simulations.
220
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.5 Components for wireless networks
This avoids unnecessary repetitions of time-consuming measurements and allows userspecific libraries of wireless obstacles and their precise geometries and characteristics to be
created.
5.5.4.4
Expanded functions of SINEMA E Standard
"Lean" and "Standard"
The functions described above are available in both SINEMA E versions. The standard
version also has two useful additional functions: "Autoplacement" and the "Site Survey".
"Autoplacement": Automatic optimization
After configuring the environment, a further step is available in which SINEMA E itself
attempts to find the optimum location for the access points: Once configuration of the
building geometry is completed and the areas of the building that must at all events be
covered by the WLAN have been defined, SINEMA E then calculates the optimum (and
resource-saving) positioning of the individual access points.
"Site Survey" mode: Analysis and diagnostics of existing networks
SINEMA E is also a complete tool for measuring (site survey) existing WLAN networks
according to the 802.11 a/b/g/h standard. This means that WLAN signals can be measured
at the start of planning or for verification during commissioning and then later for
troubleshooting during maintenance or service work.
The software stores and links received measured values of the WLAN adapter in use along
with the coordinates in the floorplan. Depending on the application, various methods are
available for measurement and evaluation. With the standard measurement method, the
WLAN adapter used for the measurement is always connected to a previously defined
WLAN (SSID). Properties such as speed, signal strength and roaming behavior of this
existing client-access point connection are recorded. With continuous measurements along a
path, it is adequate to simply set a start and end point; all other measurement coordinates
are then determined automatically by the software. This allows the WLAN connection
properties of a client to be measured quickly even when large areas are involved.
Using the Advanced measurement method, on the other hand, all WLAN signals in the
environment are scanned to acquire signals from known and unknown devices. To analyze
and display the measurement results, there is a wide range of filter functions available, such
as minimum, maximum, average value etc.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
221
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.6 Accessories
5.6
Accessories
5.6.1
Accessories for SCALANCE X-400 switches
Covers, and dummy cover, terminal set
The protective caps for the media module terminal strips and the covers must be fitted in all
slots that do not contain media modules.
For slots for twisted pair (9 through 11), the covers are recommended to protect the RJ-45
jacks.
Due to the varying availability of of RJ-45 connectors and the resulting numbers of LEDs and
their significance, there are covers available with different labeling to suit the situation.
Table 5-2
Overview of the use of covers and dummy cover
Slot
Labeling for /
Cover suitable for
CV490 2x1000
SCALANCE X414-3E: 5
Gigabit ports
CV490 2x100
SCALANCE X414-3E: 6, 7
Media module slots
Extender EM496-4: 12 - 15
CV490 4x100
SCALANCE X414-3E: 9 - 11
Fast Ethernet port
Extender EM495-8: 12, 13
CV490 COVER
SCALANCE X414-3E: 8
Slot without function
The various covers cannot be ordered individually. They are available as a complete set for
a SCALANCE X414-3E. There is also a terminal set consisting of ten 4-wire and ten five-wire
terminals.
Table 5-3
Order numbers for accessories
Order number
222
SCALANCE X400 cover set
6GK5490-0AA00-0AA2
Terminal set
6GK5498-0AA00-0AA0
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.6 Accessories
5.6.2
C-PLUG configuration memory
Application
Figure 5-34
C-PLUG
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration and project
engineering data of the basic device. This means that the configuration data remains
available if the basic device is replaced. It is therefore used when the replacement of
network components or communications modules needs to be quick if a fault occurs without
needing to configure a replacement and without needing specialist personnel. Downtimes of
network segments and connected Industrial Ethernet nodes can therefore be minimized if a
fault occurs.
It can be used in all SIMATIC NET products with a C-PLUG slot.
Design
The C-PLUG has degree of protection IP20. With IP65 components, the degree of protection
is retained because the C-PLUG is installed inside the protected housing.
Power is supplied by the host device. The C-PLUG retains all data when the power is turned
off.
Function
If an empty CPLUG (as supplied) is inserted in a SIMATIC NET component, the device
automatically backs up the configuration data during startup. Changes to the configuration
during operation are also saved on the C-PLUG without any additional operator intervention
being necessary.
When an unconfigured device starts up, it automatically adopts the configuration data of an
inserted C-PLUG assuming the data was written by a compatible device type.
The C-PLUG can also be used to store application data such as documentation or Web
pages.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
223
Part B: Passive components and accessories
5.6 Accessories
Diagnostics
Incorrect use of the C-PLUG, such as inserting a C-PLUG containing the configuration of a
different device group or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are indicated by diagnostics
mechanisms of the host device (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, Web based Management, etc.).
See also
C-PLUG configuration memory (Page 525)
5.6.3
IP65 power supply
Power supply PS791-1PRO
● AC/DC power supply unit for input voltages from 90 to
265 V AC,
● Water and dust protection with robust metal housing to IP65,
● Can be used with all SCALANCE products,
● Redundant power supply possible.
To connect the M12 socket X2 with the SCALANCE products X788 and X744 and the
SCALANCE X208PRO, the M12 power cord supplied with the products can be used. As an
alternative, a user-assembled cable can also be used.
Figure 5-35
PS791-1PRO
See also
IP65 power supply (Page 526)
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
224
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C:
Target group and content
This part is intended for configuration and commissioning engineers.
Here, you will find a wide range of reference data that you will require during the planning
and commissioning of a system. The document contains dimension drawings, specifications,
certifications and much more helpful information on SIMATIC NET components that will
support you when setting up an actual plant or network.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
225
Validity of the information
Note
Please note that the data provided here is only intended to give you general information.
Our products are in constant development and the specifications and reference data may
change in the course of this development. Despite all our efforts, it is possible that individual
items of information in this networking manual are out of date.
You will find the continuously updated data in the product manuals of the individual devices.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
227
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media
converters
6.1
Basic information on the use of SCALANCE X devices
6.1.1
General information on the use of SCALANCE X devices
6
Note the following information and warnings relating to the SCALANCE X switches and media
converters:
Note
The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge test on power supply lines are met only when a
Blitzductor VT AD 24V type no. 918 402 is used
Manufacturer:
DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG Hans Dehn Str.1 Postfach 1640 D-92306 Neumarkt,
Germany
WARNING
When used under hazardous conditions (zone 2), the devices of the SCALANCE X-100/X200/X-300 and X-400 product lines must be installed in an enclosure.
To comply with ATEX100a (EN 60079-15), this enclosure must meet the requirements of at
least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD: DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A
FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
229
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.1 Basic information on the use of SCALANCE X devices
6.1.2
General information on approvals and certifications
Please note the following:
Note
The approvals specified for the individual products apply only when the corresponding mark
is shown on the product. You can check which of the various approvals have been granted
for your product by the markings on the type plate.
CE mark
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet switches meet the requirements and aims
of the following EU directives and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) for
programmable logic controllers published in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
● Directive 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● Directive 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage
Limits" (Low Voltage Equipment Directive)
● Directive 94/9/EEC Equipment and Protective Systems intended for Use in Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres (Explosion Protection Directive).
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available for the responsible authorities according to
the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industrielle Kommunikation SIMATIC NET
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg, Germany
6.1.3
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices:
Some of the connector pin assignments are the same on all SCALANCE X devices with the
following exceptions:
● The SCALANCE X005 does not have a signaling contact and has a single non-redundant
power supply connector.
● On the SCALANCE X-100 media converters, the terminal blocks for the signaling contact
and power supply connectors are arranged directly one above the other. The pin
assignment is, however, as described below.
● Due to its higher degree of protection, the SCALANCE X208PRO is equipped with M12
sockets.
230
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.1 Basic information on the use of SCALANCE X devices
● On the SCALANCE X-400, the signaling contact is connected by contacts MK1 and MK2
on the 4-pin connector on the rear terminal block on the power module.
You should also refer to the operating instructions of the individual devices in question.
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connectors:
On the SCALANCE devices, the IE TP ports are implemented as RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X
assignment (Medium Dependent Interface–Autocrossover) of a network component.
Figure 6-1
RJ-45 jack
Table 6-1
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 jack
Pin number
Pin assignment of 10/100BaseTX
Pin assignment of the gigabit Ethernet
ports
Pin 8
n. c.
3-
Pin 7
n. c.
3+
Pin 6
TD-
1-
Pin 5
n. c.
2-
Pin 4
n. c.
2+
Pin 3
TD+
1+
Pin 2
RD-
0-
Pin 1
RD+
0+
Pin assignment of the power supply connectors:
The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block. The power supply can
be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. If there is a voltage difference greater
than 1 V, there is no load distribution between the two external power supplies. When a
redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the higher output voltage
supplies the SCALANCE alone. The power supply is connected over a high resistance with
the enclosure to allow an ungrounded set up. The two power supplies are non-floating.
Figure 6-2
IP30 power supply
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
231
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.1 Basic information on the use of SCALANCE X devices
Table 6-2
Pin assignment of the power supply terminals
Pin number
Assignment
Pin 1
L1+ 24 V DC
Pin 2
M1
Pin 3
M2
Pin 4
L2+ 24 V DC
Pin assignment of the signaling contact:
When present, the signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block. The
signaling contact (relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be
signaled by breaking the contact.
Figure 6-3
IP30 signaling contact
Table 6-3
Pin assignment of the signaling contact terminal
Pin number
Assignment
Pin 1
F1
Pin 2
F2
● The connection is different for SCALANCE X-400 devices: The connection is made here
by contacts MK1 and MK2 on the 4-pin connector to the rear terminal block on the power
module.
Among other things, the following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port,
● The failure of one of the two redundant power supplies (if present),
● C-PLUG faults and linkdown.
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message. The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is
eliminated or until the current status is applied as the new desired status using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
Other error/fault messages are listed in the sections on functions in the descriptions of the
SCALANCE devices.
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
232
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.2 SCALANCE X005
6.2
SCALANCE X005
6.2.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X005
Certifications:
Table 6-4
Approvals
SCALANCE X005
c-UL-us
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
C-Tick
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE
EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
6.2.2
Installation instructions and guidelines X005
Installation as for SCALANCE X-100
The switches are installed in the same way as the SCALANCE X-100 devices.
Note the following however
● The shape factors of the devices differ,
● The signaling contact connector is not present on the SCALANCE X005 switches,
● Power is supplied via a non-redundant two-pin terminal block.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
233
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.2 SCALANCE X005
6.2.3
Operator control and display elements of the X005
Display elements
The status of the power supply is indicated by a green LED. It is lit green when an operating
voltage between 18 V and 32 V is connected.
The status of the communication ports is indicated by five LEDs, one per port:
Table 6-5
Port status display
Status
Meaning
Ports 1 to 5: LED lit green
TP link exists, no data reception
Ports 1 to 5: LED lit yellow
TP link exists, data received at TP port
Ports 1 to 5: LED flashes yellow
Test phase during power on
Operator controls
The SCALANCE X005 does not have any operator controls.
6.2.4
Connector pin assignments X005
Connector pin assignments
The connector pin assignment of the SCALANCE X005 is the same as on the other
SCALANCE-X devices with two exceptions:
● The SCALANCE X005 does not have a signaling contact,
● The power supply is not redundant but in the form of a two-pin plug-in terminal block.
(See below)
Connecting the power supply
Figure 6-4
234
Pin assignment of the two-pin plug-in terminal block for the power supply
Pin
Assignment
1
M (chassis ground)
2
L+ (+18 -- +32 V DC)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.2 SCALANCE X005
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
6.2.5
Dimension drawing X005
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X005
Figure 6-5
Drilling template SCALANCE X005
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
235
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.2 SCALANCE X005
6.2.6
X005 technical specifications
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X005
Table 6-6
Electrical data
SCALANCE X005
Power supply
24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
2W
Current consumption at 24 V DC
80 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
PTC resettable fuse (0.5 A / 60 V)
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
375 seconds
Emission
EN 61000-6-4
EN 61000-6-3 with snap ferrite on the cables
Manufacturer: Würth Elektronik - type: 742 711 31
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-7
167.1 years
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X005
Operating temperature
0 °C - +65 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Table 6-8
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X005
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
40 x 125 x 124
Weight
550 g
Installation options
Table 6-9
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Order number
SCALANCE X005
236
•
•
•
6GK5005-0BA00-1AA3
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
6.3
SCALANCE X-100
6.3.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-100
Certifications
SCALANCE X104-2, SCALANCE X106-1 and SCALANCE X108
c-UL-us
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM
FM 3611
C-Tick
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
ATEX Zone 2
EN 50021 1)
1) For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
6.3.2
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines
6.3.2.1
Installation on a DIN rail
Assembly
Install the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line on a 35 mm rail
according to DIN EN 50022.
1. Place the upper catch of the device over the top of the DIN rail and then push in the lower
part of the device against the rail until it clips into place.
2. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
4. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
237
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-6
SCALANCE X-100 installation on a DIN rail (35 mm)
Uninstalling
To remove the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line from the
DIN rail:
1. First disconnect all connected cables.
2. Use a screwdriver to release the lower DIN rail catch of the device and pull the lower part
of the device away from the rail.
Figure 6-7
6.3.2.2
SCALANCE X-100 removing from a DIN rail (35 mm)
Installation on a standard rail
Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
1. Place the upper guide at the top of the SCALANCE housing in the S7 standard rail.
2. Screw the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line to the
underside of the S7 standard rail.
3. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
4. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
5. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
238
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-8
SCALANCE X-100 installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
Uninstalling
To remove Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line from the
SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail:
1. First disconnect all connected cables.
2. Loosen the device screws on the underside of the S7 standard rail and lift the device
away from the rail.
6.3.2.3
Wall mounting
Wall mounting
1. For wall mounting, use suitable mounting fittings for the wall
(for example, for a concrete wall, four plugs 6 mm diameter and 30 mm long, 4 screws
3.5 mm diameter and 40 mm long).
2. Connect the electrical cable connecting cables.
3. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
4. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the device.
For more exact dimensions, please refer to the section "Dimension drawings".
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the device.
6.3.2.4
Grounding
Installation on a DIN rail
The device is grounded over the DIN rail.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
239
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
S7 standard rail
The device is grounded over its rear panel and the neck of the screw.
Wall mounting
The device is grounded by the securing screw in the unpainted hole.
Please note that the SCALANCE X-100 must be grounded over one securing screw with
minimum resistance.
If a device of the SCALANCE X100 product line is mounted on a non-conducting base, a
grounding cable must be installed. The grounding cable is not supplied with the device.
Connect the paint-free surface of the device to the nearest grounding point using the
grounding cable.
6.3.3
X-100 operator controls and displays
6.3.3.1
SCALANCE X-100 button
What does the button do?
Using the button, you can display and modify the set fault mask. The fault mask setting is
retained after device power off/on.
After pressing and holding down the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for
approximately 3 seconds. The LEDs of the monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
To change the fault mask, keep the button pressed. Within the next 3 seconds, the current
link status of the ports is displayed flashing at a frequency of 2.5 Hz. Keep the button
pressed. This new status is adopted as the new fault mask. The monitored ports now are
indicated by permanently lit LEDs until the button is released. As long as the LEDs are still
flashing, however, the saving of the mask can be stopped by releasing the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored), the two neighboring port LEDs flash on
and off alternately. To create an empty fault mask when you save as described above, the
port cables must not be connected.
At the same time, the monitoring of the connected power supplies is set with the fault mask.
The existence of the two power sources is monitored only if they are connected when the
fault mask is saved.
The failure of the link of one of the monitored ports or one of the monitored power supplies is
indicated by the red fault LED lighting up. At the same time, the signaling contact opens.
Note
Port monitoring and power supply monitoring are not activated when the device is delivered
(factory default).
240
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
6.3.3.2
Fault indicator (red LED)
Fault indicator (red LED)
If the red LED is lit, the SCALANCE X-100 has detected a problem.
The signaling contact opens at the same time.
The LED signals that the device can adopt the following statuses:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit red
LED not lit
X104-2
1, 2
4
X106-1
1, 2
4
X108
1, 2
4
X112-2
1, 2, 3
4
X116
1, 2, 3
4
X124
1, 2, 3
4
1. Link down event on a monitored port.
2. Loss of one of the monitored power supplies or voltage dropped below approximately 14
V. Refer also to Section ..
3. Both supply voltages are below approximately 14 V (reduced voltage)
4. No fault detected by the SCALANCE X-100.
6.3.3.3
Power display
Power display
The LEDs signal that the device can adopt the following statuses:
The status of the power supply is indicated by two green LEDs or one green/yellow LED:
Device type
SCALANCE
Green LED lit
LED not lit
X104-2
1
2
X106-1
1
2
X108
1
2
X112-2
1
2
X116
1
2
X124
1
2
1. Power supply L1 or L2 is connected.
2. Power supply L1 and/or L2 not connected or <14 V.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
241
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
6.3.3.4
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)
The LEDs signal that the device can adopt the following statuses.
The status of the interfaces is indicated by two-color LEDs:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit green
LED lit yellow
LED flashes yellow
Number of port
LEDs
X104-2
6 port LEDs
1
2
3
X106-1
7 port LEDs
1
2
3
X108
8 port LEDs
1
2
3
X112-2
14 port LEDs
1
2
3
X116
16 port LEDs
1
2
3
X124
24 port LEDs
1
2
3
1. TP link exists, no data reception.
2. TP link, data received at TP port.
3. Setting or display of the fault mask.
6.3.4
Connector pin assignments
6.3.4.1
Power supply
Power supply
The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block.
The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the
higher output voltage supplies the device alone. The power supply is connected over a high
resistance with the enclosure to allow an ungrounded set up. The two power supplies are
non-floating.
Figure 6-9
242
Power supply SCALANCE X-100
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-10
Terminal block, four-pin
Table 6-10
Pin assignment for the power supply
Pin number
Assignment
Pin 1
L1+ 24 V DC
Pin 2
M1
Pin 3
M2
Pin 4
L2+ 24 V DC
WARNING
The device is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage. This means that only
safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can be
connected to the power supply terminals.
The power supply unit for the device power supply must meet NEC Class 2, as described
by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70).
The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source
with limited power (LPS limited power source).
If the device is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies), both
must meet these requirements.
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra-low
voltage (SELV), 24 V DC).
Never connect the device to AC voltage.
Never operate the device with DC voltage higher than 32 V DC.
6.3.4.2
Signaling contact
Signaling contact
The signaling contact (relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be
signaled by breaking the contact.
The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
243
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-11
Signaling contact SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-12
Terminal block, two-pin
Table 6-11
Pin assignment of the signaling contact
SCALANCE X-100
Pin number
Assignment
Pin 1
F1
Pin 2
F2
The following errors/faults can be signaled by the signaling contact:
● The failure of a link at a monitored port.
● The failure of one of the two monitored power supplies.
The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not
lead to an error message.
The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current
status is applied as the new desired status using the button.
When the device is turned off, the signaling contact is always activated (open).
6.3.5
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings
Dimension drawings for SCALANCE X-200
The following dimension drawings are intended as examples and apply to the SCALANCE X100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S with an installation width of 60 mm:
● SCALANCE X104-2
● SCALANCE X106-1
● SCALANCE X108
● SCALANCE X202-2IRT
● SCALANCE X204IRT
244
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
● SCALANCE X200-4PIRT
● SCALANCE X201-3PIRT
● SCALANCE X202-2PIRT
● SCALANCE X204-2
● SCALANCE X206-1
● SCALANCE X208
● SCALANCE X204-2LD
● SCALANCE X206-1LD
● SCALANCE S602
● SCALANCE S612
● SCALANCE S613
50
115
5
5
Figure 6-13
SCALANCE X100, SCALANCE X200, SCALANCE S dimension drawing
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
245
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Figure 6-14
The schematic below shows the minimum bending radii for an optical cable including
connector (external cable with 150 mm radius) and an IE FC cable with IE FC RJ-45
Plug 180 (inner cable with 76 mm radius).
Side view
See also
Dimension drawing X-200 (Page 270)
246
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
6.3.6
X-100 technical specifications
Table 6-12
Connectors
Device type
SCALANCE
Attachment of end
devices or network
components over
twisted pair
Connecting end devices
or network components
over fiber-optic
Connector for power
supply
Connector for
signaling contact
X104-2
4 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
2 x 2 BFOC sockets
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
X106-1
6 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/full
duplex)
1 x 2 BFOC sockets
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
X108
8 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
-
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
X112-2
12 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning 10/100
Mbps (half/full duplex)
2 x 2 BFOC sockets
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
X116
16 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/full
duplex)
-
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
X124
24 x RJ-45 jacks with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
-
1 x 4-pin plug-in
terminal block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
Table 6-13
Device type
SCALANCE
Electrical data
Power supply
2 x 24 V DC
(18-32 V DC)
Safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
Power loss at
24 V DC
Current consumption Overcurrent protection at
at rated voltage
input
PTC resettable fuse
(0.6 A / 60 V)
X104-2
+
4.2 W
175 mA
+
X106-1
+
3.6 W
150 mA
+
X108
+
3.36 W
140 mA
+
X112-2
+
10.8 W
450 mA
-
X116
+
7.2 W
300 mA
-
X124
+
10.8 W
450 mA
-
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
247
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Table 6-14
Signaling contact
Device type
SCALANCE
Voltage at signaling contact
X104-2
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X106-1
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X108
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X112-2
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X116
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X124
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
Table 6-15
Device type
SCALANCE
Current through signaling contact
Permitted cable lengths (copper)
0 - 55 m
IE TP torsion cable with
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
or
0 - 45 m IE TP torsion
cable with IE outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord
0 - 85 m
IE FC TP marine/trailing/ flexible
cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
or
0 - 75 m IE FC TP marine/
trailing/flexible cable + 10 m TP cord
over IE FC outlet RJ-45
0 - 100 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC RJ45 plug 180
or
over IE FC outlet RJ-45 with 0 - 90 m IE
FC TP standard cable + 10 m TP cord
X104-2
+
+
+
X106-1
+
+
+
X108
+
+
+
X112-2
+
+
+
X116
+
+
+
X124
+
+
+
Table 6-16
Device type
SCALANCE
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic)
1 - 50 m
980/1000
plastic optical
fiber (POF)
1 - 100 m
200/230 polymer
cladded fiber (PCF)
6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation with
3 dB link power margin
0 - 3,000 m
glass FOC
62.5/125 µm or
50/125 µm glass fiber;
≤ 1 dB/km at 1300 nm;
≥ 600 MHz x km;
6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation with 3
dB link power margin
0 - 26000 m
glass FOC
10/125 µm single mode fiber;
0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm;
13 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation with 2 dB
link power margin
X104-2
-
-
+
-
X106-1
-
-
+
-
X108
-
-
-
-
X112-2
-
-
+
-
X116
-
-
-
-
X124
-
-
-
-
248
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Table 6-17
Aging time/ MTBF
Device type
SCALANCE
Aging time
MTBF
X104-2
30 seconds
134.87 years
X106-1
30 seconds
136.65 years
X108
30 seconds
139.83 years
X112-2
30 seconds
61.3 years
X116
30 seconds
61.3 years
X124
30 seconds
49.3 years
Table 6-18
Permitted environmental conditions / EMC
Device type
SCALANCE
Operating
temperature
Storage/transport
temperature
Relative humidity in
operation
Operating altitude at max. xx°C
ambient temperature
X104-2
-10 °C through +60
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X106-1
-10 °C through +60
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X108
-20 °C through +70
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X112-2
-10 °C through +70
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X116
-20 °C through +70
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X124
-20 °C through +70
°C
-40 °C through
+80 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
Table 6-19
Order numbers for accessories
Order number
IE FC Stripping Tool
6GK1901-1GA00
IE FC blade cassettes
6GK1901-1GB00
IE FC TP standard cable GP
6XV1840-2AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable
6XV1840-3AH10
IE FC TP marine cable
6XV1840-4AH10
IE FC TP trailing cable GP
6XV1870-2D
IE FC TP flexible cable GP
6XV1870-2B
IE TP torsion cable
6XV1870-2F
FO FRNC Cable 50/125
6XV1 873-2B
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 1
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 10
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 50
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
249
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.3 SCALANCE X-100
Note
The number of SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet Switches connected in a line influences the
frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through devices of the SCALANCE X-100 product line, it is delayed by
the store and forward function of the switch
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more devices of the SCALANCE X-100 product line, the frame passes
through, the longer the frame delay.
250
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
6.4
SCALANCE X-100 media converters
6.4.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-100 media converters
Certifications
Table 6-20
Approvals for SCALANCE media converters X101-1, X101-1LD, X101-1POF, X101-1FL
and X101-1AUI
c-UL-us
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM
C-TICK
CE
FM 3611
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
ATEX Zone 2
EN 50021
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
6.4.2
X-100 media converter installation instructions and guidelines
Installation as for SCALANCE X-100
The switches are installed in the same way as the SCALANCE X-100 devices.
Note the following however:
● The connectors of the signaling contact on the SCALANCE X-100 media converters are
located directly above the power supply connectors.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
251
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
6.4.3
X-100 media converter operator controls and displays
Display elements
The following LEDs exist on all SCALANCE X-100 media converters and in the same
numbers:
● Fault indicator (red LED); Labeled: F): This is lit if one of the two redundant power
supplies fails and/or if there is a link down on a monitored port. The signaling contact
opens at the same time.
● Power indicator (green LED); Labeled: L): This is lit when an adequate power supply is
connected to at least one of the power supply terminals. The LED goes off if the supplied
power drops below 14 V at both inputs.
● Transparent Link indicator (green LED); Labeled: TL): This is lit when transparent link is
set. It is not lit in standalone mode; in other words when end devices are attached to both
ports of the media converter (no cascading).
The status of the ports is indicated by two LEDs:
Table 6-21
Status of the port
Port status display
Meaning
Port 1: LED lit green
TP link exists, no data reception
Port 2: LED lit green
FO link exists, no data reception
Port 1: LED lit yellow
TP link exists, data received at TP port
Port 2: LED lit yellow
FO link exists, data received at FO port
Ports 1 and 2: LEDs flash yellow
Setting or display of the fault mask
Operator controls
The media converters have a button with which the set fault mask can be displayed and
modified and with which the transparent link mode can be set.
After pressing the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for approximately 3
seconds. The LEDs of the monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
If the button remains pressed, the new fault mask is displayed after the 3 seconds have
elapsed. The flashing frequency is reduced to 2.5 Hz. After a further 3 seconds, the new fault
mask is adopted and saved. The monitored ports are indicated by permanently lit LEDs until
the button is released.
As long as the LEDs are still flashing, the saving of the mask can be interrupted by releasing
the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored) or you want to set an empty mask, the 2
port LEDs flash on and off alternately.
At the same time, you can also set the monitoring of the redundant power supply with the
fault mask. Monitoring of the power supply is activated only when both power supplies are
connected when the fault mask is stored.
The factory default is no port monitoring.
252
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
The setting is retained after a power cycle.
6.4.4
Connector pin assignments X-100 media converters
Connector pin assignments
The connector pin assignment of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters is the same as on
the other SCALANCE-X devices.
Note the following however:
● The connectors of the signaling contact are located directly above the connectors for the
power supply.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
253
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
6.4.5
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Figure 6-15
254
Dimension drawing X101-1
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Figure 6-16
Dimension drawing X101-1AUI
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
255
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Figure 6-17
256
Dimension drawing X101-1LD
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Figure 6-18
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
Rechts / Right
Oben / Top
Vorne / Front
40
Links / Left
123
Format / Size: DIN A2
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Massstab / Scale: 1:1
6GK51011BH002AA3_001
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Dimension drawing X101-1POF
257
125
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Figure 6-19
6.4.6
Bending radii SCALANCE X-100 media converters
X-100 media converter technical specifications
SCALANCE X-100 media converter technical specifications
Table 6-22
Electrical data
Device type SCALANCE X
X101-1
Power supply
X101-1POF
X101-1FL
X101-1AUI
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
(typical)
3W
3W
3W
3W
3W
Power consumption at
24 V DC (typical)
120 mA
120 mA
120 mA
120 mA
160 mA
Minimum rated current of
the supplying power unit
170 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
Overvoltage protection at
input
PTC resettable fuse (0.5 A / 60 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
Current through signaling
contact
Transmission rate
Interference emission
Immunity
MTBF
258
X101-1LD
24 V DC
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
No info
10/100 Mbps
EN 610006-3
EN 610006-4
10 Mbps
EN 610006-3
EN 610006-3
EN 61000-64
EN 61000-6-2
> 130 years
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.4 SCALANCE X-100 media converters
Table 6-23
Environmental conditions
Device type SCALANCE X
X101-1
X101-1LD
X101-1POF
Operating temperature
-10 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport
temperature
-40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in
operation
X101-1AUI
< 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection
Table 6-24
X101-1FL
Tested to IP30
Mechanical data
Device type SCALANCE X
X101-1
X101-1LD
Dimensions (W x H x D)
mm
X101-1FL
X101-1AUI
40 x 125 x 124
Weight
550 g
Installation options
Table 6-25
X101-1POF
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Order numbers
SCALANCE X101-1
6GK5101-1BB00-2AA3
SCALANCE X101-1LD
6GK5101-1BC00-2AA3
SCALANCE X101-1POF
6GK5101-1BH00-2AA3
SCALANCE X101-1FL
6GK5101-1BY00-2AA3
SCALANCE X101-1AUI
6GK5101-1BX00-2AA3
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
259
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5
SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-200
Overview
The following tables apply to the SCALANCE X models
● X200-4PIRT
● X201-3PIRT
● X202-2IRT, X202-2PIRT
● X204IRT, X204-2, X204-2LD
● X206-1, X206-1LD
● X208, X208PRO
● X212-2, X212-2LD
● X216
● X224
Table 6-26
Approvals
c-UL-us
UL 60950; CSA C22.2 No. 60950
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 for IRT devices
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM
FM 3611
C-TICK
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
ATEX Zone 21
EN60079-15II 3 G EEx nA II T..KEMA 03 ATEX 1226 X
1For
temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
Except for X208PRO: Tested to IP65.
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
260
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.2
X-200 installation instructions and guidelines
Installation of SCALANCE X-200 switches
The switches are installed in the same way as the SCALANCE X-100 line apart from the
exception below.
Ring port settings
By default, the following ring ports are set:
X208
P1, P2
X202-2IRT
X208PRO
X216
X224
X204-2
P1, P2
P1, P2
P1, P2
P5, P6
X204IRT
P3, P4
P1, P2
X204IRT PRO
P1, P2
X206-1
P1, P2
X202-2P IRT PRO
P3, P4
X212-2
X204-2
LD
X206-1
LD
X212-2
LD
P1, P2
P5, P6
P1, P2
P1, P2
X202-2P IRT
X201-3P IRT
P3, P4
P3, P4
X200-4P IRT
P3, P4
On a SCALANCE X-200, these ports are enabled as ring ports when the module is supplied.
Without deactivating them, they can also be used as normal ports, for example, in a tree
structure.
The ports of a SCALANCE X-200 that will be used as ring ports must be configured using
the WBM if they are not default ring ports.
6.5.3
X-200 operator controls and displays
6.5.3.1
SCALANCE X-200 button
Button function
Using the button, you can display and modify the set fault mask. The fault mask setting is
retained after device power off/on.
After pressing and holding down the button, the currently valid fault mask is displayed for
approximately 3 seconds. The LEDs of the monitored ports flash at a frequency of 5 Hz.
To change the fault mask, keep the button pressed. After a further 3 seconds, the current
link status of the ports is displayed and the the power supply LEDs flash at a frequency of
2.5 Hz. Keep the button pressed. After a further 3 seconds, this status is adopted and saved
as the new fault mask. The monitored ports now are indicated by permanently lit LEDs until
the button is released. As long as the LEDs are still flashing, however, the saving of the
mask can be stopped by releasing the button.
If an empty fault mask is set (no port is monitored) or you want to set an empty mask, the 2
port LEDs flash on and off alternately.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
261
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
At the same time, the monitoring of the connected power supply is set with the fault mask.
The existence of the two power sources is monitored only if they are connected when the
fault mask is saved.
The failure of the link of one of the monitored ports or one of the monitored power supplies is
indicated by the red fault LED lighting up. At the same time, the signaling contact opens.
Port monitoring and power supply monitoring are not activated when the device is delivered
(factory default), the redundancy manager is disabled.
The following applies to IE Switches X-200 (except SCALANCE X208 PRO): If the button is
pressed for 2-3 seconds longer, the RM LED starts to flash for approx. 2 seconds. If the
button is released during this time, the RM is disabled. If you hold down the button, the RM
LED lights up permanently and the RM is enabled. If the button is pressed longer (15
seconds), the device is reset to "factory defaults". This is indicated by all the Port LEDs
(green) flashing. During this activity, the device must not be turned off.
Note
On the SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO, SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO and SCALANCE X208
PRO, the button is beneath the C-PLUG cover on the rear of the device.
6.5.3.2
Fault indicator (red LED)
Fault indicator (red LED)
If the red LED is lit, the IE Switch X-200 has detected a problem.
The signaling contact opens at the same time.
The LED signals that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit red
LED flashing red
LED not lit
X208
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X208PRO
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X216
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X224
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X204-2
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X206-1
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X212-2
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X204-2 LD
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X206-1 LD
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X212-2LD
1, 2, 3, 4
9
10
X202-2IRT
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
9
10
X204IRT
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
9
10
X204 IRT PRO
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
9
10
X202-2P IRT PRO
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9
10
X202-2P IRT
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9
10
X201-3P IRT
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9
10
X200-4P IRT
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
9
10
262
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
1. Link down event on a monitored port.
2. Failure of one of the two redundant power supplies.
Note
SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO and SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO have no redundant
power supply.
3. C-PLUG
4. Device startup, the LED is lit for approx. 20 seconds.
5. Device is in PROFINET mode:
– a) There is no connection to the controller
– b) There is a connection to the controller, there is also a configured diagnostic
interrupt, for example power fail interrupt, C-PLUG interrupt etc.
6. Redundancy manager connected through.
7. Switchover of standby connection.
8. Maintenance request or maintenance requirement.
9. An internal fault was detected. Inform the maintenance personnel and, if necessary, send
the device in for repair.
10.No fault detected by the IE Switch X-200.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
263
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.3
Power display
Power display
The LEDs signal that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses:
The status of the power supply is indicated by two green LEDs or one green/yellow LED:
Device type
Green LED lit
Yellow-green LED
LED not lit
SCALANCE
LED lit green
LED lit yellow
X208
-
2
3
4
X208PRO
1
-
-
4
X216
-
2
3
4
X224
-
2
3
4
X204-2
-
2
3
4
X206-1
-
2
3
4
X212-2
-
2
3
4
X204-2 LD
-
2
3
4
X206-1 LD
-
2
3
4
X212-2LD
-
2
3
4
X202-2IRT
-
2
3
4
X204IRT
-
2
3
4
X204 IRT PRO
-
2
3
4
X202-2P IRT PRO
-
2
3
4
X202-2P IRT
-
2
3
4
X201-3P IRT
-
2
3
4
X200-4P IRT
-
2
3
4
1. Power supply L1 or L2 is connected.
2. Both L power supplies are connected (redundant supply).
3. One L power supply is connected (non-redundant supply).
4. Power supply L1 and/or L2 not connected or <14 V.
Note
SCALANCE X204 IRT PRO and SCALANCE X202-2P IRT PRO have no redundant
power supply.
264
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.4
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)
Port status indicator (green/yellow LEDs)
The LEDs signal that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses.
The status of the interfaces is indicated by two-color LEDs:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit green
LED lit yellow
LED flashes
yellow
LED flashes
green
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
Number of port
LEDs
X208
8 port LEDs
X208PRO
8 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5
X204-2
6 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X206-1
7 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X204-2 LD
6 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X206-1 LD
7 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X202-2IRT
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X204IRT
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X204 IRT PRO
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X202-2P IRT PRO
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X202-2P IRT
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X201-3P IRT
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X200-4P IRT
4 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X216
16 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X212-2
14 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X212-2LD
14 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
X224
24 port LEDs
1
2, 3
4
5, 6
1. TP link exists, no data reception.
2. TP link, data received at TP port.
3. Device startup, the LED is lit for approx. 6 seconds.
4. Setting or display of the fault mask.
5. The "Show Location" function was enabled over Ethernet (for example, PST tool).
The button was pressed for longer than 15 seconds to reset the configuration.
6. PROFINET IO operation was started with the PN IO controller, the attempt to change the
fault mask with the button was rejected by all the port LEDs flashing once.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
265
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.5
Redundancy manager indicator (green LED)
Redundancy manager indicator (green LED)
The LED signals that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit green
LED flashes green
LED not lit
X208
1
2
3
X208PRO
-
-
-
X216
1
2
3
X224
1
2
3
X204-2
1
2
3
X206-1
1
2
3
X212-2
1
2
3
X204-2LD
1
2
3
X206-1LD
1
2
3
X212-2LD
1
2
3
X202-2IRT
1
2
3
X204IRT
1
2
3
X204 IRT PRO
1
2
3
X202-2P IRT PRO
1
2
3
X202-2P IRT
1
2
3
X201-3P IRT
1
2
3
X200-4P IRT
1
2
3
1. Redundancy manager RM is enabled.
2. Redundancy manager is switched over.
3. Redundancy manager is disabled.
Note
The redundancy manager indicator and the standby indicator are implemented as a dual
LED, the indicator color changes depending on the function (Redundancy function ->
green, standby function -> yellow).
266
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.6
Standby functions (yellow LED)
Standby functions (yellow LED)
The LED signals that the IE Switch X-200 can adopt the following statuses:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit yellow
LED flashes yellow
(slowly)
LED flashes yellow
(fast)
LED not lit
X208
-
-
-
-
X208PRO
-
-
-
-
X216
-
-
-
-
X224
-
-
-
-
X204-2
-
-
-
-
X206-1
-
-
-
-
X212-2
-
-
-
-
X204-2 LD
-
-
-
-
X206-1 LD
-
-
-
-
X212-2LD
-
-
-
-
X202-2IRT
1
2
3
4
X204IRT
1
2
3
4
X204 IRT PRO
1
2
3
4
X202-2P IRT PRO
1
2
3
4
X202-2P IRT
1
2
3
4
X201-3P IRT
1
2
3
4
X200-4P IRT
1
2
3
4
1. Standby function is enabled (IE Switch X-200 is in standby active mode).
2. Standby function is enabled (IE Switch X-200 is in standby passive mode).
3. Standby partner lost.
4. Standby function is disabled.
Note
When the device switches from active to passive mode because of a fault, the red fault
LED is also activated. This is possible only when standby monitoring is enabled in the
fault mask.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
267
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.7
FOC diagnostic display (yellow LED)
Note
Only the SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, X202-2P IRT PRO, X201-3P IRT and X200-4P IRT
devices have the FO cable diagnostic display.
FOC diagnostic display (yellow LED)
The diagnostic status of the SC RJ interfaces is signaled by an additional LED per port.
The LED signals that the device can adopt the following statuses:
Device type SCALANCE
LED lit yellow
LED not lit
X202-2P IRT PRO
1
2
X202-2P IRT
1
2
X201-3P IRT
1
2
X200-4P IRT
1
2
1. Signaling maintenance is necessary. Maintenance should be performed to ensure
problem-free operation.
2. Relevant only when the link exists:
The available link power margin is adequate for problem-free operation.
268
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.3.8
LED display during startup
LED display during startup
Device type SCALANCE
When the device starts up, the following LEDs light up in the following order:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
X208
+
X208PRO
+
X216
+
X224
+
X204-2
+
X206-1
+
X212-2
+
X204-2 LD
+
X206-1 LD
+
X212-2LD
+
X202-2IRT
+
X204IRT
+
X204 IRT PRO
+
X202-2P IRT PRO
+
X202-2P IRT
+
X201-3P IRT
+
X200-4P IRT
+
6.5.4
Power LEDs (green) light up immediately after turning on the power.
Port LEDs (yellow) light up for approx. 6 seconds, the red LED is off.
Port LEDs go off, the red error LED is lit for approx. 20 seconds.
After the port LEDs go off, the correct link status is displayed after approx. 2 seconds.
The IE Switch X-200 is now ready for operation.
Connector pin assignments X-200
General
The pin assignment of the SCALANCE X-200 devices is the same as with other SCALANCE
X devices.
Pin assignments of the SCALANCE X208 PRO
Due to the use of M12 connectors, the SCALANCE X208 PRO is waterproof according to
IP65. At the same time, the requirements for CAT5 are met.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
269
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
6.5.5
Dimension drawing X-200
General dimension drawings
You will also find dimension drawings for most SCALANCE X-200 devices in the section with
the reference data of the SCALANCE X-100 line. (See below)
Dimension drawings SCALANCE X208PRO
Figure 6-20
270
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X208PRO
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Figure 6-21
SCALANCE X208PRO_M12 bending radius
See also
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings (Page 244)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
271
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
6.5.6
X-200 technical specifications
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X-200 devices without optical interface and with interface
for multimode FO cable
Table 6-27
Electrical data
SCALANCE X SCALANCE
204-2
X206-1
SCALANCE
X208
SCALANCE X20
8PRO
Power supply
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
6.36 W
Current consumption at 24 V DC
265 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
5.28 W
3.84 W
4.4 W
220 mA
160 mA
185 mA
PTC resettable fuse (0.6 A / 60 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
24 V DC
Current through signaling
contact
max. 100 mA
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
30 seconds
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-28
74.64 years
78.71 years
83.71 years
115.48 years
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X SCALANCE
204-2
X206-1
Operating temperature
-10 °C - +60 °C
-20 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport temperature
SCALANCE X20
8PRO
-20 °C - +70 °C
-40 °C - +70 °C
Relative humidity in operation
Operating altitude
SCALANCE
X208
< 95% (no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Table 6-29
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X
204-2
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
Weight
Installation options
272
•
•
•
SCALANCE
X206-1
SCALANCE
X208
SCALANCE X20
8PRO
60 x 125 x 124
90 x 125 x 124
780 g
1000 g
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X216, X212-2 and X224 devices
Table 6-30
Electrical data
SCALANCE X216
Power supply
SCALANCE X212-2
SCALANCE X224
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
5.76 W
7.92 W
8.40 W
Current consumption at 24 V DC
240 mA
330 mA
350 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
PTC resettable fuse (1.1 A / 33 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
24 V DC
Current through signaling
contact
max. 100 mA
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
30 seconds
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-31
52.07 years
51.18 years
45.87 years
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X216
SCALANCE X212-2
Operating temperature
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +70 °C
Relative humidity in operation
Operating altitude
SCALANCE X224
0 °C - +60 °C
< 95% (no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Table 6-32
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X216
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
Weight
Installation options
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
•
•
•
SCALANCE X212-2
SCALANCE X224
120 x 125 x 124
180 x 125 x 124
1200 g
1600 g
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
273
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X200 LD devices
Table 6-33
Electrical data
SCALANCE X204-2L SCALANCE
D
X206-1LD
Power supply
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
6.36 W
Current consumption at 24 V DC
265 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
5.28 W
7.92 W
220 mA
330 mA
PTC resettable fuse (1.1 A / 33 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
24 V DC
max. 28.8 V DC
Current through signaling
contact
max. 100 mA
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
30 seconds
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-34
74.64 years
78.71 years
51.18 years
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X204-2L SCALANCE
D
X206-1LD
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
Weight
Installation options
Table 6-35
SCALANCE
X212-2LD
•
•
•
SCALANCE
X212-2LD
60 x 125 x 124
120 x 125 x 124
780 g
1200 g
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X204-2L
D
Operating temperature
SCALANCE
X206-1LD
0 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +70 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude
SCALANCE
X212-2LD
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
274
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE X200IRT devices
Table 6-36
Electrical data
SCALANCE X204IRT
Power supply
SCALANCE X202-2IRT
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
Current consumption at 24 V DC
Overvoltage protection at input
4.8 W
6W
200 mA
300 mA
PTC resettable fuse (0.6 A / 60 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
24 V DC
Current through signaling
contact
max. 100 mA
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
30 seconds
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-37
80.58 years
70.90 years
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X204IRT
Operating temperature
Storage/transport temperature
-10 °C - +60 °C
-40 °C - +70 °C
Relative humidity in operation
Operating altitude
SCALANCE X202-2IRT
-20 °C - +70 °C
< 95% (no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Table 6-38
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X204IRT
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
60 x 125 x 124
Weight
Installation options
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
SCALANCE X202-2IRT
780 g
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
275
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Table 6-39
Electrical data
SCALANCE X202- SCALANCE X2012PIRT
3PIRT
Power supply
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power loss at 24 V DC
7.2 W
Current consumption at 24 V DC
300 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
8.4 W
9.6 W
350 mA
400 mA
PTC resettable fuse (1.1 A / 33 V)
Voltage at signaling contact
24 V DC
Current through signaling
contact
max. 100 mA
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Aging time
30 seconds
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-40
SCALANCE X2004PIRT
83.72 years
78.03 years
73.06 years
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE X2022PIRT
Operating temperature
SCALANCE X2013PIRT
0 °C - +60 °C
0 °C - +50 °C
Storage/transport temperature
0 °C - +40 °C
-40 °C - +70 °C
Relative humidity in operation
Operating altitude
SCALANCE X2004PIRT
< 95% (no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Table 6-41
Mechanical data
SCALANCE X202- SCALANCE X2012PIRT
3PIRT
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
60 x 125 x 124
Weight
Installation options
276
SCALANCE X2004PIRT
780 g
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.5 SCALANCE X-200/X-200 IRT
Order numbers
SCALANCE X204-2
6GK5204-2BB10-2AA3
SCALANCE X206-1
6GK5206-1BB10-2AA3
SCALANCE X208
6GK5208-0BA10-2AA3
SCALANCE X208PRO
6GK5208-0HA00-2AA6
SCALANCE X216
6GK5216-0BA00-2AA3
SCALANCE X212-2
6GK5212-2BB00-2AA3
SCALANCE X224
6GK5224-0BA00-2AA3
Table 6-42
"LD" devices
SCALANCE X204-2LD
6GK5204-2BC10-2AA3
SCALANCE X206-1LD
6GK5206-1BC10-2AA3
SCALANCE X212-2LD
6GK5212-2BC00-2AA3
Table 6-43
"IRT" devices
SCALANCE X204IRT
6GK5204-0BA00-2BA3
SCALANCE X202-2IRT
6GK5202-2BB00-2BA3
SCALANCE X202-2P IRT
6GK5202-2BH00-2BA3
SCALANCE X201-3P IRT
6GK5201-3BH00-2BA3
SCALANCE X200-4P IRT
6GK5200-4AH00-2BA3
Web Based Management
Note
You will find information on configuring the SCALANCE X switches using Web Based
Management in the relevant operating instructions.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
277
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
6.6
SCALANCE X-300
6.6.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-300
Validity
The following information applies to the SCALANCE X devices
● X310
● X308-2
● X308-2LD
Approvals
Device type
SCALANCE
c-UL-us
c-UL-us for hazardous
locations1
FM1
C-TICK
CE
ATEX Zone 21
E1
X310
UL
60950-1
CSA
C22.2 No.
60950-1
UL 1604, UL
2279Pt.15
CL.1, Div.2 GP.
A.B.C.D T..
CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC,
T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC
IIC T..
FM 3611
CL.1, Div.2
GP. A.B.C.D
T..
CL.1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T..
Ta:..
AS/NZS
2064
(Class A).
EN 61000-6-4
Class A,
EN 61000-6-2
EN60079-15
ECE-G
II 3 G EEx nA II T.. 95/54/EEC
KEMA 03 ATEX
1226 X
test number
024734
X308-2
UL
60950-1
CSA
C22.2 No.
60950-1
UL 1604, UL
2279Pt.15
CL.1, Div.2 GP.
A.B.C.D T..
CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC,
T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC
IIC T..
FM 3611
CL.1, Div.2
GP. A.B.C.D
T..
CL.1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T..
Ta:..
AS/NZS
2064
(Class A).
EN 61000-6-4
Class A,
EN 61000-6-2
EN60079-15
II 3 G EEx nA II T..
KEMA 03 ATEX
1226 X
X308-2 LD
UL
60950-1
CSA
C22.2 No.
60950-1
UL 1604, UL
2279Pt.15
CL.1, Div.2 GP.
A.B.C.D T..
CL.1, Zone 2, GP, IIC,
T..
CL.1, Zone2, AEx nC
IIC T..
FM 3611
CL.1, Div.2
GP. A.B.C.D
T..
CL.1, Zone 2,
GP. IIC, T..
Ta:..
AS/NZS
2064
(Class A).
EN 61000-6-4
Class A,
EN 61000-6-2
EN60079-15
II 3 G EEx nA II T..
KEMA 03 ATEX
1226 X
1For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the
type plate.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
278
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Order numbers
SCALANCE X310
6GK5 310-0FA00-2AA3
SCALANCE X308-2
6GK5 308-2FL00-2AA3
SCALANCE X308-2 LD
6GK5 308-2FM00-2AA3
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
6.6.2
X-300 installation instructions and guidelines
Installation of SCALANCE X-300 switches
The switches are installed in the same way as the SCALANCE X-100 line.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
279
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
6.6.3
X-300 operator controls and displays
6.6.3.1
LED display
Overview
The following table shows the states indicated by the LEDs in the various display modes.
IE Switch X-300
280
LED
Display mode A Display mode B Display mode C Display mode D
F
Problem, signaling contact opens
L1
Power supply L1 is applied.
Power supply L1 is
monitored
L2
Power supply L2 is applied.
Power supply L2 is
monitored
RM
Device is operating as RM
SB
Device operates in standby mode.
DM
off
Lit green
Lit orange
Flashes
orange/yellow
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Port status
Transmission
rate
Half / full
duplex
Fault mask
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
6.6.3.2
LED display - Fault and Power
Display modes A through C
In display modes A to C, the status of the signaling contact and the presence of the supply
voltages are displayed by the LEDs of the IE Switch X-300.
Figure 6-22
Example of the LED display of the device in DMode A
The following table lists the significance of the three LEDs on the IE Switch X-300 for display
modes A through C:
Label
Color
Status
Meaning
off
The IE Switch X-300 has not detected any faults, the
signaling contact is closed.
Red
on
The IE Switch X-300 has detected a fault, the signaling
contact opens.
off
Power supply L1 lower than 17 V.
Green
on
Power supply L1 higher than 17 V.
off
Power supply L2 lower than 17 V.
on
Power supply L2 higher than 17 V.
F
L1
L2
Green
For information on the "DM" LED, refer to the operating instructions of the switch.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
281
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Display in display mode D
In display mode D, the DM LED of the IE Switch X-300 flashes yellow/orange. This mode
indicates whether the power supply is being monitored with the signaling contact.
Figure 6-23
LED Fault / Power and System display in display mode D
The following table shows the meaning of the three LEDs on the IE Switch X-300 in display
mode D:
Label
Color
F
Red
L1
Green
L2
Green
6.6.3.3
Status
Meaning
off
No problem has been detected by the IE Switch X-300.
on
The IE Switch X-300 detects a fault. The signaling contact
opens.
off
Power supply L1 is not monitored. If L1 falls below 17 V, the
signaling contact does not respond.
on
Power supply L1 is monitored. If L1 falls below 17 V, the
signaling contact responds.
off
Power supply L2 is not monitored. If L2 falls below 17 V, the
signaling contact does not respond.
on
Power supply L2 is monitored. If L2 falls below 17 V, the
signaling contact responds.
LED display - System
System
On the IE Switch X-300, the LEDs of the system are on the right-hand LED strip.
Display modes A through D
The set display modes are indicated as follows:
282
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
50
50
50
50
6%
6%
6%
6%
'0
'0
'0
'0
'0/('OLWJUHHQ
'0/('OLWRUDQJH
'0/('IODVKHV
\HOORZRUDQJH
'0RGH%
'0RGH&
'0RGH'
'0RGH$
Figure 6-24
Display of the possible display modes (DMode A through DMode D)
The individual functions (RM, SB and DM) are independent of each other. The LED displays
are described below:
Label
Color
RM
Green
Status
Meaning
off
The IE Switch X-300 is not operating in redundancy
manager mode.
on
The IE Switch X-300 is operating in redundancy manager
mode. The ring is working without problems, monitoring is
activated.
flashes The IE Switch X-300 is operating in redundancy manager
mode. An interruption has been detected on the ring; the
IE Switch X-300 has switched through.
SB
Green
off
The standby function is disabled.
on
The standby function is enabled. The standby link is
passive.
flashes The standby function is enabled. The standby link is active.
DM
6.6.3.4
off
Mode A
Green
on
Mode B
Orange
on
Mode C
Yellow/orang
e
flashes Mode D
LED display of the ports (DMode A through DMode D)
LEDs of the ports
The LED displays of the 10 ports indicate different port states depending on the set display
mode. The displays have the same meaning for all ports.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
283
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Port statuses in DMode A
In display mode A, the current port status is displayed.
Port
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Color
Green
Status
Meaning
off
No valid link to the port (for
example station turned off or cable
not connected)
on
Link exists and port in normal
status. In this status, the port can
receive and send data.
flashes once per period
Link exists and port in "blocking"
status. In this status, the port only
receives management data (no
user data).
flashes three times per
period
Link exists and port turned off by
management. In this status, no data
is sent or received over the port.
flashes four times per period Port exists and is in the "monitor
port" status. In this status, the data
traffic of another port is copied to
this port.
Yellow
Flashes / lit
Link exists, port is in normal status
and data is being received at the
port.
The optical gigabit ports of the
IE Switch X-300 signal data
reception and data transmission.
Figure 6-25
284
Display of the port status of port 1
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Port statuses in DMode B
In display mode B, the current transmission rate is displayed.
Port
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Figure 6-26
Color
Status
Meaning
off
Port operating at 10 Mbps
Green
on
Port operating at 100 Mbps
Orange
on
Port operating at 1000 Mbps
Display of the transmission speed of port 1
Note
If there is a link fault and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), in DMode B,
the desired status, in other words the set transmission rate (1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 10
Mbps) continues to be displayed. If there is a link fault and autonegotiation is active, the port
LED goes off.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
285
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Port statuses in DMode C
In display mode C, the current mode (half duplex, full duplex) is indicated.
Port
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Figure 6-27
Color
Green
Status
Meaning
off
Port operating in half duplex
on
Port operating in full duplex
Mode display (full / half duplex) of port 1
Note
If there is a link fault and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), in DMode C,
the desired status, in other words the set type of transmission (full or half duplex) continues
to be displayed. If there is a link fault and autonegotiation is active, the port LED goes off.
286
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Port statuses in DMode D
In display mode D, you can see whether or not the port is monitored.
Port
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
Figure 6-28
6.6.4
Color
Green
Status
Meaning
off
The port is not monitored; in other words, if a link is not established
at the port, this does not trigger the signaling contact.
on
Port is monitored; in other words, if there is no link established at
the port (for example cable not plugged in or connected
IE Switch X-300 turned off), this triggers the signaling contact and
to a fault state.
Example: Monitoring of port 1 is "on“
Connector pin assignments X-300
Connector pin assignments
The connector pin assignments are identical to those of the other SCALANCE X devices.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
287
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
6.6.5
Dimension drawing
Figure 6-29
Dimension drawing SCALANCE X-300 (here based on the example of the SCALANCE X308-2)
288
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Figure 6-30
6.6.6
Device type
Drilling template for the IE Switch X-300
X-300 technical specifications
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
Weight in g
SCALANCE
Installation options
- DIN rail
- S7-300 standard rail
- Wall mounting
X310
120 x 125 x 123
1400
+
X308-2
120 x 125 x 123
1400
+
X308-2 LD
120 x 125 x 123
1400
+
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
289
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Table 6-44
Connectors
Device type
SCALANCE
Attachment of end devices Connecting end devices or
or network components
network components over
over twisted pair
fiber-optic
Connector for power
supply
Connector for
signaling contact
X310
7 x RJ-45 sockets with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
1x4-pin plug-in terminal
block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
2 SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseSX)
1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal
block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
2 SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
1 x 4-pin plug-in terminal
block
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal
block
-
3 x RJ-45 sockets with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
X308-2
7 x RJ-45 sockets with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
X308-2 LD
7 x RJ-45 sockets with
MDI-X pinning
10/100 Mbps (half/ full
duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with
MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/
full duplex)
Table 6-45
Device type
SCALANCE
Electrical data
Power supply
2 x 24 V DC
Power loss at
24 V DC
Current consumption
at rated voltage
9.6 W
400 mA
(18-32 V DC)
Safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
X310
+
Overcurrent protection at
input
Non-replaceable fuse
(F 3 A / 32 V)
+
X308-2
+
9.6 W
400 mA
+
X308-2 LD
+
9.6 W
400 mA
+
Table 6-46
Signaling contact
Device type
SCALANCE
Voltage at signaling contact
X310
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X308-2
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
X308-2 LD
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
290
Current through signaling contact
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Table 6-47
Device type
SCALANCE
Permitted cable lengths (copper)
0 - 55 m
IE TP torsion cable with IE
FC RJ-45 Plug 180 or
0 - 85 m
IE FC TP marine/trailing/ flexible cable
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
0 - 100 m
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC RJ-45
plug 180
0 - 45 m IE TP torsion
cable with IE outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
or
or
0 - 75 m IE FC TP marine/ trailing/flexible
cable + 10 m TP cord over IE FC outlet
RJ-45
over IE FC outlet RJ-45 with 0 - 90 m IE FC
TP standard cable + 10 m TP cord
X310
+
X308-2
+
+
+
X308-2 LD
+
+
+
Table 6-48
+
+
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic)
Device type
SCALANCE
0 - 750 m
glass FOC
0 - 10000 m
glass FOC
50/125 µm multimode fiber;
2.5 dB/km at 850 nm
9/125 µm single mode fiber;
0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm;
4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation with
3 dB link power margin
6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation with 3 dB
link power margin
X310
-
-
X308-2
+
-
X308-2 LD
-
+
Note
Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB per SC connector.
Table 6-49
Aging time
Device type
SCALANCE
Aging time
X310
30 seconds
X308-2
30 seconds
X308-2 LD
30 seconds
Table 6-50
MTBF
Device type
SCALANCE
MTBF
X310
46 years
X308-2
48 years
X308-2 LD
48 years
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
291
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.6 SCALANCE X-300
Table 6-51
Permitted ambient conditions
Device type
SCALANCE
Operating temperature
Storage/transport
temperature
Relative humidity in
operation
Operating altitude at max. xx°C
ambient temperature
X310
0 °C through +60 °C
-40 °C through +70 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X308-2
0 °C through +60 °C
-40 °C through +70 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
X308-2 LD
0 °C through +60 °C
-40 °C through +70 °C
‹ 95 %
(no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C
3000 m at max. 50 °C
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through an IE Switch X-300, it is delayed by the Store&Forward
function of the IE Switch X-300
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more IE Switch X-300 devices the frame passes through, the longer the
frame delay.
292
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7
SCALANCE X-400
6.7.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection X-400
Certifications
SCALANCE X408-2, X414-3E
c-UL-us (Information Technology Equipment)
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
c-UL-us (Industrial Control Equipment)
UL 508; CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM
FM 3611
C-Tick
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
ATEX Zone 2
EN 50021
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
Order numbers
SCALANCE X414-3E
6GK5414-3FC00-2AA2
SCALANCE X408-2
6GK5408-2FD00-2AA2
See also
General information on approvals and certifications (Page 230)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
293
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.2
Overview of X408-2
Design of the SCALANCE X408-2
Figure 6-31
SCALANCE X408-2
SCALANCE X-400 products are designed for installation in switching cubicles and have
degree of protection IP20. The installation width of the X408-2 basic device is 9 inches.
The SCALANCE X408-2 basic device consists of a basic module with the following
permanently installed modules:
● Slot 2: A power supply module for supplying the SCALANCE X408-2 with 24 V DC;
redundant 24 V supply is possible. The module also provides a floating signal output for
simple display of disruptions.
● Slot 3: A dummy module for the following LED displays: RM, STBY, DM1, DM2.
Slots 4 and 7 are covered by dummy modules and have no function.
The following ports are located on the basic module:
● Slots 5 and 6: Each slots for an optical Fast Ethernet media module each with 2 ports.
● In slots 5 and 6: Each with two RJ-45 jacks allowing connection of electrical (twisted pair)
connections at 10/100/1000 Mbps.
As an option, slots 5 and 6 can be used for an optical gigabit module with two ports.
● In slot 8: Four RJ-45 jacks for electrical (twisted pair) connections (10, 100 Mbps). These
cannot be used by media modules. Here, there is also a D-sub socket (RS-232) as
configuration and diagnostics port.
294
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.3
Overview of the X414-3E
Design of the SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X-400 products are designed for installation in switching cubicles and have
degree of protection IP20. The installation width of the SCALANCE X414-3E with extender is
19 inches.
Figure 6-32
Basic device without media modules, protective caps and covers
The SCALANCE X414-3E consists of a frame with basic module. This has the following slot
numbering:
Figure 6-33
Basic device X414-3E without media modules with existing ports
As default, the following modules are inserted:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
295
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
● Slot 2: A power supply module for supplying the SCALANCE X414-3E with 24 V DC;
redundant 24 V supply is possible. The module also provides a floating signal output for
simple display of disruptions.
● Slot 3: A module with 8 floating inputs for acquiring digital status information, such as
signaling contacts from PROFIBUS OLMs or door contacts and forwarding via
SCALANCE X-400 diagnostics methods (LED display, log table, trap or E-mail)
● Slot 4: A CPU module responsible for the management of the SCALANCE X414-3E
The following ports are located on the basic module:
● In slot 5: Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps, RJ-45
jacks) for interconnecting the SCALANCE X-400 switches. Slot for an optical gigabit
Ethernet media module with 2 ports; when this module is inserted, the two RJ-45 gigabit
Ethernet twisted-pair ports on the same slots cannot be used.
● Slots 6 and 7: Each slots for an optical Fast Ethernet media module each with 2 ports.
● In slots 9 to 11: 12 integrated Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10 or 100 Mbps, RJ-45
jacks),
● An extender expansion port
&380RGXOH
&RYHU
&RYHU
[
[
[
[
[
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
3
3
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
[
50
67%<
'0
'0
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
&RYHU
8QXVHG
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
)
/
/
3RZHU0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
;
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0RGXOH
Using this extender expansion port, the X414-3E can be expanded with the twisted-pair
extender EM495-8 by a further 8 Fast Ethernet ports:
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
Figure 6-34
Basic device with twisted pair extender module
&380RGXOH
&RYHU
&RYHU
8QXVHG
&RYHU
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
3
3
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
[
50
67%<
'0
'0
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
)
/
/
3RZHU0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
;
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0RGXOH
Using the media module extender EM496-4, an expansion of 4 ports for media modules is
possible, so that up to 8 optical Fast Ethernet ports (100 Mbps) are available:
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
Figure 6-35
296
Basic device with media module extender
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
The media module plug connectors are protected by protective caps.
Both the installation of the media module extender and removal or insertion of the media
modules is possible during operation. For data transfer via the extender module EM496-4, at
least one media module is required.
The SCALANCE X414-3E also has the following ports:
● Serial port
● Console port (Ethernet twisted-pair port) for on-site parameter assignment/diagnostics,
for firmware update and for standby synchronization
● Slot for optional C-PLUG exchangeable medium for simple device replacement (ships
with the product; it is located on the CPU module below the labeling strip)
Serial port
The CPU module of the SCALANCE X414-3E has an RS-232 port. This is used for the
following purposes:
● Firmware updates
● Management with the aid of the command interpreter (Command Line Interpreter, CLI)
including setting of the IP address information.
Input to the command interpreter is over command lines.
For more detailed information, refer to the Configuration Manual - SCALANCE X-400
Industrial Ethernet Switches.
Console port (Ethernet twisted-pair port)
On the bottom panel of the CPU module of the SCALANCE X414-3E, there is an 8-pin RJ-45
jack. This Ethernet interface can be used for productive communication with other switches
or end devices. This is used for the following purposes:
● Configuration
● Commissioning
The SCALANCE X414-3E can be configured either locally or over a network. For more
detailed information, refer to the Configuration Manual - SCALANCE X-400 Industrial
Ethernet Switches.
6.7.4
X-400 installation instructions and guidelines
6.7.4.1
Installing / uninstalling the SCALANCE X-400
Notes on installation
IE Switches X-400 are designed for installation on an S7-300 standard rail and installation on
a 35 mm DIN rail.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
297
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
You will find general information on this in the section on installing SCALANCE X-100
devices.
Clearances
Certain minimum clearances between an IE Switch X-400 and neighboring equipment must
be taken into account. These minimum clearances are necessary during installation and
operation to allow the following:
● Install and remove modules,
● To allow the flow of air required for heat dissipation during operation of the IE Switches X400.
The following figure shows the space you need to allow for an IE Switch X-400.
PP
PP
PP
PP
Figure 6-36
Installation clearances for the IE Switches X-400 based on the example of a SCALANCE X414-3E with
extender module
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
298
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.4.2
Installing / uninstalling with a 35 mm DIN rail
Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
CAUTION
If the IE Switch X-400 is liable to be subjected to severe vibration (> 10 g), use the S7-300
standard rail for installation. The DIN rail does not provide adequate support for the
IE Switch X-400 with vibration greater than 10 g.
Since the two captive screws are not used to secure the device when installing on a 35 mm
DIN rail, it is not absolutely necessary to remove the covers and the blind cover, although
this does make it easier to handle the basic device.
NOTICE
When installing the IE Switch X-400, hold it by the backplane and not by the modules,
otherwise the device may be damaged.
To install the device, follow the steps below:
1. Place the central groove containing two spring clips on the back of the basic device on
the upper edge of the DIN rail with the device tilted slightly towards the back. Note that
both spring clips must be located behind the edge of the DIN rail.
2. Press the basic device down and push in the lower part until you hear it click into place in
the DIN rail.
3. Adjust the basic device to the right or left until it is in the required position.
Note
Only horizontal installation permitted (ventilation slit top/bottom).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
299
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-37
Installing the SCALANCE X414-3E on a 35 mm DIN rail
Removing the SCALANCE X414-3E from a 35 mm DIN rail
Since the two captive screws are not used to secure the device when removing from a 35
mm DIN rail, it is not absolutely necessary to remove the covers and the blind cover,
although this does make it easier to handle the basic device.
NOTICE
When uninstalling the SCALANCE X414-3E, hold it by the backplane and not by the
modules, otherwise the device may be damaged.
To remove the device, follow the steps below:
1. Push the basic device down until the lower part can be pulled away from the rail to the
front.
2. Lift the IE Switch X-400 up and off the DIN rail.
Removing the SCALANCE X408-2 from a 35 mm DIN rail
Since the two captive screws are not used to secure the device when removing from a 35
mm DIN rail, it is not absolutely necessary to remove the covers and the blind cover,
although this does make it easier to handle the basic device.
300
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
NOTICE
When uninstalling the SCALANCE X408-2, hold it by the backplane and not by the
modules, otherwise the device may be damaged.
To remove the device, follow the steps below:
1. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade, pull down the clip on the basic
device slightly and pull out the lower part of the basic device to the front so that the spring
clips can no longer engage.
2. Lift the IE Switch X-400 up and off the DIN rail.
Figure 6-38
6.7.4.3
Removing the SCALANCE X408-2 from a 35 mm DIN rail
Fitting / removing a cover/dummy cover
Variants of the covers/dummy cover
There are three variants of the covers
● CV490 2x1000
1 Gbps, electrical transmission, 2 port displays
possible slots:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
301
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X414-3E: 5
SCALANCE X408-2: 5 and 6
● CV490 2x100
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 6, 7 and extender module EM496-4 slots 12 through 15
● CV490 4x100
10/100 Mbps, electrical transmission, 4 port displays
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 9 through 11 and extender module EM495-8 slots 12, 13
SCALANCE X408-2: 8
There is a dummy cover
● CV490 COVER
(no displays connected to front)
possible slots
SCALANCE X414-3E: 8
SCALANCE X408-2: 4 and 7
Fitting a cover/dummy cover
There is only a dummy cover (no port displays to the front) on slot 8 (SCALANCE X414-3E)
or slot 7 (SCALANCE X408-2).
To fit a cover, you do not require any tools.
1. Place the two lower guides of the cover/dummy cover into the recesses at the lower edge
of the basic device. It should no longer be possible to move the cover/dummy cover to the
side.
2. Tilt the cover/dummy cover at an angle towards the back until the two plastic pins at the
back top edge of the cover/dummy cover jut into the recesses in the basic device.
3. Press the upper part of the cover/dummy cover onto the basic device until the fluted
middle section of the cover/dummy cover is heard to click into place.
4. Secure the labeling strip on the front of the cover/dummy cover.
Removing a cover/dummy cover
To remove a cover, you do not require any tools.
1. Press on the fluted middle section of the top of the cover/dummy cover next to the
backplane.
2. At the same time, tilt the cover/dummy cover down at an angle, the two guides initially
remain in the recesses at the lower edge of the basic device.
3. Remove the cover/dummy cover by pulling it upwards.
302
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.5
X-400 operator controls and displays
6.7.5.1
X-400 display elements
Display elements:
Depending on the display mode, the LEDs have the following meaning. To set the display
mode, press the SELECT / SET button on the CPU module until the DM1 and DM2 LEDs
light up on the CPU in the required combination. The selected display mode is then
activated. There is an automatic switchover to Dmode A if the button is not pressed for
longer than one minute.
The following table shows the states indicated by the LEDs in the various display modes.
You will find detailed information in the Operating Instructions SCALANCE X-400 Industrial
Ethernet Switches.
LED
Display mode A
Display mode B
Power
F
module for
L1
X414-3E and
X408-2
L2
Problem, signaling contact opens
DI module
only for
X414-3E
Switch CPU
for X414-3E
and X408-2
Display mode C
Display mode D
Power supply L1 is applied. No monitoring with the
signaling contact.
Power supply L1
is monitored
Power supply L2 is applied. No monitoring with the
signaling contact.
Power supply L2
is monitored
IN1/IN5
Signal at input
IN1
Signal at input
IN5
Signal at input
IN1
Signal at input
IN5
IN2/IN6
Signal at input
IN2
Signal at input
IN6
Signal at input
IN2
Signal at input
IN6
IN3/IN7
Signal at input
IN3
Signal at input
IN7
Signal at input
IN3
Signal at input
IN7
IN4/IN8
Signal at input
IN4
Signal at input
IN8
Signal at input
IN4
Signal at input
IN8
RM
Device is operating as RM
STBY
Device is in standby mode
DM1
off
on
off
on
off
off
on
on
Port status
Transmission
rate
Half / full duplex
Fault mask
DM2
Ports for
P1
X414-3E and P2
X408-2
P3
P4
While the device is starting up, the red LED on the power module indicates the current status
of the device. For more detailed information, refer to the following table:
LED on
LED off
During device startup
Device starts or a
Device startup
fault/error was detected successful
During operation
Fault/error detected
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
LED flashing
Error in keyboard input
over serial interface or
bad firmware image
Operation not OK
303
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.5.2
SELECT / SET button
Function
The SELECT / SET button is used to switch over the display modes (DMode) and to make
other settings. After turning on the IE Switch X-400, it is in DMode A.
The button has the following functions:
● Changing the display modes
By pressing the button briefly, you change from one display mode to the next. The
selected mode or current status is displayed by the LEDs (D1, D2).
● Resetting to the factory defaults
It is possible to restore some of the factory defaults in DMode A. You do this by pressing
the button for 12 seconds. You can cancel the reset procedure by releasing the button
before the 12 seconds have elapsed. All previously made settings are overwritten by the
factory defaults.
● Defining the fault mask and the LED displays
It is possible to set the fault mask in DMode A and DMode D. This allows you to specify
the mask for signaling faults by defining an individual "good status" for the connected
ports and the power supplies. In this case, you press the button for 5 seconds in DMode
A or DMode D. After 3 seconds, the two LEDs (D1 and D2) start to flash. You can cancel
the procedure by releasing the button before the 5 seconds have elapsed. If, however,
you press the button for a further 2 seconds, the current states of all ports and the states
of the power supplies L1 and L2 are included in the fault mask. The previous fault mask is
then overwritten.
● Activating/deactivating the redundancy manager
It is only possible to activate/deactivate the RM in DMode B. You do this by pressing the
button for 5 seconds. After 3 seconds, the two LEDs (D1 and D2) start to flash. If you
release the button before the 5 seconds have elapsed, the action is aborted. After 5
seconds the redundancy manager is activated/deactivated. If the redundancy manager as
well as ring redundancy were deactivated, ring redundancy is also activated at the same
time. If you deactivate, only the redundancy manager is deactivated.
6.7.5.3
DIL switches of the SCALANCE X-414-3E
Meaning of the DIL switches
The RM switch allows you to configure the SCALANCE X414-3E as a redundancy manager
in a ring with redundancy manager.
Note
Only the SCALANCE X414-3E basic device has DIL switches.
Ring redundancy can be configured with these DIL switches. These settings are made in the
software for the SCALANCE X408-2 basic device. On the SCALANCE X408-2, the RM can
also be enabled / disabled with the SET/SELECT button. For more detailed information, refer
to the configuration manual "SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet
Switches".
304
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Changing the switch settings during operation causes fault displays and activates the
signaling contact. The settings are adopted only after the device is restarted.
Configuration options
Below the labeling strip on the CPU module on slot 4, there are four DIL switches. These DIL
switches can have one of two states (ON / OFF).
Figure 6-39
Power module, digital inputs and CPU module with operator controls on the SCALANCE
X414-3E
● The RM switch allows you to configure the SCALANCE X414-3E as a redundancy
manager in a ring with redundancy manager. When using a SCALANCE X408-2, this
setting is made in the software or using the SELECT/SET button.
● The STBY switch is reserved for future functionality and does not currently have any
function.
● With switches R1 and R2, you can specify either the two ports in slot 5, the two ports in
slot 6 or the first ports of slots 6 and 7 as ring ports. When both switches are set to ON,
ring redundancy is configured by the software as with the SCALANCE X408-2.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
305
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Switch
Status
Meaning
RM
OFF
SCALANCE X414-3E is not a redundancy manager.
ON
--
SCALANCE X414-3E is a redundancy manager.
No function.
Ports in slot 5 (gigabit ports) are ring ports.
R1
OFF
R2
OFF
R1
ON
Ports 1 and 2 of slot 6 are ring ports.
R2
OFF
.
R1
OFF
Port 1 of slot 6 is first ring port.
R2
ON
Port 1 of slot 7 is second ring port.
R1
ON
Setting ring redundancy with software
R2
ON
When shipped from the factory, all DIL switches are set to OFF.
Using the C-PLUG
C-PLUG settings overwrite the DIL switches during startup
Ring ports on slots 5 to 7
NOTICE
When supplied, the DIL switches R1 and R2 on the SCALANCE X414-3E are set to OFF.
As a result, the gigabit ports on slot 5 are defined as ring ports and ring redundancy is
therefore enabled. In this case, you cannot enable rapid spanning tree / spanning tree.
For more detailed information, refer to the configuration manual "SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches".
If R1 and R2 are set to OFF, the two gigabit ports of slot 5 are selected as ring ports.
Note
If the SCALANCE X414-3E is operated without media modules, R1 and R2 must be set to
OFF, otherwise ports in slots 6 and 7 will be defined as ring ports that are only available
when media modules are plugged in.
306
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
&RYHU
)
/
/
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
,1,1
50
67%<
'0
'0
3
3
3
3
3
3
&380RGXOH
8QXVHG
&RYHU
[
[
[
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
[
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
[5-
0%LWV
7ZLVWHG3DLU
&RYHU
3RZHU0RGXOH
6&$/$1&(
;
'LJLWDO,QSXW
0RGXOH
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
6ORW
Figure 6-40
Ring ports that can be defined with switches R1 and R2
Possible settings of the ring ports
Note
Only two ports of a switch can ever be defined as ring ports. All other ports in slots 6 and 7
that are not defined as ring ports can be used for the optical connection of nodes or subnets.
● Switch 1:
In the schematic below, switches R1 and R2 are set to OFF.
● Switch 2:
In the schematic below, switch R1 is set to ON and R2 to OFF.
● Switch 3:
In the schematic below, switch R1 is set to OFF and R2 to ON.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
307
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-41
The three possible settings for ring ports with R1 and R2
6.7.6
Connector pin assignments X-400
6.7.6.1
Connectors for the twisted pair cables
The FastConnect cabling system
With the IE FC RJ-45 Plug and the FastConnect cables (FC), you can achieve a segment
length up to 100 m without patching. In this case, the IE FC standard cable 2x2 is connected
directly to the SCALANCE X414-3E and other components on the network.
Two FastConnect cable types are available, the eight-wire IE FC standard cable 4x2 and the
four-wire IE FC standard cable 2x2.
The diameter of the IE FC standard cable 4x2 does not allow connection to an RJ-45 plug so
that only the IE FC standard cable 2x2 as a four-wire cable is suitable for RJ-45 plugs. This
means that the maximum transmission rate is 100 Mbps.
The flexible eight-wire patch cable (TP cord) for gigabit transmission allows a maximum
cable length of 10 m.
308
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
;
;(
$
%
%
%
6
3&
%
$ P
% P
Figure 6-42
FastConnect cabling
A TP cord (1 Gbps)
B IE FC standard cable 2x2 (100 Mbps)
Connecting TP cord to FC cable
To connect TP Cord to FC cables, two IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert types are available:
● IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 1GE
1 RJ-45 jack with 4x2 wire cable for 1 Gbps
● IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 2FE
2 RJ-45 jacks each with 2x2 wire cable for 100 Mbps
With the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 1GE, the eight-wire FastConnect cable allows a
transmission rate of 1 Gbps.
Figure 6-43
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 1GE
With the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 2FE, the eight-wire FastConnect cable is split
over two RJ-45 jacks and allows a transmission rate of 2 x 100 Mbps.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
309
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-44
IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet insert 2FE
The maximum segment length of 100 m also applies when using the FastConnect cabling
with TP cord. Normally, FastConnect cable with a length of 90 m is used. The remaining 10
m is then available for TP cord at both ends (total of 10 m).
;
;(
$
$
$
$
6
,()&5-
0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW
*(
,()&5-
0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW
)(
%
$
,()&5-0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW)(
%
$$ P
$%$ P
Figure 6-45
$
;(
$
,()&5-0RGXODU
2XWOHW,QVHUW*(
FastConnect cabling
A1 TP cord 4x2
A2 TP cord 4x2
B IE FC standard cable 4x2
Removing the FC cable from IE Switches X-400
Under some circumstances, a screwdriver is necessary to remove the twisted pair cables
with RJ-45 plugs because it may not be possible to reach the connector with your hand due
to neighboring media modules, covers, or the dummy cover.
310
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
If this is the situation, do the following:
1. Press the catch on the RJ-45 plug to the left with a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cable.
Figure 6-46
6.7.6.2
Unlocking the FastConnect RJ-45 plug
Connectors for fiber-optic cables
Gigabit transmission with FOC
Data transmission at 1 Gbps is over multimode FOC or single mode FOC. In both cases, the
fiber-optic cable is plugged into the SC duplex socket with the SC duplex plug. The
connectors have polarity reversal protection mechanisms.
When a media module is inserted, port 1 is to the front and port 2 to the rear.
NOTICE
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
311
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-47
SC duplex plug with gigabit media module MM492-2LD
Fast Ethernet transfer with FOC
Data transmission at 100 Mbps is over multimode FOC or single mode FOC. In both cases,
the BFOC plug on the fiber-optic cable is plugged into the BFOC socket. When using the LH
module, SC duplex sockets are used as the connectors.
When a media module is inserted, the front two sockets belong to port 1 and the two back
sockets to port 2. The front socket is the input and the rear socket the output socket of the
respective port. Behind the labeling strip on the front of the media module, you will see the
relevant symbols.
NOTICE
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connections with the supplied dust caps.
312
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-48
6.7.6.3
BFOC plug with Fast Ethernet media module MM491-2
Connectors of the power supply (X1) of the SCALANCE X-400
Polarity reversal protection X1, X2
The two 4-pin male connectors (X1, X2) for the power supply and the signaling contact have
no polarity reversal protection. If the connectors are accidentally swapped over, this does not
cause damage or destroy circuits. Normal functionality is, however, not available while the
connectors are swapped over.
Connectors of the power supply (X1)
The redundant power supply is connected over a 4-pin connector at the front terminal block
on the power module.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
313
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
/
Figure 6-49
Conn. 1
0
0
/
Pins of connector X1
L1+
+ 24 V power supply 1
M1
Ground
M2
Ground
L2+
+ 24 V power supply 2
CAUTION
If IE Switches X-400 are supplied over long 24 V power supply lines or networks, measures
are necessary to prevent interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines.
These can result, for example, due to lightning or switching of large inductive loads.
One of the tests used to attest the immunity of devices of the IE Switches X-400 to
electromagnetic interference is the "surge immunity test" according to EN61000-4-5. This
test requires overvoltage protection for the power supply lines. A suitable device is, for
example, the Dehn Blitzductor VT AD 24 V type no. 918 402 or comparable protective
element.
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans-Dehn-Str.1, Postfach 1640, D-92306
Neumarkt, Germany.
6.7.6.4
Connectors of the signaling contact and grounding strap (X2) of the SCALANCE X-400
Polarity reversal protection X1, X2
The two 4-pin male connectors (X1, X2) for the power supply and the signaling contact have
no polarity reversal protection. If the connectors are accidentally swapped over, this does not
cause damage or destroy circuits. Normal functionality is, however, not available while the
connectors are swapped over.
314
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Connectors of the signaling contact and grounding strap (X2)
The signaling contact is connected by contacts MK1 and MK2 on the 4-pin connector to the
rear terminal block on the power module.
0. *1'
Figure 6-50
0
0.
Pins of connector X2
By inserting a strap between protective earth GND and M3, IE Switches X-400 can be
operated with grounded reference potential.
When the device ships, no strap is fitted (non-grounded reference potential).
Conn. 2
6.7.6.5
MK1
Floating signaling contact relay connector 1
M3
Ground
GND
Protective earth
MK2
Floating signaling contact relay connector 2
Connectors of the digital inputs (X2) of the SCALANCE X414-3E
Ports
Digital inputs 5 through 8 are connected using a 5-pin connector at the rear terminal block on
the DI module.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
315
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
,1
Figure 6-51
Conn. 2
6.7.6.6
,1
0
,1
,1
Pins of connector X2 (inputs 5-8)
IN5
Digital input 5
IN6
Digital input 6
M5
Ground
IN7
Digital input 7
IN8
Digital input 8
Note
Note the following:
You should also compare the general connector pin assignments for SCALANCE X devices.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
316
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.7
Dimension drawings X-400
6.7.7.1
SCALANCE X408-2
Dimension drawings for the SCALANCE X408-2
Figure 6-52
SCALANCE X408-2 front
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
317
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
242
Figure 6-53
SCALANCE X408-2 top
Figure 6-54
SCALANCE X408-2 left
318
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.7.2
SCALANCE X-414-3E
Dimension drawings for the SCALANCE X414-3E
Figure 6-55
SCALANCE X414-3E front
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
319
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Figure 6-56
SCALANCE X414-3E top
Figure 6-57
SCALANCE X414-3E left
320
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.8
X-400 technical specifications
6.7.8.1
SCALANCE X414-3E and X408-2 - technical specifications
Interfaces
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
2 x RJ-45 jack (10/100/1000 Mbps)
12 x RJ-45 jack (10/100 Mbps)
All electrical ports support
autonegotiation and autocrossover.
4 x RJ-45 jack (10/100/1000 Mbps)
4 x RJ-45 jack (10/100 Mbps)
Installation of media 2 x slot (6 and 7) for media module
modules
types MM491-2 and MM491-2LD.
2 x universal slot for media module
types
MM491-2 or
MM491-2LD or
MM492-2 or
MM492-2LD or
MM492-2LH or
MM492-2LH+
Connecting end
devices or network
segments over
twisted pair
1 x slot (5) for media module types
MM492-2, MM492-2LD, MM492-2LH
and MM492-2LH+
Installation of
extender modules
1 x slot for extender module EM495-8
or EM496-4
Not present.
Connector for power 2 x 4-pin plug-in terminal blocks
supply and signaling
contact
2 x 4-pin plug-in terminal blocks
Connection of digital 2 x 5-pin plug-in terminal blocks
inputs
Not present.
Power supply
(redundant inputs
isolated)
2 power supplies 24 V DC (20.4 to
28.8 V) safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
2 power supplies 24 V DC (20.4 to
28.8 V) safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
Power supply voltage connected over
high resistance with housing (not
electrically isolated).
Power supply voltage connected over
high resistance with housing (not
electrically isolated).
Tested to IEC 6100-4-5, 1995 "Surge
Immunity Test", performed with
lightning protection device DEHN
Blitzductor VT AD 24 V, article no. 918
402
Tested to IEC 6100-4-5, 1995 "Surge
Immunity Test", performed with
lightning protection device DEHN
Blitzductor VT AD 24 V, article no.
918 402
Power consumption 15 W
(without modules) at
24 V DC
8W
Current
consumption at 24
V DC
< 2000 mA
< 700 mA
Load on the
signaling contact
24 V DC / max. 100 mA safety extralow voltage (SELV)
24 V DC / max. 100 mA safety extralow voltage (SELV)
Overvoltage
protection at input
Non-replaceable fuse (F 3.15 A /
250 V)
Non-replaceable fuse (F 3 A / 32 V)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
321
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Digital Inputs
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Input voltage:
• Rated value 24 V DC safety extralow voltage (SELV)
• For state "1": + 13 V ...+ 30 V
• For state "0": – 30 V... + 3 V
Inputs not present.
Max. input current: 8 mA
Max. cable length: 30 m
Inputs isolated from electronics.
C-PLUG
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Dimensions (width x height x
depth)
24.3 x 17.0 x 8.1 mm
24.3 x 17.0 x 8.1 mm
Weight
approx. 5 g
approx. 5 g
Power consumption
0.015 W
0.015 W
Memory capacity
32 Mbytes
32 Mbytes
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
With TP cord up to 10 m, with
FastConnect cabling system up
to 100 m.
With TP cord up to 10 m, with
FastConnect cabling system up
to 100 m.
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Linear/star structure
Any (only depending on signal
propagation time)
Any (only depending on signal
propagation time)
Ring with redundancy manager
50 (for reconfiguration time <
0.3 seconds)
50 (for reconfiguration time <
0.3 seconds)
Permitted cable lengths
TP cable length
Cascading depth
322
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Switching properties
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Max. number of learnable
addresses
8000
8000
Aging time (default)
40 s
40 s
Switching technique
Store and forward
Store and forward
Latency (store and forward time)
5 µs
5 µs
(10 µs when changing from
gigabit to Fast Ethernet or vice
versa)
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Operating temperature
Product version < 07
0°C to + 60°C
Product version ≥ 07
-40°C to + 70°C
0°C through + 60°C
Storage/transport temperature
- 40 °C through + 80 °C
- 40 °C through + 80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
< 95% (no condensation)
Permitted environmental conditions / EMC
Operating altitude
Max. 2000 m
Max. 2000 m
RF interference level
EN 55081 Class A
EN 55081 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2: 2001
EN 61000-6-2: 2001
SCALANCE X414-3E
SCALANCE X408-2
Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D)
344 x 145 x 117 mm
242 x 145 x 117 mm
Weight
3,070 g
1,900 g
Installation options
35 mm DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
35 mm DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
323
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
MTBF information (mean time between failure)
Device type
MTBF
SCALANCE X414-3E basic device
6GK5 414-3FC00-2AA2
24 years
SCALANCE X408-2 basic device
18 years
6GK5 408-2FD00-2AA2
Twisted pair extender EM495-8
6GK5 495-8BA00-8AA2
1,474 years
Media module extender EM496-4
6GK5 496-4MA00-8AA2
2,038 years
Fast Ethernet media module MM491-2
6GK5 491-2AB00-8AA2
138 years
Fast Ethernet media module MM491-2LD
6GK5 491-2AC00-8AA2
141 years
Gigabit media module MM492-2
6GK5 492-2AL00-8AA2
400 years
Gigabit media module MM492-2LD
6GK5 492-2AM00-8AA2
400 years
Gigabit media module MM492-2LH
6GK5 492-2AN00-8AA2
400 years
Gigabit media module MM492-2LH+
6GK5 492-2AP00-8AA2
400 years
6.7.9
Media modules
6.7.9.1
Installing / removing a media module
Installing a media module
For installation, you require a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
Note
Installing a Fast Ethernet media module is the same in the IE Switch X-400 and in the media
module extender.
1. Remove the cover from the slot of the media module and remove the protective cap of
the module terminal strip underneath from the backplane of the basic device.
Note
Keep these parts in a safe place in case you want to remove the media module later.
324
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
2. Remove the inserted labeling strip from the front of the media module.
3. Place the two lower guides of the media module into the recesses at the lower edge of
the basic device. It should no longer be possible to move the media module to the side.
4. Tilt the media module at an angle towards the back until the two plastic pins at the back
top edge of the media module jut into the recesses in the basic device. The terminal strip
of the media module must fit into the guide in the backplane.
5. Press the upper part of the media module onto the basic device until the fluted middle
section of the media module is heard to click into place.
6. Tighten the captive screw on the front of the media module with a slotted screwdriver with
a 2.8 mm wide blade.
7. Secure the labeling strip on the front of the media module.
Figure 6-58
Inserting a media module
Removing a media module
To remove the device, you require a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
Note
Removing a Fast Ethernet media module is the same in the IE Switch X-400 and in the
media module extender.
1. Remove the inserted labeling strip from the front of the media module.
2. Release the captive screw on the front of the media module as far as it will go with a
slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
3. Press on the fluted middle section of the top of the media module next to the backplane.
4. At the same time, tilt the media module down at an angle, the two guides initially remain
in the recesses at the lower edge of the basic device.
5. Remove the media module by pulling it upwards.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
325
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6. Fit the protective cap on the module terminal strip on the backplane of the
basic device. Fit a suitable cover on the slot of the media module.
6.7.9.2
Display elements of the media modules
LED display of the modules
All media modules have 2 LEDs. In principle, their significance is the same for each module.
They match the LED displays of the basic device. With optical transmission, only a fixed
transmission rate and full duplex mode are possible. The display in display modes B and C is
analogous.
● In display mode A, the current connection status is displayed.
● In display mode B, the fixed transmission rate is displayed.
● In display mode C, the full duplex mode is always displayed.
● In display mode D, you can see whether or not the port is monitored.
6.7.9.3
Technical specifications of the media modules
Technical specifications of the media modules
Table 6-52
Electrical data
MM491-2
Power consumption
Transmission rate
MM492-2
MM492-2LD
2W
2W
4W
4W
100 Mbps
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
1000 Mbps
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
Table 6-53
MM491-2LD
> 130 years
> 130 years
> 400 years
> 400 years
Environmental conditions
MM491-2
Operating temperature
MM491-2LD
MM492-2
0 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude
MM492-2LD
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to
326
IP20
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Table 6-54
Mechanical data
MM491-2
MM491-2LD
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
MM492-2LD
35 x 145 x 90 mm
Weight
Table 6-55
MM492-2
260 g
250 g
Permitted cable lengths
Cable length
SCALANCE X408-2
SCALANCE X414-3E
0 - 3000 m
Cable length multimode FOC at
100 Mbps;
MM491-2 with glass FOC
62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm;
≤ 1 dB/km at 1300 nm;
≥ 600 MHz x km
Cable length multimode FOC at
100 Mbps;
MM491-2 with glass FOC
62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm;
≤ 1 dB/km at 1300 nm;
≥ 600 MHz x km
0 - 750 m
Cable length multimode FOC at
1000 Mbps;
MM492-2 with glass FOC
50/125 μm;
≤ 2.7 dB/km at 850 nm;
≥ 600 MHz x km
Cable length multimode FOC at
1000 Mbps;
MM492-2 with glass FOC
50/125 μm;
≤ 2.7 dB/km at 850 nm;
≥ 600 MHz x km
0 - 26 km
Cable length single mode FOC
at 100 Mbps;
MM491-2 LD with glass FOC
10/125 μm or 9/125 μm;
≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm
Cable length single mode FOC
at 100 Mbps;
MM491-2 LD with glass FOC
10/125 μm or 9/125 μm;
≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm
0 - 10 km
Cable length single mode FOC
at 1000 Mbps;
MM492-2 LD with glass FOC
10/125 μm or 9/125 μm;
≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm
Cable length single mode FOC
at 1000 Mbps;
MM492-2 LD with glass FOC
10/125 μm or 9/125 μm;
≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm
Table 6-56
Order numbers of the media modules
Media module
Order number
MM491-2 (100 Mbps)
6GK5 491-2AB00-8AA2
MM491-2LD (100 Mbps)
6GK5 491-2AC00-8AA2
MM492-2 (1000 Mbps)
6GK5 492-2AL00-8AA2
MM492-2LD (1000 Mbps)
6GK5 492-2AM00-8AA2
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
327
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.10
Extender modules
6.7.10.1
Installation instructions and guidelines
Twisted-pair and media module extenders
These instructions apply to installation of the modules
● Twisted pair extender EM495-8
● Media module extender EM496-4
Installing the extender modules on an S7-300 standard rail
You require the following tools:
● slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade
● slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade
Note
Make sure that in addition to the extender width of 87 mm (EM495-8) or 155 mm (EM4964), there is a clearance of 20 mm to the right of the basic device on the standard rail to be
able to align the guide bolts of the extender with the holes in the basic device during
installation.
Note
Protective caps and CV490 2x100 covers must be fitted to all slots without media
modules.
When installing an extender module on an S7-300 standard rail, the basic device remains in
position. Follow the steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Remove the right-hand side panel of the basic device. To do this, use a slotted
screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws on slot 11 in
the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Remove the side panel of the basic device from the basic device to the right.
Note
Keep the panel in a safe place in case the extender needs to be removed again later.
4. Remove the two covers from the extender.
5. Place the extender module on the edge of the S7-300 standard rail with the upper groove
angled slightly towards the back and tilt the extender towards the back. Make sure that
there is adequate clearance between the guide bolts of the extender module and the
basic device. In this position, the extender module should not be able to slip off, however
it can be moved horizontally in both directions.
6. Push the extender module slowly to the left while keeping it straight and without skewing
and check that the two guide bolts on the extender fit into the holes in the basic device.
328
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Then push the extender module to the left as far as it will go so that it is flush with the
right side of the basic device.
7. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade, tighten the captive screw between
slots 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or 13 and 14 (EM496-4) in the lower part of the extender
module.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit the CV490 4x100 cover on slot 11 of the basic device. Make sure that the unused
slots have protective caps and covers CV490 2x100 fitted to them.
Figure 6-59
Installing the twisted pair extender on the S7-300 standard rail
Removing the extender modules from an S7-300 standard rail
You require the following tools:
● slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade
● slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade
When removing an extender module from an S7-300 standard rail, the basic device remains
in position. Follow the steps below:
1. To remove an extender module, remove the two covers on the extender.
2. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 5.5 mm wide blade, open the captive screw between
slots 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or 13 and 14 (EM496-4) in the lower part of the extender
module.
3. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
329
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
4. Use a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws
on slot 11 of the basic device in the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
5. Push the extender module slowly to the right while keeping it straight until the two guide
bolts of the extender module are completely outside the holes in the basic device.
6. Pull out the lower part of the extender module slightly towards the front and lift it from the
S7-300 standard rail.
7. Replace the right side panel of the basic device so that the guide bolts fit into the two
holes in the basic device.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit a suitable cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Note
The basic device must not be used permanently without the right side panel.
Installing extender modules on a 35 mm DIN rail
CAUTION
If the IE Switch X-400 with extender is liable to severe vibration (> 10 g), use the S7-300
standard rail for installation. The DIN rail does not provide adequate support for the
extender modules with vibration greater than 10 g.
For installation, you require a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade.
Although the captive screw in the lower part between slots 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or 13 and
14 (EM496-4) of the extender module is not used when installing on a 35 mm DIN rail, it is
nevertheless advisable to remove the media modules.
Note
Make sure that in addition to the extender width of 87 mm (EM495-8) or 155 mm (EM496-4),
there is a clearance of 20 mm to the right of the basic device on the DIN rail to be able to
align the guide bolts of the extender with the holes in the basic device during installation.
Note
Protective caps and CV490 2x100 covers must be fitted to all slots without media modules.
When installing an extender module on a 35 mm DIN rail, the basic device remains in
position. Follow the steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Remove the right-hand side panel of the basic device. To do this, use a slotted
screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws on slot 11 in
the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Remove the side panel of the basic device from the basic device to the right.
330
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Note
Keep the panel in a safe place in case the extender needs to be removed again later.
4. Place the central groove containing a spring clip on the back of the extender module on
the upper edge of the DIN rail with the module tilted slightly towards the back. Make sure
that there is adequate clearance between the guide bolts of the extender module and the
basic device.
5. The spring clip must be located behind the edge of the DIN rail so that it is visible from
the rear of the frame.
6. Press the extender module down and push in the lower part until you hear it click into
place in the DIN rail.
7. Push the extender module slowly to the left while keeping it straight and without skewing
and check that the two guide bolts on the extender fit into the holes in the basic device.
Then push the extender module to the left as far as it will go so that it is flush with the
right side of the basic device.
8. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
9. Fit the CV490 4x100 cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Figure 6-60
Installing the twisted pair extender on the 35 mm DIN rail
Removing extender modules from a 35 mm DIN rail
To remove the device, you require a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade. The
captive screw in the lower part of the extender module between slot 12 and 13 (EM495-8) or
13 and 14 (EM496-4) is not used for mounting on a 35 mm DIN rail. When removing an
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
331
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
extender module from a 35 mm DIN rail, the basic device remains in position. Follow the
steps below:
1. Remove the cover from slot 11 of the basic device.
2. Use a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade to loosen the two captive slug screws
on slot 11 of the basic device in the upper and lower recesses as far as they will go.
3. Push the extender module slowly to the right while keeping it straight until the two guide
bolts of the extender module are completely outside the holes in the basic device.
4. Push the extender module down until the lower part can be pulled away from the rail to
the front.
5. Lift the extender module up and off the DIN rail.
6. Replace the right side panel of the basic device so that the guide bolts fit into the two
holes in the basic device.
7. Using a slotted screwdriver with a 2.8 mm wide blade, tighten the two captive slug screws
on slot 11. The screws lock the two guide bolts, so do not use excessive force when
tightening them.
8. Fit a suitable cover on slot 11 of the basic device.
Note
The basic device must not be used permanently without the right side panel.
332
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
6.7.10.2
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawing - EM495-8 extender module
Front
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
333
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Side
334
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Dimension drawing - EM496-4 extender module
Front
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
335
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
Side
6.7.10.3
Technical specifications of the extender modules
Technical specifications of the extender modules
Table 6-57
Electrical data
EM495-8
Power consumption
EM496-4
< 0.5 W
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
> 130 years
> 140 years
> 400 years
> 400 years
Environmental conditions
EM495-8
Operating temperature
336
100 Mbps
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
Immunity
Table 6-58
< 0.1 W
EM496-4
0 °C - +60 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE X switches and media converters
6.7 SCALANCE X-400
EM495-8
Operating altitude
EM496-4
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to
Table 6-59
IP20
Mechanical data
EM495-8
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
Weight
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
EM496-4
86 x 145 x 112.5 mm
154 x 145 x 112.4 mm
560 g
980 g
337
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1
SCALANCE W access points and client modules
7.1.1
Designation of the SCALANCE W product lines
7
Overview of the product lines
For technical reasons, the SCALANCE W devices are grouped in the following product lines:
Table 7-1
SCALANCE W product lines and members
Name of the line
Models
W -788
W788-1PRO
W788-2PRO
W-788-1RR
W-788-2RR
W744-1PRO
W746-1PRO
W747-1RR
W -786
W786-1PRO
W786-2PRO
W786-3PRO
W -784
W784-1PRO
W-784-1RR
W744-1
W746-1
W747-1
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
339
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
7.1.2
Certifications and approvals of the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR
Certifications
SCALANCE W-788/W740-PRO/RR
c-UL-us (Information
Technology Equipment)
UL 60950-1; CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and Non
Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
(T* = For concrete information on the temperature class, refer to
the type plate)
FM
FM 3611
FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and Non
Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
(T* = For concrete information on the temperature class, refer to
the type plate)
340
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
SCALANCE W-788/W740-PRO/RR
CE
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2RR
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D conform to the
regulations of the following European directive:
99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council relating to
Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
and the Mutual Recognition of their Conformity.
Conformity with the essential requirements of the directive
is attested by adherence to the following standards:
EN 60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment
EN 301489-1
Electromagnetic Compatibility for Radio Equipment and Services
EN 301489-17
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems
and for equipment in local high-performance radio networks
(HIPERLAN)
EN 300328
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Issues
EN 301893
Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz highperformance RLAN
EN 50371
Compliance of low power electronic and electrical apparatus with
the basic restrictions related to human exposure to
electromagnetic fields (10 MHz to 300 GHz)
1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the
general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety
regulations.
ATEX Zone 2 *
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
EN 50021
341
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
WARNING
* ATEX Zone 2
When used under hazardous conditions (Zone 2), the SCALANCE W78x product must be
installed in an enclosure. To comply with EN 50021, this enclosure must meet the
requirements of at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE
ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
The purpose of installation in an enclosure with at least IP54 is to prevent accidental
insertion and removal of cables on the SCALANCE W. This is possible by installing in a
lockable switching cubicle.
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
Order numbers
Table 7-2
Order numbers
SCALANCE W744-1PRO
SCALANCE W746-1PRO
SCALANCE W747-1RR
SCALANCE W788-1PRO
SCALANCE W788-2PRO
SCALANCE W788-1RR
SCALANCE W788-2RR
National approvals for operation
Order no.
Outside the USA
6GK5744-1ST00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5744-1ST00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5746-1ST00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5746-1ST00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5747-1SR00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5747-1SR00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5788-1ST00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5788-1ST00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5788-2ST00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5788-2ST00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5788-1SR00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5788-1SR00-2AB6
Outside the USA
6GK5788-2SR00-2AA6
In the USA
6GK5788-2SR00-2AB6
Antenna ANT795-4MR
6GK5795-1MR00-0AA6
Lightning Protector LP7981PRO
6GK5798-1LP00-0AA6
Degree of protection
Tested to IP65.
342
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
7.1.3
Installation instructions and guidelines
7.1.3.1
Securing the housing
Wall mounting or standard rail
There are two ways of securing the housing:
● Wall mounting
Use the holes in the housing to screw the device to the wall or on a horizontal surface.
● Standard rail mounting
Mount the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR or W74x-1PRO/RR on a 90 mm long, vertically
mounted section of standard rail (S7-300). In this case, the standard rail serves as an
adapter between the wall and SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR or W74x-1PRO/RR. If you
want to mount the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR or W74x-1PRO/RR along with a PS7911PRO, you will require a 150 mm long standard rail.
Make sure that there is suitable strain relief for the connecting cable.
CAUTION
Premature aging of the device and cables due to UV radiation
Provide suitable shade to protect the device against direct sunlight. This avoids unwanted
heating of the device and prevents premature aging of the device and cabling. When
operating the SCALANCE W outdoors, it must be mounted so that it is protected from UV.
UV radiation can discolor the front panel of the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR or W74x1PRO/RR. Discoloring of the front panel does not impair the mechanical stability of the
device. The device must also not be subjected to long periods of rain (provide cover to
protect from rain). The cover should be made of a synthetic material since metal impairs the
radiation of radio waves.
Note
The minimum distance to fluorescent lamps should be 0.5 m. When installed in a cabinet, we
recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on directly neighboring mounting
rails.
7.1.3.2
Installation instructions for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR
Installation
The SCALANCE W has a robust IP65 metal housing optimally designed for installation on an
S7-300 standard rail. With drill holes in the housing, wall mounting is also possible.
Installation on a DIN rail is possible only with additional fittings.
On the back of the device, there is a locking screw below which the receptacle for a C-PLUG
is located. This is used to store the device configuration. If the device develops a fault, the
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
343
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
configuration can be transferred to the replacement device from the C-PLUG without
needing a programming device.
To achieve degree of protection IP65, however, suitable cables and connectors must be
used.
2x antennas,
detachable
with SCALANCE W788-2PRO:
2x additional sockets
for separate antennas
back:
C-PLUG
energy
hybrid
socket
protective
clip
10/100 Mbit/s
Industrial Ethernet
Figure 7-1
redundant
energy
G_IK10_XX_30019
wallmounting
Connectors of the SCALANCE W access points and clients (here: W788-1PRO AP)
Suitable cables
The following cable variants are available to connect a SCALANCE W to the power supply
and to Ethernet:
● IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 (order no. 6XV1870-2J)
The two data wire pairs are separately shielded. This cable is particularly suitable for
assembly with the IE IP67 hybrid connector shipped with SCALANCE W. The 4 x 0.34
cables are used to supply power.
● IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP (order no. 6XV1870-2E)
IE FC TP Flexible Cable 4 x 2 GP (order no. 6XV1870-2H -- as spare part only)
In these cable types, two wires are twisted. All four pairs of wires are inside a common
shield. Two of the cable pairs are used to supply power. This cable is also suitable for
assembly with the IE IP67 hybrid connector shipped with SCALANCE W.
● 2 x 2 IE cable, the optional power supply (18 - 32 V DC) is over M12 connectors.
How to fit the connectors and cables is described in the general installation instructions or
the connector pin assignments of the SCALANCE W components.
344
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
24 V DC and data
transmission on
one line
24 V DC and data
transmission on
two separate lines
220 V DC and data
transmission on
two separate lines
48 V DC and data transmission on one
line (Power over Ethernet) according to
IEEE 802.3af
(4-core and
2-core)
Redundant
24 V DC and data
transmission on
one line
(8-core and
2-core)
(8-core)
(4-core and
3-core)
(4-core,
modulated)
Installation of only
one line
Data and power on
two separate lines
Redundant
power supply
Operation
with 220 V
Operation with Power over Ethernet
(PoE)
(8-core)
IP67 hybrid plug connector with
IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0,34
IP67 hybrid plug connector with
IE standard cable 2x2
Power M12 cable connector
with energy cable 2x0,75
Use
Figure 7-2
G_IK10_XX_30122
Power Supply PS791-1PRO
Options for power supply to the SCALANCE W access points and clients
Supplying power
For a 24 V power supply to IP65, the AC/DC power unit PS791-1PRO is particularly suitable.
This is supplied with 115 V AC / 230 V AC (permitted voltage range 90 V AC to 265 V AC).
The generated 24 V DC is available via the supplied cable to the M12 socket of the
SCALANCE W.
If the power is supplied via the IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34, the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
Power Insert (6GK1901-1BE00-0AA3) can be strongly recommended (see also section
IE FC Modular Outlet).
Grounding
There must be no potential difference between the following parts otherwise there is a risk
that the device will be destroyed:
● Ground potential of the power supply and ground potential of the antenna ground.
● Ground potential of the power supply and a grounded housing.
● Ground potential of the power supply and the ground potential of the device connected to
Industrial Ethernet (for example PC, AS-300, AS-400 etc.)
Connect both grounds to the same foundation earth or use an equipotential bonding cable.
Antenna connectors
All SCALANCE W devices have at least two R-SMA antenna connectors and ship with two
ANT795-4MR antennas.
The SCALANCE W788-2PRO and SCALANCE W788-2RR each have two integrated
wireless adapters. They therefore have two additional antenna connectors to which the
additional antennas can be connected to the sides of the housing via antenna connecting
cables.
If the SCALANCE W is installed in a switching cubicle, the antennas must be removed due
to the restricted communication. In this case, the connection is over detached antennas that
must be installed outside the cabinet. On the front panel, there is an identifier for the antenna
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
345
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
connectors. The A connectors are on the right-hand side and B connectors B on the lefthand side.
SIMATIC NET offers the IWLAN FRNC antenna extension cable for the connection between
the SCALANCE W and a detached antenna. To avoid violating the approvals, only antennas
released for this product can be used.
The distance between a pair of antennas for the first and second WLAN interface must be at
least 0.5 m.
Lightning protection
WARNING
Installing antennas outdoors
Antennas installed outdoors must be within the area covered by a lightning protection
system. Make sure that all conducting systems entering from outdoors can be protected by
a lightning protection potential equalization system.
When implementing your lightning protection concept, make sure you adhere to the VDE
0182 or IEC 62305 standard.
Suitable lightning protectors are available in the range of accessories of SIMATIC NET
Industrial WLAN:
● Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO (with R-SMA connector, order no. 6GK5798-1LP000AA6)
● Lightning protector LP798-1N (with N/N female/female connector, order no. 6GK57982LP00-2AA6)
Installing one of these lightning protectors between an antenna and a SCALANCE W is not
adequate protection against a lightning strike. The LP798-1PRO/N lightening protector only
works within the framework of a comprehensive lightning protection concept. If you have
questions, ask a qualified specialist company.
See also
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices (Page 527)
IE FC Modular Outlet (Page 199)
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 189)
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 188)
Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients
(Page 349)
346
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
7.1.4
Display elements of SCALANCE W
7.1.4.1
LEDs on the W-788
Information on operating status and data transfer
On the front of the housing, several LEDs provide information on the operating status of the
SCALANCE W788:
L1
F
L2
P1
R1
6&$/$1&(:[[
Figure 7-3
L1
F
L2
R2
P1
R1
6&$/$1&(:[[
The LED display of the SCALANCE W788
LED
Color
Meaning
P1
Yellow
Data transfer over the Ethernet interface (traffic).
L2
Green
There is a connection over the Ethernet port. (Link)
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Flashing green
"Flashing" enabled over PST.
Green
Power supply over the hybrid connector X1 (PoE or
energy contacts).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
347
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
LED
Color
R1
Meaning
Yellow
Data transfer over the first WLAN interface.
Green
Access Point Mode:
The WLAN interface is initialized and ready for operation.
Client Mode:
There is a connection over the first WLAN port.
Flashing green
Access Point Mode:
The channels are being scanned.
Client Mode:
The client is searching for a connection to an access point or ad hoc
network.
Green flashing
quickly
Access Point Mode:
With 802.11h, the channel is scanned for one minute for primary users
before the channel can be used for data traffic.
Client Mode:
The client waits for the adopt MAC address due to the setting <Auto Find
Adopt MAC> and is connected to no access point.
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Green 3 x fast ,1 Client mode:
x long flashing
The client waits for the adopt MAC address due to the setting <Auto Find
Adopt MAC> and is connected to an access point.
R2
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Yellow
Access Point Mode:
Data transfer over the second WLAN port.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Green
Access Point Mode:
The WLAN interface is initialized and ready for operation.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Flashing green
Access Point Mode:
The channels are being scanned.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Green flashing
quickly
Access Point Mode:
With 802.11h, the channel is scanned for one minute for primary users
before the channel can be used for data traffic.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
348
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
L1
Green
Power supply over the M12 connector (X2).
F
Red
An error occurred during operation with the SCALANCE W78x.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
Note
If the LED for the WLAN port is not green when the device starts up, although it is activated,
the port is not ready for operation (interface not initialized).
The main reason for this is usually that during commissioning of the SCALANCE W78x
products, a waiting time of up to 15 minutes can occur when the ambient temperature is
below zero. The device is ready for operation at the specified ambient temperature as soon
as the LED for the WLAN interface is lit green.
7.1.4.2
LEDs of the W-740PRO/RR clients
Note
The arrangement and functions of the LEDs on the W-740 clients correspond to those on the
W788-1xx access point.
See also
LEDs on the W-788 (Page 347)
7.1.5
Connector pin assignments for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR clients
Attachment for Ethernet
The SCALANCE W is attached to an Ethernet network using a hybrid socket on the front of
the housing. This port also has contacts for the operating voltage.
There is an RJ-45 jack integrated in the hybrid jack. A standard Ethernet cable with an RJ-45
plug can be inserted into this, however, this does not achieve IP65.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
349
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
Connectors for the power supply
Depending on the selected connector type (hybrid connector or M12), the power supply
pinning is as follows:
Table 7-3
Pinning of the hybrid connector for the power supply
Wire coding
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
White/blue
Blue
White/brown
Brown
24 V
24 V
Ground
Ground
1
2
3
4
IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34
Wire coding
IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP or
IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2 GP
Power supply insert module
Table 7-4
Pinning of the M12 connector
X2 Socket
Pin 1
24 V DC
Pin 2
-
Pin 3
Ground
Pin 4
-
If you do not use the hybrid socket, this must be covered with a protective cap, otherwise IP
65 protection is lost. A suitable protective cap is available as an accessory (order no.
6ES7194-1JB10-0XA0). If you do not use the M12 connector, the supplied protective cap
must also be fitted to retain the IP65 degree of protection.
See also
Installation instructions for the SCALANCE W-788 and W-740PRO/RR (Page 343)
350
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
7.1.6
Dimension drawing W-788/W-740PRO/RR
Dimension drawing for SCALANCE W-780 and SCALANCE W-740PRO/RR
125
115
90
80
5
5
4
Figure 7-4
Dimension drawing for SCALANCE W-780 and SCALANCE W-740PRO/RR
The cubicle installation depth with the hybrid cable connected is approx. 230 mm.
7.1.7
Technical specifications for the SCALANCE W788-xPRO/RR and W74x-1PRO/RR
Device variants
The technical specifications of the
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1RR
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
351
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2PRO
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-1RR
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W788-2RR
are largely identical. Unless indicated otherwise in the table, the following tables apply to all
the devices listed above:
Data transfer
Ethernet transfer rate
10/100 Mbps
Wireless transmission rate
1 ... 54 Mbps (108 Mbps)
Wireless standards supported
802.11a
802.11b
802.11g
802.11h
Power supply standards supported
802.3af (Power over Ethernet)
Interfaces
Note
Bridging a power outage is is possible only with an input voltage of 24 V DC (-15% . . .
+20%).
Power
• M12 connector
(24 V DC, 48 V DC)
• Energy contacts in the hybrid connector
(24 V DC, 48 V DC)
• RJ-45 jack Power over Ethernet
(48 V DC)
2 supplies 24 V DC (24 V DC, 48 V DC)
safety extra-low voltage (SELV).
Power supply isolated according to IEEE 802.3af,
isolation resistance > 2 Mohms.
Back up
IE IP 67 hybrid connector
R-SMA antenna sockets
(2 x or 4 x with the 788-2PRO)
Electrical data
Power consumption
352
< 10 W
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.1 SCALANCE W access points and client modules
Construction
Dimensions without antennas
(W x H x L)
125 mm x 88 mm x 108 mm
Weight
approx. 1050 g
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Transport/storage temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Degree of protection
Tested to IP65
MTBF information (mean time between failure)
MTBF
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
67 years
353
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
7.2
SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
7.2.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection
7.2.1.1
Certifications and approvals for the SCALANCE W786
CE conformity
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-1PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-2PRO
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W786-3PRO
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D meets the regulations of the following
European directives:
● 99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Conformity with the basic requirement of the directive is attested by adherence to the
following standards:
● EN 60950-1
Safety of information technology equipment
● EN 301489-1 V1.6.1
Electromagnetic compatibility for radio equipment and services
● EN 301489-17 V1.2.1
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems and for equipment in
local high-performance wireless networks (HIPERLAN)
● EN 300328 V1.6.1
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum issues
● EN 301893 V1.3.1
Broadband radio access networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz high-performance RLAN
● EN 50385:2002
Generic standard to demonstrate the compliance of low power electronic and electrical
apparatus with the basic restrictions related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields
(110 MHz to 40 GHz)
● 1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety regulations.
354
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Industrielle Kommunikation
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
This declaration certifies compliance with the directives named above, but does not
guarantee any specific properties.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
7.2.1.2
Degree of protection
Degree of protection
The SCALANCE W-786 access point is certified according to IP65.
Shock resistant plastic housing, UV and salt spray resistant.
7.2.2
Installation instructions and guidelines
7.2.2.1
Removing / fitting the housing cover
When does the housing cover need to be removed?
You can only perform the following activities when the cover is removed:
● You want to screw the SCALANCE W786 to a wall or onto the optional mounting plate.
● You want to connect cables to the SCALANCE W786 for the power supply, for Ethernet
or for external antennas.
● You want to insert a C-PLUG in the device or replace an existing C-PLUG.
● You want to use the reset button.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
355
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Removing the housing cover
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Once you have removed the housing cover, there is the danger from line voltage in the
area of the connecting terminals on the power supply adapter.
Only authorized personnel is permitted to open the device and carry out any work on the
open device (e.g. connection and disconnection of lines, operating the reset button,
replacing the C-PLUG)!
6-3
78
EW
NC
A
AL
SC
L1
PoE
P1
R1
R2
F
R3
s
C
B
A
Figure 7-5
Removing the cover
A Sealing cap
B Cover screw
C Housing cover
Follow the steps below to remove the housing cover:
1. Remove the sealing caps from the housing cover (position A in the figure above)
2. Loosen the screws in the cover (position B in the figure above).
356
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Note
These screws remain in the cover after they have been loosened (prevents them being
lost). Never attempt to remove these screws from the housing cover using force,
otherwise the housing cover will be damaged!
3. Remove the housing cover with the captive screws (position C in the figure above).
Fitting the housing cover
Fitting the housing cover is carried out in the reverse order. Tightening torque for the cover
screws 1.8 Nm.
7.2.2.2
Connecting up cables
Connecting up cables prior to mounting
Before you screw a SCALANCE W786 to a wall or to the optional mounting plate, the cables
for the power supply, for Ethernet, and, when necessary, for the external antennas must be
connected up first. The available options are as follows:
A
Figure 7-6
B
C
Side view of a SCALANCE W786 with cables entering from different directions
● The cables are inserted from above (position A in the previous schematic). The housing
of the SCALANCE W786 has an opening at the top for this purpose.
● The cables are inserted from below (position B in the previous schematic). There is also
an opening at the bottom for this purpose.
● Cables inserted through a wall behind the SCALANCE W786 (position C in the previous
schematic). In this case, you will need to mount the SCALANCE W786 so that the
opening in the wall is located above the lower edge of the device.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
357
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Connecting up FO cables
Fiber-optic cables have a minimum bending radius. The cable must not be bent tighter than
this bending radius during installation or operation, otherwise the FO cable will be irreperably
damaged.
m
R
m
> 25
A
R*
Figure 7-7
Connecting up an FO cable
For the FO cable, use the second opening from the left in the seal. Cable routing is
illustrated in the figure above. For individual cores immediately following the connector, the
minimum bending radius is 25 mm. Refer to the specification of the cable you are using for
the minimum permitted bending radius of the cable within the jacket. Make sure that the FO
cable is not sharply kinked after passing through the housing.
An adhesive sealing foil must be used in the housing sealing with FO cables (position A in
the figure above). For more detailed information, refer to the section "Connecting the
cables".
Grounding terminal
WARNING
To operate the SCALANCE W786 safely, the chassis ground connector must have a
suitable cable connected. Do not use the SCALANCE W786 without a ground cable
connected.
358
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
The chassis ground connector is located on the rear of the device (M4 thread). Connect the
ground cable before you mount the SCALANCE W786 on a wall or on the optional mounting
plate. Once the SCALANCE W786 is mounted, the connector is no longer accessible.
Place the supplied toothed washer directly on the rear of the device before screwing on the
ground cable. Only then can you be sure that there is ideal contact with the screwed-on
cable.
Figure 7-8
Chassis ground connector on the rear of the SCALANCE W786
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
359
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
7.2.2.3
Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only)
Drilling template
46
187
19
The location of the holes for mounting the SCALANCE W786 on a wall is shown in the
following figure:
34
Figure 7-9
360
184
34
Drilling template for wall mounting of the SCALANCE W786
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Procedure
B
A
Figure 7-10
SCALANCE W786 wall mounting
Follow the steps below to screw a SCALANCE W786 to a wall:
1. Lead the cables into the housing of the SCALANCE W786 (position A in the figure
above). Note the information in the section "Connecting up cables".
2. Secure the SCALANCE W786 to the wall with three screws (position B in the figure
above). The screws are not supplied with the device. The type and length of the screws
depend on the type of wall.
Type of screw:
– for wooden walls: wood screw 4 x 30 mm
– for concrete walls: 4 x 50 mm with 5 mm concrete plug
– for metal walls: M4 x 25 mm with machine thread in the wall
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
361
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Option: Threaded holes on rear of housing
When a wall is extremely thin, it is often not possible to use wall plugs for the screws. To
allow wall mounting even in this situation, there are four M4 threaded holes on the rear of the
SCALANCE W786. The drilling template is a square with sides 100 mm long. The device can
therefore be mounted on a wall with bolts through the wall.
Calculate the length of the required M4 screws as follows:
Screw length = wall thickness + 7 mm
7.2.3
LED display
Information on operating status and data transfer
On the front of the housing, several LEDs provide information on the operating status of the
SCALANCE W786:
SCALANCE W786-1x
L1 PoE P1 R1
-3
86
W7
CE
AN
AL
SC F
L1
P1
PoE
R1
R2
F
SCALANCE W786-2x
L1 PoE P1 R1 R2
F
R3
s
SCALANCE W786-3x
L1 PoE P1 R1 R2 R3
Figure 7-11
F
The LED display of the SCALANCE W786
Note
The "PoE" LED does not exist on devices with a port for FO cable.
362
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
LED
Color
Description
L1
Green
Power supply over a power supply adapter or the 48 V DC energy
contacts of devices with a port for FO cable.
PoE
Green
Power over Ethernet or power over the 48 V DC energy contacts of
devices with an RJ-45 port.
P1
Yellow
Data transfer over the Ethernet interface (traffic).
R1
Green
There is a connection over the Ethernet port. (Link).
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Flashing green
"Flashing" enabled over PST.
Yellow
Data transfer over the first WLAN interface.
Green
Access Point Mode:
The WLAN interface is initialized and ready for operation.
Client Mode:
There is a connection over the first WLAN port.
Flashing green
Access Point Mode:
The channels are being scanned.
Client Mode:
The client is searching for a connection to an access point or ad hoc
network.
Green flashing
quickly
Access Point Mode:
With 802.11h, the channel is scanned for one minute for primary users
before the channel can be used for data traffic.
Client Mode:
The client waits for the adopt MAC address due to the setting <Auto Find
Adopt MAC> and is connected to no access point.
R2
Green
3x fast,
1x long flashing
Client Mode:
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Yellow
Access Point Mode:
The client waits for the adopt MAC address due to the setting <Auto Find
Adopt MAC> and is connected to an access point.
Data transfer over the second WLAN port.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Green
Access Point Mode:
The WLAN interface is initialized and ready for operation.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Flashing green
Access Point Mode:
The channels are being scanned.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
363
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
LED
Color
Description
Green flashing
quickly
Access Point Mode:
With 802.11h, the channel is scanned for one minute for primary users
before the channel can be used for data traffic.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 2nd port is not available in client
mode.
R3
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Yellow
Access Point Mode:
Data transfer over the third WLAN port.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 3rd port is not available in client
mode.
Green
Access Point Mode:
The WLAN interface is initialized and ready for operation.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 3rd port is not available in client
mode.
Flashing green
Access Point Mode:
The channels are being scanned.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 3rd port is not available in client
mode.
Green flashing
quickly
Access Point Mode:
With 802.11h, the channel is scanned for one minute for primary users
before the channel can be used for data traffic.
Client Mode:
The LED is always off because the 3rd port is not available in client
mode.
F
Flashing yellow
PRESET-PLUG detected.
Yellow/green
PRESET function completed successfully.
Red
An error occurred during operation with the SCALANCE W786.
Flashing red
Ready to load firmware. The device was either stopped with the reset
button or there is incorrect firmware on the device.
Note
If the LED for the WLAN port is not green when the device starts up, although it is activated,
the port is not ready for operation (interface not initialized).
The main reason for this is usually that during commissioning of the SCALANCE W78x
products, a waiting time of up to 15 minutes can occur when the ambient temperature is
below zero. The device is ready for operation at the specified ambient temperature as soon
as the LED for the WLAN interface is lit green.
364
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
7.2.4
Connector pin assignment W-786
Connector variants
With a SCALANCE W786, you have the choice of two Ethernet ports:
● RJ-45 jack
● ST duplex socket for multimode FO cables 1310 nm and a maximum cable length of
3000 m
Location of the connectors and pin assignment of the Ethernet cable
ST-Duplex:
TX RX
Figure 7-12
7.2.5
Position of the Ethernet port with the housing cover removed
SCALANCE W786 technical specifications
Product versions
● SCALANCE W786-1PRO with one wireless interface and in the variants with two internal
antennas or two external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or FO connector
● SCALANCE W786-2PRO with two wireless interfaces and in the variants with four
internal antennas or four external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or FO connector
● SCALANCE W786-3PRO with three wireless interfaces and in the variants with six
external antenna connectors and with RJ-45 or with FO connector
Data transfer
Ethernet transfer rate
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
10/100 Mbps
365
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Wireless transmission rate
1 ... 54 Mbps (108 Mbps)
Wireless standards supported
802.11a
802.11b
802.11g
802.11h
Power supply standards supported
802.3af (Power over Ethernet)
Power
• 48 V DC supply via supplied connector
Interfaces
• RJ-45 jack Power over Ethernet
(48 V DC)
• 2 x 12 - 24 V DC supplies with optional power
supply adapter (available as accessory)
• 100 - 240 V AC with optional power supply
adapter (available as accessory)
Power supply isolated according to IEEE 802.3af,
isolation resistance > 2 Mohms.
Data
• RJ-45 jack for Ethernet
or on devices for FO cable:
1 x 2 BFOC sockets
• depending on version, up to six R-SMA antenna
sockets
Electrical data
Power consumption depending on power supply
PoE
12.9 W
48 V DC
12.9 W
12 - 24 V DC (adapter)
15 W
100 - 240 V AC
(adapter)
15 W
Construction
366
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
251 mm x 251 mm x 72 mm
Weight
(version with three IWLAN ports)
Without power supply
adapter
2241 g
With power supply
adapter 12 - 24 V DC
2428 g
With power supply
adapter
100 - 240 V AC
2433 g
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Transport/storage temperature
-40°C to 85°C
Degree of protection
Tested to IP65
MTBF information (mean time between failure)
MTBF
61 years
Specifications and order numbers
Type
Number of
WLAN ports
Number and
type of
Ethernet ports
Number of
internal
antennas
Number of RSMA sockets
for external
antennas
Order no.
W786-1PRO
1
1 RJ-45
1
(diversity(2))
—
6GK57861BA60-2AA0
6GK57861BA60-2AB0
(1)
W786-1PRO
1
1 RJ-45
—
2
6GK57861AA60-2AA0
6GK57861AA60-2AB0
(1)
W786-1PRO
1
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
1
(diversity(2))
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
1 RJ-45
2
(diversity(2))
—
6GK57861BB60-2AA0
6GK57861BB60-2AB0
(1)
W786-1PRO
1
2
6GK57861AB60-2AA0
6GK57861AB60-2AB0
(1)
W786-2PRO
2
—
6GK57862BA60-2AA0
6GK57862BA60-2AB0
(1)
W786-2PRO
2
1 RJ-45
—
4
6GK57862AA60-2AA0
6GK57862AA60-2AB0
(1)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
367
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.2 SCALANCE W-786 Access Points
Type
Number of
WLAN ports
Number and
type of
Ethernet ports
Number of
internal
antennas
Number of RSMA sockets
for external
antennas
Order no.
W786-2PRO
2
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
2
(diversity(2))
—
6GK57862BB60-2AA0
6GK57862BB60-2AB0
(1)
W786-2PRO
2
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
4
6GK57862AB60-2AA0
6GK57862AB60-2AB0
(1)
W786-3PRO
3
1 RJ-45
—
6
6GK57863AA60-2AA0
6GK57863AA60-2AB0
(1)
W786-3PRO
3
1 ST duplex
multimode FO
cable
—
6
6GK57863AB60-2AA0
6GK57863AB60-2AB0
(1)
(1) US variant
(2) There are two internal antennas per WLAN port. The antenna used is always the one that
provides the best possible data transmission (diversity).
368
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3
SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3.1
Certifications for SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
CE conformity
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1
in the version put into circulation by Siemens A&D conform to the regulations of the following
European directive:
● 99/5/EC
Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Conformity with the basic requirement of the directive is attested by adherence to the
following standards:
● EN 60950
Safety of information technology equipment
● EN 301489-1
Electromagnetic compatibility for radio equipment and services
● EN 301489-17
Specific requirements for broadband data transmission systems and for equipment in
local high-performance wireless networks (HIPERLAN)
● EN 300328
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum issues
● EN 301893
Broadband radio access networks (BRAN) – 5 GHz high-performance RLAN
● EN 50371
Compliance of low power electronic and electrical apparatus with the basic restrictions
related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields (10 MHz to 300 GHz)
● 1999/519/EC
Council recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz)
Devices connected to the system must meet the relevant safety regulations.
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Industrielle Kommunikation
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
369
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
This declaration certifies compliance with the directives named above, but does not
guarantee any specific properties.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
ATEX, cULus and FM approvals
The products
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1RR
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1
SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1
have the following approvals
● EN 60079-15
II 3 G Ex nA II T..
KEMA 07 ATEX 0145X
● c-UL-us:
UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No.
● c-UL-us for hazardous location*:
ISA 12.12.01-2000, CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
CL. 1, Div. 2 GP. A.B.C.D T..
CL. 1, Zone 2, GP, IIC, T..
CL. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T..
● FM 3611 Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T*
(T.. / T* = For concrete information on the temperature class, refer to the type plate)
WARNING
When used under hazardous conditions (Zone 2), the SCALANCE W784-1xx or W74x-1
product must be installed in an enclosure. To comply with EN 50021, this enclosure must
meet the requirements of at least IP 54 in compliance with EN 60529.
DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR COMBUSTIBLE
ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
Note
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
370
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Wireless approvals
For the current wireless approvals for these products, please visit
http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info.
7.3.2
Technical specifications of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
Device variants
The technical specifications apply to the following products:
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W784-1RR
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W744-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W746-1
● SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W747-1
Data transfer
Ethernet transfer rate
10/100 Mbps
Wireless transmission rate
1 ... 54 Mbps (108 Mbps)
Wireless standards supported
802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11h, 802.11i
Power supply standards supported
802.3af (Power over Ethernet)
Power
• Rated voltages 24 V DC or 48 V DC safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) (minimum permitted
voltage 18 V, maximum permitted voltage 57 V)
Interfaces
• RJ-45 jack Power over Ethernet
(48 V DC)
Power supply isolated according to IEEE 802.3af,
isolation resistance > 2 Mohms.
Data
• RJ-45 jack for Ethernet
• 2 R-SMA antenna sockets
Electrical data
Power consumption
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
5W
371
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Construction
Dimensions without antennas and adapter plate
(W x H x D)
100 mm x 205 mm x 20 mm
Weight
approx. 291 g
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-20°C to 60°C
Transport/storage temperature
-40°C to 70°C
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30
MTBF information (mean time between failure)
MTBF
67 years
7.3.3
Installation instructions and guidelines
7.3.3.1
Mounting without an adapter (wall mounting only)
Drilling template and procedure
The location of the holes for mounting the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 on a wall is
shown in the following figure:
372
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
205
s
110
30
L1
PoE
P1
R1
F
90
SCALANCE
20
15
5
20
100
Figure 7-13
Drilling template for wall mounting of a SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
Secure the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 to the wall using four screws. The screws are
not supplied with the device. The type and length of the screws depend on the type of wall.
Note
The minimum clearance between the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 and fluorescent
lamps should be 0.5 m.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
373
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3.3.2
Lightning protection, power supply, and grounding
Notes on lightning protection
WARNING
Danger due to lightning strikes
Antennas installed outdoors must be within the area covered by a lightning protection
system. Make sure that all conducting systems entering from outdoors can be protected by
a lightning protection potential equalization system.
When implementing your lightning protection concept, make sure you adhere to the VDE
0182 or IEC 62305 standard.
A suitable lightning conductor is available in the range of accessories of SIMATIC NET
Industrial WLAN:
Lightning protector LP798-1N (order no. 6GK5798-2LP00-2AA6)
WARNING
Danger due to lightning strikes
Installing this lightning protector between an antenna and a SCALANCE W-700 is not
adequate protection against a lightning strike. The LP798-1N lightening protector only
works within the framework of a comprehensive lightning protection concept. If you have
questions, ask a qualified specialist company.
Note
The requirements of EN61000-4-5, surge immunity tests on power supply lines, are met only
when a Blitzductor is used with 12 - 24 V DC and 48 V DC:
12 - 24 V DC: VT AD 24V type no. 918 402
48 V DC: Type no. 919 545 and 919 506 (holder)
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans Dehn Str. 1, Postfach 1640, D-92306
Neumarkt, Germany
374
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Safety extra low voltage
WARNING
Danger to life from overvoltage, fire hazard
SCALANCE W-700 devices are designed for operation with a directly connectable safety
extra-low voltage or with the power supply adapters available as accessories (available
only for the SCALANCE W786-xPRO device). Therefore only safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) with limited power source (LPS) complying with IEC950/EN60950/VDE0805 may
be connected to the power supply terminals (exception: Power supply adapter for 100 - 240
V AC for the SCALANCE W786-xPRO).
Take measures to prevent transient voltage surges of more than 40% of the rated voltage.
This is the case if you only operate devices with SELV (safety extra-low voltage).
The power supply unit to supply the SCALANCE W-700 must comply with NEC Class 2
(requirements of class 2 for power supply units of the "National Electrical Code, table 11
(b)") or SELV with LPS (Limited Power Source) EN 60950-1. If the power supply is
designed redundantly (two separate power supplies), both power supplies must meet these
requirements.
Exceptions:
• Power supply with PELV (according to VDE 0100-410 or IEC 60364-4-41) is also
possible if the generated rated voltage does not exceed the voltage limits 25 V AC or 60
V DC.
Grounding
CAUTION
Damage to the device due to potential differences
To avoid the influence of electromagnetic interference, the device should be grounded.
There must be no potential difference between the following parts, otherwise the device or
other connected device could be severely damaged:
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the ground potential of the antenna.
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the ground potential of a device connected over
Ethernet.
• Housing of the SCALANCE W-700 and the shield contact of the connected Ethernet
cable.
Connect both grounds to the same foundation earth or use an equipotential bonding cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
375
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Interruption of the power supply
CAUTION
Damage to the Ethernet interface
Repeated fast removal and insertion of the Ethernet cable when using Power-over-Ethernet
and when there is a redundant power supply can cause damage to the Ethernet interface.
Avoid repeatedly removing and inserting the Ethernet cable when using Power-overEthernet and a redundant power supply.
FM warning notice
When operated in potential hazardous areas:
WARNING - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR
DIVISION 2
WARNING - DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED
WARNING - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT
7.3.3.3
Connectors for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
Possible power supplies
The following power supplies are suitable for the SCALANCE W784-xx / W74x-1:
● 24 V DC or 48 V DC direct voltage
● Power over Ethernet (PoE)
If an eight-wire Ethernet cable is used, it is possible to supply power over the four wires
that are not used as data lines. As an alternative, the voltage can be modulated onto the
data lines ("phantom power")
If a Fast Connect Ethernet connector is used to allow cable assembly in the field and due
to its greater mechanical strength, you can only use four-wire cables. In this case, only
phantom power is possible.
376
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Procedure for connecting the supplied connector
24 V / 48 V
L1 M1 M2 L2
Figure 7-14
Connector for the power supply of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1. The screw
terminal is located as shown on the rear of the connector.
Perform the following steps to connect a power supply cable to a SCALANCE W784-1xx /
W74x-1:
1. Connect the supplied connector to the power supply cable. The figure above shows the
location of the socket in the housing and the contact assignment. The connector is
protected against polarity reversal. When connecting the wires, make sure that the
connector is oriented correctly.
2. Press the connector into the socket in the housing until it engages.
3. Make sure that there is suitable strain relief for the power cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
377
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3.3.4
Connection for Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet connector on the base of the housing
A
Figure 7-15
Connector for Industrial Ethernet on a SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
The Ethernet connector is located on the underside of the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
(position A in the figure above)
Insert the Ethernet connector into this jack until it locks in place. Make sure that there is
suitable strain relief for the Ethernet cable.
378
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3.3.5
Connectors for external antennas
How to connect antennas
A
L1
PoE
P1
R1
F
B
Figure 7-16
Connectors for external antennas on the top of a SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1
The figure above shows the location of the antenna sockets "A" and "B". Perform the
following steps to connect a cable for an external antenna to a SCALANCE W784-1xx /
W74x-1:
1. Insert the connector on the antenna cable into the R-SMA socket and tighten the sleeve
nut on the socket (key size SW8). The maximum tightening torque is 0.6 Nm.
2. Screw a terminating resistor to the unused socket if you are only using one antenna.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
379
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
7.3.3.6
Mounting with adapter plate
Fitting the adapter plate to an S7-300 standard rail
Procedure
A
B
Figure 7-17
Side view of an S7-300 standard rail (shown in gray) with an adapter plate fitted
Note
For cabinet installation, we recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on
directly neighboring mounting rails
Follow the steps below to fit the adapter plate to an S7-300 standard rail:
1. Place the adapter plate on the upper edge of the S7-300 standard rail (position A in the
figure above).
380
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
2. At the bottom of the adapter plate, there are two holes with recesses. Use these holes to
screw the adapter plate to the S7-300 standard rail. The required screws (position B in
the figure above) are supplied with the adapter plate.
The threaded holes at the bottom of the adapter plate are not suitable for screwing the
plate to the S7-300 standard rail.
Mounting the adapter plate on a 35 mm DIN rail
Procedure
A
B
Figure 7-18
Side view of a DIN rail (shown in gray) with an adapter plate fitted
Note
For cabinet installation, we recommend that you do not install relays on the same or on
directly neighboring mounting rails
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
381
Part C: SCALANCE W wireless network components
7.3 SCALANCE W-784 Access Points
Follow the steps below to fit the adapter plate to a DIN rail:
1. Place the adapter plate on the upper edge of the DIN rail (position A in the figure above).
2. Pull down the DIN rail sliding catch (position B in the figure above) and press the adapter
plate against the DIN rail until the sliding catch engages.
Mounting the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 on an adapter plate
L1
PoE
P1
R1
F
Procedure
s
A
SC
Figure 7-19
NC
LA
E
Screwing the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 to an adapter plate
Screw the SCALANCE W784-1xx / W74x-1 to the plate using the four M4 screws supplied
with the adapter plate. The maximum tightening torque for these screws is 0.7 Nm.
382
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE S security components
8.1
8
SCALANCE S certifications and approvals, degree of protection
Certifications
Table 8-1
Approvals
SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612, SCALANCE S613
c-UL-us (Information
Technology Equipment)
UL 60950; CSA C22.2 No. 60950
c-UL-us for hazardous locations
UL 1604, UL 2279Pt.15
FM
FM 3611
C-TICK
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
CE
EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
ATEX Zone 2
EN 50021
Degree of protection
Tested to IP30.
8.2
SCALANCE S installation and setup instructions
Installation
Installation is analogous to the SCALANCE X-100 modules.
Parameter settings
To operate the SCALANCE S, you must download a configuration created with the Security
Configuration Tool. To set the parameters, use the software application "Security
Configuration Tool" that ships with the product.
A SCALANCE S configuration includes the IP parameters and the setting for firewall rules
and, if applicable, the setting for IPsec tunnels (S612 / S613) or router mode.
Before putting the device into operation, you can first create the entire configuration offline
and then download it. For the first configuration (device with factory settings), use the MAC
address printed on the device.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
383
Part C: SCALANCE S security components
8.3 Display elements SCALANCE S
Depending on the application, you will download the configuration to one or more modules
during the commissioning phase.
Factory defaults
With the factory defaults (settings as supplied or after resetting to factory defaults), the
SCALANCE S behaves as follows after turning on the power supply:
● IP communication is not possible since the IP settings are missing; in particular, the
SCALANCE S does not yet have an IP address.
As soon as the SCALANCE S module is assigned a valid IP address during configuration,
the module can also be reached via a router (IP communication is then possible).
● The device has a fixed, default MAC address; the MAC address is printed on the device
and must be used during configuration.
● The firewall is preconfigured with the following basic firewall rules:
– Unsecured data traffic from internal port to external port and vice versa
(external ↔ internal) is not possible;
The unconfigured status can be recognized when the F LED is lit yellow.
See also
X-100 installation instructions and guidelines (Page 237)
8.3
Display elements SCALANCE S
Displays
The following LEDs exist on all SCALANCE S devices and in the same numbers:
● Fault indicator (red LED); Labeled: F):
Table 8-2
Display of the operating state
Status
Meaning
Lit red
Module detects a fault. (Signaling contact is open).
The following faults are detected:
• Internal error/fault (for example: startup failed)
• Invalid C-PLUG (invalid formatting)
Lit green
Module is in productive mode (signaling contact is closed).
Not lit
Module has failed; no power supply (signaling contact is open).
Lit yellow
Module in startup. (Signaling contact open).
If no IP address exists, the module remains in this status.
Flashes yellow and
red alternately
Module resets itself to factory settings. (Signaling contact open).
● Power indicator (red-green double LED; labeling: L1, L2):
384
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE S security components
8.3 Display elements SCALANCE S
The status of each power supply is indicated by a double LED:
Table 8-3
Status of the power supply
Status
Meaning
Lit green
Power supply L1 or L2 is connected.
Not lit
Power supply L1 or L2 not connected or < 14 V (L+)
Lit red
Power supply L1 or L2 failed during operation or < 14 V (L+)
● Port status displays (one green-yellow double LED per RJ-45 jack, labeling: P1 or P2 and
a yellow LED, labeling: TX
Table 8-4
Port status display P1 or P2
Status
Meaning
Lit green
TP link exists
Flashes / lit yellow
Receiving data at RX
Not lit
No TP link or no data being received
Table 8-5
Port status display TX
Status
Meaning
Flashes / lit yellow
Data being sent
Not lit
No data being sent
Operator controls
SCALANCE S devices have a reset button. The reset button is located on the rear of the
housing below a cover secured with screws immediately beside the C-PLUG. The reset
button is therefore mechanically protected against being activated accidentally.
Two functions can be triggered with the reset button:
● Restart
If the reset button is pressed for shorter than 5 seconds, the module is restarted. The
loaded configuration is retained.
● Reset to factory settings
If the reset button is pressed for longer than 5 seconds, the error LED starts to flash
yellow-red. The module is restarted and reset to the status set in the factory. A loaded
configuration is deleted. Resetting takes up to 2 minutes. During the reset, the fault LED
continues to flash yellow-red. The power supply must not be interrupted during this
procedure.
On completion of the reset, the device starts up again automatically. The fault LED is
then lit yellow.
If a C-PLUG is plugged in when you reset to factory settings, the C-PLUG is erased!
After pressing the button, the C-PLUG compartment must be closed again with the screw
cover.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
385
Part C: SCALANCE S security components
8.4 Connector pin assignments SCALANCE S
8.4
Connector pin assignments SCALANCE S
Connector pin assignments
They correspond to those of the SCALANCE X products and are described in the section
Common connector pin assignments.
See also
Common connector pin assignments of SCALANCE X devices (Page 230)
8.5
Dimension drawings for SCALANCE S
Dimensions of the SCALANCE S602, S612 and S613 modules
The dimension drawings of the SCALANCE S devices can be found in the SCALANCE X
reference section.
See also
SCALANCE X-100, SCALANCE X-200 and SCALANCE S dimension drawings (Page 244)
8.6
SCALANCE S technical specifications
Technical specifications
Table 8-6
Electrical data
SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612, SCALANCE S613
Power supply
Power loss at 24 V DC
Current consumption at 24 V
DC
Overvoltage protection at input
Voltage at signaling contact
Current through signaling
contact
Interference emission
Immunity
MTBF
386
2 x 24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
3.84 W
130 A at 24 V
Non-replaceable fuse (T 1.6 A / 250 V)
24 V DC
max. 100 mA
EN 61000-6-4 Class A
EN 61000-6-2
> 80 years
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: SCALANCE S security components
8.6 SCALANCE S technical specifications
Table 8-7
Mechanical data
SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612, SCALANCE S613
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
60 x 125 x 124
Weight
0.7 kg
Installation options
Table 8-8
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Environmental conditions
SCALANCE S602, SCALANCE S612
Operating temperature
0 °C - +60 °C
SCALANCE S613
-20 °C to +70 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +85 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (at 30 °C, no condensation)
Operating altitude
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to
Table 8-9
IP30
Order numbers
SCALANCE S612
6GK5612-0BA00-2AA3
SCALANCE S613
6GK5613-0BA00-2AA3
SCALANCE S602
6GK5602-0BA00-2AA3
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
387
9
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1
Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection OSM/ESM
Product name
The OSM/ESM products below meet the regulations listed if the corresponding symbols are
shown on the type plate:
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62 with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AA10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62 without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AA00
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AC10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AC00
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP53 with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AD10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP53 without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AD00
Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80 with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AA10
Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80 without digital inputs
6GK1105-3AA00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP 62 with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AB10
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP62 without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AB00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP80 with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AB10
Industrial Ethernet ESM TP 80 without digital inputs
6GK1105-3AB00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP22 with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AE00
Industrial Ethernet ESM TP40 with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AC00
Industrial Ethernet OSM BC08 with digital inputs
6GK1105-4AA00
CE mark
SIMATIC NET OSMs/ESMs meet the requirements of the following EC directives:
● Directive 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● Directive 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage
Limits" (Low Voltage Equipment Directive)
The EC Declaration of Conformity is available for the responsible authorities according to the
above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
389
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Industrielle Kommunikation (A&D SC IC)
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg, Germany
Area of application
The products are designed for use in an industrial environment:
Area of application:
Requirements
Emission
Requirements
Immunity
Industrial area
EN 50081-2 : 1993
EN 50082-2 : 1995
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore
no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this
product.
If the product is part of the equipment of a machine, it must be included in the procedure for
obtaining the declaration of conformity by the manufacturer of the machine.
Marking for Australia
C-Tick Mark, AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)
UL approval
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories UL 1950 / UL 60950 (Information Technology Equipment)
CSA approval
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standard Association CSA C22.2 No. 60950-00
FM Approval
FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T* and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
*) Temperature Class T4 or T4A, depending on model
390
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
WARNING
In hazardous areas, personal injury or damage to property may occur if you make or break
an electrical circuit while an OSM/ESM is in operation.
Do not connect or disconnect equipment when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is
present.
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
9.1.2
Installation instructions and guidelines for OSM/ESM
Housing, installation
The Industrial Ethernet OSMs and ESMs have a sheet steel casing with degree of protection
IP20. They are suitable for the following types of installation:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Installation in pairs in a 19" cubicle
● Wall mounting
The modules can be installed vertically, one beside the other with no spacing between.
Unobstructed convection of surrounding air is essential, in particular air must be able to
circulate freely through the ventilation openings of the OSM/ESM.
Preparations
1. Prior to installation, check whether the settings of the DIP switch are correct for your
application.
2. Remove the terminal block for the power supply and signaling contact from the OSM and
wire up the power supply and signal cables.
3. Only for OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs:
Where necessary, remove the terminal blocks for the digital inputs from the OSM/ESM
and wire up the input signals.
Installation on a DIN rail
1. Install the OSM/ESM on a 35 mm DIN rail complying with DIN EN 50022.
2. Place the upper catch of the OSM/ESM over the top of the DIN rail and then push in the
lower part of the device against the rail until it clips into place.
3. Connect the electrical and optical connecting cables, the terminal block for the power
supply and, where necessary, the standard cable 9/9 to the standby sync port.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
391
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Removing from the DIN rail
To remove the OSM/ESM from the DIN rail, pull the device down pull out the bottom part
away from the DIN rail.
Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
1. First secure the two supplied brackets on both sides of the OSM/ESM.
2. Place the upper guide at the top of the OSM housing in the S7 standard rail.
3. Secure the OSM/ESM with the supplied screws to the lower part of the rail.
Installation in pairs in a 19" cubicle
To install in pairs in the 19" cubicle, you require the two securing brackets supplied.
1. First screw the two OSMs/ESMs together using the supplied holding plate on the rear.
2. Fit two of the supplied brackets to the sides
3. Secure the two devices using the brackets in the 19" cubicle. Please note that the
OSM/ESM must be grounded with a low resistance via the two holding brackets.
Wall mounting
To install an OSM/ESM on a wall, follow the steps below:
1. Fit the supplied mounting brackets on the sides.
2. Secure the device to the wall using the brackets.
3. Connect the device to protective earth with a low-resistance connection via one of the
brackets.
The following table shows how to mount the device on different types of walls:
Wall
Mounting
Concrete wall
Use the four wall plugs (6 mm diameter and 30
mm long). (drill hole 6 mm in diameter, 45 mm
deep). To secure the device, use 4.5 mm
diameter and 40 mm long screws.
Metal wall
(min. 2 mm thick)
To secure the device, use 4 mm diameter screws
at least 15 mm long.
Sandwich type plaster walll
(min. 15 mm thick)
Use an anchoring plug with at least
4 mm diameter.
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the device.
392
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.3
Operator control and display elements of the OSM/ESM
9.1.3.1
"Status" LED display
Fault (red LED)
Status
Effect
Lit
The OSM/ESM has detected an error. At the
same time, the signaling contact opens.
Not lit
No problems detected by the OSM/ESM.
Stby – Standby (green LED)
This LED does not exist on the OSM TP22 and ESM TP40.
Status
Effect
Lit
The standby function is activated, the OSM/ESM
is in standby passive mode.
Not lit
The standby function is disabled.
flashes
The standby function is activated, OSM/ESM is in
the standby active mode; in other words, the
master OSM/ESM has failed and the standby
OSM/ESM takes over data traffic.
RM – Redundancy Manager (green LED)
Status
Lit
Effect
The OSM/ESM is operating in the redundancy
manager mode. The ring is operating free of
errors in other words the redundancy manager
does not allow traffic through but monitors the
ring.
Note: One OSM must operate in the redundancy
manager mode (and one only) in each OSM/ESM
ring.
Not lit
The OSM/ESM is not operating in redundancy
manager mode.
flashes
The OSM/ESM is in redundancy manager mode
and has detected a break on the ring. The
OSM/ESM makes the connection between its two
ring ports so that a functional linear configuration
is reestablished.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
393
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.3.2
"Power" LED display
Overview
The display mode of the "Power" LED can be switched over by briefly pressing the
"Select/Set" button on the front panel of the OSM/ESM. The valid display mode is indicated
by the display mode LEDs on the OSM/ESM.
Depending on the status of the display mode LEDs, the "Power" LED has the two following
display modes:
Display mode
Display mode LED
Power LED
Status of the power
supplies
In the following states of the display
mode LEDs, the Power LEDs
indicate the current status of the two
power supplies of the OSM/ESM:
Power LED L1 or L2
③②①
□ □ □ or
□ □ ♦ or
□ ♦ □ or
♦□□
Fault mask
In this display mode LED status, the
Power LED indicates the fault mask
status:
③②①
□♦♦
Lit green; in other words, power
supply 1 or 2 (line 1 or line 2) is
applied.
Not lit; in other words power
supply 1 or 2 (line 1 or line 2) is
lower than 14 V.
With the line 1 or 2 LEDs, the
fault mask indicates whether the
power supplies are monitored
with the signaling contact.
L1 or L2 LED
Lit green; in other words the
corresponding power supply
(line 1 or line 2) is monitored. If
the power supply falls below 14
V, the signaling contact
responds.
Not lit, in other words the
corresponding power supply
(line 1 or line 2) is not
monitored. If the power supply
falls below 14 V this does not
trigger the signaling contact.
The fault mask can be set again
with the button on the front
panel of the OSM/ESM.
("□" -- LED off, "♦" -- LED on, Note: LED 3 exists only on devices with digital inputs.)
The "Select/Set" button on the front panel of the OSM/ESM changes the display mode of the
display mode LEDs. Using this button, a new status can be programmed for the fault mask
394
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.3.3
Port LEDs
Overview
The port LEDs indicate the operating states of the individual ports of the OSM/ESM. On the
OSM/ESM variants with digital inputs, the state of the inputs is also indicated by the port
LEDs. To allow this, the OSMs/ESMs have an additional display mode. The display mode of
the port LEDs can be changed using the Select/Set button on the front panel of the
OSM/ESM allowing all operating states to be displayed. The current display mode is
signaled by the display mode LEDs.
Display mode
Mode LED status
Meaning of the Port LED
Port status
③②①
□□□
Not lit: No valid link to the port
(for example station turned off
or cable not connected)
Lit green: Valid link
Flashes green (once per
period): Port switched to
standby
Flashes green (twice per
period): Port is segmented
Flashes green (three times per
period): Port is turned off
Flashes green (four times per
period): Port is mirrored port
Flashes / lit yellow: Data
reception on this port
100 Mbps
③②①
□□♦
Lit green: Port operating at 100
Mbps
Not lit: Port operating at 10
Mbps
Full duplex
③②①
□♦□
Lit green: Port operating in full
duplex mode
Not lit: Port operating in half
duplex mode
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
395
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Display mode
Mode LED status
Meaning of the Port LED
Fault mask
③②①
□♦♦
The fault mask indicates
whether the ports and the power
supplies are monitored with the
signaling contact.
Lit green: Port is monitored; in
other words, if the port does not
have a valid connection (for
example cable not plugged in or
attached device turned off), the
signaling contact is triggered.
Not lit: The port is not
monitored; in other words, an
invalid or valid connection at the
port does not trigger the
signaling contact.
The fault mask can be set again
with the button on the front
panel of the OSM.
Digital Inputs
③②①
♦□□
Lit green: The logical state "1" is
applied to the corresponding
digital input. This requires an
input voltage of + 13 V DC to +
30 V DC.
Not lit: The logical state "0" is
applied to the corresponding
digital input. This requires an
input voltage of –30 V DC to + 3
V DC.
("□" -- LED off, "♦" -- LED on, Note: LED 3 exists only on devices with digital inputs.)
9.1.3.4
Operator controls
Two-pin DIP switch
The two-pin DIP switches on the upper casing of the OSM/ESM have the following functions:
● The standby function can be enabled or disabled with the Stby switch.
This switch has no function on the OSM TP22 and ESM TP40.
● With the RM switch, you can activate the redundancy manager function.
Figure 9-1
396
Functions of the "Stby" and "RM" DIP switches
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Note
Please restart the device after changing DIP switch settings. The switch setting is
adopted only when the device starts up.
"Select/Set" button
The "Select/Set" button on the front panel of the OSM/ESM has the following functions
● Pressing the button briefly moves on the display of the port LEDs (display mode). The
current display mode is indicated by the display mode LEDs.
● If the display is in the port status (all display mode LEDs off) and if the button is pressed
for three seconds, the display mode LEDs begin to flash. If you then continue to press the
button for a further two seconds, the OSM/ESM is reset.
When it is reset, all the settings of the OSM/ESM are set to their defaults (as set in the
factory). This allows you to cancel settings made, for example, with Web-Based
Management (WBM) (see also OSM/ESM Network Management, User Manual).
● If the display is in the fault mask status and you press the button for two seconds, the
display LEDs start to flash. If you then press the button for a further two seconds, the
current status of the ports and the supply voltages are entered in the fault mask. This
means, if, for example, the ports 1, 5, 6 had a valid connection (in other words the port
status displays of these ports are lit green or yellow) and if power supply 1 was active at
the point when the values were entered in the fault mask, ports 1, 5, 6 and power supply
1 will then be monitored.
Note
If the "Select/Set" button is pressed while the device is starting up (takes approximately
20 seconds) after turning on the OSM/ESM, the OSM/ESM changes to the load firmware
status (all display mode LEDs flash simultaneously). This status is exited by pressing the
button again.
9.1.4
Connector and outlet pin assignment
9.1.4.1
Interface pin assignments
ITP ports
In the ITP variant of the OSM/ESM, the end devices are attached via D-sub female
connectors. The casings of the connectors are electrically connected to the housing of the
OSM. A screw locking mechanism holds the connectors firmly in place.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
397
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Figure 9-2
ITP port
TP ports
With OSM TP62, OSM TP22, ESM TP40, and ESM TP80 modules, the end devices are
connected via RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment (Medium Dependent Interface
Crossover).
Fiber-optic ports
The FO ports have BFOC/2.5(ST) female connectors. They monitor the connected cable for
wire breaks complying with the IEEE 802.3 100 Base-FX standard. A break on the FO cable
is always signaled by the port status display of both connected OSMs (status LED of the port
goes off).
Note
The FO ports operate at the fixed transmission rate of 100 Mbps. An optical link, for
example, to OLM (10 Mbps) is not possible.
Standby-sync port
A 9-pin female connector is used to connect the ITP XP standard cable 9/9 for the redundant
standby coupling. The casing of the connector is electrically connected to the housing of the
OSM/ESM.
The OSM TP22 and ESM TP40 do not have a standby-sync port.
A screw locking mechanism holds the connectors firmly in place.
398
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Figure 9-3
Standby-sync port
Serial port
OSM/ESM modules have an RS-232 interface. This is used for the following purposes:
● Firmware updates
● Management with the aid of the command interpreter (Command Line Interpreter, CLI)
including setting of the IP address information
Figure 9-4
Serial port
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
399
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Signaling contact/terminal block fir connecting the power supply
The connection of the power supply and the signaling contact is made using a 6-pin plug-in
terminal block with a screw locking mechanism.
WARNING
Industrial Ethernet OSMs/ESMs are designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage.
This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with IEC950/EN60950/
VDE0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals and the signaling contact.
The power supply unit to supply the OSM/ESM must comply with NEC Class 2 (voltage
range 18 - 32 V, current requirement 1 A)
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra-low
voltage (SELV), 24 V DC).
Exceptions:
* Power supply with PELV (according to VDE 0100-410) is also possible if the generated
rated voltage does not exceed the voltage limits 25 V AC or 60 V DC.
* Power supply by a SELV power source (according to IEC 60950) or PELV power source
(according to VDE 0100-410) without limited power is also permitted if suitable fire
protection measures are taken by:
- Installation in a cubicle
- Installation in a suitable enclosure
- Installation in a suitably equipped, closed room.
Figure 9-5
400
Signaling contact/terminal block for power supply
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Power supply
The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no
distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the
higher output voltage supplies the OSM/ESM alone.
Digital Inputs
In the case of the OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs, the states of these inputs are available in a
management information base (MIB) and can be read with an SNMP get request. Depending
on the configuration of the device, changes at these inputs can also trigger the sending of Emails, SNMP traps and/or entries in the log of the OSM/ESM. The use of these functions is
described in the OSM/ESM Network Management User Manual /1/.
The digital inputs are attached using six-pin plug-in terminal blocks with screw locking
mechanisms.
WARNING
The input voltage must not exceed +30 V DC or fall below -30 V DC.
Figure 9-6
Digital Inputs
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
401
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.5
Dimension drawing
9.1.5.1
Optical Switch Module (OSM)
Outer dimensions and installation clearances for the OSM ITP62, OSM ITP62-LD, ITP53
Figure 9-7
402
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITPxx (dimensions in mm)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Outer dimensions and installation clearances for the OSM TP62
Figure 9-8
Industrial Ethernet OSM TPxx (dimensions in mm)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
403
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Side view of the OSM
Figure 9-9
Industrial Ethernet OSM (side view; dimensions in mm)
Cable type
Required clearance*
9pin D-sub connector for user assembly on ITP
standard cable
approx. 160 mm
Preassembled cables
ITP Standard Cable 9/x
approx. 95 mm
ITP XP Standard Cable 9/x
approx. 95 mm
Preassembled cables
404
TP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
ITP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
TP Cord 945/x (45° cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
TP XP Cord 945/x (45° cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.5.2
Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Outer dimensions of the ESM ITP80
Figure 9-10
Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80 (dimensions in mm)
Outer dimensions of the ESM TP80
Figure 9-11
Industrial Ethernet ESM TP80 (dimensions in mm)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
405
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Outer dimensions and installation clearances for the ESM ITP80/TP80 (side view)
Figure 9-12
Industrial Ethernet ESM (side view; dimensions in mm)
Cable type
Required clearance*
9pin D-sub connector for user assembly on ITP
standard cable
approx. 160 mm
Preassembled cables
ITP Standard Cable 9/x
approx. 95 mm
ITP XP Standard Cable 9/x
approx. 95 mm
Preassembled cables
406
TP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
ITP Cord 9/x (horizontal cable outlet)
approx. 95 mm
TP Cord 945/x (45° cable outlet)
approx. 65 mm
TP XP Cord 945/x (45° cable outlet)
approx. 65 mm
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.6
Components supplied with the OSM/ESM
Components supplied with the OSM/ESM
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM incl.
● Terminal block for the power supply
● Fittings for wall mounting
● Product information
● CD with Operating Instructions and "Network Management" manual
Order number
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM See catalog IK PI
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet ESM See catalog IK PI
Accessories
SIMATIC NET ITP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET ITP XP Standard Cable
SIMATIC NET FIBER OPTIC glass FOC
SIMATIC NET TP Cord
SIMATIC NET FC Outlet RJ-45
SIMATIC NET FC TP cables
You will find ordering data in the catalog IK PI.
WARNING
The Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage.
This means that only safety extralow voltages (SELV) complying with IEC 950/EN
60950/VDE 0805 may be connected to the power supply terminals
or the signaling contact.
For more detailed information on the OSM/ESM, refer to the "Industrial Ethernet
OSM/ESM" operating instructions.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
407
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
9.1.7
Technical specifications
Interfaces
Connecting end devices or network segments
over twisted pair / Industrial Twisted Pair
6 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on OSM ITP62 and OSM
ITP62-LD
5 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on OSM ITP53
8 x 9-pin D-sub sockets on ESM ITP80
2 x RJ-45 jacks on OSM TP22
4 x RJ-45 jacks on ESM TP40
6 x RJ-45 jacks on OSM TP62
8 x RJ-45 jacks on ESM TP80
All electrical ports support 10/100 Mbps
autonegotiation.
OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs:
The electrical ports support autocrossover.
Standby-sync port for redundant coupling of rings
1 x 9-pin D-sub female connector
(not OSM TP22, ESM TP40)
Attachment of further OSMs and end devices via
FO
2 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM ITP 62, OSM
ITP62-LD, OSM TP62 and OSM TP22
3 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM ITP 53
8 x 2 BFOC sockets on OSM BC08
(100 Mbps, 100BaseFX, full duplex)
Connector for power supply and signaling contact 1 x 6-pin plug-in terminal block
Power supply
(redundant inputs isolated)
2 x 24 V DC power supplies (18 to 32 V DC)
safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power supply voltage connected over high
resistance with housing (not electrically isolated).
Tested to IEC 6100-4-5, 1995 "Surge Immunity
Test", performed with lightning protection device
DEHN Blitzductor VT AD 24V, article no. 918 402
Power loss at 24 V DC
20 W
Load on the signaling contact
24 V DC / max. 100 mA safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
Current consumption at rated voltage
1000 mA
Overvoltage protection at input
Non-replaceable fuse (1.6 A / 250 V / time lag)
Digital Inputs
Input voltage:
Rated value 24 V DC safety extra-low voltage
(SELV)
For state "1": +13 ...+30 V
For "0" state: –30 ... +3 V
Max. input current: 8 mA
Max. cable length: 30 m
Inputs isolated from electronics.
408
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Permitted cable lengths
FO cable length between two OSMs
For OSM ITP62, OSM ITP53, OSM TP62, OSM
TP22:
0-3000 m (62.5/125 μm glass fiber; 1 dB/km at
1300 nm; 600 MHz*km; 6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
0-3000 m (50/125 μm glass fiber; 1 dB/km at
1300 nm; 600 MHz*km; 6 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
For OSM ITP62-LD:
0-26000 m (10/125 μm single mode fiber; 0.5
dB/km at 1300 nm; 13 dB max. permitted FO
cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin)
ITP cable length
0 - 100 m
TP cable length
0-10 m with TP cord
up to 100 m total length when using the
FastConnect cabling system
Length of the ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 at
standby-sync port
0 - 40 m
Linear/star structure
Any (only depending on signal propagation time)
Redundant ring
50 (for reconfiguration time < 0.3 s)
Cascading depth
Switching properties of OSM/ESM
Number of learnable addresses
Up to 7000
Aging time
40 s (default)
Latency
4 µs (measured at 75% load between two ports
operating at 100 Mbps)
Switching procedure
Store and forward
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 °C to +60 °C
(OSM ITP62-LD: 0 °C to +55 °C)
Storage/transport temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
‹ 95% (at 25 °C, no condensation)
Operating altitude
Max. 2000 m
Interference emission
EN 55081 Class A
Immunity
EN 50082-2
Laser protection
Class 1 complying with IEC 60825 -1
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
409
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
217 x 156.5 x 69
Weight in g
1400
Installation options
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounted
Installation in 19" cubicle
Only horizontal installation permitted
(ventilation slit top/bottom)
Scope of supply
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM
Fittings for 19" cubicle installation/wall mounting
6-pin plug-in terminal block for power supply and signaling contact
One to two 6-pin plug-in terminal blocks for OSMs/ESMs with digital inputs
Documentation on the CD
Order numbers
410
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62
with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AA10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62
without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AA00
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD
with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AC10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD
without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AC00
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP53
with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AD10
Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP53
without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AD00
Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80
with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AA10
Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80
without digital inputs
6GK1105-3AA00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP 62
with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AB10
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP62
without digital inputs
6GK1105-2AB00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP80
with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AB10
Industrial Ethernet ESM TP 80
without digital inputs
6GK1105-3AB00
Industrial Ethernet OSM TP22
with digital inputs
6GK1105-2AE00
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.1 Optical Switch Module (OSM) and Electrical Switch Module (ESM)
Industrial Ethernet ESM TP40
with digital inputs
6GK1105-3AC00
Industrial Ethernet OSM BC08
with digital inputs
6GK1105-4AA00
Triaxial networks for Industrial Ethernet manual
6GK1970-1AA20-0BA0
Accessories
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
411
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
9.2
Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
9.2.1
Certifications and approvals, degree of protection ELS
Approvals
Table 9-1
ELS TP40, ELS TP40M and ELS TP80
UL
CSA
FM
C-TICK
CE
Shipbuilding approval
UL 1950
CSA C22.2 No. 950
FM 3611
AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).
yes
-
Degree of protection
Tested to IP20.
9.2.2
Installation instructions and guidelines ELS
Housing, installation
The ELS has a robust sheet steel casing with degree of protection IP20. They are suitable
for the following types of installation:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Installation in a 19" cubicle (along with other ELS modules in the 19" mounting system)
● Wall mounting
Note
Remember that the ELS must only be installed horizontally (ventilation slits top/bottom
see Figure 4). To ensure adequate convection, there must be a clearance of at least 5 cm
above and below the ventilation slits. You should also make sure that the permitted
ambient temperature range is not exceeded.
Preparations
Remove the terminal block from the ELS and wire up the power supply lines
412
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Installation on a DIN rail
1. Install the ELS on a 35 mm DIN rail complying with DIN EN 50022.
2. Place the upper catch of the ELS over the top of the DIN rail and then push in the lower
part of the device against the rail until it clips into place.
3. Install the electrical connecting cables and the terminal block for the power supply.
Removing from the DIN rail
1. To remove the ELS from the DIN rail, first disconnect the TP cables and pull off the
terminal block.
2. Then pull down the device and release it from the rail.
Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
1. First secure the supplied brackets to the left and right of the ELS.
2. Place the upper guide at the top of the ELS housing in the S7 standard rail.
3. Screw the ELS to the bottom of the standard rail.
Installation in a 19" cubicle
To install in the 19" cubicle, you require the securing brackets supplied. You can achieve the
19'' width
• with 3 ELS devices
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. First screw the ELS switches to the supplied mounting plates at the rear.
2. Fit two of the supplied brackets to the sides
3. Secure the devices using the brackets in the 19" cubicle.
Wall mounting
To install an ELS on a wall, follow the steps below:
1. Fit the supplied mounting brackets on the sides of the ELS.
2. Secure the device to the wall using the brackets and fittings suitable for the wall in
question.
3. Using one of the brackets or the PE screw terminal, connect the device with protective
earth with as low a resistance as possible.
Note
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the
device.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
413
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Grounding
● 19" cubicle: Please note that the ELS must be grounded with a low resistance via the two
holding brackets. It is also possible to ground the device using the PE screw terminal on
the terminal block.
● Installation on a DIN rail: The device is grounded either via the DIN rail or the PE screw
terminal on the terminal block.
● Wall mounting: Please note that the ELS must be grounded with a low resistance via the
two holding brackets. It is also possible to ground the device using the PE screw terminal
on the terminal block.
● S7 standard rail: The device is grounded either via the two mounting brackets or the PE
screw terminal on the terminal block.
Connecting the IE FC TP Cable to the ELS TP40 or ELS TP40M
When connecting the IE FC cables, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Strip the insulation from the FC TP cable with the IE FastConnect stripping tool. (Refer to
the instructions for the IE FC stripping tool, Order no. 6GK1901-1GA00)
2. Remove the protective foil from the cores and remove the support element between the
cores.
3. Open the cover of the TP ports with insulation piercing contacts.
4. Open the two contact covers.
5. Arrange the wires according to the color code of the contact cover of the TP ports with
insulation piercing contacts.
6. Insert the wires of the IE FC TP cable into the contact cover according to the color code.
7. Press down both contact covers to establish contact with the cores.
8. Close and screw down the cover of the TP ports with insulation piercing contacts.
9.2.3
Operator control and display elements of the ELS
LEDs
ELS modules have the following LED displays:
● Power display: The status of the ELS TP40M is indicated by a green and a red LED, on
the ELS TP40 and ELS TP80, a green LED is used.
● The status of each TP interface is indicated by a green/yellow LED:
414
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
9.2.4
Connector pin assignments
Power supply
The connection of the power supply on all ELS is made using a 3-pin plug-in terminal block
with a screw locking mechanism. A suitable terminal block is supplied with all ELS devices.
The power supply is connected over a high resistance with the enclosure to allow an
ungrounded set up. The ELS TP80 can also be grounded via the PE screw terminal on the
terminal block.
No signaling contact
The ELS devices do not have a signaling contact.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
415
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
9.2.5
Dimension drawings of the ELS
Massstab / Scale: 1:1
Format / Size: DIN A2
Links / Left
62.3
54
6GK11026AA00_001
Dimension drawings
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
Vorne / Front
Oben / Top
144.5
130
Figure 9-13
416
Dimension drawing ELS 40
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Figure 9-14
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
Oben / Top
Vorne / Front
144.5
Links / Left
62.3
54
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Massstab / Scale: 1:1
6GK11026AB00_001
Format / Size: DIN A2
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Dimension drawing ELS TP40M
417
130
Figure 9-15
418
Alle Bemassungswerte sind in Millimeter (mm) angegeben.
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm).
Oben / Top
Vorne / Front
144.5
Links / Left
62.3
54
Format / Size: DIN A2
Massstab / Scale: 1:1
6GK11027AA00_001
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Dimension drawing ELS TP80
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
130
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
9.2.6
Technical specifications of the ELS
Technical specifications of the Industrial Ethernet ELS
Table 9-2
Electrical data
ELS TP40
ELS TP40M
Transmission rate
ELS TP80
10/100 Mbps
Power supply
24 V DC (18 - 32 V DC) safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Power consumption
150 mA
Power loss at 24 V DC
3.6 W
Overvoltage protection at input
200 mA
150 mA
4.8 W
3.6 W
PTC resettable fuse (0.6 A / 60 V)
Aging time
5 minutes
Interference emission
EN 61000-6-4
Immunity
EN 61000-6-2
MTBF
108.85 years
51 years
81.52 years
Interfaces
Depending on the variant, the following TP interfaces are available:
● Twistedpair port (RJ-45): TP cords or TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can
be connected to the RJ-45 TP port. In conjunction with IE FC outlet RJ-45, a total cable
length of up to 100 m is permitted.
● Twisted pair interface as insulation piercing contacts: IE FC TP cables with a maximum
length of up to 100 m can be connected to the TP interfaces with insulation piercing
contacts.
Table 9-3
Interfaces
ELS TP40
RJ-45 jacks
Insulation piercing contacts
Connector for power supply
ELS TP40M
ELS TP80
2 x (10/100 Mbps; TP)
8 x (10/100 Mbps; TP)
2 x (10/100 Mbps)
-
1 x 3-pin terminal block (L1+ (24 V), M, PE)
Further data
Table 9-4
Environmental conditions
ELS TP40
Operating temperature
Storage/transport temperature
Relative humidity in operation
Operating altitude
ELS TP40M
ELS TP80
0 °C - +60 °C
-40 °C - +80 °C
< 95% (no condensation)
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
IP20
419
Part C: OSM, ESM and ELS
9.2 Electrical Lean Switch (ELS)
Table 9-5
Mechanical data
ELS TP40
ELS TP40M
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
145 x 126.5 x 62.5
Weight
Installation
ELS TP80
950 g
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall mounting
Installation in a 19" cubicle. Only horizontal installation
permitted(ventilation slit top/bottom)
Order numbers
420
Industrial Ethernet ELS TP40
6GK1 102-6AA00
Industrial Ethernet ELS TP40M
6GK1 102-6AB00
Industrial Ethernet ELS TP80
6GK1 102-7AA00
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.1
10
Overview: Media, cables and connectors
Overview of the available types of cable, connectors and accessories
Twisted Pair-networks
Fiber Optic-networks
Wireless link
Star, linear bus, ring, tree
Star, linear bus, ring, tree
Wireless network
FastConnect cables
ITP-Standard Cable
TP Cord
FO Standard Cable
FO Ground Cable
FO Trailing Cable
POF Standard Cable
POF Trailing Cable
PCF Standard Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable
over FC RJ 45 Plug and
FastConnect cables
ITP Standard Cable
ITP XP Standard Cable
TP Cord, TP XP Cord
TP Converter Cord
FO Standard Cable
FO Ground Cable
FO Trailing Cable
POF Standard Cable
POF Trailing Cable
PCF Standard Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable GP
PCF Trailing Cable
Endgeräteanschluss über OMC
over RJ 45 Plug and
FastConnect cables
ITP Standard Cable
ITP XP Standard Cable
TP Cord, TP XP Cord
TP Converter Cord
Outlet RJ45
FC Stripping Tool
FC RJ 45 Plug
FC RJ45 Modular Outlet
9-pin ITP sub-D connector
15-pin ITP sub-D connector
BFOC connectors
further components
on request
SC connectors
SC RJ connectors
Antennas
(incl. RCoax Cable)
Not relevant since twisted-pair
only used in the indoor area
Not applicable
Lightning protector
Transmission media
Device connection
Tools and accessories
Lightning converter
Manual for TP and fiber optic networks
Documentation
Figure 10-1
Included in SCALANCE W
scope of supply
G_IK10_XX_10014
Network topology
Product overview of cables and connectors
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
421
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.2 Contacts for special cables and special lengths
10.2
Contacts for special cables and special lengths
Contacts for special cables and special lengths
If you require special cables and special lengths of the cable types, please contact:
Jürgen Hertlein
SIEMENS A&D SE PS 1
E-mail: juergen.hertlein@siemens.com
Tel.: + + 49 (911) 750-4465
Telefax: + 49 (911) 750-9991
10.3
Notes on installation of electrical and optical bus cables
General
Note
For detailed information on laying electrical and optical bus cables, refer to the Appendix.
See also
Laying bus cables (Page 574)
422
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4
Components for electrical networks
10.4.1
Twisted Pair Cord
10.4.1.1
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet)
Design
The cable consists of two pairs of wires each pair twisted together (PIMPF structure). Each
pair is shielded with an aluminum foil. The outer shield is a tinplated copper braid mesh. The
outer sheath is PVC.
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by a plastic laminated aluminum foil with an external contact
surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a braided shield of tinplated
copper wires (coverage approximately 88%).
Wire pair 2 (white/orange)
Wire pair 1 (white/blue)
Jacket (green)
Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP CORD CAT5 (600MHz)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foil)
Plastic foil
Jacket (green)
Plastic foil
Wire pair 2 (white/orange)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foils)
Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Figure 10-2
Wire pair 1 (white/blue)
Structure of the twopair IE TP CORD (PIMF)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
423
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Label
The IE TP CORD is labeled as follows:
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP CORD CAT5 (600MHz)".
Technical specifications
Table 10-1
Electrical data of the IE TP Cord 2x2 at 20 °C
Cable category complying
with EN 50173
CAT5
DC loop resistance
maximum
300 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
minimum
150 MΩ x km
maximum
5.7 dB
Attenuation/100 m
at 4 MHz
10 MHz
9.0 dB
100 MHz
28.5 dB
49.5 dB
300 MHz
Near end crosstalk loss
(NEXT)/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 4 MHz
minimum
80 dB
10 MHz
80 dB
100 MHz
72.5 dB
300 MHz
65 dB
at 1...100 MHz
100 Ω +15/-15 %
10...600 MHz
100 Ω +10/-10 %
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
maximum
10 mΩ/m
Return loss
at 1...20 MHz
minimum
23 dB
20..0.100 MHz
23 dB - 10log(f/20)
Longitudinal conversion loss
at 64 KHz
minimum
43 dB
Capacitance unbalance pair
to ground
at 1 KHz
maximum
1600 pF/km
effective value
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz
- conductor/conductor
1 min
700 V
- conductor/shield
1 min
700 V
424
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-2
Mechanical data of the IE TP 2x2 Cord
Standard code
LI 02YSCY 2x2x0.15/0.98 PIMF ICCS GN
Core diameter to AWG 26
0.5 mm
Core diameter with PE jacket
0.98 mm
Approx. thickness of PVC outer sheath
approx. 0.5 mm
Outer diameter
3.7 x 5.8 +/- 0.2 mm
Permitted bending radius:
over the flat side
Multiple bends
> 60 mm
Single bend
> 40 mm
Permitted tensile force
≤ 48 N
Temperature range:
Operation
-40 °C to +70 °C
Installation/assembly
-20 °C to +50 °C
Transport/storage
-40 °C to +70 °C
Net weight
33 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
Resistance to fire
Flameretardant complying with DIN VDE 0472, Part 804 test type B
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant to mineral oils and fats
Silicone-free
yes
The available preassembled IE TP Cord 2x2 cables are listed in the section Preassembled
Twisted Pair Cord cables.
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair cords (Page 451)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
425
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4.1.2
Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet)
Design
The cable consists of four pairs of wires. Each wire has a PE jacket. The pairs are twisted
together. Each pair is shielded with an aluminum foil. The outer shield is a tinplated copper
braid mesh. The material of the outer jacket is FRNC (flame-retardant, non-corrosive).
Figure 10-3
Structure of the Twisted Pair Cord (8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet)
Label
The IE TP CORD is labeled as follows:
"meter markers" SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET TP Cord 4x2
CAT6 * AWM STYLE 21283 *
426
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Technical specifications
Table 10-3
Electrical data of the IE TP Cord 4x2 at 20 °C
Cable category complying
with EN 50173
CAT6
DC loop resistance
maximum
290 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
minimum
500 MΩ x km
maximum
5.5 dB
Attenuation/100 m
Near end crosstalk loss
(NEXT)/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 4 MHz
10 MHz
8.6 dB
100 MHz
28.0 dB
300 MHz
50.1 dB
at 4 MHz
minimum
80 dB
10 MHz
80 dB
100 MHz
72.4 dB
300 MHz
65.3 dB
at 1...300 MHz
100 Ω +15/-15 %
300..00.600 MHz
100 Ω +25/-25 %
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
maximum
10 mΩ/m
Return loss
at 10 MHz
minimum
25 dB
Capacitance unbalance pair
to ground
100 MHz
20.1 dB
350 MHz
17.3 dB
at 1 KHz
Dielectric strength at 50 Hz
maximum
1600 pF/km
effective value
- conductor/conductor
1 min
700 V
- conductor/shield
1 min
700 V
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
427
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-4
Mechanical data of the IE TP 4x2 Cord
Standard code
LI 02YSCH 4x2x0.15 PIMF GN FRNC
Core diameter to AWG 26
0.5 mm
Core diameter with PE insulation
1.0 mm
Approx. thickness of FRNC outer sheath
approx. 0.5 mm
Outer diameter
(6.2 +/- 0.3) mm
Permitted bending radius:
Multiple bends
7 x outer diameter
Single bend
5 x outer diameter
Temperature range:
Operation
-25 °C to +70 °C
Installation/assembly
-20 °C to +50 °C
Transport/storage
-25 °C to +70 °C
Net weight
50 kg/km
Free of halogens
yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
Silicone-free
yes
The available preassembled IE TP Cord 4 x 2 cables are listed in the section "Preassembled
Industrial Twisted Pair and twisted pair cables".
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables (Page 451)
10.4.2
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables
10.4.2.1
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 4-wire for 100 Mbps Ethernet
Design
The FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cable is a shielded cable with a symmetrical radial design
and 100 W characteristic impedance. The cable consists of 4 conductors arranged as a star
quad.
The IE FC Standard Cable and IE FC Food Cable have solid cores, the other cables (the
IE FC Trailing Cable, the IE FC Trailing Cable GP, the IE FC Flexible Cable GP, the
IE FC Marine Cable, the IE FC Torsion Cable and the IE FC FRNC Cable and IE FC
Festoon Cable) have stranded cores.
428
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Cores
(star quad)
Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Jacket
Plastic foil
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET FC TP
Plastic laminated
aluminum foil
Inner jacket
Dummy core
Core
aluminum foil
Outer jacket
Inner jacket
Figure 10-4
Dummy core
Outer braided shield
Plastic foil
Basic structure of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cable
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
429
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-5
Product overview of the IE FC Cable 2 x 2 (PROFINET-compliant according to PROFINET
Installation Guide 1))
PROFINET Type A
PROFINET Type B
PROFINET Type C
AWG 22/1
rigid cable
AWG 22/7 flexible cable for
occasional movement
AWG 22
highly flexible cable for
constant movement, for
example drag chains or
robots
IE FC TP Standard Cable
GP 2 x 2
(Type A)
6XV1 840-2AH10
X
-
-
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP
2x2
(Type B)
6XV1 870-2B
-
X
-
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP
2x2
(Type C)
6XV1 870-2D
-
-
X
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2
(Type C)
6XV1 840-3AH10
-
-
X
IE TP Torsion Cable GP
2x2
(Type C)
6XV1 870-2F
-
-
X
IE FC TP FRNC Cable GP
2x2
(Type B)
6XV1 871-2F
-
X
-
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2
(Type B)
6XV1 840-4AH10
-
X
-
1) Available as download from www.profibus.com
430
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-6
Electrical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type 1)
IE FC Standard Cable GP
2 x 2 (Type A)
IE FC flexible cable GP
2 x 2 (Type B)
IE FC torsion cable GP
2 x 2 (Type C)
Areas of application
Universal application
Occasional movement
Use in robots
Cable specification
Cat 5E
Cat 5E
Cat 5E
at 10 MHz
typically 5.2 dB/100 m
typically 6 dB/100 m
typically 7.6 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
typically 19.5 dB/100 m
typically 21 dB/100 m
typically 41 dB/100 m
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
typically ≥ 50 dB/100 m
typically ≥ 50 dB/100 m
≥ 50 dB/100 m
at 10 MHz
≤ 115 Ω/km
≤ 100 mΩ/m
≤ 100 mΩ/m
DC loop resistance
≤ 124 Ω/km
≤ 120 Ω/km
≤ 120 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
> 500 MΩ x km
> 500 MΩ x km
> 500 MΩ x km
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug
100 m
85 m
55 m
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
90 m
75 m
45 m
Electrical data (at 20 °C)
Attenuation
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
Near end crosstalk loss
at 1-100 MHz
Transfer impedance
Transmission range
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
431
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-7
Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type
IE FC Standard
Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A)
IE FC flexible cable GP
2 x 2 (Type B)
IE FC torsion cable GP
2 x 2 (Type C)
Cabling
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.64/1.5-
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-
02YS (ST) C11Y 1 x 4 x 0.7
(Standard code)
100 GN
100LI GN
5/1.5-100LI GN VZN FRNC
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.64 mm, AWG22
0.75 mm, AWG22
0.76 mm, AWG22
Core insulation
PE Ø 1.5 mm
PE Ø 1.5 mm
PE ∅ 1.5 mm
Inner jacket
PVC Ø 3.9 mm
PVC Ø 3.9 mm
Ø 4.6 mm
Jacket
PVC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
PVC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
PUR Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
Transport/storage
temperature
-40 ºC to +75 ºC
-10 ºC to +70 ºC
-40 ºC to +80 ºC
Installation temperature
-40 ºC to +75 ºC
-40 ºC to +70 ºC
-40 ºC to +80 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
multiple
7.5 x ∅
8x∅
15 x ∅
single
3x∅
5x∅
5x∅
Bending cycles
-
-
- 4)
Permitted tensile force
≤ 150 N
≤ 150 N
≤ 130 N
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Permitted bending radius
Weight approx.
approx. 67 kg/km
approx. 68 kg/km
approx. 54 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
no
yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Flame retardant to
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Flame retardant to
IEC 60332-1-2
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
Conditionally resistant
Conditionally resistant
UL listing / 300 V rating
yes/CM/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res yes/CM/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res UL Style 21161
UL style / 600 V rating
yes
no
no
CCC certificate 5)
Not necessary
Not necessary
Not necessary
UV resistance
yes
yes
yes
Fast Connect cable structure
yes
yes
no
Silicone-free
yes
yes
yes
432
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-8
Electrical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type 1)
IE FC Trailing
Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)
IE FC Trailing
Cable 2 x 2 (Type C)
IE FC Marine
Cable 2 x 2 (Type B)
Areas of application
Use in drag chains
Use in drag chains
Marine and offshore use 2)
Cable specification
Cat 5E
Cat 5E
Cat 5E
at 10 MHz
6.3 dB/100 m
6.3 dB/100 m
6 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
22.3 dB/100 m
22.3 dB/100 m
22 dB/100 m
100 Ω ± 5 Ω
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
≥ 50 dB/100 m
≥ 50 dB/100 m
≥ 50 dB/100 m
at 10 MHz
≤ 10 mΩ/m
≤ 10 mΩ/m
≤ 10 mΩ/m
DC loop resistance
≤ 120 Ω/km
≤ 120 Ω/km
≤ 120 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
> 500 MΩ x km
> 500 MΩ x km
> 500 MΩ x km
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug
85 m
85 m
85 m
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
75 m
75 m
75 m
Electrical data (at 20 °C)
Attenuation
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
Near end crosstalk loss
at 1-100 MHz
Transfer impedance
Transmission range
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
433
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-9
Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type
IE FC Trailing
Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)
IE FC Trailing
Cable 2 x 2 (Type C)
IE FC Marine
Cable 2 x 2 (Type B)
Cabling
(Standard code)
2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-1
00 LI GN
2YH (ST) C11Y 2 x 2 x 0.75/
1.5-100 LI GN VZN FRNC
L-9YH (ST) CH 2 x 2 x 0.34/
1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.75 mm, AWG22
0.75 mm, AWG22
0.75 mm, AWG22
Core insulation
PE Ø 1.5 mm
PE Ø 1.5 mm
PP Ø 1.5 mm
Inner jacket
PVC Ø 3.9 mm
FRNC Ø 3.9 mm
FRNC Ø 3.9 mm
Jacket
PVC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
PUR Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
FRNC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
Transport/storage
temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
-40 ºC to +75 ºC
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Installation temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
-50 ºC to +75 ºC
-40 ºC to +70 ºC
-10 ºC to +60 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
0 ºC to +50 ºC
multiple
7.5 x ∅
7.5 x ∅
15 x ∅
single
5x∅
3x∅
6x∅
Bending cycles
3 million 3)
4 million 3)
-
Permitted tensile force
≤ 150 N
≤ 150 N
≤ 150 N
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Permitted bending radius
Weight approx.
approx. 68 kg/km
approx. 63 kg/km
approx. 68 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
yes
yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Flame retardant to
IEC 60332-1
Flame test to IEC 603323-22; flame retardant to
UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
Conditionally resistant
Conditionally resistant
UL listing / 300 V rating
yes/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res
yes/CMX
yes/CM/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res
UL style / 600 V rating
yes
no
no
CCC certificate 5)
Not necessary
Not necessary
Not necessary
UV resistance
yes
yes
yes
Fast Connect cable structure
yes
yes
yes
Silicone-free
yes
yes
yes
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C, tested to DIN 0472
2) Shipbuilding approvals:
- Germanischer Lloyd
- Lloyds Register of Shipping
- Bureau Veritas
- Det Norske Veritas
- ABS Europe LTD
3) at a bending diameter of 200 mm
434
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
4) Torsion-resistant cable for the following requirements:
min. 5 million torsion movements on 1 m cable +/- 180 º
5) All SIMATIC NET cables with order numbers beginning 6XV1 do not require a CCC
certificate (confirmation available)
Application
● IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2:
Standard bus cable with rigid cores and specially designed for fast assembly. Four rigid
conductors are arranged as a star quad.
● IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2:
Flexible bus cable for special applications with occasional movement; four wires
(stranded) arranged as a star quad.
● IE FC Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement, for example for
use in robots; stranded cores.
● IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement in a in a drag
chain, for example for permanently moving machine parts; not halogen-free; four wires
(stranded) arranged as start quad.
● FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2:
Highly flexible bus cable for special applications with constant movement in a in a drag
chain, for example for permanently moving machine parts; halogen-free; four wires
(stranded) arranged as start quad.
● IE FC Marine Cable 2 x 2:
Bus cable specially for use on ships; halogen-free, certified for shipbuilding; four wires
(stranded) arranged as star quad.
Advantages
For structured cabling in the factory
● Time-saving due to simple and fast installation with FastConnect cables to the Industrial
Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 and IE FC RJ-45 Plug with insulation piercing technique.
● Convenient stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool, with which the outer jacket and
braid shield can be removed to the perfect length in one step.
● Versatile application due to special bus cables
● High noise immunity due to double shielding
● Easy length measurement with printed meter markers
● Exceeds the requirements of category 5 (CAT5e) of the international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
● Silicone-free and therefore suitable for use in the automobile industry (for example in
paint shops)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
435
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Notes on Installation
The bus cables are sold in meters.
FastConnect
Using the IE FastConnect stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield of IE FastConnect cables
can be stripped to correct lengths in a single action. This allows the Outlet RJ-45 and the IE
FC R-45 Plug to be connected quickly and simply to the Industrial Ethernet FC cable.
Reduced length
Due to the stranded cores used in the cable variants, the signal attenuation is higher. For
precise values, refer to the above tables in the electrical data. Make sure that you take this
into account in your configuration.
Do not assemble with D-sub connectors
FastConnect twisted-pair cables are not suitable for the use of Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub
connectors due to their diameter. If you assemble Industrial Twisted Pair cables yourself with
D-sub connectors, use only Industrial Twisted Pair cable!
Laying cables
During storage, transport, and installation, the bus cables must be closed at both ends with a
shrink-on cover. Make sure that you do not exceed the bend radii and tensile stress!
Table 10-10 Ordering data
Order number
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A)
6XV1 840-2AH10
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet
RJ-45 for general application, 4-wire, shielded, sold in meters,
maximum length available 1000 m, minimum length available 20 m.
IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B)
6XV1 870-2B
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for occasional movement;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)
6XV1 870-2D
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for drag chains;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
6XV1 840-3AH10
IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C)
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180/90 for drag chains;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
436
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Order number
IE TP Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)
6XV1 870-2F
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug for use with robots;
PROFINET-compliant; with UL approval;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC TP FRNC Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B)
6XV1 871-2F
TP installation cable for connection to FC OUTLET RJ-45, 4-wire,
shielded, CAT 5, sold in meters, maximum length available 1000 m,
minimum length available 20 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B)
6XV1 840-4AH10
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to
IE FC Outlet RJ-45/ IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180/90 shipbuilding certified;
sold in meters; maximum length available. 1000 m, minimum length
available 20 m
IE FC Stripping Tool
6GK1 901-1GA00
Preset insulation stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet
FC cables
IE FC blade cassettes (12 mm)
6GK1 901-1GB00
Cassette with spare blades for the Industrial Ethernet Stripping Tool;
for use with IE FC Outlet RJ-45, ELS TP40, set of 5
IE FC blade cassettes (5 mm)
6GK1 901-1GB01
Cassette with spare blades for the Industrial Ethernet Stripping Tool;
for use with IE FC RJ-45 Plugs and IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet, set of
5
IE FC Outlet RJ-45
6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0
For connecting Industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP Cords;
graduated price as of 10 and 50 connectors
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for
network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack of 1
1 pack of 10
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 90
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for
ET 200S
1 pack of 1
1 pack of 10
1 pack of 50
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0
437
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Order number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for
SIMOTION and SINAMICS
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0
1 pack of 50
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection
6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0
Electronic manuals for communication systems, protocols, products;
on CD-ROM;
German/English
10.4.2.2
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire for Gigabit Ethernet
Cable structure
&RSSHUZLUH$:*
,QQHUMDFNHWKDORJHQIUHH
&RUHLQVXODWLRQ
7ZLVWHGSDLUV
)RLODQGEUDLGHGVKLHOG
&HQWUDOHOHPHQW
2XWHU39&MDFNHW
Figure 10-5
FastConnect (FC) twisted-pair cables 8-wire
Design
The FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cable IE FC Cable 4x2 has a particularly robust
design for industrial applications. Its shielded, symmetrical, radial structure allows the use of
the IE FC stripping tool.
438
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-11 Electrical data of the 8-wire FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cable:
Cable type 1)
IE FC standard cable GP 4x2
Areas of application
Universal application
Cable specification
Cat 6
Attenuation
at 10 MHz
typically 6.0 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
typically 19.9 dB/100 m
at 250 MHz
typically 33.0 dB/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
Near end crosstalk loss
at 10 MHz
typically 59.3 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
typically 44.3 dB/100 m
at 250 MHz
typically 38.3 dB/100 m
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
≤ 10 mΩ/m
DC loop resistance
≤ 118 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
> 5000 MΩ x km
Transmission range
with IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet RJ-45
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
90 m
439
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-12 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type 1)
IE FC standard cable GP 4x2
Cabling
SF/UTP 4x2xAWG22
(Standard code)
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.64 mm; AWG22
Core insulation
PE Ø 1.25 mm
Inner jacket/thickness
LSOH approx. 0.6 mm
Jacket/outer diameter
PVC Ø (9.6 ± 0.3) mm; green
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
Transport/storage temperature
-40 ºC to +70 ºC
Installation temperature
-40 ºC to +70 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
Permitted bending radius
in operation
55 mm
during installation
80 mm
Bending cycles
-
Permitted tensile force
≤ 180 N
Total weight approx.
115 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
UL approval
CMG, PLTC
UL style / 600 V rating
-
CCC certificate
yes
UV resistance
no
Fast Connect cable structure
yes
Silicone-free
yes
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 0472
Application
The IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2 is an 8-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection
to IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet for universal application. It is a standard bus cable with rigid
cores and is specially designed for fast assembly with corresponding UL approval (general
purpose) for installation in cable bundles and on cable racks according to the regulations of
the NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.
440
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Notes on Installation
The bus cables are sold in meters and have meter markers printed on them.
Using the IE FC stripping tool, the outer jacket and shield of IE FC 4x2 cables can be
stripped to correct lengths in a single action. This allows the IE FC RJ-45 modular outlet to
be connected quickly and simply to the IE FC 4x2 cable.
Note: The user may need to readjust the IE FC stripping tool 6GK1 901-1GA00 for the 4x2
cable variant. The two setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be
opened by approximately half a turn. An IE FC stripping tool preset for 4x2 cables is in
preparation.
Laying cables
During storage, transport, and installation, the bus cable must be closed at both ends with a
shrink-on cover. Make sure that the bend radii and tensile stress are not exceeded!
Label
The IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2 has the following printed on it every meter:
SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET FC TP STANDARD CABLE GP 4x2
CAT6 6XV1870-2E AWG22 SUN RES OIL RES (UL) CMG FT4 E137929 + "lot" + "meter
marker"
Table 10-13 Ordering data
Order number
IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2
6XV1 870-2E
TP installation cable for attachment to Industrial Ethernet FC RJ-45
Modular Outlet for general application, 8-wire, shielded, sold in
meters, maximum length available 1000 m, minimum length available
20 m
IE FC Stripping Tool
6GK1 901-1GA00
Insulation stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC
cables
10.4.2.3
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
Application
With its flexible cores (stranded wires), this halogen-free cable is suitable for applications
with occasional movement. The cable has the FastConnect cable structure and can
therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping tool and can be assembled with all
FastConnect IE connectors.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
441
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-14 Electrical data of the IE FC TP FRNC Cable GP 2x2:
Cable type 1)
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
Areas of application
Machine parts that are moved occasionally
Cable specification
Cat5e
Attenuation
at 10 MHz
at 100 MHz
6 dB/100 m
22 dB/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
100 ± 15 Ω
Near end crosstalk loss
at 1-100 MHz
≥ 50 dB/100 m
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
≤ 10 mΩ/km
DC loop resistance
≤ 120 Ω/km
Dielectric resistance
≥ 500 MΩ km
Transmission range
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
85 m
75 m
Table 10-15 Mechanical data of the IE FC TP FRNC Cable GP 2x2:
Cable type (standard code)
L-9YH(ST)CH 2X2X0.34/1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.75 mm (AWG 22)
Core insulation
PP, Ø 1.5 mm
Inner jacket
FRNC, Ø 3.9 mm
Jacket
PE Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-40 ºC to +70 ºC
Installation temperature
0 ºC to +50 ºC
Permitted bending radius
multiple
15 x Ø
single
6xØ
Bending cycles
-
Permitted tensile force
≤ 150 N
Weight
approx. 68 kg/km
Free of halogens
Yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-3-22
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
UL listing / 300 V rating
CMG/PLTC/Sun Res
UL style / 600 V rating
No
UV resistance
Yes
Fast Connect cable structure
Yes
442
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Cable type (standard code)
L-9YH(ST)CH 2X2X0.34/1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC
Silicone-free
Yes
Shipbuilding approvals
-
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472
Table 10-16 Ordering data
Order number
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2x2
10.4.2.4
6XV1 871-2F
IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2 and IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2
Application
With its PE outer jacket and stranded wires, the IE FC TP food cable is especially suitable
for applications in the food, beverages and tobacco sector. The cable has the FastConnect
cable structure and can therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping tool and can be
assembled with all FastConnect IE connectors.
Due to its mechanical design (stranded wires and PUR outer jacket), the IE FC Festoon
Cable GP 2x2 is especially suitable for festoon applications on cranes. The cable has the
FastConnect cable structure and can therefore by stripped with the FastConnect stripping
tool and can be assembled with all FastConnect IE connectors.
Table 10-17 Electrical data of the IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2 and IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2:
Cable type 1)
IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2
(PROFINET Type C)
IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2
(PROFINET Type B)
Areas of application
Food, beverages and tobacco industry
Festoon cables
Cable specification
Cat5e
Cat5e
at 10 MHz
6.9 dB/100 m
6.0 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
23.5 dB/100 m
23.5 dB/100 m
at 1-100 MHz
100 ± 15 Ω
100 ± 15 Ω
Near end crosstalk loss
≥ 50 dB/100 m
≥ 50 dB/100 m
≤ 10 mΩ/km
≤ 10 mΩ/km
DC loop resistance
≤ 120 Ω/km
≤ 120 Ω/km
Dielectric resistance
≥ 500 MΩ km
≥ 500 MΩ km
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug
85 m
85 m
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
75 m
75 m
Attenuation
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
Transmission range
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
443
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-18 Mechanical data of the FastConnect (FC) twisted pair cables
Cable type (standard code)
2YH(ST)C2Y 2x2x0.75/1.5-100LI
2YY(ST)CY 2x2x0.75/1.5 LI GN
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.25 mm (AWG 22)
0.25 mm (AWG 22)
Core insulation
PE, Ø 1.5 mm
PE, Ø 1.5 mm
Inner jacket
FRNC, Ø 3.9 mm
PVC, Ø 3.9 mm
Jacket
PE Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
PVC Ø (6.5 ± 0.2) mm
Operating temperature
-40 ºC to +75 ºC
-40 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-45 ºC to +75 ºC
-45 ºC to +75 ºC
Installation temperature
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
multiple
0.05 m
0.07 m
single
0.02 m
0.03 m
Perm. ambient conditions
Permitted bending radius
Bending cycles
-
5 million
Permitted tensile force
≤ 150 N
≤ 150 N
Weight
approx. 55 kg/km
approx. 68 kg/km
Free of halogens
Yes
No
Resistance to fire
-
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
Conditionally resistant
UL listing / 300 V rating
-
Yes / CMG/PLTC/SUNRES/OIL RES
UL style / 600 V rating
-
Yes
UV resistance
Yes
Yes
Fast Connect cable structure
Yes
Yes
Silicone-free
Yes
Yes
Shipbuilding approvals
-
-
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 0472 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472
Table 10-19 Ordering data
Order number
444
IE FC TP Food Cable 2x2
6XV1 871-2L
IE FC Festoon Cable GP 2x2
6XV1 871-2S
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4.3
IE Hybrid Cable
Cable structure
Figure 10-6
Structure of the IE Hybrid Cable
Design
The cables for data transmission have a shielded, symmetrical, radial design. Four cables for
power transmission are arranged around them. The entire cable is surrounded by a 1 mm
thick green FRNC jacket.
Due to the different structure compared with FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cables,
the IE FC stripping tool cannot be used.
Table 10-20 Technical specifications of the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34:
Cable type 1)
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Areas of application
Universal application
Data line:
Cable specification
CAT 5e
Attenuation
at 10 MHz
typically 7.5 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
typically 26 dB/100 m
Characteristic impedance
at 1-100 MHz
100 Ω ± 15 Ω
Near end crosstalk loss
at 10 MHz
typically 50.3 dB/100 m
at 100 MHz
typically 35.3 dB/100 m
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
≤ 10 mΩ/m
DC loop resistance
≤ 120 Ω/km
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
445
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Cable type 1)
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
DC insulation resistance
> 500 MΩ x km
Range with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
80 m + 5 m IE TP Cord
Power supply line:
Cable resistance
< 54 Ω/km
Max. current per core
< 0.35 A
DC insulation resistance
> 20 MΩ x km
Operating voltage (peak)
< 100 V
Table 10-21 Mechanical specifications of the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34:
Cable type 1)
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Data line:
Cable type (standard code)
2YH(ST)C 2x2x0.75/1.5LI
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.76 mm; 7 x 0.25 (AWG22)
Core insulation
PE; Ø 1.6 mm
Power supply line:
Cable type (standard code)
4 x LIH 1x0.34/1,6; 2 x black, 2 x brown
Inner wire diameter (copper)
0.76 mm; 7 x 0.25 (AWG22)
Core insulation
FRNC; Ø 1.5 mm
Entire cable:
Cable type (standard code)
2YH(ST)C 2x2x0.75/1.5LI
LIH H 2x2x0.34/1.6 GN FRNC
Jacket/outer diameter
FRNC; green / (8.5 + 0.2 - 0.4) mm
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature; no current over power supply cores
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Operating temperature; max. 0.35 A per power supply core
-25 ºC to +65 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Installation temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Permitted bending radius
- single
5 x cable diameter
- multiple
10 x cable diameter
Bending cycles
-
Permitted tensile force
≤ 260 N
Total weight approx.
105 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant
UL approval
CMG, PLTC
UL style / 600 V rating
yes
CCC certificate
yes
UV resistance
yes
446
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Cable type 1)
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Fast Connect cable structure
no
Silicone-free
yes
1) Electrical properties at 20 °C; tested to DIN 0472
Notes on Installation
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 is available in meters.
Due to its design, it is not possible to use the IE FC stripping tool.
To keep the voltage drop over the power supply cable as low as possible, the two cables
with the same color should be connected in parallel. Please note that the power supply
voltage at the input to the cable must be higher than the minimum permitted power supply of
the device being supplied by the amount of power drop over the outward and return
conductor. On the other hand, the power supply voltage must not exceed the maximum
permitted power supply of the device being supplied when no current is flowing.
The specified current of 0.35 A per wire of the power supply cable means a maximum
current of 0.7 A when two wires are connected in parallel for the outward and return cables.
Note that in this case, with an 80 m long IE Hybrid Cable, the voltage input must be >= 24 V
to supply the consumer with a voltage of at least 20.4 V.
If the maximum permitted current over the power supply cables is exceeded permanently,
the data transmission characteristics of the data lines can no longer be guaranteed. Their
attenuation characteristics deteriorate with increasing temperature. For this reason, if 0.35 A
is applied to each wire, the lower maximum ambient temperature of +65 °c applies.
Label
The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 has the following printed on it:
"continuous length in meters" SIEMENS SIMATIC NET IE Hybridcable 2x2 +
4x0.34 6XV1870-2J CAT V * 22AWG (SHIELDED) (UL) E119100 CMG 75°C or PLTC or
AWM 21287 600V FT4 SUN RES
Order number
Order number
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
6XV1 870-2J
Flexible cable; 4 x Cu CAT 5e, shielded (AWG 22) and 4 x CU (0.34
mm2 per core) for IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert and
Hybrid cable connector IP67; available in meters; maximum length
available 1000 m.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
447
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4.4
Industrial Twisted Pair cables (ITP)
Structure of the ITP Standard Cable for Industrial Ethernet
The standard cable is designed as a 100 ohm S/STP cable
(Screened/Shielded Twisted Pair) with two pairs of wires. The basic element consists of two
twisted wires along with two blind elements, known as a twisted pair.
The wires are solid copper covered by an insulation layer of cellular polyethylene which is
further covered by a noncellular foam skin. The color coding of the conductors can be seen
in Table 4-2. The outer sheath is green PVC.
Table 10-22 Color coding of the pairs
Pair
1
2
Conductor a
white
White
Conductor b
blue
Orange
Shielding
Each pair of wires is shielded by two plastic laminated aluminum foils with an external
contact surface. All the pairs making up the cable are surrounded by a braided shield of tinplated copper wires (coverage approximately 90%).
Wire pair 2 (white/orange)
Wire pair 1 (white/blue)
Jacket (green)
Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Dummy
elements
(wire pair 1)
I 0086m SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP 6XV1 850-0AH10
Meter marker
(consecutive number)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foils)
Plastic foil
Dummy elements
(wire pair 2)
Jacket (green)
Plastic foil
Wire pair 2 (white/orange)
Pair shielding
(plastic laminated
aluminum foils)
Outer braided shield
(tin-plated copper braid)
Wire pair 1 (white/blue)
Dummy element
Figure 10-7
448
Structure of the 2 x 2-wire Industrial Twisted Pair standard cable
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Label
The standard cable has the following printed on it
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP 6XV1850-0AH10 (meter marker)".
There are markers printed at one meter intervals. These make it simple to check the length
of the cable.
Structure of the ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet
The structure is basically the same as that of the standard cable. In contrast to the standard
cable, the outer jacket is of halogen-free material (FRNC).
Label
The FRNC cable has the following printed on it
"SIEMENS SIMATIC NET INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET ITP FRNC CABLE
CAT5 6XV1851-0AH10* 22AWG (SHIELDED) (UL) E119100 CMG 75°C or
PLTC FT4 SUN RES (meter marker)".
Table 10-23 Electrical data of the ITP Standard Cable and ITP FRNC Cable at 20 °C
Cable category complying
with EN 50173
CAT5
DC loop resistance
maximum
124 Ω/km
DC insulation resistance
minimum
5 GΩ x km
maximum
3.6 dB
Attenuation/100 m
at 4 MHz
10 MHz
5.7 dB
100 MHz
18.0 dB
Near end crosstalk loss
(NEXT)/100 m
at 1 to 300 MHz
Characteristic impedance
at 1...100 MHz
minimum
80 dB
100 Ω +15/-15 %
100...300 MHz
100 Ω +45/-30 %
Transfer impedance
at 10 MHz
maximum
2 mΩ/m
Return loss
at 1...100 MHz
minimum
23 dB
minimum
43 dB
Capacitance unbalance pair
to ground
maximum
3400 pF/km
Operating voltage
effective value
≤ 165 V
100...300 MHz
Longitudinal conversion loss
at 64 KHz related to 100 m
cable
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
15 dB
449
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-24 Mechanical data of the ITP Standard Cable and ITP FRNC Cable
ITP Standard Cable for
Industrial Ethernet
ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet
Standard code
J-02YSCY 2x2x0.64/1.5 PIMF F GN
J-02YSCY 2x2x0.64/1.5 PIMF F GN
Core diameter to AWG 22
0.64 mm
0.64 mm
Outer diameter
approx. (6.0 x 9.4) mm
approx. (6.0 x 9.4) mm
Thickness of the jacket approx.
approx. 0.8 mm
approx. 0.8 mm
Permitted bending radius:
over the flat side
over the flat side
under tensile strain during installation
approx. 48 mm
approx. 48 mm
FRNC
after installation without tensile strain
approx. 33 mm
approx. 33 mm
Permitted tensile force
≤ 80 N
≤ 80 N
Operation
-40 °C to +80 °C
-40 °C to +80 °C
Installation/assembly
-25 °C to +80 °C
-25 °C to +80 °C
Transport/storage
-40 °C to +80 °C
-40 °C to +80 °C
Copper number
46 kg/km
46 kg/km
Net weight
90 kg/km
98 kg/km
Free of halogens
no
yes
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to VDE 0482-265-2-1
IEC 60332-1
Flame retardant to VDE 0482-266-2-4
IEC 60332-3-24)
Resistance to oil
Conditionally resistant to mineral oils
and fats
Conditionally resistant to mineral oils
and fats
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Temperature range:
Special notes on installation
The maximum total length of a segment is 100 m. To obtain the best transmission
characteristics, the segment should consist of one single section of cable. In special
situations (for example when using two cabinet feedthroughs), the segment can consist of up
to three separate sections of cable.
The excellent transmission characteristics of the entire system can be guaranteed only when
SIEMENS Industrial Ethernet network components are used exclusively.
Assembling cables with twistedpair D-sub connectors
When assembling Industrial Twisted Pair cables yourself, make sure that you only combine
the ITP standard cable for Industrial Ethernet or the ITP FRNC cable for Industrial Ethernet
with the SIMATIC NET ITP D-sub connector for assembly on site. The dimensions of these
two components match each other.
Cannot be connected to IE FC Outlet RJ-45, IE FC RJ-45 Plug and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
The two ITP cables are not suitable for connection to the IE FC Outlet RJ-45, IE FC RJ45 Plug and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet due to their diameters. Use the FastConnect (FC)
twisted pair cables for this.
450
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Versions available
The two ITP cables are available either by the meter without connectors or with 9 and 15-pin
D-sub connectors.
At the network component end, metal 9-pin D-sub male connectors are used, at the device
end 15-pin connectors. The 15-pin connectors have a special jumper with which the modules
with integrated twisted-pair transceiver can switch from AUI to twisted pair mode.
The following preassembled cables use the Industrial Twisted Pair cables:
● ITP Standard Cable 9/15
● ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
● ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15
● ITP FRNC Cable 9/15
The XP supplement means that this is a crossover cable.
10.4.5
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables
10.4.5.1
Preassembled twisted-pair cords
Twisted-pair (TP) cables (cord)
The flexibility of the cords allows simple installation, for example in a wiring closet or to
connect devices in a control room with low EMI levels.
A maximum of 10 m of twisted-pair cord can be used between two devices. With structured
cabling using two twisted-pair patch cables, this length is the maximum for both patch cables
together.
Adapter cables are used to connect devices with a D-sub port to devices with an RJ-45 port.
To convert the RJ-45 interface of an end device to a 15-pin D-sub interface of the ITP
cabling system, the TP converter cord 15/RJ-45 can be used.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
451
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Overview
The following twisted-pair cables are available:
Table 10-25 Data of the preassembled twisted-pair cables
Cable
name
Application
Available
lengths
MLFB
IE TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ-45 plugs
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 870-3QE50
6XV1 870-3QH10
6XV1 870-3QH20
6XV1 870-3QH60
6XV1 870-3QN10
IE TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
Crossover TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ-45 plugs
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 870-3RE50
6XV1 870-3RH10
6XV1 870-3RH20
6XV1 870-3RH60
6XV1 870-3RN10
IE TP Cord 9/RJ-45
TP cable 2 x 2
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2JE50
6XV1 850-2JH10
6XV1 850-2JH20
6XV1 850-2JH60
6XV1 850-2JN10
with a 9-pin D-sub male connector and an RJ-45
plug
IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45
Crossover TP cable 2 x 2 with a 9-pin D-sub
male connector and an RJ-45 plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2ME50
6XV1 850-2MH10
6XV1 850-2MH20
6XV1 850-2MH60
6XV1 850-2MN10
IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP cable 2 x 2 with an RJ-45 plug and a D-sub
male connector with 45° cable outlet (only for
OSM/ESM)
1.0 m
6XV1 850-2NH10
IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
TP crossover cable 2 x 2 with an RJ-45 plug and
a D-sub male connector with 45° cable outlet
(only for OSM/ESM)
1.0 m
6XV1 850-2PH10
IE TP XP Cord 9/9
Crossover TP cable 2 x 2 for direct connection of
two Industrial Ethernet network components with
ITP interface with two 9-pin D-sub male
connectors
1.0 m
6XV1850-2RH10
IE TP Cord RJ-45/15
TP cable 2 x 2 with a 15-pin D-sub male
connector and an RJ-45 plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2LE50
6XV1 850-2LH10
6XV1 850-2LH20
6XV1 850-2LH60
6XV1 850-2LN10
IE TP XP Cord RJ-45/15
Crossover TP cable 2 x 2 with a 15-pin
D-sub male connector and an RJ-45 plug
0.5 m
1.0 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
10.0 m
6XV1 850-2SE50
6XV1 850-2SH10
6XV1 850-2SH20
6XV1 850-2SH60
6XV1 850-2SN10
For a full list of the order numbers (MLFB), refer to the IK PI catalog
452
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Connector pinout
Network component
End device
Pin
Function
blue
3
RD+
white
6
RD-
Orange
1
TD+
white
2
TD-
Pin
Housing, shield
RJ-45 plug
Function
3
TD+
6
TD-
1
RD+
2
RD-
RJ-45 plug
a) Connector pinout of the TP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
End device
End device
Function
Function
Pin
RD+
3
RD-
6
white
orange
white
2
TD-
Pin
blue
1
TD+
Housing, shield
RJ-45 plug
3
RD+
6
RD-
1
TD+
2
TD-
RJ-45 plug
b) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord RJ-45/RJ-45
End device
Network component
Function
Housing, shield
TD+
Pin
5
TD-
9
1
RD+
6
RD-
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
9-pin D-sub connector
Function
3
RD+
6
RD-
1
TD+
2
TD-
RJ-45 plug
c) Connector pinout of the TP Cord 9/RJ-45
Figure 10-8
Connector pin assignment of the TP cords
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
453
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Network component
Network component
Function
TD+
TDRD+
RD-
Housing, shield
Pin
Pin
blue
5
white
9
orange
1
white
6
9-pin D-sub connector
Function
3
TD+
6
TD-
1
RD+
2
RD-
RJ-45 plug
d) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 9/RJ-45
Network component
Function
Pin
TD+
TDRD+
RD-
End device
Function
Housing, shield
Pin
blue
5
white
9
orange
1
white
6
9-pin D-sub connector
3
RD+
6
RD-
1
TD+
2
TD-
RJ-45 plug
e) Connector pinout of the TP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
Network component
Function
TD+
TD-
Pin
5
9
RD+
1
RD-
6
Network component
Housing, shield
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
9-pin D-sub connector
Function
3
TD+
6
TD-
1
RD+
2
RD-
RJ-45 plug
f) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ-45
Figure 10-9
454
Connector pin assignment of the TP cords
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Network component
Network component
Function
RD+
Housing, shield
Pin
1
6
RD-
1
RD+
white
6
RD-
5
TD+
9
TD-
white
9
TD-
blue
orange
5
TD+
Function
Pin
9-pin
D-sub male connector
9-pin
D-sub male connector
g) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 9/9
End device
Function
RD+
RDTD+
TDCoding for
Switchover
AUI/ITP interface
Network component
Pin
Housing, shield
Pin
blue
5
white
12
orange
3
white
10
6
Function
3
TD+
6
TD-
1
RD+
2
RD-
RJ-45 plug
7
15-pin D-sub connector
h) Connector pinout of the TP Cord 15/RJ-45
End device
Function
Housing, shield
RD+
Pin
5
RD-
12
TD+
TDCoding for
Switchover
AUI/ITP interface
3
10
End device
Pin
blue
white
orange
white
6
Function
3
RD+
6
RD-
1
TD+
2
TD-
RJ-45 plug
7
15-pin
D-sub male connector
i) Connector pinout of the TP XP Cord 15/RJ-45
Figure 10-10 Connector pin assignment of the TP cords
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
455
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
(QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
(QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV
DV
DV
75'3
5'
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
75'1
5'
75'3
75'1
7'
7'
75'3
75'1
75'3
75'1
(QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
75'3
5'
75'1
5'
75'3
75'1
7'
75'3
75'1
75'3
75'1
5'
5'
7'
7'
ZKLWHJUHHQ
5'
75'3
*UHHQ
5'
75'1
75'3
75'1
ZKLWHRUDQJH
7'
RUDQJH
7'
EOXH
75'3
75'1
75'3
75'1
ZKLWHEOXH
ZKLWHEURZQ
EURZQ
(QGGHYLFHHQGGHYLFH
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQWQHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV
DV
DV
7'
8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV
DV
DV
(QGGHYLFH
QHWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
8VHZLWK
0ELWV0ELWV
DV
DV
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
ZKLWHRUDQJH
5'
75'3
5'
75'1
ZKLWHJUHHQ
7'
*UHHQ
7'
75'3
75'1
RUDQJH
ZKLWHEURZQ
EURZQ
EOXH
ZKLWHEOXH
75'3
75'1
75'3
75'1
Figure 10-11 Connector pin assignment of the IE TP Cord RJ-45_RJ-45 cables with 4 x 2 wires
456
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
1) For network devices and end devices that have the autocrossing function, no crossover
cable is necessary even when linking end device to end device or network component to
network component.
With devices that do not have the autocrossing function, a crossover cable is required to link
end device to end device or network component to network component.
See also
Twisted Pair Cord (4-wire for Fast Ethernet) (Page 423)
10.4.5.2
Twisted pair interface converters
Product range
Table 10-26 Data of the interface converter TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45
Cable name
Application
Available
lengths
MLFB
TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45
TP patch cable for attachment of
end devices with an RJ45 port to
the ITP cabling system;
with one 15pin D-sub female
connector with slide locking
mechanism and one RJ45 plug
0.5 m
2m
6XV1850–2EE50
6XV1850–2EH20
Mounting bracket
The D-sub female connector has a mounting bracket. This allows the female connector to be
fixed in place. The mounting bracket has two functions:
● Strain relief
The TP cord and the RJ45 port on the end device are protected from tensile strain.
● Grounding
The mounting bracket is electrically connected with the casing of the female connector
and therefore also with the cable shields. The bracket should be screwed to a grounded
plate or rail ensuring good contact.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
457
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Connector pinout
(QGGHYLFH
)XQFWLRQ
7'
7'
5'
5'
,73FDEOHIRUQHWZRUNFRPSRQHQWV
3LQ
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
RUDQJH
ZKLWH
EOXH
ZKLWH
3LQ
)XQFWLRQ
7&
7&
5'
5'
5-SOXJ
SLQ'VXEIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
Figure 10-12 Connector pin assignment of the interface converter TP Converter Cord 15/RJ-45
10.4.5.3
IE M12 connecting cable
Overview
Table 10-27 SIMATIC NET IE CONNECTING CABLE M12-180/M12-180, preassembled IE FC
TRAILING CABLE GP, with 2 M12 male connectors (D-coded)
Length
Order number
0.3 m
6XV1 870-8AE30
0.5 m
6XV1 870-8AE50
1.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH10
1.5 m
6XV1 870-8AH15
2.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH20
3.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH30
5.0 m
6XV1 870-8AH50
10.0 m
6XV1 870-8AN10
15.0 m
6XV1 870-8AN15
See also
IE M12 Plug PRO (Page 468)
458
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4.5.4
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables
Industrial Twisted Pair cables
Preassembled Industrial Twisted Pair cables are intended for direct links (without patch
cables) of up to 100 m in length between two devices.
Due to the double, extra thick shielding, Industrial Twisted Pair cables are particularly
suitable for an industrial environment with high levels of EMI, for example for a connection
between wiring closets.
The preassembled ITP cables are available in standard versions and as halogen-free FRNC
cable.
Overview
Table 10-28 Data of the Industrial Twisted Pair standard cables
Cable name
Application
Available
lengths
MLFB
ITP Standard Cable 9/15
ITP installation cable is used for
direct attachment of end devices
with an ITP port to Industrial
Ethernet network components with
an ITP port;
with one 9pin and one 15pin D-sub
connector
2 m, 5 m, 8 m,
6XV1 850–0Bxxx 1)
12 m, 15 m,
20 m, 30 m,
40 m, 50 m,
60 m, 70 m,
80 m, 90 m, 100 m
ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9
Crossover ITP installation cable,
for direct connection of two
Industrial Ethernet network
components with ITP interface;
with two 9-pin D-sub male
connectors
2 m, 5 m, 8 m,
6XV1 850–0Cxxx 1)
12 m, 15 m,
20 m, 30 m,
40 m, 50 m,
60 m, 70 m,
80 m, 90 m, 100 m
ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15
Crossover ITP installation cable,
for direct connection of two end
devices with ITP interface;
with two 15-pin D-sub male
connectors
2 m, 6 m, 10 m
6XV1 850–0Dxxx 1)
1) For a full list of the order numbers (MLFB), refer to the IK PI catalog
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
459
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-29 Data of the Industrial Twisted Pair FRNC cables
Cable name
Application
Available
lengths
MLFB
ITP FRNC Cable 9/15
ITP installation cable is used for
direct attachment of end devices
with an ITP port to Industrial
Ethernet network components with
an ITP port;
with one 9pin and one 15pin D-sub
connector
2 m, 5 m, 8 m,
12 m, 15 m,
20 m, 30 m
6XV1 851–1Axxx 1)
1) For a full list of the order numbers (MLFB), refer to the IK PI catalog
Connector pinout
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
)XQFWLRQ
5'
5'
7'
7'
3LQ
(QGGHYLFH
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
EOXH
ZKLWH
RUDQJH
ZKLWH
3LQ
)XQFWLRQ
7'
7'
5'
5'
&RGLQJIRU
6ZLWFKRYHU
$8,,73LQWHUIDFH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
D&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,736WDQGDUG&DEOH
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
)XQFWLRQ
3LQ
1HWZRUNFRPSRQHQW
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
)XQFWLRQ
3LQ
5'
5'
7'
7'
EOXH
ZKLWH
RUDQJH
ZKLWH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
5'
5'
7'
7'
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
E&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,73;36WDQGDUG&DEOH
460
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
(QGGHYLFH
+RXVLQJVKLHOG
(QGGHYLFH
7'
3LQ
EOXH
3LQ
7'
ZKLWH
7'
5'
5'
)XQFWLRQ
'7(
5'
5'
RUDQJH
ZKLWH
&RGLQJIRU
6ZLWFKRYHU
$83,73LQWHUIDFH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
)XQFWLRQ
'7(
7'
&RGLQJIRU
6ZLWFKRYHU
$8,,73LQWHUIDFH
SLQ'VXEFRQQHFWRU
F&RQQHFWRUSLQRXWRIWKH,73;36WDQGDUG&DEOH
Connector pin assignment of the Industrial Twisted Pair standard cables
See also
IE Hybrid Cable (Page 445)
Special lengths
Note
Special lengths for TP and ITP cables on request!
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 422)
10.4.6
Cable connectors
10.4.6.1
RJ-45 plugs and IE M12 Plug PRO
RJ-45 plug
The RJ-45 plug is an 8-pin plug designed in compliance with IEC 60603-7. This plug type is
recommended according to IEEE 802.3 for 10BASE–T and 100BASE–TX. The RJ-45 plug
was developed by Western Electric and is also known as the Western plug.
The RJ45 plug cannot be ordered separately and is supplied only with preassembled cables
(TP cord).
● Connector casing with straight cable outlet
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
461
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
● Intended for connecting to:
– End devices with an RJ45 port and
– Network components with an RJ45 port
Illustration of an RJ45 connector system
8
1
1
8
Figure 10-13 RJ45 jack and plug
Use in an industrial environment
Originally designed for an office environment, the connector system was made suitable for
industry by various measures including:
● All-round shielding,
● Metal casing,
● Fast Connect technology.
462
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Design of the plug for user assembly
Three variants of the plug are available:
● With 180° (straight) cable outlet
Figure 10-14 FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 180
Due to their compact design, the cable connectors (FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 180) can be
used both for devices with individual jacks and for devices with multiple jacks (blocks). The
cable connector is particularly suitable for connecting FC TP cables to SIMATIC NET
modules and SCALANCE devices.
● With 90° (angled) cable outlet
Figure 10-15 FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 90
The FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 90 is intended, for example, for connection of FC TP cables to
ET200 or PN/PN couplers.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
463
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
● With 145° (angled) cable outlet (SIMOTION and SINAMICS only)
Figure 10-16 FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 145
The FastConnect RJ-45 Plug 145 can be used to connect FC TP cables to SIMOTION and
SINAMICS modules.
Installation
With the four integrated insulation piercing contacts, establishing contact with the FC cable
variants is simple and error-proof. With the casing open, colored markers on the contact
cover make it simple to connect the cores to the insulation piercing contacts. The transparent
synthetic material of the contact cover allows the user to check the contacts at any time.
Table 10-30 Connector pin and color assignment
Pins of RJ-45
Wire color
Signal on switch
Signal on end device
1
Yellow
RX+
TX+
2
Orange
RX-
TX-
3
White
TX+
RX+
6
Blue
TX-
RX-
The assembly of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug is described in a separate section .
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times. Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used
twice but must be cut off before fitting a new connector.
464
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Technical specifications
Transmission rate
100 Mbps; CAT5e
Maximum cable length
0 - 100 m depending on the type of IE FC cable
Temperature range:
Operation
-20 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage
-40 °C to +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95%
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 180
13.7 x 16 x 55
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 90
13.7 x 16 x 42
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 145
13.9 x 16 x 55.6
Installation
No tools required with insulation piercing technology (FastConnect)
Weight
approx. 35 g
Degree of protection
IP20
Table 10-31 Ordering data
Order number
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for
network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 90
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for
ET 200S
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145
RJ-45 cable connector for Industrial Ethernet with robust metal casing
and integrated insulation piercing contacts for connection of the
Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for
SIMOTION and SINAMICS
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0
1 pack of 10
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0
1 pack of 50
6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
465
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
See also
Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 530)
Notes on crossover cabling
The need for crossover cabling
The SCALANCE devices described in this manual have the autocrossover function. This
means that there is no situation in which crossover cables are necessary. IE FC RJ45 Plugs with the pin assignment shown above can be connected to both ends of the cable.
This corresponds to straight-through wiring.
In particular with older switches and end devices (for example OSM, ESM) it is possible that
this function is not implemented. In such cases, a crossover cable is necessary for a direct
connection from end device to end device or switch to switch if neither of the switches has
the autocrossover function.
Swapping over the send and receive pairs in one of the two plugs of the IE FC cable creates
a crossover cable.
IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug
Installation
The assembly of the IE Hybrid RJ-45 Plug is described in a separate section (Page 533).
Table 10-32 Connector pin assignment of the RJ-45 part
Pin number (RJ-45 part)
Signal
Wire color
Pin 1
TX+
Yellow
Pin 2
TX-
Orange
Pin 3
RX+
White
Pin 6
RX-
Blue
Table 10-33 Pin assignment of the power supply insert module
466
Pin number
Signal
Wire color
Pin 1
24 V
Brown
Pin 2
24 V
Brown
Pin 3
Ground
Black
Pin 4
Ground
Black
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-34 Technical specifications
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps; CAT5
Maximum cable length with IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
80 m IE FC cables
Connector technology
Insulation piercing technology
Permitted cable cross section for data cables
AWG24 - AWG22
Outer cable diameter
10 mm to 11 mm
Degree of protection
IP67
Ambient temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
See also
Connecting the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 (Page 533)
IP65 plug
M12 cable connectors
M12 plugs are used not only for data transmission but also for the power supply and the
signaling contact. Different coding prevents inserting the wrong plug.
Table 10-35 Pin assignment of the cable socket Power M12 Cable Connector PRO
Pin 1
24 V DC
Pin 2
-
Pin 3
Ground
Pin 4
-
Table 10-36 Pin assignment of the cable socket Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO
Pin 1
F1
Pin 2
-
Pin 3
-
Pin 4
F2
Pin 5
-
The IE M12 Plug PRO is male and D-coded so that it cannot be confused with the Power
M12 Cable Connector PRO.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
467
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-37 Ordering data
Order number
IE M12 Plug PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, D-coded, for assembly on IE FC Cable
2 x 2 with robust metal casing and fast connect technology; 180
degree cable outlet
1 pack of 1
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8
1 pack of 8
Signaling contact M12 cable connector PRO
M12 cable connector 5-pin, B-coded, for connection to power cable
2x0.75
6GK1 908-0DC10-6AA3
Power M12 cable connector PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, A-coded, connection to power cable
2x0.75
6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3
Power cable 2x0.75
Sold in meters
6XV1812-8A
See also
IP degrees of protection (Page 579)
IE M12 Plug PRO
Connector pinout
An IE M12 Plug PRO with the pinning as shown in the following table must be connected to
both ends of the IE FC cable.
Table 10-38 Pinning at both ends of a straight-through cable
Pin number
Assignment as a network
component
Color
Pin 1
RX+
Yellow
Pin 2
TX+
White
Pin 3
RX-
Orange
Pin 4
TX-
Blue
The signal assignment in the table corresponds to the pin assignment of the 4-pin
10/100BaseTX M12 socket of SCALANCE X208 PRO.
The pin assignment of the M12 socket of a network component on the other hand is as
follows:
468
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-39 Crossover pin assignment at one end of a crossover cable
Pin number
Assignment
Pin 1
TX+
White
Pin 2
RX+
Yellow
Pin 3
TX-
Blue
Pin 4
RX-
Orange
The difference is that the send pin at one end must connect to the receive pin at the other
end. With straight-through cables, this is only the case if the connector pin assignment is not
the same at both ends. With devices that have autocrossing, a transmission would work
even if the pin assignment was the same.
Technical specifications and ordering data
Table 10-40 Technical specifications
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbps; CAT5e
Maximum cable length (depending on cable type)
100 m IE FC cables
Number of pins
4
Cable connector/coding
M12 "D" (Draft IEC 61076-2-101 Amendment 1)
Connector technology
Insulation piercing technology
Permitted cable cross section
AWG24 - AWG22
Outer cable diameter
6.0 mm to 8.0 mm
Degree of protection
IP67
Ambient temperature
-25 °C to +85 °C
Table 10-41 Ordering data
Order number
IE M12 Plug PRO
M12 cable connector 4-pin, D-coded, for assembly on IE FC Cable
2 x 2 with robust metal casing and fast connect technology; 180
degree cable outlet
1 pack of 1
1 pack of 8
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0
6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8
469
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
10.4.6.2
IE FC Modular Outlet and IE FC Outlet RJ-45
IE FC Modular Outlet
General
Simple assembly with integrated insulation piercing contacts with color coding allows timesaving and error-free installation of the 8-wire CAT6 Industrial Ethernet FC installation cable
in the CAT6 Industrial Ethernet Modular Outlet. The design of the 8-wire AWG22 cable
allows the outer jacket and shield to be stripped with the familiar IE FC Stripping Tool in one
action (it may be necessary for the user to readjust the tool for the 4x2 cable variant. The two
setting screws of the knife cassette on the stripping tool must be opened by approximately
half a turn.) After preparing the cable in this way, contact is made immediately via the
insulation piercing contacts in the Modular Outlet.
Design
The robust metal housing is intended for industry (IP40) and allows the modular outlet to be
installed on a DIN rail. Direct mounting on a wall is also possible.
The metal housing also provides strain relief for the installation cables suitable for industrial
surroundings and reliable shield contact. With its higher IP40 degree of protection is can be
mounted directly on site.
The IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet basic module can be equipped with two different optional
inserts without changing the wiring (permanent wiring):
● Insert 2 FE: Two Fast Ethernet connections for attachment of two 10/100 Mbps end
devices/network components
● Insert 1 GE: One gigabit Ethernet connection for attaching a 10/100/1000 Mbps end
device/network component
The basic module can be ordered without inserts. In this case, the inserts must be ordered
separately.
The modular outlet
● FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 1 GE and
● FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 2 FE
The ordering unit is a basic module and the relevant insert. When necessary, the insert can
be replaced.
Replacing the insert allows an upgrade of a 100 Mbps double connection to a gigabit
connection. This is possible only if the wiring was performed with the IE FC standard cable 4
x 2 GP. In this case, there is no need to change the installed wiring.
470
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
SCALANCE X-400
S7-300
IE TP Cord
ET 200S
IE FC RJ45
Modular
Outlet
Insert 1GE
IE FC RJ45
Modular
Outlet
Insert 2FE
IE FC RJ45
Modular
Outlet
Insert 2FE
2 x 100 Mbit/s
connection
PC
IE TP Cord
1 x 1000 Mbit/s connection
IE FC RJ45
Modular Outlet
Insert 1GE
G_IK10_XX_10086
IE FC Standard Cable 4x2
Figure 10-17 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE and IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE
A further modular outlet, the
● FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert
Figure 10-18 Basic module with power insert
provides not only a Fast Ethernet connection to connect a 10/100 Mbps end device / network
component but also the option of supplying power to the end device by connecting a power
supply to a two-wire terminal block. In this case, the wiring of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular
Outlet must be performed with the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34. Apart from the 2x2 data
line, this cable has four wires intended for the power supply.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
471
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
SCALANCE X-400
24 V DC
IE FC RJ45
Modular Outlet
Power Insert
IE Hybrid
cable connector
SCALANCE
W788-1PRO
G_IK10_XX_10087
IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34
Figure 10-19 Example of wiring with the FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert
Installation
You will find instructions on assembling the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet in the relevant
section of this manual.
To use the 2FE and 1 GE inserts, the basic modules of the outlets must be connected with
the following cable:
● IE FC Standard Cable 4 x 2 GP
The basic module of the FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert must be connected with the
following cable:
● IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Please note that the IE hybrid cable cannot be be prepared with the stripping tool.
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times. Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used
twice but must be cut off before fitting a new connector.
WARNING
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
• Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
• In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
• In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
• Current load maximum 0.5 A.
472
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-42 Technical specifications
FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 2 FE
- Transmission rate of the 2 x RJ-45 jacks
10/100 Mbps; CAT5e
FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Insert 1 GE
- Transmission rate of the RJ-45 jack
10/100/1000 Mbps; CAT6
FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet Power Insert
- Transmission rate of the RJ-45 jack
10/100 Mbps; CAT5e
- Voltage at the power insert terminal
Max. 57 V 1)
Maximum cable length
0 - 100 m depending on the type of IE FC cable
Temperature range:
Operation
-20 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage
-40 °C to +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95%
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
50 x 115.25 x 59
Installation
Wall mounting or on DIN rail
Weight
450 g
Degree of protection
IP40
UL listing
yes
Transmission characteristics
Corresponds to category 6 of the international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
1) The minimum voltage supplied depends on the following parameters
● Resistance of the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 per meter
● Actual length of the hybrid cable connected to the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
● Minimum operating voltage of the connected consumer
The following inserts are available without basic housing
Insert 2FE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
Insert 1GE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
Note that the connection between IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlets with these inserts requires 8wire FastConnect cables (Cat6). The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 6XV1870-2J is not
suitable for operation of the 2FE and 1GE inserts!
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
473
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Table 10-43 Ordering data
IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet with interface to the slot of an insert
Order number
Base module without insert
6GK1901-1BE00-0AA0
- with insert 2FE; insert for 2 x 100 Mbps interface
6GK1901-1BE00-0AA1
- with insert 1GE; insert for 1 x 1000 Mbps interface
6GK1901-1BE00-0AA2
- with power insert; insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbps interface
6GK1901-1BE00-0AA3
Insert 2FE for FC Modular Outlet Base; 2 x RJ-45 for 2 x 100 Mbps; 1 x
set of 4
6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
Insert 1GE for FC Modular Outlet Base; 1 x RJ-45 for 1 x 1000 Mbps; 1
x set of 4
6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
See also
Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45 (Page 532)
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
Installation
The FC Outlet RJ-45 is suitable for mounting on a DIN rail and for wall mounting. There are
four drilled holes for wall mounting.
By arranging several FC Outlet RJ-45 devices in a line, you can create a patch panel with
any terminal density you require (for example 16 outlets to a width of 19" is possible with a
suitably wide rail). The FC Outlet RJ-45 can also be installed behind a metal panel with a
suitable cutout (for example in a wiring cubicle).
Application example
The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45 is attached directly to the Industrial Ethernet FC TP
cable. To connect the FC Outlet RJ-45 and network components or an end device, various
preassembled RJ-45 patch cables are available.
474
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Figure 10-20 Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
Pin assignment of the FC Outlet RJ-45
The contacts of the RJ-45 jack and the insulation-piercing terminals for the FC TP cable are
assigned to each other as follows:
RJ-45 pin number
Signal
Insulation-piercing
terminal number
Wire color
1
TX+
1
Yellow
2
TX-
3
Orange
3
RX+
2
white
6
RX-
4
blue
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
475
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Technical specifications
Table 10-44 Specifications of the FC Outlet RJ-45
Interfaces
• Attachment of end devices, network components
• Attachment of Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables
RJ-45 jack
Installation
Standard rail or wall installation
Perm. ambient conditions
• Operating temperature
• Storage/transport temperature
-25 °C to +70 °C
Construction
• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
• Weight
31.7 x 107 x 30
Degree of protection
IP20
Transmission characteristics
Correspond to category 5 of the
international cabling standards
ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173
4 insulation piercing terminals
-40 °C to +70 °C
300 g
Ordering data
Table 10-45 Ordering data of the FC Outlet RJ-45
Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ-45
6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0
For connecting Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables and TP
Cords
476
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Dimension drawings
Front view of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
Front
Figure 10-21 IE FC Outlet RJ-45 (dimensions in mm)
See also
Connecting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP / IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2 GP
(Page 535)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
477
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Side view of the IE FC Outlet RJ-45
Left
Figure 10-22 IE FC Outlet RJ-45 (dimensions in mm)
Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors
General
The Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors correspond to the standards MIL-C-24308 and
DIN 41652. Due to its mechanical strength and its excellent electromagnetic compatibility, for
use in a harsh industrial environment, this connector was preferred to the RJ-45 connector
recommended for 10BASE-T in IEEE 802.3.
Design of the plug for user assembly
Only the connectors for user assembly are described below.
There are two versions of the Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors for user assembly:
● 9-pin connector with straight cable outlet and securing screws
● 15-pin connector with variable cable outlet (+30° , 0°, -30°) and securing bolts
478
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Both connector types have a metal casing. The Industrial Twisted Pair cables are connected
to the connector pins using screw terminals, special tools are not required.
For a detailed description of fitting connectors, refer to the section D-sub connectors.
Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors, 9-pin
● Intended for connecting to:
– OLM/ELM (port 1–3)
– OSM/ESM (port 1–6, standby–sync port)
– Interface card ECTP3 (port 1–3) for star coupler (ASGE)
● Connector casing with straight cable outlet
● Can be mechanically secured to the female connector with integrated knurled screws
● Simple cable assembly with screw terminals
Screw terminal
Connector insert
Knurled screw
5 9 1 6
Cover of the
housing
Connector
housing
Cable clamp
Figure 10-23 Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (9-pin) for user assembly
Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub connectors, 15-pin
● For connection to end devices with an integrated Industrial Twisted Pair port
● Connector casing with variable cable outlet angle
+30° , 0° , –30°
● Slide mechanism for locking to female connector
● Two dummy plugs for closing unused cable outlets
● Simple cable assembly with screw terminals
● Internal coding jumper for converting the end device port from AUI to Industrial Twisted
Pair
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
479
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.4 Components for electrical networks
Connector
insert
Cover of the
housing
5 12 3 10
Connector
housing
Sealing plugs
Cable clamp
Figure 10-24 Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (15-pin) for user assembly
See also
Fitting the D-sub male connector (Page 549)
480
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5
Components for optical networks
10.5.1
Glass FO cables 50/125
10.5.1.1
Properties of glass FO cable 50/125 µm
Technical specifications
The following tables show an overview of the technical specifications of all SIMATIC NET
glass FO cables.
Table 10-46 Technical specifications of the FO Standard Cable GP and FO Ground Cable
Cable type
FO standard cable GP
FO Ground Cable
Areas of application
Universal cable for use indoors
and outdoors
Longitudinally and laterally
watertight cable for use
outdoors with non-metallic
rodent protection for direct
underground installation
Can be ordered
In meters; preassembled with
4 BFOC or 4 SC connectors
In meters; preassembled with
4 BFOC or 4 SC connectors
Cable type (standard code)
AT-W(ZN)YY 2x1G50/125
AT-WQ(ZN)Y(ZN)B2Y
2G50/125
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber
50/125 µm
Multimode graded-index fiber
50/125 µm
at 850 nm
≤ 2.7 dB/km
≤ 2.7 dB/km
at 1300 nm
≤ 0.7 dB/km
≤ 0.7 dB/km
at 850 nm
≥ 600 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
at 1300 nm
≥ 1200 MHz *km
≥ 1200 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
2
Attenuation
Modal bandwidth
Cable design
Splittable
Splittable
Core type
Hollow core, filled
Hollow core, filled
Basic element
PVC, orange/black
PVC, orange/black
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
PVC, green
PE, black
2.9 mm Ø
2.9 mm Ø
Cable dimensions
4.5 x 7.4 mm
10.5 mm ± 0.5 mm
Cable weight
approx. 40 kg/km
approx. 90 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
≤ 500 N
≤ 800 N
Materials
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions of basic element
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
481
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
FO standard cable GP
FO Ground Cable
Bending radius
65 mm
155 mm
Bending cycles
–
–
Transverse compressive
strength
300 N/cm
300 N/cm
Impact strength (initial energy /
number / hammer Ø)
–
–
Installation temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
Storage temperature
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
–
Perm. ambient conditions
Free of halogens
–
–
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Resistance to mineral oils and
fats
Conditionally resistant
Highly resistant
UL/CSA approval
OFN (NEC Article 770,
UL1651)/
OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA
Standard C22.2 No232-M1988)
–
UV resistant
yes
yes
Rodent protection
–
yes
1000BaseSX
750 m
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
2000 m
Gigabit length
Table 10-47 Technical specifications for the FO Trailing Cable and FO Trailing Cable GP
Cable type
FO Trailing Cable
FO Trailing Cable GP
Areas of application
Cable for use in drag chains and Cable for use in drag chains and
for high mechanical strain, PUR for lower mechanical strain,
outer jacket, no UL approval
PVC outer jacket, UL approval
Can be ordered
In meters; preassembled with
4 BFOC or 4 SC connectors
In meters; preassembled with
4 BFOC or 4 SC connectors
Cable type (standard code)
AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2G50/125
AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2G50/125
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber
50/125 µm
Multimode graded-index fiber
50/125 µm
Attenuation
at 850 nm
≤ 2.7 dB/km
≤ 2.7 dB/km
at 1300 nm
≤ 0.7 dB/km
≤ 0.7 dB/km
at 850 nm
≥ 600 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
at 1300 nm
≥ 1200 MHz *km
≥ 1200 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
2
Cable design
Splittable
Splittable
Modal bandwidth
482
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
FO Trailing Cable
FO Trailing Cable GP
Core type
Hollow core, filled
Hollow core, filled
Basic element
PVC, orange/black
PVC, orange/black
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
PUR, green
PVC, green
2.9 mm Ø
2.9 mm Ø
Materials
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions of basic element
Cable dimensions
10.5 mm Ø ±0.5 mm
10.5 mm Ø ±0.5 mm
Cable weight
approx. 90 kg/km
approx. 90 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
≤ 800 N
≤ 800 N
Bending radius
200 mm
200 mm
Bending cycles
5.000.000
3.500.000
Transverse compressive
strength
300 N/cm
300 N/cm
Impact strength (initial energy /
number / hammer Ø)
–
–
Installation temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
Perm. ambient conditions
Storage temperature
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
-25 ºC to +80 ºC
Resistance to fire
–
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
Free of halogens
–
–
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Resistance to mineral oils and
fats
Highly resistant
Conditionally resistant
UL/CSA approval
–
OFN (NEC Article 770,
UL1651)/
OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA
Standard C22.2 No232-M1988)
UV resistant
yes
yes
Rodent protection
–
–
1000BaseSX
750 m
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
2000 m
Gigabit length
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
483
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Table 10-48 Technical specifications for the INDOOR fiber optic cable and fiber optic standard cable
Cable type
INDOOR fiber-optic
indoor cable
Fiber-optic
standard cable
Areas of application
Non-crush, halogen-free and
extremely flame-retardant cable
for use indoors
Universal cable for use indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
Cable type (standard code)
T-VHH 2G62.5/125
3.2B200+0.9F600 F TB3 OR
FRNC
AT-VYY 2G62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm
≤ 3.1 dB/km
≤ 0.8 dB/km
≤ 3.1 dB/km
≤ 0.8 dB/km
Modal bandwidth at 850 nm
Modal bandwidth at 1300 nm
≥ 200 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
≥ 200 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
2
Cable design
Splittable indoor cable
Splittable outdoor cable
Core type
Fixed core
Compact core
Cable type
INDOOR fiber-optic
indoor cable
Fiber-optic
standard cable
Areas of application
Non-crush, halogen-free and
extremely flame-retardant cable
for use indoors
Universal cable for use indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
Cable type (standard code)
T-VHH 2G62.5/125
3.2B200+0.9F600 F TB3 OR
FRNC
AT-VYY 2G62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F
Basic element
Copolymer, gray (FRNC)
PVC, gray
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn
Kevlar yarn and impregnated
glass fiber yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
Copolymer, bright orange
(FRNC)
PVC, black
Dimensions of basic element
(2.9 ± 0.1) mm Ø
(3.5 ± 0.2) mm Ø
Cable dimensions
(3.9 × 6.8) ± 0.2 mm
(6.3 × 9.8) ± 0.4 mm
Cable weight
approx. 30 kg/km
approx. 74 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
≤ 800 N (brief)
≤ 500 N (brief)
Bending radius
≥ 60 mm (during installation);
≥ 40 mm (in operation) flat
surface only
≥ 100 mm only the flat surface
Transverse compressive
strength
10,000 N/10 cm (brief)1)
2,000 N/10 cm (permanent)2)
2,000 N
Materials
Mechanical characteristics
484
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
INDOOR fiber-optic
indoor cable
Fiber-optic
standard cable
Impact strength (initial energy /
number / hammer Ø)
1.5 Nm/20 blows/12.5 mm
–
Dimensions of basic element
(2.9 ± 0.1) mm Ø
(3.5 ± 0.2) mm Ø
Perm. ambient conditions
Installation temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
-20 ºC to +60 ºC
Storage temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
and VDE 0482-265-2-1
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-3
and VDE 0482-266-2-4
Free of halogens
yes
–
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Resistance to mineral oils and
fats
–
–
UL approval
–
–
UV resistant
–
yes
Rodent protection
–
–
1000BaseSX
–
–
1000BaseLX
–
–
Gigabit length
1) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.3 dB, 2) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.1 dB
Table 10-49 Technical specifications for the Flexible Fiber-optic trailing cable and SIENOPYR Duplex
Fiber-Optic Marine Cable
Cable type
Flexible fiber-optic
trailing cable
SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine
Cable
Areas of application
Flexible cable for installation in
drag chains indoors and
outdoors
Fixed installation on ships and
offshore facilities in all enclosed
spaces and on free decks;
shipbuilding approval
Can be ordered
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
Sold in meters
Cable type (standard code)
AT-W11Y (ZN) 11Y 2G62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F
MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 + 2 x 1CU
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm
≤ 3.1 dB/km
≤ 0.8 dB/km
≤ 3.1 dB/km
≤ 0.8 dB/km
Modal bandwidth at 850 nm
Modal bandwidth at 1300 nm
≥ 200 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
≥ 200 MHz *km
≥ 600 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
2
Cable design
Splittable outdoor cable
Splittable outdoor cable
Core type
Hollow core, filled
Solid core
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
485
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
Flexible fiber-optic
trailing cable
SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine
Cable
Cable type
Flexible fiber-optic
trailing cable
SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine
Cable
Areas of application
Flexible cable for installation in
drag chains indoors and
outdoors
Fixed installation on ships and
offshore facilities in all enclosed
spaces and on free decks;
shipbuilding approval
Can be ordered
In meters, preassembled with 4
BFOC connectors
Sold in meters
Cable type (standard code)
AT-W11Y (ZN) 11Y 2G62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F
MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 + 2 x 1CU
Basic element
PUR, black
Polyolefin
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn, also GFK central
element
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
PUR, black
SHF1 mixture, black
(3.5 ± 0.2) mm Ø
(2.9 ± 0.2) mm Ø
Materials
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions of basic element
Cable dimensions
12.9 mm (outer diameter)
13.3 ± 0.5 mm
Cable weight
approx. 136 kg/km
approx. 220 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
≤ 2000 N (brief)
≤ 1000 N (permanent)
≤ 500 N (brief)
≤ 250 N (permanent)
Bending radius
≥ 150 mm min. 100,000 bending 133 mm (once)
cycles
266 mm (multiple)
Perm. ambient conditions
Installation temperature
-30 ºC to +60 ºC
-10 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-30 ºC to +60 ºC
–40 ºC to +80 ºC 1)
–40 ºC to +70 ºC 2)
Storage temperature
-30 ºC to +70 ºC
-40 ºC to +80 ºC
Resistance to fire
–
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-3
Cat A
Free of halogens
yes
yes
Silicone-free
yes
yes
Resistance to mineral oils and
fats
–
–
UL approval
–
–
UV resistant
yes
–
Rodent protection
–
–
1000BaseSX
–
–
1000BaseLX
–
–
Gigabit length
486
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
Flexible fiber-optic
trailing cable
SIENOPYR
Duplex Fiber-Optic Marine
Cable
Shipbuilding approvals
–
Lloyds Register of Shipping
Germanischer Lloyd
Registro Staliano Navale
Bureau Veritas
1) With no load on copper cores, 2) With maximum load on copper cores (6 A)
10.5.1.2
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 µm
Brief description of the Fiber Optic Standard Cable GP 6XV1873–2A
Figure 10-25 Design of the Fiber Optic Standard Cable
The fiberoptic standard cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 6XV1 873–2A (UL) E157125 OFN (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm. The slash can be used
as a meter marker. Meter markers make it easier to estimate the length of an installed cable.
Properties
The fiberoptic standard cable has the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
● Suitable for direct connector assembly
● Available in meters up to max. 3000 m
● Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 300 m
● Preassembled with 4 SC connectors in lengths up to 300 m
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
487
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Note
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
Application
The fiberoptic standard cable is the universal cable for use indoors and outdoors. It is
suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850 nm
and 1300 nm.
See also
Preassembled FO standard cable GP (Page 508)
10.5.1.3
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm
Brief description of the Fiber Optic Ground Cable 6XV1873–2G
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
%LQGLQJHOHPHQW
5RGHQWSURWHFWLRQ
3(RXWHUMDFNHW
Figure 10-26 Design of the Fiber Optic Ground Cable
The FO Ground Cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO Ground Cable 50/125 6XV1873–
2G (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100
cm. The slash can be used as a meter marker. Meter markers make it easier to estimate the
length of an installed cable.
See also
Preassembled FO Ground Cable (Page 508)
488
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.1.4
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL)
FO Trailing Cable 6XV1873–2C
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
%LQGLQJHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
385RXWHUMDFNHW
Figure 10-27 Design of the FO Trailing Cable
The FO Trailing Cable contains two multimode graded fibers of type 50/125 µm.
The outer jacket is made of PUR and is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO
Trailing Cable 50/125 6XV1873–2C (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter
marker)" approximately every 100 cm. The slash can be used as a meter marker. Meter
markers make it easier to estimate the length of an installed cable. This cable does not have
UL approval.
FO Trailing Cable GP 6XV1873–2D
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
+ROORZFRUH
7HDUVWULS
'XPP\HOHPHQW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
39&RXWHUMDFNHW
Figure 10-28 Design of the FO Trailing Cable GP
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
489
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
In contrast to the FO Trailing Cable, the material of the outer jacket is PVC. The fiber type is,
however, the same. The FO Trailing Cable GP has UL and CSA approval.
The outer jacket is made of PVC and is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET FO
Trailing Cable GP 50/125 6XV1873–2D (UL)E157125 OFN LL 64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA
(drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
Properties
The FO Trailing Cable and FO Trailing Cable GP have the following properties:
● UV resistant
● Silicone-free
● Suitable for direct connector assembly
● Available in meters up to 3000 m
● Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors in lengths up to 100 m
● Preassembled with 4 SC connectors in lengths up to 100 m
The FO Trailing Cable also has the following properties:
● Number of bending cycles at least 5,000,000
The FO Trailing Cable GP has the following properties compared with the FO Trailing Cable:
● UL and CSA approval
● Number of bending cycles at least 3,500,000
Application
The FO Trailing Cable is suitable for use in trailing cables for heavy mechanical stress, the
FO Trailing Cable GP for less mechanical stress.
Both cables are suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range
around 850 nm and 1300 nm.
See also
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable (Page 509)
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable GP (Page 510)
10.5.1.5
FO FRNC Cable 50/125
Application
The FO FRNC Cable with two 50/125 µm fibers is halogen-free and flame retardant and is
particularly suitable for fixed installation in buildings. With this cable design, little smoke that
is free of halogens is produced in the case of fire therefore reducing secondary damage
significantly.
490
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Designed as a breakout cable, it is suitable for direct fitting of connectors.
Technical specifications
Cable type
FO FRNC Cable
Areas of application
Halogen-free cable for fixed installation indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered
Sold in meters
Cable type (standard code)
AT-W(ZN)HH 2G50/125 UV
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber 50/125 µm
Attenuation
at 850 nm
≤ 2.7 dB/km
at 1300 nm
≤ 0.7 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 850 nm
≥ 600 MHz *km
at 1300 nm
≥ 1200 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
Cable design
Splittable
Core type
Hollow core, filled diameter 1400 µm
Materials
Basic element
Halogen-free, flame retardant, orange/black
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
Halogen-free and flame retardant, FRNC, green
Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions of basic element
2.9 mm Ø
Cable dimensions
9.2 mm
Cable weight
approx. 85 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
≤ 800 N
Bending radius
50 mm
Bending cycles
-
Transverse compressive strength
300 N/cm
Impact strength (initial energy / number / hammer
Ø)
-
Perm. ambient conditions
Installation temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Storage temperature
-25 ºC to +70 ºC
Resistance to fire
IEC 60332-3,
IEC 61034-1
IEC 61034-2
Free of halogens
Yes
Silicone-free
Yes
Resistance to mineral oils and fats
Conditionally resistant
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
491
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
FO FRNC Cable
UL/CSA approval
-
UV resistant
Yes
Rodent protection
-
Gigabit length
1000BaseSX
750 m
1000BaseLX
2000 m
Product name
Order number
FO FRNC Cable 50/125
6XV1 873-2B
Ordering data
10.5.2
Glass FO cables 62.5/125
10.5.2.1
Overview of the glass fiber-optic cables 62.5/125 μm
Technical specifications
The following tables show an overview of the technical specifications of the SIMATIC NET
glass FO cables 62.5/125 µm.
Table 10-50 Technical specifications for the INDOOR fiber optic cable and fiber optic standard cable
Cable type
Fiber-optic standard cable
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
Area of application
Universal cable for use indoors and
outdoors
Non-crush, halogen-free and extremely
flame-retardant cable for use indoors
Can be ordered
Assembled with 4 BFOC connectors in
fixed lengths and in meters
Assembled with 4 BFOC connectors in
fixed lengths
Cabling
AT–VYY 2G62.5/125
I–VHH 2G62.5/125
(Standard code)
3.1B200+0.8F600 F
3.2B200+0.9F600 F
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Multimode graded-index fiber
62.5/125 µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm
<= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km
<= 3.2 dB/km
<= 0.9 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 850 nm
at 1300 nm
200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
2
TB3 FRNC OR
492
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
Fiber-optic standard cable
INDOOR fiber-optic indoor cable
Cable design
Splittable
outdoor cable
Splittable
indoor cable
Core type
Compact core
Fixed core
Materials basic element
PVC, gray
Copolymer, orange
(FRNC)
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn and
impregnated glass fiber yarn
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket/
color of cable
PVC / black
Copolymer/
bright orange (FRNC)
Dimensions
of basic element
(3.5 ± 0.2) mm ∅
2.9 mm ∅
Outer dimensions
(6.3 x 9.8) ± 0.4 mm
approx. 3.9 x 6.8 mm
Cable weight
approx. 74 kg/km
approx. 30 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
<= 370 N (in operation)
<= 500 N (brief)
<= 200 N (in operation)
<= 800 N (brief)
Bending radiuses
100 mm
Only flat side
100 mm (during installation)
60 mm (in operation)
Only flat side
Transverse compressive strength
5,000 N/10 cm
3,000 N/10 cm (brief)
1,000 N/10 cm (permanent)
Resistance to impact
3 blows
(initial energy: 5 Nm
Hammer radius: 300 mm)
3 blows
(initial energy: 1.5 Nm
Hammer radius: 300 mm)
Installation temperature
–5 °C to +50 °C
–5 °C to +50 °C
Operating temperature
–25 °C to +60 °C
–20 °C to +60 °C
Storage temperature
–25 °C to +70 °C
–25 °C to +70 °C
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to
IEC 60332–3 Cat. CF
Flame retardant to IEC 60332–3 and
DIN VDE 0472
Part 804, test type B
Free of halogens
no
yes
UL approval
no
no
Shipbuilding approval
no
no
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
493
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Table 10-51 Technical specifications of the flexible fiber optic trailing cable
Cable type
Flexible fiber-optic trailing cable
Area of application
Flexible cable for installation in drag chains indoors and
outdoors
Can be ordered
Assembled with 4 BFOC connectors in fixed lengths and in
meters
Cabling
(Standard code)
AT–W11Y (ZN)
11Y2G62.5/125
3.1B200+0.8F600 LG
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm
<= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km
Modal bandwidth at 850 nm
at 1300 nm
200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
Cable design
Splittable
outdoor cable
Core type
Hollow core, filled
Materials basic element
PUR, black
Tensile strain relief
GFK central element, Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
PUR, black
Dimensions of basic element
(3.5 ± 0.2) mm ∅
Outer dimensions
approx. 12.9 mm
Cable weight
approx. 136 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
<= 2000 N (brief)
<= 1000 N (permanent)
Bending radiuses
150 mm
Max. 100,000 bending cycles
Installation temperature
–5 °C to +50 °C
Operating temperature
–25 °C to +60 °C
Storage temperature
-25 °C to +70 °C
Behavior in fire
Complies with IEC 60332-1
Free of halogens
no
UL approval
no
Shipbuilding approval
no
494
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.2.2
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable 62.5/125 μm
Cable cross-sectional area
Copper cable
Insulation
FO cable fiber
Tensile strain relief
Protective sleeve
Winding
Copper braid
Common sheath
Outer jacket
Figure 10-29 Design of the SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable 6XV1 830-0NH10
The SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable has 2 multimode graded-index fibers
62.5/125 µm. It also has 2 multiwire, rubber insulated copper cores with 1 mm2 cross section.
These allow, for example, power to be supplied to the connected devices.
The round cross section of the cable makes it easier to seal cable feedthroughs.
The outer jacket is labeled with the year of manufacture and the label "SIENOPYR–FR MI–
VHH 2G 62.5/125 3,1B200+0.8F600+2x1CU 300V" at intervals of approximately 50 cm.
Properties
The SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable has the following properties:
● Ozone proof complying with DIN VDE 0472 Part 805 test type B
● Silicone-free
● Behavior in fire complying with IEC 603323 cat. A
● Corrosivity of combustion gases complying with IEC 607542
● Smoke density complying with IEC 61031
● Halogen-free
● Is approved for ship building
– Lloyds Register of Shipping
– Germanischer Lloyd
– Registro Staliano Navale
– Bureau Veritas
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
495
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
The rubber insulated copper cores have the following properties:
● Rated voltage 300 Veff
● Current carrying capacity: The specifications of DIN VDE 0891 apply. The maximum
permitted current carried by the copper wires is 6 A at an ambient temperature of 70 °C.
● DC loop resistance: max. 36.2 ohms/km at 20 °C
Application
The SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable is intended for fixed installation on ships and
offshore facilities in all enclosed spaces and on open decks. The cable is not, however,
intended for permanent installation in water.
It is suitable for connecting optical interfaces operating in the wavelength range around 850
nm and 1300 nm.
Technical specifications
Table 10-52 Technical specifications of the SIENOPYR duplex fiberoptic marine cable
Cable type
SIENOPYR
marine duplex
fiber-optic cable
Area of application
Fixed installation on ships and offshore facilities in all
enclosed spaces and on free decks
Can be ordered
Sold in meters
Cabling
(standard designation)
MI–VHH 2G 62.5/125
3.1B200 + 0.8F600 +
2x1CU 300 V
Fiber type
Multimode graded-index fiber 62.5/125 µm
Power loss at 850 nm
Power loss at 1300 nm
<= 3.1 dB/km
<= 0.8 dB/km
Modal bandwidth at 850 nm
at 1300 nm
200 MHz *km
600 MHz *km
Number of fibers
2
Cable design
Splittable
outdoor cable
Core type
Solid core
Materials basic element
Polyolefin
Tensile strain relief
Aramid yarn
Outer jacket /color of cable
SHF1 mixture / black
Dimensions of basic element
(2.9 ± 0.2) mm ∅
Outer dimensions
(13.3 ± 0.5) mm
Cable weight
approx. 220 kg/km
Permitted tensile force
<= 500 N (brief)
<= 250 N (permanent)
496
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
SIENOPYR
marine duplex
fiber-optic cable
Bending radiuses
133 mm (once)
266 mm (multiple)
Installation temperature
-10 °C to +50 °C
Operating temperature
–40 °C to +80 °C 1)
–40 °C to +70 °C 2)
Storage temperature
–40 °C to +80 °C
Behavior in fire
Complying with IEC 60332–3 Cat. A
Free of halogens
yes
UL approval
no
Shipbuilding approval
yes
1) With no load on copper cores
2) With maximum load on copper cores (6 A)
10.5.3
Plastic FO cable POF and PCF
10.5.3.1
POF Standard Cable and POF Trailing Cable
Brief description of the POF Standard Cable and POF Trailing Cable
outer sheath
strain relief using
aramide yarn
able
POF fiber
single core sheath
G_IK10_XX_10179
ndard C
POF Sta
Figure 10-30 POF Standard Cable
The POF Standard Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 980/1000 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000
Profinet 6XV1874–2A E157125 OFN-FT1 c(UL)us OFN (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
The POF Standard Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
497
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Application
SIMATIC NET POF fiber-optic cables are used to set up optical PROFINET and Industrial
Ethernet networks indoors. Devices with an integrated optical interface (SC RJ connectors)
include, for example SCALANCE X200-4P IRT, SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE
X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X101-1POF, ET 200S.
Rugged round cables with green outer jacket and Kevlar strengthening elements and two
plastic fibers with a robust polyamide inner jacket for applications indoors and outdoors with
cable lengths up to 50 m. The cables are suitable for connector assembly on site.
● POF Standard Cable GP (General Purpose);
for indoor and outdoor applications
● POF Trailing Cable;
for use in drag chains
Table 10-53 Technical specifications of the POF Standard Cable GP and POF Trailing Cable
Cable type
POF Standard Cable GP
980/1000
POF Trailing Cable 980/1000
Area of application
For fixed installation indoors
For moving applications (e.g.
drag chains)
Can be ordered
Sold in meters
Sold in meters
Cable type (standard code)
I-V4Y(ZN)Y 2P980/1000
I-V4Y(ZN)11Y
2P980/1000 FLEX
Fiber type
POF FO cable 980/1000 µm
POF FO cable 980/1000 µm
160 dB/km
180 dB/km
Attenuation
at 650 nm
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm
10 MHz x 100 m
10 MHz x 100 m
Number of fibers
2
2
Polymethyl methacrylate
(PMMA)
Polymethyl methacrylate
(PMMA)
Materials
Fiber core
Cladding
Fluorinated special polymer
Fluorinated special polymer
Inner jacket/color
PA, black orange
PA, black orange
Outer jacket/color
PVC, green
PUR, green
Tensile strain relief
Kevlar fibers
Kevlar fibers
980 µm
980 µm
Mechanical characteristics
Diameter of fiber core
498
Cladding outer diameter
1000 µm
1000 µm
Diameter of inner jacket
2.2 mm Ø ±0.01 mm
2.2 mm Ø ±0.01 mm
Cable dimensions
7.8 mm ± 0.3 mm
8 mm
Cable weight
65 kg/km
55 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile
strain
100 N
100 N
Bending radius
150 mm
60 mm
Bending cycles
–
5.000.000
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
POF Standard Cable GP
980/1000
POF Trailing Cable 980/1000
Transverse compressive
strength (brief)
100 N/cm
200 N/cm
mineral oil ASTM no. 2
Conditionally resistant
Highly resistant
Mineral grease/water
Conditionally resistant / -
Highly resistant/ -
UV radiation
yes
yes
Operating temperature
-30 °C to 70 °C
-20 °C to 70 °C
Transport/storage temperature
-30 °C to 70 °C
-40 °C to 80 °C
Installation
0 °C to 50 °C
+5 °C to 50 °C
In short-circuit to cable
–
–
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant to IEC 60332-1
–
Resistant to
Perm. ambient conditions
10.5.3.2
UL/CSA approval
OFN-FT1
UL-758 AWM Style 5422
UV resistant
no
no
Halogen-free
no
no
Silicone-free
yes
yes
PCF Standard Cable
Brief description of the PCF Standard Cable 6XV1861–2A
support element
outer sheath
single core sheath
ble
PCF fiber
strain relief
using aramide
yarn
hollow core
fleece wrapping
with strain relief
elements
G_IK10_XX_10031
iling Ca
PCF Tra
PCF-LWL Trailing Cable
Figure 10-31 PCF Standard Cable
The PCF Standard Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Standard Cable GP 200/230
Profinet 6XV1861–2A (UL)E157125 OFN LL64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA (drum number) /
(year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
499
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
The PCF Standard Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Application
The PCF standard cable is a rugged round cable with a green PVC outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust polyamide inner jacket. It is
intended for fixed installation indoors with cable lengths up to 100 m. The recommended
wavelength is 660 m.
Table 10-54 Technical specifications of the PCF Standard Cable
Cable type
Area of application
FO cable for fixed installation indoors
Can be ordered
In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code)
I-VY(ZN)YY 2K200/230
Fiber type
Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm
10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm
17 MHz * km
Number of fibers
2
Max. cable length
100 m
Materials
Fiber core
Fused silica
Single jacket
PVC
Tensile strain relief
Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable
PVC / green
Diameter of single element
2.2 mm
Outer diameter
7.2 mm
Cable weight
approx. 45 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief
800 N
permanent
100 N
Bending radius, min.
brief
70 mm
permanent
105 mm
Max. transverse compression
500
brief
500 N/cm
permanent
300 N/cm
Installation and assembly
temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
UL approval
Type OFN (NEC Article 770, UL 1651)
CSA approval
Type OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA-Standard C22.2 No232M1988)
Shipbuilding approval
No
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
10.5.3.3
Chemical properties
Conditionally resistant to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance
UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN EN ISO 4892-2,
procedure A; UV application 500 hours
PCF trailing cable
Brief description of the PCF Trailing Cable
Figure 10-32 PCF trailing cable
The PCF Trailing Cable contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Trailing Cable 200/230 6XV1861–
2C (drum number) / (year of manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100
cm.
The PCF Trailing Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
Application
The PCF trailing cable is a rugged round cable with a green PUR outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust PVC inner jacket. It is intended for
moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100
m. The recommended wavelength is 660 m.
Table 10-55 Technical specifications of the PCF Trailing Cable
Cable type
Area of application
FO cable for flexible application in drag chains both indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered
In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code)
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230
Fiber type
Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm
10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm
17 MHz * km
Number of fibers
2
Max. cable length
100 m
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
501
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
Materials
Fiber core
Fused silica
Single jacket
PVC
Tensile strain relief
Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable
Polyurethane (PUR) / green
Diameter of single element
2.2 mm
Outer diameter
8.8 mm
Cable weight
approx. 85 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief
2000 N
permanent
800 N
Bending radius, min.
brief
130 mm
permanent
175 mm
Max. transverse compression
502
brief
500 N/cm
permanent
300 N/cm
Bending cycles
5.000.000
Installation and assembly
temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-30 ºC to +75 ºC
Resistance to fire
Flame retardant
Shipbuilding approval
No
Chemical properties
High resistance to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance
UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN 53 387, procedure 1;
condition A
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.3.4
PCF trailing cable GP
Brief description of the PCF Trailing Cable GP
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
)OHHFHZUDSSLQJ
2SWLFDOILEHU
'XPP\HOHPHQW
6XSSRUWHOHPHQW
39&VLQJOHMDFNHW
7HQVLOHVWUDLQUHOLHI
)OHHFHZUDSSLQJ
39&RXWHUMDFNHW
Figure 10-33 PCF trailing cable GP
The PCF Trailing Cable GP contains two step-index fibers of type 200/230 µm.
The outer jacket is labeled "SIEMENS SIMATIC NET PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230
6XV1861–2D (UL)E157125 OFN LL64163 OFN FT4 90C CSA (drum number) / (year of
manufacture, e.g. 05) (meter marker)" approximately every 100 cm.
The PCF Trailing Cable is available in meters and is suitable for fitting connectors directly.
The main difference between PCF Trailing Cable and PCF Trailing Cable GP is that the GP
variant as UL approval and that its outer jacket consists of PVC instead of PUR.
Application
The PCF trailing cable GP is a rugged round cable with a green PVC outer jacket and Kevlar
strengthening elements and two glass fibers with a robust PVC inner jacket. It is intended for
moving applications such as drag chains indoors and outdoors with cable lengths up to 100
m. The recommended wavelength is 660 m.
Table 10-56 Technical specifications of the PCF Trailing Cable GP
Cable type
Area of application
FO cable for flexible application in drag chains both indoors
and outdoors
Can be ordered
In meters or preassembled with 2 x SCRJ connectors
Cable type (standard code)
AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2K200/230
Fiber type
Step-index cable
Power loss at 660 nm
10 dB/km
Modal bandwidth
at 650 nm
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
17 MHz * km
503
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Cable type
Number of fibers
2
Max. cable length
100 m
Materials
Fiber core
Fused silica
Single jacket
PVC
Tensile strain relief
Aramid
Outer jacket /color of cable
PVC / green
Diameter of single element
2.2 mm
Outer diameter
8.8 mm
Cable weight
approx. 85 kg/km
Maximum permitted tensile strain
brief
2000 N
permanent
800 N
Bending radius, min.
brief
130 mm
permanent
175 mm
Max. transverse compression
504
brief
500 N/cm
permanent
300 N/cm
Bending cycles
5.000.000
Installation and assembly
temperature
-5 ºC to +50 ºC
Operating temperature
-25 ºC to +75 ºC
Transport/storage temperature
-30 ºC to +75 ºC
UL approval
Type OFN (NEC Article 770, UL 1651)
CSA approval
Type OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA-Standard C22.2 No232M1988)
Shipbuilding approval
No
Chemical properties
Conditionally resistant to oil, petrol, acids and alkalis
UV resistance
UV resistance of outer jacket to DIN EN ISO 4892-2,
procedure A; UV application 500 hours
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.4
Cable connectors for FO cables
10.5.4.1
Cable connectors for glass FO cables
BFOC cable connectors for glass FO cables
In Industrial Ethernet fiber-optic networks, BFOC cable connectors have been used for many
years for glass FO cables.
Figure 10-34 BFOC connectors
In the meantime, the SC connectors have also become established. They are used mainly
with the SCALANCE products with a gigabit Ethernet interface.
Figure 10-35 SC cable connectors
Fitting connectors on site
When connectors need to be fitted on site,
● SIEMENS provides this service,
● BFOC and SC connectors and special tools can be ordered.
In this case, speak to your contact for special cable solutions.
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiberoptic cables by trained personnel. When fitted
correctly, they allow extremely low insertion loss and the value is highly reproducible after
multiple plugging cycles.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
505
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Preassembled cables
To be able to use glass fiberoptic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiberoptic cables
are also available with four BFOC or SC connectors already fitted.
For more details, refer to section Preassembled FO cables (Page 508).
CAUTION
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connectors with the supplied dust caps.
Note
Only remove the dust cap immediately before establishing the connection.
10.5.4.2
Cable connectors for plastic and PCF FO cables
SC RJ connectors
POF and PCF FO cables are used to set up optical Ethernet/PROFINET networks indoors
and outdoors and used SC RJ connectors.
Ethernet/PROFINET devices with an integrated optical interface with SC RJ connectors
include, for example, SCALANCE X-200P IRT, ET200S.
POF/PCF-LWL termination kit
To fit connectors to POF/PCF FO cables on site, the termination kit is available.
506
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Figure 10-36 POF/PCF-LWL termination kit
The kit is available in a termination case. It consists of stripping tool, buffer stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, fiber cutter and microscope.
Table 10-57 Order numbers for kits and accessories
MLFB
Name
6GK1900-0ML00-0AA0
SIMATIC NET termination kit SC RJ POF plug, termination case for
on-site assembly of SC RJ connectors consisting of stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, polishing set
6GK1900-0NL00-0AA0
SIMATIC NET termination kit SC RJ PCF plug, termination case for
on-site assembly of SC RJ PCF connectors consisting of stripping tool,
Kevlar scissors, polishing set, fiber cutter
6GK1900-0MB00-0AC0
SIMATIC NET, IE SC RJ POF PLUG threaded coupling connector for
on-site fitting to POF FO cables (set of 20 duplex connectors)
6GK1900-0NB00-0AC0
SIMATIC NET, IE SC RJ PCF plug threaded coupling connector for
on-site fitting to PCF FO cables (set of 10 duplex connectors)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
507
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.5
Preassembled FO cables
10.5.5.1
Preassembled FO standard cable GP
Preassembled FO standard cable GP
The FO cables are available with two fibers. They are preassembled with 4 BFOC or 4 SC
connectors.
Table 10-58 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Standard Cable GP are available:
Length
Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors
Preassembled with 4 SC connectors
0.5 m
6XV1 873-3AH05
6XV1 873-6AH05
1m
6XV1 873-3AH10
6XV1 873-6AH10
2m
6XV1 873-3AH20
6XV1 873-6AH20
3m
6XV1 873-3AH30
6XV1 873-6AH30
5m
6XV1 873-3AH50
6XV1 873-6AH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3AN10
6XV1 873-6AN10
15 m
6XV1 873-3AN15
6XV1 873-6AN15
20 m
6XV1 873-3AN20
6XV1 873-6AN20
30 m
6XV1 873-3AN30
6XV1 873-6AN30
40 m
6XV1 873-3AN40
6XV1 873-6AN40
50 m
6XV1 873-3AN50
6XV1 873-6AN50
80 m
6XV1 873-3AN80
6XV1 873-6AN80
100 m
6XV1 873-3AT10
6XV1 873-6AT10
150 m
6XV1 873-3AT15
6XV1 873-6AT15
200 m
6XV1 873-3AT20
6XV1 873-6AT20
300 m
6XV1 873-3AT30
6XV1 873-6AT30
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
See also
FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 µm (Page 487)
10.5.5.2
Preassembled FO Ground Cable
Preassembled FO Ground Cable
The FO cables are available with two fibers. They are preassembled with 4 BFOC or 4 SC
connectors.
508
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
Table 10-59 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Ground Cable are available:
Length
Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors
Preassembled with 4 SC connectors
100 m
6XV1 873-3GT10
6XV1 873-6GT10
200 m
6XV1 873-3GT20
6XV1 873-6GT20
300 m
6XV1 873-3GT30
6XV1 873-6GT30
Due to the properties and the areas of application of the FO Ground Cable, shorter
preassembled lengths are not defined.
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
See also
FO Ground Cable 50/125 µm (Page 488)
10.5.5.3
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable
The FO cables are available with two fibers. They are preassembled with 4 BFOC or 4 SC
connectors.
Table 10-60 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Trailing Cable are available:
Length
Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors
Preassembled with 4 SC connectors
3m
6XV1 873-3CH30
6XV1 873-6CH30
5m
6XV1 873-3CH50
6XV1 873-6CH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3CN10
6XV1 873-6CN10
20 m
6XV1 873-3CN20
6XV1 873-6CN20
50 m
6XV1 873-3CN50
6XV1 873-6CN50
10 m
6XV1 873-3CT10
6XV1 873-6CT10
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
See also
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL) (Page 489)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
509
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.5 Components for optical networks
10.5.5.4
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable GP
Preassembled FO Trailing Cable GP
The FO cables are available with two fibers. They are preassembled with 4 BFOC or 4 SC
connectors.
Table 10-61 The following preferred lengths of preassembled FO Trailing Cable are available:
Length
Preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors
Preassembled with 4 SC connectors
3m
6XV1 873-3DH30
6XV1 873-6DH30
5m
6XV1 873-3DH50
6XV1 873-6DH50
10 m
6XV1 873-3DN10
6XV1 873-6DN10
20 m
6XV1 873-3DN20
6XV1 873-6DN20
50 m
6XV1 873-3DN50
6XV1 873-6DN50
10 m
6XV1 873-3DT10
6XV1 873-6DT10
Other special cables and special lengths available on request.
See also
FO Trailing Cable 50/125 µm Standard (variants with and without UL) (Page 489)
510
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
10.6
Components for wireless networks
10.6.1
Antennas
10.6.1.1
Characteristics of omnidirectional antennas
Distribution of the RF field
With the omnidirectional antennas ANT795-6MR and ANT795-4MR, the RF field is
concentrated in a plane perpendicular to the antenna. The field is uniformly distributed
around the antenna and weakens with increasing distance from the antenna. Both antennas
have a beamwidth of 30° and similar antenna gain. In contrast to the ANT795-4MR that is
mounted directly on the housing, the ANT795-6MR can be installed detached from the
device connected by the preassembled antenna cable.
horizontal
opening
angle
G_IK10_XX_30027
vertical
opening
angle
Figure 10-37 Radiation pattern of the omnidirectional antennas ANT 795-6/4 MR
Above and below the antenna there is no radiation. Moving away from the plane
perpendicular to the antenna, once the beamwidth is reached, the antenna gain has dropped
to half the value. The quality of the wireless connection then becomes noticeable poorer.
10.6.1.2
Characteristics of directional antennas
Distribution of the RF field
The directional antennas ANT792-8DR and ANT793-8DR concentrate the RF in the shape of
a lobe (to simplify matters, this is shown as a funnel in the figure below). The emission is
best perpendicular to the antenna. If the direction around the beamwidth is left, there is
practically no wireless connection possible. This antenna is then known as directional.
Antennas are supplied with a preassembled 5 m antenna cable, ANT792-8DR is also
available without a cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
511
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
vertical
opening angle
G_IK10_XX_30028
horizontal
opening angle
Figure 10-38 Radiation characteristics of the ANT 792/3-8DR directional antennas
The ANT792-8DR and ANT793-8DR antennas differ in the beamwidth of the RF field:
Beamwidth
10.6.1.3
ANT792-8DR
approx. 30°
ANT793-8DR
approx. 20°
Technical specifications for antennas
Overview
Frequency range
ANT795-4MR
ANT795-4MS
ANT792-6MN
2.4 … 5 GHz
2.4 … 5 GHz
2.4 GHz
Characteristics
omnidirectional
Radiation angle
360° horizontal
Antenna gain
4 dBi / 4 dBi
4 dBi / 4 dBi
6 dBi
SWR
max. 2.0
max. 2.0
max. 1.8
Connectors
R-SMA male
R-SMA male
N female
Operating temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C
-20 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage
temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C
-20 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Perm. ambient conditions
Relative humidity
100 %
Degree of protection
Dimensions (W x H x
D) in mm
IP65
35 x 148 x 13
22 x 250 x 22
Installation
Directly on the device
Directly on the device
Wall or mast
Weight
50 g
50 g
300 g
100 m
200 m
Range with line-of-sight 100 m
and no disruption
512
35 x 160 35 x 13
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
ANT793-6MN
ANT795-6MN
ANT795-6DN
Frequency range
5 GHz
2.4 … 5 GHz
2.4 … 5 GHz
Characteristics
omnidirectional
omnidirectional
directional
Radiation angle
360° horizontal
360° horizontal
55° horizontal, 55°
vertical
Antenna gain
5 dBi
6 dBi / 8 dBi
9 dBi / 9 dBi
SWR
max. 1.5
max. 1.8
max. 1.5
Connectors
N female
N female
N female
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage
temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Perm. ambient conditions
Relative humidity
100 %
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions (W x H x D) 16 x 160 x 16
in mm
86 x 43 x 86
Installation
Wall or mast
Ceiling
Wall or mast
Weight
300 g
300 g
110 g
Range with line-of-sight
and no disruption
200 m
200 m
200 m
ANT792-8DN
ANT793-8DN
Frequency range
2.4 GHz
5 GHz
Characteristics
directional
directional
Radiation angle
35° horizontal, 30°
vertical
18° horizontal, 18°
vertical
Antenna gain
14 dBi
19 dBi
SWR
max. 1.5
max. 1.5
Connectors
N female
N female
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Transport/storage
temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
100 x 95 x 32
Perm. ambient conditions
Relative humidity
100 %
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions (W x H x D) 200 x 200 x 43
in mm
190 x 190 x 31
Installation
Wall or mast
Wall or mast
Weight
500 g
700 g
Range with line-of-sight
and no disruption
1000 m
1000 m
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
513
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
Note
Actual range
The actual range may be significantly shorter than the value listed in the table and depends
on the spatial conditions, the wireless standard used, the data rate and the antenna being
used at the other end.
Note
Note on national wireless approvals
You will find the current national approvals on the Internet at
www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info
10.6.1.4
Dimension drawings for the antennas
ANT795-4MR/MS
6
148
21,2
34,6
13
Figure 10-39 Dimension drawing ANT795-4MR/MS
514
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
ANT792-6MN
Figure 10-40 Dimension drawing ANT792-6MN
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
515
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
ANT793-6MN
Figure 10-41 Dimension drawing ANT793-6MN
ANT795-6MN
Figure 10-42 Dimension drawing ANT795-6MN
516
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
ANT795-6DN
Figure 10-43 Dimension drawing ANT795-6DN
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
517
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
ANT792-8DN
Figure 10-44 Dimension drawing ANT792-8DN
ANT793-8DN
Figure 10-45 Dimension drawing ANT793-8DN
518
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
10.6.2
RCoax leaky feeder cable
10.6.2.1
Technical specifications
Overview
The information relates to the two RCoax cables with MLFB numbers 6XV1875-2A for 2.4
GHz and 6XV1875-2D for 5 GHz.
Construction
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Inner conductor
Copper-clad aluminum,
diameter: 4.8 mm
Dielectric
Polyethylene foam,
diameter: 12.4 mm
Outer conductor
Overlapping copper foil with the slot groups
bonded to cable jacket
Cable jacket
Polyethylene, pastel turquoise
diameter: 15.5 mm
Jacket thickness: 1.3 mm
Mechanical characteristics
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Minimum bending radius (once)
20 cm
Tensile strength
110 daN (1daN = 10 N)
Weight
0.232 kg/m
Recommended mounting distance
0.6 m
Electrical characteristics
2.4 GHz / 5 GHz
Impedance
50 +/- 2 Ω
Ratio of propagation speed
88%
Capacitance
76 pF/m
DC resistance at 20 °C
Inner conductor: 1.48 Ω/km
Outer conductor: 2.9 Ω/km
Prohibited frequencies
535, 1070, 1605 +/- 65 MHz
2140 +/- 40 MHz
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
519
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
Nominal longitudinal attenuation and coupling losses at 20 °C and 2.4 GHz
f
α
C50
[MHz]
[dB/100m]
[dB]
2400
17.0
59
2500
17.7
59
Nominal longitudinal attenuation at 20 °C and 5 GHz
f
α
α
[MHz]
[dB/100m]
[dB/100m]
Cable installation 10 cm over
concrete
Cable installation 15 mm over
aluminum rail
5200
24
35
5800
28
39
C50
C95
Nominal coupling losses at 20 °C and 5 GHz
f
[MHz]
[dB]
[dB]
5200
43
47
5800
42
46
Notice: C50 and C95 apply here for an antenna distance of 10 cm from the cable
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
- 40°C through + 85°C
Operating temperature according to UL listing
- 20°C through + 60°C
Storage temperature
- 70°C through + 85°C
Installation temperature
- 25°C through + 60°C
Low corrosive gas emission
IEC 60754-2
Flame retardant
IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 Cat. C
Low smoke emission
IEC 61034
Resistance to fire
520
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
10.6.3
Various WLAN accessories
Antenna extension cable
Table 10-62 Technical specifications
Antenna extension cable FRNC
Attenuation
0.5 dB/m at 2.4 GHz, 0.8 dB/m at 5 GHz
Connectors
R-SMA
Antenna cable length
15 m/5 m
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-25 °C to +80 °C
Transport/storage temperature
-40 °C to +80 °C
Relative humidity
100 %
Resistance to fire
IEC 60332-1
Halogen-free
yes
Silicone-free
yes
Resistance to mineral oils and fats
Conditionally resistant
Degree of protection
IP65
Weight
500 g
Approvals
IEC 60754-1/-2, IEC 601034, IEC 60332-1, UL
Table 10-63 Ordering data
MLFB
SIMATIC NET, ANTENNA EXTENSION
CABLE FRNC FOR IWLAN ANTENNAS
ANT 790
6XV1875-3FH50
LENGTH: 5 M
6XV1875-3FN15
LENGTH: 15 M
Terminator TI795-1R
Table 10-64 Technical specifications
Termination Impedance TI795-1R
Frequency range
2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
Impedance
50 ohms
Connectors
R-SMA male
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C
Transport/storage temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C
Relative humidity
100 %
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions (L X D) in mm
15 x 10
Weight
5g
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
521
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
Table 10-65 Ordering data
MLFB
6GK5795-1TR10-0AA6
SIMATIC NET, IWLAN TERMINATION
IMPEDANCE TI 795-1R, TERMINATOR 50
OHMS
Lightning protector LP 798-1N
Table 10-66 Technical specifications
Lightning protector LP798-1N
Frequency range
0 to 5.8 GHz
Impedance
50 ohms
Connectors
N/N female/female
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +100 °C
Transport/storage temperature
-40 °C to +100 °C
Relative humidity
100 %
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions (L X D) in mm
36.8 x 17
Weight
50 g
Table 10-67 Ordering data
MLFB
6GK5798-2LP00-2AA6
SIMATIC NET, IWLAN LIGHTNING
PROTECTOR LP 798-1N
Power supply PS791-1PRO
See alsoIP65 power supply (Page 526)
10.6.4
SINEMA E
Software in continuous development
Note
Note that SINEMA E is a software product that is constantly being developed.
If you want to keep up to date with the current range of functions of the application, check
the Internet regularly:
http://www.siemens.de/sinema
522
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
Software requirements
To use its full functionality problem-free, SINEMA E requires the following software:
● Windows XP Service Pack 2 The available language versions of SINEMA E are German
and English.
Note
The release for Windows Vista is planned for Autumn 2007.
Hardware requirements
The computer on which you install SINEMA E should meet the following minimum
requirements:
● Processor speed 1 GHz
● 512 MB RAM
● Hard disk with 20 MB of free space to install SINEMA E. You also require enough space
for one or more projects. For more detailed information, refer to the current readme file
supplied with the software.
● Monitor resolution at least 1024 x 768 pixels
Supported WLAN components
● WLAN access points
– SCALANCE W 788-1PRO
– SCALANCE W 788-2PRO
– SCALANCE W788-1RR
– SCALANCE W788-2RR
– Hipath AP2610,2620,2630,2640 *1)
– Standard Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g/h access points *1)
● WLAN clients
– SCALANCE W744-1PRO
– SCALANCE W746-1PRO
– SCALANCE W747-RR
– IWLAN/PB Link PN IO
– Standard Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g/h clients *1)
● LAN/WLAN adapters for up/download functions
– SIMATIC NET CP 1613-A2
– SIMATIC NET CP 1612
– Standard LAN adapters *2)
– SIMATIC NET CP 7515
– Standard WLAN adapters *3)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
523
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.6 Components for wireless networks
● WLAN adapters for WLAN measurement (site survey) *5)
– Standard mode:
Standard WLAN adapters *3)
– Advanced mode:
SIEMENS CP 7515
PCMCIA WLAN adapters *4)
Notes:
1) no configuration possible online and offline (Note: Hipath is configured by the Hipath
WLAN controller)
2) Integrated LAN interface of notebooks and PGs such as SIEMENS Power PG M
3) WLAN PCMCIA adapters such as SIEMENS CP 7515 or integrated WLAN interface of
notebooks and SIEMENS PGs
4) Driver supports cards with the following Atheros chipsets ( AR5001A, AR5001X,
AR5002G, AR5002X, AR5004G, AR5004X, AR5005GS) such as NetGear WAG511 V2,
Cisco Aironet CB21AG 802.11 a/b/g
5) SINEMA E standard license required
Order numbers and software versions
524
MLFB
Version
6GK1781-0AA00-6AA0
SINEMA E 2006 LEAN ENGINEERING
SOFTWARE FOR PLANNING +
CONFIGURATION + SIMULATION OF WLAN
SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD SINGLE
LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A 2 LANGUAGES
(G,E);WIN XP PRO
6GK1782-0AA00-6AA0
SINEMA E STANDARD ENGINEERING
SOFTWARE FOR PLANNING +
AUTOPLACEMENT + CONFIGURATION +
SIMULATION + OPTIMIZATION * SITE SURVEY
OF WLAN SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD
SINGLE LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A 2
LANGUAGES (G,E);WIN XP PRO
6GK1782-4AA00-6AC0
SINEMA E POWERPACK UPGRADE OF
SINEMA E LEAN TO SINEMA E STANDARD
LICENSE SINGLE LICENSE ON FD, CLASS A
SOFTWARE + MANUAL ON CD 2 LANGUAGES
(G,E);WIN XP PRO
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.7 Accessories
10.7
Accessories
10.7.1
C-PLUG configuration memory
Technical specifications of the C-PLUG
Table 10-68 Electrical data
C-PLUG
Power consumption
0.015 W
Power supply
Supplied by end device
Memory capacity
32 Mbytes
MTBF
> 600 years
Table 10-69 Environmental conditions
C-PLUG
Operating temperature
-20 °C - +70 °C
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C - +80 °C
Relative humidity in operation
< 95% (no condensation)
Operating altitude
2000 m at max. 56 °C ambient temperature
3,000 m at max. 50 °C ambient temperature
Degree of protection, tested to
IP20
Table 10-70 Mechanical data
C-PLUG
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm
24.3 x 17 x 8.1 mm
Weight
approx. 5 g
Table 10-71 Order number
C-PLUG
6GK1900-0AB00
Note
The C-PLUG must only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is
turned off.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
525
Part C: Passive components and accessories
10.7 Accessories
10.7.2
IP65 power supply
Overview
Table 10-72 Technical specifications
Power supply PS791-1PRO
Interfaces
AC Power 3+PE Cable Connector for 100-240 V
AC power supply
M12 Plug pro or Power Cord M12 for 24 V DC
output power
On/off switch
Input voltage
90 V to 265 V AC at 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output voltage
24 V DC, +-7%, 0.42 A
Output power
10 W
Network disruption
Bridging min. 20 ms at 230 V AC
Perm. ambient conditions
Operating temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C
Transport/storage temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C
Relative humidity
100%
Approvals
EMC:
EN 55022 Class B,
EN 61000-4;
UL 1950, EN 60950;
Device failure
MTBF 600,000 h at full load, 25 °C
Switching frequency
typ. 100 kHz
Degree of protection
IP65
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
125 x 60 x 130
Installation
Wall/standard rail mounting (S7-300) direct on
SCALANCE devices
Weight
700 g
Table 10-73 Ordering data
MLFB
6GK5791-1PS00-0AA6
SIMATIC NET, POWER SUPPLY PS 791 11PRO (AC/DC POWER UNIT)
See also
IP65 power supply (Page 224)
526
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors,
attachments and devices
11.1
11
Note on the installation instructions
Note the following:
This networking manual provides information on installing some of the most common
components.
You will find more detailed information on installing and setting up in the documentation of
the relevant devices or components.
11.2
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool
General
This section describes the use of the IE FC Stripping Tool. This is the ideal tool for preparing
the IE FC cables and simplifies fitting the IE FC connectors to the IE FC cables. Please refer
also to the instructions in the user guide supplied with the IE FC Stripping Tool.
The cables must be prepared before the connector can be fitted. The IE FC connectors are
constructed so that the cables can always be stripped in the same way.
Personnel qualification requirements
Qualified personnel as referred to in these operating instructions or in the warning notes are
defined as persons who are familiar with the installation, assembly, startup and operation of
this product and who possess the relevant qualifications for their work.
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool
WARNING
The tool described in this manual is intended only for stripping SIMATIC NET Industrial
Ethernet FastConnect cables. If used elsewhere, accidents may occur or tools and cable
may be irreparably damaged.
The tool and must not be used on live cables under any circumstances.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
527
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.2 Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool
1. Fit the required knife cassette in the 1. Take the stripping tool in your right 1. Fit the measured end of the cable in
the stripping tool. Limit stop for the
hand.
stripping tool. When using stripping
cable length is the index finger of
tool supplied with the yellow knife
2. Measure the cable length by placing
your left hand.
cassette, the cutting depth must be
the cable on the template. Use the
adjusted with the middle socket
index finger of your left hand as the
head screw after converting.
limit stop.
1. Clamp the stripping tool as far as it
will go.
528
1. To strip the insulation, turn the tool
in the direction of the arrow
• approx. 4 times for PVC insulation
• approx, 8 times for PUR insulation.
1. Keeping the it closed, pull the
stripping tool with jacket and
remnants of the shield off the end of
the cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.2 Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool
1. After releasing the tool, remove the
remnants of the cable from the tool.
1. If the white filler is not removed with 1. The protective foil is easier to
the insulation, remove it with your
remove if you score it between the
hand.
wires with a screwdriver.
1. Pull the protective foil off the wires.
1. Follow the instructions supplied with 1. Replace the knife cassette after
your connector or outlet.
approx:
• 1500 operations with cables with
PVC outer jackets
• 150 operations with cables with
PUR outer jackets
1. Order numbers for knife cassettes:
• Green: 6GK1901-1GB01
• Yellow: 6GK1901-1GB00
Note
Using the IE FC Stripping Tool
The insulation piercing contacts of the FC RJ-45 plug can be released and recontacted up to
10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
To assemble a cable with crossed over wires, connect the color-coded wires at one end of
the cable in the connector as shown below:
- connect white with yellow
- connect blue with orange.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
529
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.3 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
11.3
Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Fit the IE FC RJ-45 Plug as explained in the instructions below.
In the stripping tool, use the green knife Take the stripping tool in your right
hand.
cassette 6GK1901-1GB01
(5.1 mm knife distance)!
Measure the cable length by placing
When using stripping tool supplied with the cable on the template.
Use the index finger of your left hand
the yellow knife cassette, the cutting
depth must be adjusted with the middle as the limit stop.
socket head screw after replacing the
knife cassette.
Place the cable in the stripping tool.
The index finger of your left hand is the
limit stop.
Rotate the stripping tool to strip the
cable - with PVC insulation approx. 4
times, - for PUR insulation approx. 8
times in the direction of the arrow.
If the white filler was not pulled off
when you stripped the cable, remove it
and the transparent protective foil
manually.
Keeping the it closed, pull the stripping
tool with jacket and remnants of the
shield off the end of the cable.
Clamp the stripping tool as far as it will
go.
Cut off the dummy cores.
530
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.3 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Spread out the cores according to their
colors on the contact elements of the
FC RJ-45 plug.
Insert the cores as far as they will go
into the contact elements of the FC RJ45 plug.
Press down the contact elements as far
as the limit stop to contact the cores.
Close the cover and turn the locking
mechanism with your hand as far as
possible in the direction of the arrow.
Insert a 2.5 mm screwdriver into the
hole in the locking mechanism and
continue turning it as far as the limit
stop.
The connector is correctly locked when
the opening of the locking mechanism
is at the side and the side edges are
flush with the connector.
Note
The figures show how to fit an IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180. To fit the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 145 or IE
FC RJ-45 Plug 90, the procedure is analogous!
Notes:
Replace the knife cassette if the cut is
not clean or after stripping
approximately
• 1500 operations with cables with
PVC outer jackets
• 150 operations with cables with
PUR outer jackets
The insulation piercing contacts of the
FC RJ-45 plug can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector
fitted, must not be used twice but must
be cut off before fitting a new
connector.
To assemble a cable with crossed over
wires, connect the color-coded wires at
one end of the cable in the connector
as shown below:
Connect white with yellow
Connect blue with orange.
See also
IE FC RJ-45 Plug (Page 463)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
531
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
11.4
Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
11.4.1
Connecting the RJ-45 Modular Outlet
Graphic showing connection of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet
532
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
11.4.2
Connecting the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34
Instructions:
Remove the locking screw of
the insert. (1.)
Pull the insert forward as far as
the limit stop. (2.)
Now release the two cover
screws that are now accessible
Lift up the upper part of the IE
FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet. (4.)
Lift up the 4 terminals of the
terminal block. (5.)
Strip the approx. 55 mm of the
jacket of the IE Hybrid Cable
2x2 + 4x0.34.
Shorten the shield of the data
wires by approx. 5 to maximum
20 mm.
Cut off the dummy cores.
Spread the wires according to
the color markings in the figure
above.
Cut all the wires in a straight
line to leave 48 mm to the cable
jacket.
Insert the wires pair by pair into
the wire channels of the
insulation piercing terminals
according to the color codes in
the picture on the left.
The color codes on the terminal
block of the modular outlet have
no meaning for the hybrid cable!
The ends of the wires must be
visible in the last viewing
window of the terminal block
and must meet the back panel
of the terminal block!
Secure the wires in position by
pressing down the terminals as
far as the limit stop.
Repeat these steps until all four
pairs or wires are connected.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
533
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
Center the cable in the shield
clamp so that the power wires
are at the bottom in the shield
clamp and the braided shield
makes contact with the
pressure surface in the upper
part of the outlet. (15.)
Tighten the two cover screws.
Fit the outlet on a DIN rail or
Tighten the insert screw until the secure it to a smooth surface
insert is flush with the casing of using the three holes in the
casing.
the outlet.
Fold down the upper part. (16.)
Make sure that the power wires
do not slip and are not jammed
by the lateral metal bars.
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
Note
The following inserts are available without basic housing
Insert 2FE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA1
Insert 1GE order no. 6GK1901-1BK00-0AA2
Note that the connection between IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlets with these inserts requires 8wire FastConnect cables (Cat6). The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 6XV1870--2J is not
suitable for operation of the 2FE and 1GE inserts!
Note
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
Current load maximum 0.5 A.
534
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
WARNING
Keep to the rules in the SCALANCE W manual for fitting an IP67 hybrid cable connector to
a SCALANCE W device!
11.4.3
Connecting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP / IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2
GP
Instructions
Remove the locking screw of
the insert. (1.)
Pull the insert forward as far as
the limit stop. (2.)
Now release the two cover
screws that are now accessible.
Lift up the upper part of the IE
FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet. (4.)
Lift up the 4 terminals of the
terminal block. (5.)
Use the green knife cassette
6GK1901-1GB01 (5.1 mm knife
clearance) in the stripping tool.
Adjust the cutting depth of the
knife cassette if necessary with
the socket-head screws at the
head of the tool.
Take the stripping tool in your
right hand.
Measure the cable length
against the stripping tool.
Use your left index finger as the
limit stop. (9.)
Place the cable in the stripping
tool. Your left index finger is the
limit stop.
Tighten the stripping tool until it
locks into place (audible click).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
535
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
536
Rotate the stripping tool to strip
the cable
- with PVC insulation approx. 4
times,
- for PUR insulation approx. 8
times
in the direction of the arrow.
Remove the cable jacket, shield
and the white filler with your
hand.
Cut off the central support
element.
Spread out the wires according
to the color markings on the
terminal block of the Modular
Outlet.
Do not undo the twisting of the
wire more than necessary to
make the connection.
Shorten the two middle pairs so
that all wires end in a line.
Guide the wires according to the
color markings, pair by pair into
the wire channels of the
insulation piercing terminals as
far as the limit stop on the back
panel. (17.)
The ends of the wires must be
visible in the last viewing
window of the terminal block!
(18.)
Secure the wires in position by
pressing down the terminals as
far as the limit stop.
Repeat these steps until all four
pairs or wires are connected.
Align the cable so that the
braided shield is in the center of
the middle section of the shield
clamp.
Fold down the upper part.
Tighten the two cover screws.
(23.)
Tighten the insert screw until the
insert is flush with the casing of
the outlet. (24.)
Fit the outlet on a DIN rail or
secure it to a smooth surface
using the three holes in the
casing.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.4 Fitting the IE FC Modular Outlet RJ-45
Note
The insulation piercing contacts of the IE FC RJ-45 Modular Outlet can be released and
recontacted up to 10 times.
Cable ends that have had a connector fitted, must not be used twice but must be cut off
before fitting a new connector.
Note
Use the power insert only under the following conditions:
Extra-low voltages SELV, PELV to IEC 60364-4-41
In USA/CAN with power supplies according to NEC class 2
In USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of the NEC/CEC
Current load maximum 0.5 A.
WARNING
Keep to the rules in the SCALANCE W manual for fitting an IP67 hybrid cable connector to
a SCALANCE W device!
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
537
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
11.5
Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid
connector
Terminating the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 with an IE IP67 hybrid plug
Remove the two inner shells of the universal
sealing ring to adapt it to the diameter of the
hybrid cable.
Push the bushing, the washer, the adapted
universal sealing ring and the housing over the
cable jacket.
Remove the following lengths of cable jacket and
shield braid:
• 25 mm for the power leads.
• 30 mm for the data leads
(to achieve good shielding, the shield braid
must be at least 30 mm long).
538
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Arrange the data leads according to the color
codes on the splice element. The following table
shows the assignment of the data leads.
Contact and color assignment of the splice
element.
Wire color code
(standard)
White
Blue
Yellow
Orange
Connector color code
(Siemens IE)
White
Blue
Yellow
Orange
Siemens IE FC RJ-45
socket (reference)
3
6
1
2
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
539
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Insert the all the data leads at the same time into
the splice element is far as they will go.
Close the splice element and RJ-45 data module
until they lock together.
Insert the data module and the splice element
into the supplied IDC assembly tool.
540
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Press the data module and the IDC assembly tool
together to establish the installation piercing
connection.
Remove the assembled data module from the
IDC assembly tool.
Position the top shield plate and press it over the
cable shield.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
541
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Position the lower shield plate and press it and
the upper shield plate together until they lock
together with an audible "click".
Arrange the power leads and insert them as far
as they will go into the hinge elements of the
isolation body.
The following table shows the pin assignment of
the power leads.
Wire color code
(standard)
Power supply insert
module
542
Brown
Brown
Black
Black
24 V
24 V
Ground
Ground
1
2
3
4
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.5 Assembling an IE hybrid cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 with an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Press each individual hinge element together with
the integrated IDC contact.
Recommendation: Use a small slotted
screwdriver (max. 3.5 mm) as a lever.
Push the housing over the assembled data
module and the insulator body until they lock
together (there should be an audible click).
Tighten the cable gland. We recommend an open
ring key with a size of 21 mm.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
543
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.6 Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
11.6
Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid
connector
Procedure
Remove the two inner shells of the universal sealing ring
to adapt it to the diameter of the hybrid cable.
Push the bushing, washer, adapted universal sealing
ring and the housing over the cable jacket.
30 mm
25 mm
Remove the following lengths of cable jacket and shield
braid:
• 25 mm for the power leads
• 30 mm for the data leads
To achieve good shielding, the shield braid must be alt
least 30 mm long.
Arrange the data leads according to the color codes on
the splice element. The following table shows the
assignment of the data leads.
Wind the shield braid around the data leads. As a result,
the shielding of the cable has contact to the shield plate
of the splice element that will be fitted later.
544
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.6 Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Contact and color assignment of the splice element.
Contact 2
(Orange)
Contact 1
(Yellow)
*
Contact 6
(Blue)
Contact 3
(White)
Color coding of the standard cable
White /
orange *
Orange
White /
green *
Green
Connector color code (Siemens IE)
White
Blue
Yellow
Orange
Siemens IE FC RJ-45 socket (reference)
3
6
1
2
White wire of the pair.
Insert the all the data leads at the same time into the
splice element is far as they will go.
Close the splice element and RJ-45 data module until
they lock together.
Insert the data module and the splice element into the
supplied IDC assembly tool.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
545
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.6 Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Press the data module and the IDC assembly tool
together to establish the installation piercing connection.
Remove the assembled data module from the IDC
assembly tool.
Position the top shield plate and press it over the cable
shield.
Position the lower shield plate and press it and the upper
shield plate together until they lock together with an
audible "click".
Arrange the power leads and insert them as far as they
will go into the hinge elements of the isolation body.
The following table shows the assignment of the power
leads.
546
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.6 Fitting the IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 GP to an IE IP 67 hybrid connector
Wire color code (standard)
*
White /
blue *
Blue
White /
brown *
Brown
Function
24 V
24 V
Ground
Ground
Power supply insert module
1
2
3
4
White wire of the pair.
Press each individual hinge element together with the
integrated IDC contact.
Recommendation: Use a small slotted screwdriver (max.
3.5 mm) as a lever.
Push the housing over the assembled data module and
the insulator body until they lock together (there should
be an audible click).
Tighten the cable gland. We recommend an open key
with a size of 21 mm.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
547
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
11.7
Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
11.7.1
Assembling Industrial Twisted Pair Connectors
General
To maintain the excellent EMC and transmission characteristics of the twistedpair cabling
system, connectors must be fitted with extreme care. Follow the installation instructions
exactly.
How to fit 9pin and 15pin connectors is explained in detail on the following pages.
Note
Fit the D-sub connectors for self-assembly only to the 2x2 Industrial TwistedPair standard
cable. The cable clamp used for contacting the shield is designed for the diameter of this
cable.
These D-sub male connectors are not suitable for fitting to Industrial Ethernet FC cable
types.
548
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
11.7.2
Fitting the D-sub male connector
9-pin D-sub male connector
Figure 7-7 shows all the components of a 9-pin D-sub connector.
&RYHU
&RYHUVFUHZ
&DEOHFODPSVFUHZ
&DEOHFODPS
&RQQHFWRULQVHUWZLWK
IRXUVFUHZWHUPLQDOV
&RSSHUEDQG
&RQQHFWRUFDVLQJ
Figure 11-1
Industrial Twisted Pair D-sub male connector (9-pin) for user assembly
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
549
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
Steps
1. Remove approximately 30 mm of the outer sheath from the braided shield.
30
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and pull off the loose shield.
10
3. Turn back the braided shield over the outer sheath.
● Unwind the aluminum foil shield up to a point approximately 15 mm from the folded back
braided shield and cut off the unwound material.
● Remove the plastic foil and blind elements.
● Remove approximately 5 mm of the insulation from the conductors.
5 10
15
4. Wrap copper band around the braided shield.
5. Fit the connector
● Fit the connector insert into the connector casing
● Fit the lower cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing
550
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
● Match the wire pairs to the screw terminals
You will find the assignment required for a particular cable type in section .
● Fit the cable into the connector casing so that the braided shield with the copper band lies
in the cable clamp
● Fit the upper cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing and screw it tight
● Secure the conductors in the screw terminals
● Screw the cover on to the connector casing
5
9 1 6
6KLHOGIRLO
%UDLGHGVKLHOG
ZUDSSHGZLWK
FRSSHUEDQG
Figure 11-2
9-pin D-sub male connector fitted to the standard cable
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
551
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
15-pin D-sub male connector
Figure 7-9 shows all the components of a 15-pin D-sub connector
Figure 11-3
552
15-pin D-sub male connector for user assembly
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
Steps
1. Remove approximately 35 mm of the outer sheath from the braided shield.
35
2. Cut the braided shield approximately 10 mm from the edge of the outer sheath
and pull off the loose shield.
3. Shorten the white-blue pair by approximately 3 mm to 32 mm
(to introduce the cable as shown in Figure 1–10).
● Turn back the braided shield over the outer sheath.
● Unwind the aluminum foil shield leaving approximately 15 mm (shorter pair) or
approximately 18 mm (longer pair) to the folded back braided shield and cut off the
unwound shield.
● Remove the plastic foil and blind element.
● Remove approximately 5 mm of the insulation from the conductors.
4. Wrap copper band around the braided shield.
5. Fit the connector
● Fit the lower cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing.
● Fit the cable into the connector casing so that the braided shield with the copper band lies
in the cable clamp
● Fit the upper cable clamp into the grooves of the connector casing and screw it tight
● Match the wire pairs to the screw terminals
You will find the assignment required for a particular cable type in section .
● Secure the conductors in the screw terminals
● Screw the cover on to the connector casing
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
553
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.7 Assembly of Industrial Twisted Pair connectors
Figure 11-4
15-pin D-sub male connector fitted to the standard cable
See also
Preassembled twisted-pair (TP) and Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) cables (Page 451)
554
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8
Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8.1
General notes on networking bus cables
Bus cables in plants
Bus cables are important connections for communication between individual components of
an automation system. Mechanical damage or repeated electrical interference affecting
these bus connections reduces the transmission capacity of the system. In extreme cases,
such problems can lead to failure of the entire automation system. The following sections
explain how to protect cables from mechanical and electrical impairment.
Shielding and grounding concept
Bus cables connect programmable controllers. These in turn are connected to transducers,
power supply units, peripheral devices etc. over cables.
All the components together form a complex electrically networked automation system.
When connecting system components via electrical cables (in this case bus cables),
remember to take into account the requirements of the overall system structure.
Connecting cables, in particular, influence the shielding and grounding concept. Shielding
and grounding an electrical installation serves the following purposes:
● Protects both humans and animals from dangerous network voltages
● Prevents unacceptable noise emission and susceptibility to noise
● Protects the system from overvoltage (for example lightning protection)
Networking SIMATIC with SIMATIC NET
SIMATIC NET network components and SIMATIC automation components are designed to
operate together taking into account the aspects listed above. By keeping to the installation
instructions described in the system manuals and in the following sections of this book, your
automation system will meet the legal and normal industrial requirements for safety and
noise immunity.
11.8.2
Protection from electric shock
Twistedpair signal level
The signal levels on twisted pair cables are in the range of only a few volts. Correctly
installed and operated twisted-pair cables do not have dangerous electrical voltages.
Nevertheless you should remember the following rules when installing the power
supply for all components (end devices, bus components, etc.) that you want to connect to
twistedpair cable.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
555
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Operation with 24 V DC
Numerous SIMATIC NET components require a voltage of 24 V DC as their operating
voltage or as auxiliary contact voltage. This power supply must meet the requirements of an
extralow voltage with reliable electrical isolation from the main power system, complying with
IEC 60950 or EN 60950 /18/.
Operation with line power
Components operated with line power must meet the requirements for protection against
electric shock as stipulated in EN 60950 /18/, EN 611312 /20/, EN 61010 /19/ or other
applicable product standards.
All the signals of the twistedpair port must meet the requirements of reliable electrical
isolation from the line power supply, complying with IEC 60950 or EN 60950 /18/.
Cabling components
Conductive cable path systems, barriers, and accessories must be included in the protective
measures preventing indirect contact (protection against illegal dangerous contact voltage).
Grounding conductors (PE) and equipotential bonding conductors must be installed
according to the requirements of systems in buildings complying with HD 384.4.41
(protection against electric shock) and HD 384.5.54 (grounding and grounding conductor).
The use of EN 501742 is recommended for the separation of low voltage cabling and IT
cabling.
The requirements of HD 384.4.47 S2 (application of measures for protection against electric
shock) and HD 384.4.482 S1 (selection of protective measures as a function of external
influences) and appropriate national or local regulations must be adhered to.
Safe initial state of the system in case of faults
Problems on communication connections must not be allowed to put system users at risk.
Cable or wire breaks must not lead to undefined statuses in the plant or system.
11.8.3
Mechanical protection of bus cables
Protection of electrical and optical bus cables
Mechanical protection is required to protect bus cables from breaks or mechanical damage.
Note
The measures described here for mechanical protection apply both to electrical and optical
cables.
556
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Measures for mechanical protection
The following measures are recommended to protect bus cables from physical damage:
● When cable cannot be installed on a cable rack or similar construction, it should be
installed in a conduit (for example PG 11-16)
● In areas where the cable is subject to mechanical stress, install the cable in a heavygauge aluminum conduit or in a heavy-gauge plastic conduit (see Figure 1–5)
● When 90° bends are necessary and at the junctions between buildings (for example
expansion joints), a break in the conduit is acceptable only when there is no likelihood of
damage to the cable, for example due to falling objects (see Figure 1–6).
● In areas where the cable is likely to be walked on or driven over in buildings or in
machines, install the cable in a closed heavy-gauge aluminum or steel conduit or in a
metal cable gutter.
Figure 11-5
Mechanical protection of the bus cable
Figure 11-6
Interrupting the conduit at an expansion joint
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
557
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Redundant bus cables
The installation of redundant bus cables involves special requirements. Redundant cables
should always be installed on separate cable racks to avoid simultaneous damage by the
same event.
Install bus cables separately
To prevent accidental damage to bus cables, they should be clearly visible and should be
separate from all other wiring and cables. To improve EMC, it is often advisable to install the
bus cables in a separate cable channel or in conductive metal tubes. Such measures also
make it easier to localize a faulty cable.
11.8.4
Electromagnetic compatibility of fiberoptic cables
Fiberoptic cables
For communications between buildings and/or external facilities, the use of fiberoptic cables
is generally recommended. Due to the optical transmission principle, fiberoptic cables are
not affected by electromagnetic interference. Measures for equipotential bonding and for
overvoltage protection are unnecessary with fiberoptic cables.
Note
Fiberoptic cables are ideally suited for connections in areas with high EMI levels.
Remember, however, that bus components operating on an electrical basis such as OLMs,
OSMs etc. may require additional noise protection measures if they are operated in such
areas. These must be protected against unacceptable interference using the measures
already mentioned such as shielding, grounding, minimum clearance to sources of
interference etc.
558
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8.5
Connecting fiber-optic cables
BFOC connectors
Industrial Ethernet fiber-optic network components use only glass fiber-optic cables with
BFOC connectors.
Figure 11-7
BFOC connector with dust cap
Note
Connectors should only be fitted to glass fiber-optic cables by trained personnel. When fitted
correctly, they allow extremely low insertion loss and the value is highly reproducible after
multiple plugging cycles.
Preassembled cables
To be able to use glass fiber-optic cables with untrained personnel, glass fiber-optic cables
are also available with four BFOC connectors already fitted. See also preassembled FO
cables.
Fitting connectors on site
If it is necessary to fit connectors on site,
– BFOC connectors and suitable tools can be ordered
– SIEMENS provides this service.
If this is required, please ask your contact for special cables and special lengths.
You will also find the address:
- in our catalog IK PI
- on the Internet (http//www.ad.siemens.de)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
559
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
CAUTION
Fiber-optic cable connectors are susceptible to contamination and mechanical damage to
the face. Protect open connectors with the supplied dust caps. Only remove the dust cap
immediately before making the connection.
See also
Contacts for special cables and special lengths (Page 422)
Preassembled FO cables (Page 508)
11.8.6
Electromagnetic compatibility of bus cables
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the capability of a electrical equipment to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment and
interfering with other equipment belonging to it (in compliance with DIN VDE 0870).
This mutual influence can take the form of electrical, magnetic, and electromagnetic effects.
These effects can spread both over cable connections (for example a common power
supply) or due to radiated interference affecting the cable.
To avoid interference affecting electrical systems, these effects must be reduced to a certain
level. The measures involved in achieving this limitation include the design, construction, and
correct connection of bus cables. The components and bus cables for SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet meet the requirements of the European standards for devices used in an
industrial environment. This is documented by the CE marking.
Note
Adherence to the specified limit values can only be guaranteed when using components
from the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet range exclusively and by keeping to the
installation instructions in this manual!
11.8.6.1
Equipotential bonding system
Aims of equipotential bonding
The noise immunity of extended electronic automation systems or, in general, information
technology systems largely depends on the suitable design of the grounding and
equipotential bonding system of the building.
Equipotential bonding and grounding have two essential aims:
● Protection from the dangers of electricity
560
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
– by limiting the contact voltage and creating a fault to ground path
● Improvement of electromagnetic compatibility
– by creating a reference potential and equalizing potential differences between parts of
the system
– by shielding.
Causes of potential differences
Wherever electric currents flow, magnetic fields are produced that in turn induce stray
currents in electrically conductive materials. Induced stray currents can therefore not be
avoided in the vicinity of electrical consumers (drives, electronic controls, lighting etc.) and
their power supply cables. They spread in all conductor loops. Conductor loops are formed
by parts of buildings such as metal banisters on staircases, water pipes or central heating
pipes as well as through the shields of electrical data cables and the protective ground
connectors of electrical devices (PE). The flow of current produces a voltage drop. This can
be measured as a potential difference between two locations within the system.
Extremely high potential differences between two grounding points result from lightning
strikes.
Effects of potential differences in information technology systems
If locations with different grounding potential are connected via cables, currents will flow. The
currents flow on all connections between these two points, for example also on the signal
cables or cable shields connecting them. Attached devices can be disturbed or even
destroyed.
The aim of a grounding and equipotential bonding system is to ensure that the currents flow
in the grounding system and not in the electronic circuits.
Measures for grounding and equipotential bonding
According to EN 50310 /21/, a "common bonding network CBN" with a fine mesh of
conductive elements must be created in buildings with information technology systems.
Systems that extend beyond one floor and that are interconnected by electrical bus cables
require a threedimensional CBN with a lattice construction resembling a Faraday cage.
With the following measures, you can create a grounding and bonding system that will
improve EMC:
● Include all the metal parts of a building in a common bonding network (CBN) with low
impedance and high current carrying capacity. To this network, you should then connect
the main grounding terminal or bar, grounding conductors, metal conduits, reinforcing
rods, equipotential bonding ring conductor, cable racks and any additional bonding
conductors.
● Connect all inactive metal parts in the immediate vicinity of your automation components
and bus cables to the bonding system ensuring good conductivity. This includes all metal
parts of cabinets, machine parts etc. that have no electrical function in the automation
system.
● Include metal, conductive cable channels/racks in the equipotential bonding of the
building and between the individual parts of the system. The individual segments of the
channels/racks must be connected together with low inductance and low resistance and
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
561
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
connected to the CBN system as often as possible. Expansion joints and angled
connections should be bridged by additional flexible grounding bands. The connections
between the individual segments of channels must be protected from corrosion to ensure
longterm stability.
● The effectiveness of equipotential bonding is greater when the impedance of the bonding
conductor is low.
● The impedance of the additional bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the shield
impedance of parallel Industrial Twisted Pair cables.
● Protect the bonding conductor from corrosion.
● Install the bonding conductor so that the area enclosed by the bonding conductor and
signal cables is as small as possible.
● Use copper or galvanized steel for the bonding conductor.
562
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Figure 11-8
Example of meshed bonding system
For information about grounding and bonding techniques, refer to the system manuals of the
SIMATIC S7300 /9/, S7400 /10/ programmable controllers.
Note
Equipotential bonding is unnecessary if the sections of a system are connected exclusively
using fiberoptic cable (FO).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
563
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8.6.2
Requirements of the AC power distribution system
General
HD 384.3 S2 (IEC 603643:1993, modified, /22/) describes various power distribution
systems (TNS, TNC,S, TNC, TT and IT systems). Additional national or local regulations
stipulate the measures required for protection against electric shock and stipulate the
requirements for a grounding system (see also section 1.2 Protection against electric shock).
The outer surfaces of switching cubicles, device housings, connectors and bus cables are
conductive to provide shielding and must be connected to the grounding system to ensure
safety. To ensure that the EMC shield effect is achieved, they make further requirements of
the grounding system and grounding of the power distribution system. These result in an
alternating power distribution system with noncurrent carrying grounding conductors, for
example as in the TNS system.
Cable shields are part of the equipotential bonding network of a system.
Since the shields of twistedpair cables are included in the bonding system, all the currents
coupled into the bonding system of a building or plant flow through them.
Depending on the intensity and frequency range, these shield currents can cause
disturbances in data communication. Measures must therefore be taken to avoid the
alternating power distribution system of a plant including the bonding system in the power
return cabling. A TN-S system with separate cables or N and PE, for example, meets these
requirements. The EN 50310:2000 /21/ standard provides detailed guidelines for installing a
network system for supplying information technology equipment.
Note
End devices and /or network components connected over shielded twistedpair cables must
only be supplied by alternating power distribution systems whose grounding conductors
cannot contribute to the transmission of energy. There must be no PEN cable within the
entire system. This condition is met, for example, by a TNS system.
Signal connections in existing installations
If unexplained, sporadic disturbances occur in data processing systems or on their
communication connections, it is advisable to check for unwanted shield currents. These can
be measured simply by inserting the cable in question in a clipon ammeter. Currents higher
than approximately 0.1 A indicate problems in the electrical installation, for example in the
TNC system.
If the alternating current power system supplies a large number of electronic devices or
electronically controlled consumers, the highest interference currents can generally be
observed at the third harmonic of the frequency.
Other signs of an unsuitable alternating current power supply are as follows:
● Currents on the PE conductor
● Currents through water pipes and heating pipes
● Progressive corrosion at grounding terminals, on lightning conductors, and water pipes.
564
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Remember that sporadic events such as switching, short circuits, or atmospheric discharge
(lightning strike) can cause current peaks in the system many times higher than the
measured average value.
Troubleshooting
The following measures are suitable for troubleshooting:
● Restructuring the power distribution system (to form a TNS system)
● Replacing the electrical data cabling with fiberoptic cables
● Installing an equipotential bonding conductor parallel to the disturbed data cabling.
Note
If shield currents on bus cables cause problems in communication, the safest often
cheapest solution is to replace the disturbed electrical bus connection with a fiberoptic
cable.
Example of installing FO cable in a TNCS system
The graphic below illustrates the relationships between the structure of the alternating
current network, equipotential bonding system, and information technology cabling in a
building.
Three PCs and three S7300 PLCs represent the information technology system. These are
networked using two OSMs. The housing of all the end devices and the OSMs are correctly
connected to the grounding and bonding system of the building. The PCs are connected to
the system via the PE contact of their power supply cable. The housing of the OSMs and the
racks of the S7300 PLCs are connected either directly or via a switching cubicle housing
locally to the CBN. The shields of the twistedpair cables interconnect all the device housings
and are therefore connected to the grounding and bonding systems at both ends.
The horizontal power distribution within a floor corresponds to the requirements of a TNS
system. The neutral cable N and grounding conductor PE are separate cables. The PE
grounding conductor does not contribute to the power supply of the devices. The parallel
cable shields of the twistedpair cables are therefore also free of neutral cable currents.
The vertical, interfloor power distribution is designed as a TNC system (common PEN cable
for N and PE). The PEN is the return cable of the power supply of all connected consumers.
A connection between the two OSMs at the righthand edge of the picture over shielded
twistedpair cables would allow the return cable current of the PEN to flow through the entire
bonding system, all PE cables, and all cable shields on both floors. It is therefore strongly
recommended to implement the interfloor connection between the two OSMs with fiberoptic
cables.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
565
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Figure 11-9
566
Fiberoptic links avoid shield currents in the TNCS network
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8.6.3
Shielding devices and cables
Shielding cables
The high degree of noise immunity of SIMATIC NET twisted-pair copper networks is
achieved by the exclusive use of shielded twisted-pair cables. The highly symmetrical
twisted signal wires are surrounded by a combination of foil and braided mesh shields. The
shield makes large-area, conductive contact with the casing of the attached end device or
network component at both ends of the twisted-pair cable via the connector/outlet. The entire
communications electronics, consisting of transmitter and receiver chips as well as the signal
cables is protected from electromagnetic influence from the outside world by a closed
"cocoon" of electrically conductive device casing and cable shield.
Note
The values specified for noise emission and noise immunity in the technical specifications of
all SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet components assumes the use of shielded twisted-pair
cables.
As explained in the installation rules for the devices, the shields of the twisted-pair cables
must make good conductive contact with the device housings at both ends. This is ensured
by the SIMATIC NET connectors designed specially to match the devices.
If, on the other hand, the rules are ignored and unshielded cables are used or the shields do
not make contact with the casing at both ends, there is no longer any guarantee that the
technical data regarding noise emission and noise immunity will apply. In this case, the
operators of the system must take responsibility themselves for compliance with the legal
limit values for noise emission and noise immunity (CE mark)!
Handling bus cable shields
Note the following points about cable shields:
● Use SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables throughout your system. The shields of these
cables have an adequate density to meet the legal requirements regarding noise
emission and immunity.
● Always contact the shields of bus cables at both ends. The legal requirements for noise
emission and noise immunity in your system (CE marking) can only be achieved when
the shields make contact at both ends.
● Secure the shield of the bus cable to the connector casing.
● If cables are installed permanently, it is advisable to remove the insulation of the shielded
cable and to establish contact on the shield/PE conductor bar.
Note
If there is a potential difference between the grounding points, an illegally high
compensating current can flow through the shield grounded at both ends. To rectify the
problem, do not, under any circumstances, open the shield of the bus cable.
This problem can be solved in the following ways:
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
567
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
● Install an additional bonding conductor parallel to the bus cable that takes over the shield
current.
● Use fiber-optic cable instead of electrical cable (safest solution).
Establishing shield contact
When contacting the cable shields, please note the following points:
● Secure the braided shield with metal cable clamps.
● The clamps must make good and large-area contact with the shield.
● Contact SIMATIC NET twisted-pair cables only using the braided copper shield and not
the aluminum foil shield. The foil shield is connected to a plastic foil to increase tearing
strength and is therefore non-conductive.
● Contact the shield with the shielding bar directly at the point at which the cable enters the
cabinet.
Figure 11-10 Securing shielded cables with cable clamps and ties (schematic representation)
● When removing the sheath of the cable, make sure that the braid shield of the cables is
not damaged.
● To allow good contact between grounding elements, tin-plated or galvanically stabilized
surfaces are ideal. With galvanized surfaces, the necessary contact should be achieved
using suitable screws. Painted surfaces should be avoided at the contact points.
568
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
● Unless specifically intended for this purpose, shield clamps and contacts should not be
used for strain relief. The contact with the shielding bar could be impaired or be broken
altogether.
Figure 11-11 Contacting the shield at the point of entry to a cabinet
11.8.6.4
Special noise suppression measures
Connecting switched inductances to suppressors
Some inductive switching devices (for example relays) create interference voltages that are
a multiple of the connected operating voltage. The SIMATIC S7-300 /9/ and S7-400 /10/
system manuals contain suggestions on how to limit the interference voltages caused by
inductance by connecting them to suppressors.
Power supply for programming devices
It is advisable to include a power socket for programming devices in each cabinet. The
socket must be supplied by the same system to which the PE conductor for the cabinet is
connected.
Cabinet lighting
Use bulbs for the cabinet lighting, for example LINESTRA lamps. Avoid the use of
fluorescent lamps since they cause interference. If you need to use fluorescent lamps, take
the measures shown in the figure below.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
569
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Figure 11-12 Measures for interference suppression of fluorescent lamps in a cabinet
11.8.7
Arrangement of devices and cables
Adequate clearance to reduce the effects of interference
One simple but nevertheless effective method of reducing the effects of interference is to
keep the "culprit" and "victim" devices and cables as far apart from each other as possible.
Inductive and capacitive interference injection declines in proportion to the square of the
distance of the elements involved. This means that doubling the clearance reduces the
effects of interference by a factor of four. Taking certain aspects into account during the
planning phase of a building generally incurs little extra cost and can save considerable
effort later.
Standards recommending the spatial arrangement of devices and cables
EN 501742 /13/ includes recommendations on the spatial arrangement of devices and
cables with the aim of achieving the lowest possible mutual interference.
570
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
11.8.7.1
The influence of power distribution systems (EN 501742, 6.4.4.2)
Planning the electrical installations
To avoid the power distribution system affecting sensitive devices, the following points must
be taken into account when planning the electrical installation:
● Possible sources of interference, for example voltage distributors, voltage transformers,
elevators, high currents in power supply bars, must be located at a suitable distance from
sensitive devices;
● Metal pipes (for example for water, gas, heating) and cables should enter the building at
the same point;
● The metal surfaces, shields, metal pipes, and connections of such conduits must be
connected with lowresistance conductors to the main bonding conductor of the building;
● Using a common cable route for lowvoltage cable and signal cables with adequate
separation (either by clearance or shielding) between the two to avoid large induction
loops that are created by the different lowvoltage cabling;
● The use of either a single multicore cable for all power supplies or (in the case of higher
power requirements) of conductor bars with weak magnetic fields.
11.8.7.2
Cable categories and clearances
Fiberoptic cables
When using fiberoptic cables, mechanical protection is necessary, however the EMC rules
do not apply.
Grouping in categories
It is useful to group wires and cables into various categories according to the signals they
carry, possible interference signals, and their sensitivity to interference. Minimum clearances
can be specified for these categories so that interferencefree operation can be expected
under normal operating conditions if the clearance is adhered to.
Constraints
Grouping cables according to voltage classes assumes that the interference voltages relate
directly to the power supply voltage conducted (the lower the supply voltage, the lower the
interference voltage). Remember, however, that DC or 50 Hz power supply voltages do not
represent any danger to Industrial Ethernet bus cables. The critical interference voltages in
the kHz to MHz frequency range are created by the consumers connected to the cable. A 24
V DC cable with which a relay is switched regularly has a far more critical interference range
than a 230 V cable supplying a lightbulb.
In the information shown below, it is assumed that all the components within an automation
system and all the plant components controlled by the system (for example machines, robots
etc.) at least meet the requirements of the European standards for electromagnetic
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
571
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
compatibility in an industrial environment. If devices are defective or incorrectly installed,
higher interference voltages must be expected!
The following is assumed:
● The cables for analog signals, data signals and process signals are always shielded.
● The distance from the cables to the chassis surface of the system (cabinet wall, grounded
and conducting cable channel, ...) is not more than 10 cm.
Note
In general, the greater the distance between cables and the shorter the distances over
which the cables run parallel to each other, the less the danger of interference.
How to read the table
To check how cables of different types must be laid, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Find the cable type of the first cable in column 1 (Cables for ...).
2. Find the cable type of the second cable in the relevant section in column 2 (and cables
for ...).
3. Read the guidelines for laying the cables in column 3 (lay ...).
Table 1-1 Cabling within buildings
Cables for ...
and cables for ...
Lay ...
Bus signals, shielded
(PROFIBUS, Industrial
Ethernet)
Bus signals, shielded
(PROFIBUS, Industrial
Ethernet)
In common bundles or cable
channels
Bus signals, unshielded
(ASInterface)
Bus signals, unshielded
(ASInterface)
Data signal, shielded
(PG, OP, printer, counter inputs
etc.)
Analog signals, shielded
DC voltage
(v 60 V), unshielded
Process signals
(v 25 V), shielded
AC voltage
(v 25 V), unshielded
Monitors (coaxial cable)
DC voltage
(u 60 V and v 400 V),
unshielded
In separate bundles or cable
channels (no minimum
clearance required)
AC voltage
(u 25 V and v 400 V),
unshielded
572
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Cables for ...
and cables for ...
Lay ...
DC and AC voltage
(u 400 V), unshielded
Within closets:
In separate bundles or cable
channels (no minimum
clearance required)
Outside closets:
On separate cable paths with at
least 10 cm clearance
HF cables for transmitter high
level stages and transmitter
antennas with voltages from 10
to 1000 V
11.8.7.3
Lay HF cables in steel pipes
with multiple ground points; at
least 30 cm clearance
Cabling within closets
Cabling within closets
When running cables within cubicles and cabinets, remember the following rules:
● Install the cables in metallic, electrically conductive cable channels.
● Screw the cable channels to the struts of the rack or cubicle walls approximately every 50
cm making lowresistance and lowinductance contact.
● Separate the cables according to the categories as shown in table 1-1.
● Maintain the minimum clearance between the cables of different categories as explained
in table 1-1. In general, the risk of interference due to crosstalk is less the greater the
clearance between the cables.
● Where cables of different categories cross, they should cross approximately at right
angles (wherever possible avoid sections where the cables run parallel).
● The shields of all cables entering the wiring closet should make largearea contact with
closet ground as close as possible to the point of entry.
11.8.7.4
Cabling within buildings
Cabling within buildings
When laying cables outside cabinets but within buildings, note the following points:
● Install the cables in metallic, electrically conductive cable channels.
● Include the metal cable channels and racks in the bonding system of the building or plant.
Note the information on equipotential bonding in Section 1.3 in this manual.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
573
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
● Separate the cables according to the categories as described in table 11 and run the
various categories in their own channels/racks.
● If there is only one common metal channel available for all categories, either the
clearances shown in Table 11 must be maintained or the individual categories should be
separated from each other by metallic partitions. The partitions must be connected to the
channel making lowresistance and lowinductance contact.
● Cable racks should cross each other at right angles.
11.8.7.5
Cabling outside buildings
Using fiberoptic cables
Industrial Twisted Pair is intended for use within buildings (tertiary area). The installation of
Industrial Twisted Pair cables between buildings in not permitted. LAN connections between
buildings and between buildings and external facilities are only possible with fiberoptic
cables (FO). Due to the optical transmission principle, fiberoptic cables are not affected by
electromagnetic interference. Measures for equipotential bonding and overvoltage protection
are unnecessary with fiberoptic cables.
11.8.8
Laying bus cables
11.8.8.1
Installation instructions for electrical and optical bus cables
Installation instructions for electrical and optical bus cables
General
During installation, remember that LAN cables can only be subjected to a certain amount of
mechanical strain. Cables can be damaged or even destroyed by too much tensile stress or
pressure, by torsion or by bending them too sharply. The following instructions will help you
to avoid damage when installing LAN cables. If cables are subjected to strain or stress as
listed above, they should always be replaced.
Storage and transportation
During storage, transportation and cabling, the open ends of the LAN cable (without
connectors) must be kept closed with a shrinkon cover to prevent oxidation of the cores and
to keep dampness out of the cable.
574
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Temperatures
During transportation, cabling and operation, the cable must not be exposed to temperatures
below the specified minimum temperature or above the specified maximum temperature
otherwise the electrical and mechanical characteristics of the cables can deteriorate. The
permitted temperature ranges of your bus cable can be found in the technical data sheets of
the bus cables
Tensile strength
The tensile force exerted on the cables during or after installation must not exceed the limits
of tensile strength of the cables. The permitted tensile strain on your bus cable can be found
in the technical data sheets of the bus cables.
Pull preassembled cables using cable grips
To pull preassembled cables, make sure that you use cable grips. These surround the
connector and protect it from damage when pulling in the cable.
Fitting strain relief
Make sure that you provide strain relief approximately 1 m from the connection point on all
cables subject to tensile force. Shield clamps are not adequate for strain relief.
Pressure
Too much pressure on the cables must also be avoided, for example crimping the cable
when securing it in position.
Torsion
Torsion can lead to the elements of a cable being displaced and degrading the electrical
characteristics of cables. Bus cables must therefore not be twisted.
Bending radiuses
To avoid damage within the bus cables, they must at no time be bent more sharply than the
minimum bending radius. Note the following:
● The permitted bending radii are larger when pulling in the cable under tensile strain than
in the fixed, installed state
● Bending radii for noncircular cables apply only to bending the flat, broader surface. Bends
in the narrower surface require much greater radii.
The permitted bending radii for your bus cable can be found in the technical data sheets of
the bus cables.
Avoid loops
When laying LAN cables, roll them tangentially from the cable drum or use appropriate rotary
tables. This prevents loops forming and resulting in kinks and torsion.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
575
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
Installing other cables
Remember that cables must not be subjected to excessive strain and stress when installed.
This can, for example, happen when cables are installed along with other cables on a
common rack or in a common duct (providing this is electrically permitted) and when new
cables are pulled along the same path later (during repairs or when extending a system).*
11.8.8.2
Additional instructions on installing fiberoptic cables
Protecting connectors from contamination
Fiberoptic cable connectors are sensitive to contamination. Unconnected male and female
connectors must be protected with the supplied dust caps.
Attenuation variations under load
During installation, fiberoptic cables must not be twisted, stretched or squashed. The
specified limit values for tensile strain, bending radii and temperature ranges must be
adhered to. During installation, the attenuation values can vary slightly, these variations are,
however, reversible providing the strain limits are not exceeded.
Pull cables using cable grips and protect connectors
If the cable does not have a Kevlar pulling attachment, make sure that you use cable grips.
Before fitting the cable grip, make sure that the connectors of preassembled cables are
protected from the pressure exerted by the cable grip, for example using a piece of
protective tube.
Fitting strain relief
Although the BFOC connectors have their own strain relief and kink protection, it is advisable
to arrange for additional strain relief as close as possible to the connected device to protect
against mechanical strain.
Plan adequate attenuation reserves
When installing cables over greater distances, it is advisable to take into account one or
more repair splices in the power loss budget.
Electromagnetic immunity
Fiberoptic cables are immune to electromagnetic interference. Installing cables in cable
channels along with other cables (for example 230 V/380 V power supply cables) causes no
problems. When installing in cable channels, however, make sure that the permitted strain
on the fiberoptic cables is not exceeded when pulling in other cables later.
576
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Instructions for fitting connectors, attachments and devices
11.8 Guidelines for setting up networked automation systems in buildings
WARNING
Keep to the technical specifications
During installation and operation, all mechanical requirements for the cable such as
bending radii, tensile strain etc. must be kept to. If these are exceeded, there may be
deterioration of the transmission characteristics that can lead to temporary or complete
failure of the data transmission.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
577
Part C: Installing network components in cabinets
12.1
12
IP degrees of protection
General
Electrical equipment is normally surrounded by a protective casing.
The purpose of this casing includes
● Protection of persons from touching live components or moving parts
(accidental contact protection)
● Protection of equipment from intrusion of solid foreign bodies (solid body protection)
● Protection of equipment from ingress of water (water protection).
IEC 60529, EN 60529 /15/
The degree of protection specifies the degree to which the casing meets these
three protective functions.
The degrees of protection are specified uniformly in the "International Standard IEC 60529"
or in the identical European standard EN 60529.
The degree of protection of a casing is indicated by a code. The code consists of the letters
IP (International Protection) followed by a code number for contact, solid body and water
protection as shown below:
IP 5 4
Code letters
(International Protection)
1. Code number (0 - 6)
Protection against accidental contact
and solid matter ingress
2. Code number (0 - 8)
Water protection
In some situations, the degree of protection is specified in even greater detail by adding
letters to the code numbers.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
579
Part C: Installing network components in cabinets
12.2 SIMATIC NET components
Scope of protection
The various degrees of protection are listed briefly in Tables 1-1 and 1-2. For more detailed
information on the individual ratings and the test conditions that must be fulfilled, please refer
to the standards listed above.
Table 12-1
Contact protection (short form)
First number
Protection of equipment from intrusion of
solid foreign bodies
0
not protected
not protected
1
≥ 50.0 mm diameter
back of hand
2
≥ 12.5 mm diameter
finger
3
≥ 2.5 mm diameter
tool
4
≥ 1.0 mm diameter
wire
5
dust protected
wire
6
dustproof
wire
Table 12-2
Water protection (short form)
Second number
12.2
Protection of persons from access to
dangerous parts
Protection of equipment from ingress of water
0
not protected
1
vertically falling drops of water
2
falling water (15° from vertical)
3
sprayed water
4
splashwater
5
jet water
6
strong jet water
7
temporary immersion
8
long period of immersion
SIMATIC NET components
Ventilation openings
The casings of most SIMATIC NET network components have ventilation openings. To allow
more effective cooling of the electronics components, ambient air can flow through the
casing. The maximum operating temperatures quoted in the technical specifications apply
only when there is unrestricted flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Depending on the size of the ventilation openings, such modules comply with degree of
protection IP 20, IP 30 to IP 40. You will find the precise degree of protection of a SIMATIC
NET component in its operating instructions.
580
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Part C: Installing network components in cabinets
12.2 SIMATIC NET components
Components with the degrees of protection mentioned above do not provide protection
against dust and water! If the installation site requires such protection, the components must
be installed in an additional enclosure such as a switching cubicle that provides the higher
degree of protection (for example IP65/ IP67).
If you install these components in an additional enclosure, make sure that the conditions
required for operation are maintained!
Heat dissipation
Make sure that the temperature inside the additional enclosure does not exceed the
permitted ambient temperature for the installed components. Select an enclosure with
adequate dimensions or use heat exchangers.
Outdoor installation
If you install the equipment outdoors, make sure that the additional enclosure is not
subjected to direct sunlight. This can lead to a considerable rise in temperature within the
enclosure.
Clearances
Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the component so that
● the convection cooling of the component is not restricted
● components do not cause neighboring components to heat up more than permitted
● there is enough space for installing cabling
● there is enough space to remove components for maintenance or repair.
Note
Regardless of the degree of protection of the casing, the electrical and optical ports are
always sensitive to
- mechanical damage
- damage caused by electrostatic contact discharge when touched
- contamination by dust and fluids
On devices with degree of protection IP65, always close unused ports with the supplied
dust protection caps. Remove these caps only immediately before connecting up the
cables to the ports.
Standards
EN 60529:2000 degree of protection due to casing (IP code) (IEC 60529:1999)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
581
A
Appendix
A.1
Overview of the standards relevant for network installation
Introduction
This section provides with a basic overview of the standards generally relevant for
installation of networks in buildings and those particularly relevant for Industrial Ethernet.
Note
This section can only include basic information available at the time of going to print.
Fort more detailed and up-to-date guidelines, contact the PROFIBUS user organization e.V.
The PROFIBUS user organization
PROFIBUS User Organization e.V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7,
D-76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel. +49 (0) 7 21 · 96 58 590, Fax +49 (0) 7 21 · 96 58 589
germany@profibus.com, www.profibus.com
Standards for general-purpose cable communications networks in an office environment
Standard
Area of application
ISO/IEC 11801
International standard for network planning in office buildings
EN50173
European standard for network planning in office buildings; adopted as national
standard
Due to the use of Ethernet in automation engineering, the existing standards needed to be
expanded to include the industrial sector.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
583
Appendix
A.1 Overview of the standards relevant for network installation
Standards for general purpose cable communications networks in an industrial environment
Standard
Area of application
ISO/IEC 24702
International standard for planning general-purpose networks in industrial
buildings
EN50173-2
EN50173-3
European standard for network planning in industrial buildings; adopted as
national standard
For industrial applications, expanded standards are necessary that describe the constraints
for these applications
Cabling standards for industrial networks and their scope
Standard
Area of application
Scope
IEC 61918
International standard for communications
networks in industrial automation systems;
relevant for various fieldbuses, common
aspects of planning, installation, operation1)
Describes the network structure and
general requirements in and
between automation cells
IEC61784-5-x
International series of standards for special
requirements in industrial networks such as
PROFINET / PROFIBUS, supplementing
IEC 61918
Describes specific requirements of
the communication profile
1)
Fieldbus-specific aspects are described in separate, ancillary standards
The "PROFINET Cabling and Interconnection Technology" guideline
Among other things, the PROFIBUS User Organization has produced the "PROFINET
Cabling and Interconnection Technology" guideline that served as input for IEC 61918 and
IEC 61784 and that also references these standards.
It describes the technical benchmark values for cables and connectors (both electrical and
optical) for PROFINET networks. These are intended to help new manufacturers to produce
PROFINET-compliant products.
The guideline can be downloaded in English from the URL:
http://www.profibus.com/pall/meta/downloads/article/00327/
584
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Appendix
A.2 Content of the standards
A.2
Content of the standards
Content of the IEC 24702 and EN50173-3 standards
The standards for general purpose building networking of buildings used for industrial
purposes describe:
● The structure of the building network,
● The requirements for cables (fibre-optic, electrical),
● The requirements for connectors (fibre-optic, electrical),
● Limit values for installed links.
IEC 24702 references IEC11801.
Technical aspects of installation described in IEC 14763 (EN50174).
Content of the IEC 61918 and IEC61784 standards
the standards for automation networks include a general section describing the following
points:
● Design of the network (network structure, grounding, equipotential bonding),
● Planning and installation,
● Requirements of components (table connectors, cables, grounding, ...)
● Acceptance of an installation,
● Maintenance and service.
IEC 61918 contains general requirements common to all fieldbuses (PROFINET, PB,
Interbus,…).
Fieldbus-specific aspects/requirements that differ from the general section described in
profile-specific standards, for example in IEC61784-5-3 for PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS PA and
PROFINET; IEC61784-5-6 for Interbus.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
585
Appendix
A.3 Application of the standards
A.3
Application of the standards
Application of the EN standards 50173/50174
Standard
Project phase
Tasks
EN50173-1
Planning of cabling
Topology, cables, connection technology, limit
values for transmission links
EN50174-1
EN50174-2
EN50174-3
Planning phase
Management of the cabling, safety requirements,
laying of cables, equipotential bonding)
EN50174-1
EN50174-2
EN50174-3
Implementation phase
EN501714-1
Operational phase
Quality assurance, management of the cabling,
repair and maintenance
Description of the fieldbus-specific characteristics in IEC 61784
This standard references IEC 61918.
Standard
Fieldbus
IEC 61784-5-2
ControlNet, EtherNet/IP
IEC 61784-5-3
PROFIBUS, PROFINET
IEC 61784-5-6
Interbus
IEC 61784-5-10
Vnet/IP (Yokogawa)
IEC 61784-5-11
TCnet (Toshiba)
General-purpose cabling systems: EN 50173/EN 50174
Standard
Contents
EN50173-1
Part 1: General requirements
EN50173-2
Part 2: Office environment
EN50173-3
Part 3: Industrial area
EN50173-4
Part 4: Domestic environment
EN50174-5
Part 5: Computer centers
Installation of communication cabling: EN 50174
586
Standard
Contents
EN50174-1
Part 1 Specification and quality assurance
EN50174-2
Part 2 Installation planning and practices in buildings
EN50174-3
Part 3 Installation planning and practices outdoors
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
802.11
A series of standards for wireless network protocols developed by the IEEE.
Access point
A node in a WLAN that performs administrative functions in the network while at the same
time provides → clients with the connection to wired networks, other clients in the same
wireless cell or in other wireless cells.
ACL
"Access Control List", list with → MAC addresses with the right to access the wireless
network
Ad hoc network
Ad hoc network (ad hoc: Latin "for this purpose") is used in information technology to
describe a wireless network between two or more mobile end devices without a fixed
infrastructure.
This technology is used, for example, in Bluetooth to allow the spontaneous linking of mobile
phones, for example with headsets.
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
Aging time
The aging time is the time after which a learned → MAC address is discarded if an IE switch
has not received frames with this sender address during this time.
Antenna diversity
The simultaneous availability of two wireless interfaces on one device. In areas hostile to
wireless communication, it is possible to switch over to the interface with the frequency
currently providing the best reception.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
587
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
Autocrossover
Technique with which a → TP port is automatically switched over between → MDI and
→ MDIX pin assignment to make a connection regardless of the port pin assignment of the
device being attached. This means that crossover cables are not required. The
autocrossover function can only be used when the port is set to → autonegotiation mode.
Autonegotiation
Procedure standardized by IEEE 802.3 in which the transmission parameters (for example
10/100 Mbps, full/half duplex) are negotiated automatically between the devices.
Bandwidth
Practically synonymous with "maximum usable data rate". The term derives from the fact
that the transmission at a certain data rate occupiers a proportionally wide part of the
wireless spectrum.
BFOC
"Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector", a connector system for glass fiber FO cables with which
the cable is secured by a bayonet locking mechanism.
BOOTP
A protocol for automatic assignment of IP addresses. The IP addresses are provided by a
BOOTP server. → DHCP.
CLI
Command Line Interpreter. Option for configuring various devices based on a command line.
The CLI can be used with → TELNET over every Ethernet Port.
Client
A node of a WLAN without a infrastructure capability of its own that accesses a wireless
network via an → access point.
Collision domain
To ensure that the → CSMA/CD protocol functions correctly, the propagation time of a data
packet from one node to another is restricted. This propagation time results in a spatially
limited span for the network depending on the data rate known as the collision domain.
Connection monitoring
With regular link test pulses, a switch monitors the connected TP and FO cable segments for
short-circuits or interruptions. The switch does not send data to a segment from which it is
not receiving link test pulses.
588
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
CP 1515
Communications processor (wireless adapter) for a wireless connection of a laptop, a
programming device or an Internet pad with a WLAN. This is the predecessor to the
→ CP 7515. Both have been overtaken in the meantime by wireless interfaces integrated in
the PG.
CP 7515
Communications processor (wireless adapter) for a wireless connection of a laptop, a
programming device or an Internet pad with a WLAN. The CP 7515 has two wireless
interfaces (→ antenna diversity) and consists of a PCMCIA type II card that is inserted in the
appropriate slot of the laptop. In the meantime, the CP has been replaced by wireless
interfaces integrated in the PG.
C-PLUG
The C-PLUG (configuration plug) is an exchangeable memory medium of storing the
configuration data. If the device is replaced, the configuration can be adopted by swapping
the C-PLUG.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A checksum used in transmission protocols to detect errors in
frames.
CSMA/CA
"Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance", a method for detecting "collisions";
in other words, an attempt by more than one sender to start transmission on a frequency at
the same time. When this happens, both senders stopped at transmission and wait for a
more or less random time. They start their repeated transmission only when the other sender
has not started to transmit during this time. A second collision can only occur if both
randomly selected delays are identical.
Cut through
In the Cut Through process not the entire data package is stored temporarily in a buffer, but
is passed directly onto the target port as soon as the first 6 bytes (target address) have been
read. The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal.
The data is only stored temporarily using the store and forward mechanism when the section
between the target part and the port of the next switch is in use.
In PROFINET switches, cut through is implemented by using ERTEC-ASICs.
Default gateway
A network node that forwards all frames not addressed to stations in the same LAN (subnet).
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
589
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), like → BOOTP, a method for automatic
assignment of IP addresses. With DHCP, however, addresses can be assigned while the
device is operating.
Dispersion
Broadening and distortion of light pulses in fiber-optic cable due to signals arriving at
different times. On → multimode FOC, the distortion of the output signal is greater than with
→ single mode FOC.
Display mode (DMode)
Display mode that indicates various statuses (port status, power monitoring activated etc.).
The modes can be switched over using a button on the switch.
DSSS
"Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum", a wireless modulation technique as used in
IEEE 802.11 standard "b".
Duplex connection
A connection between two nodes on which both can send and receive simultaneously. This
means that no collisions are possible during communication. "Switched LANs" operate with
D.
EAP
"Extensible Authentication Protocol", a protocol with which servers and clients can negotiate
a procedure for authentication prior to the actual authentication.
ESM
Electrical Switching Module – SIMATIC NET Ethernet switch with electrical ports.
Event
For Alarms & Events: An event is anything that happens that could be of interest to a client.
Although events can also be generated when a condition is met, they are not necessarily
dependent on conditions. Events that are not linked to conditions include, for example, error
messages of the communication system.
Fault mask
Specifies the desired status (good status). Deviations from this occurring during operation
are handled as faults.
590
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
Firewall
A computer or an application located between a local parent an external network to block
illegitimate data traffic between the networks. In this way, they prevent unauthorized access
from the outside.
FO port
Fiber Optic port
FRNC
"Flame-Retardant Non-Corrosive" a halogen-free, flame-retardant material for cable jackets.
No acids are released when FRNC burns.
Full duplex connection
Synonymous with duplex connection
GARP
"Generic Attribute Registration Protocol", previously "Group Address Registration Protocol",
a protocol for LANs with which the switches and end devices can exchange "attributes"
(node IDs, addresses etc.). This gives each node an overview of the structure of the entire
network.
Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode- it is only possible to either send or receive over the
interfaces at any one time.
Half duplex connection
A connection on which only one node can transmit at any one time. The opposite is a duplex
connection. Half duplex is typical for shared LANs such shares wireless networks.
Handover
The transfer of a mobile client from one access point and its wireless cell to the next (see
roaming); in particular, the reintegration in the network.
Hidden node problem
Two nodes (for example clients) are arranged in a cell so that they are both connected to a
third receiver (access point) but they themselves cannot see each other; in other words, both
clients are outside the wireless range of the other. If both nodes send to the access point at
the same time, the packets collide at the access point without the nodes being aware of it.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
591
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
Hub
A device that operates like a → switch by connecting individual segments of a networked
together. In contrast to a switch, however, there is only a physical connection but no analysis
of the network traffic. The administrative advantages of using switches (routing network
traffic, collision rejection etc.) are therefore not available with hubs.
ICMP
"Internet Control Message Protocol", is used in networks to exchange information and error
messages via the Internet Protocol (→ IP). It is therefore located at the same level as, for
example, → TCP and → UDP. ICMP Operates at the same OSI Model layer as IP, at the
Network Layer (layer 3).
IEEE
"Institute of Electrics and Electronics Engineers", a US institute that works on guidelines and
technical recommendations, to some extent comparable with DIN.
IGMP
"Internet Group Management Protocol", a protocol with which a computer connected to the
Internet can inform a neighboring switch of the → multicast groups to which it belongs. This
protocol simplifies and speeds up communication when a message is intended for a larger
group of recipients. (mailing lists, audio and video streams, ...)
IP30
A degree of protection that indicates that a component in this category is protected from the
intrusion of coarse solid foreign bodies (as of 2.5 mm diameter), but is not protected from the
ingress of water. This corresponds to a normal electrical household appliance.
IP65
A degree of protection that indicates that the component in this category is fully protected
from dust and water jets. This corresponds to a practically airtight encapsulation.
IP67
A degree of protection that indicates that the component in this category is fully protected
from dust and water jets and will not be damaged by temporary immersion in water.
iPCF
"Industrial Point Coordination Function", a proprietary network protocol supported by
SIEMENS that is the basis of rapid roaming (see entry). The → handover times allow
roaming of mobile nodes to be reduced to the order of 30 ms.
592
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
IRT
"Isochronous Real Time Technology", real-time communication even under difficult
conditions (overload situation, complex network topology etc.). When this acronym is used in
device names, it identifies devices such as SCALANCE S switches that support IRT
technology.
Isochronous Real-Time Communication, IRT
In PROFINET with IRT, communication over Ethernet is divided into individual cycles. Each
cycle consists of two phases, an IRT channel reserved for extremely time-critical data, and
an "open channel", within which RT and non-time critical frames can be sent.
This allows time-critical and uncritical data to be sent on the same connection. At the same
time, however, a certain data rate (and therefore a transmission time) is reserved for the
critical data and real-time capability can therefore be guaranteed.
When this transmission method is implemented in ERTEC-ASICs (Enhanced Real-Time
Ethernet Controller), cycle times of 0.25 ms and jitter accuracy below 1 µs are achieved.
ITP
"Industrial Twisted Pair", a cabling and connector technology for Ethernet adapted to the
requirements of an industrial environment.
IWLAN
An IWLAN is an "Industrial WLAN", in other words, a wireless network "hardened" to cope
with the wireless complications of an industrial environment.
LAN
"Local Area Network", a spatially restricted network, for example compared with the Internet
Latency
Latency specifies the time taken by frames to pass through a switch. This does not include
the time required for buffering frames.
LD
"Long Distance", an acronym used with SCALANCE S devices whose optical interfaces are
designed for particularly long distances
Load containment
With its filtering functions, a switch makes sure that local data traffic remains local. The local
network load of a segment is contained in the originating segment and does not represent
extra load on the remainder of the network.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
593
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
MAC
"Media Access Control", a protocol for controlling access to a transmission medium (cable,
wireless) that cannot be accessed by all nodes at the same time.
MAC address
A worldwide unique identification number for every hardware component of importance in a
network.
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface, - straight.
On a MDI port or a MDI cable, the receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) cables are not crossed
over.
MDI-X
Medium Dependent Interface – Crossover. On an MDI-X port or MDI-X cable, the receive
(Rx) and the transmit (Tx) lines are crossed over.
MIB
Management Information Base. The MIB is a formal description of network objects in the
form of a tree structure that contains all the relevant information for network management in
→ SNMP.
Mirroring
A port (mirror port) with its specific data traffic can be mirrored to another port (monitor port)
for test purposes. Protocol analysis devices can be connected to the monitor port, in other
words, the monitor port is not available for data exchange. Mirroring has no effect on the
mirror port.
Modes
Modes are discrete waves used to transmit data within a fiber-optic cable. With → single
mode fibers, only one wave propagates, whereas in → multimode fibers several waves
propagate. Modes are patterns of electromagnetic fields in FOCs.
Multicast
A frame with a multicast address is received by all nodes prepared to receive this address.
Multimode
In multimode transmission, the pulse is transferred using many modes (waves) that travel
along curved paths or are reflected within the core. Attenuation is mainly caused by physical
absorption and dispersion as well as by mechanical bending. The amount of attenuation
depends among other things on the wavelength of the input light. Multimode fiber-optic
594
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
cables have an outer diameter of 125 µm and 50 or 62.5 µm core diameter. Due to the larger
core diameter the pulse edges degrade more than in single mode transmission resulting in
shorter transmission distances.
OFDM
"Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex", a wireless modulation technique used in the
IEEE 802.11 standards "a", "g" and "h"
Omnidirectional antennas
Antennas without a specific directional characteristic in contrast to directional antennas.
OSM
Optical Switching Module – SIMATIC NET Ethernet switch with optical ports.
Passive listening
Support of Rapid Spanning Tree Topology Change frames. When an RSTP topology change
frame is received, the → MAC address table is deleted.
PCF
Polymer Cladded Fiber
Optical fiber that can be assembled in the field and whose core is made of glass and jacket
made of plastic.
POF
Plastic Optical Fiber
Optical fiber that can be assembled in the field and whose core and jacket are made of
plastic.
PROFIDrive
PROFIdrive is the functional interface between controllers and drives in PROFINET and
PROFIBUS. PROFIdrive is defined by the PROFIdrive profile of the PROFIBUS user
organization (PNO).
PROFISave
A safety profile complying with safety standard IEC 61508 that allows the transmission of
standard and safety-oriented data on one bus cable and can be used regardless of the bus
medium. PROFIsafe is the first profile certified by the German TÜV for failsafe
communication for Ethernet.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
595
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
PST
"Primary Setup Tool", a software tool for the basic parameter assignment of Web
components
RADIUS
"Remote Authentification Dial In User Service". a method in which the authentication is
handled on a separate server.
Rapid roaming
Roaming in which the re-establishment of the connection is so fast that there is no
appreciable interruption of connectivity (→ handover). Rapid roaming is implemented with
→ iPCF.
Reconfiguration time
The time required to restore a functional configuration if a device fails or a network cable is
interrupted.
Redundancy manager (RM)
A switch in a ring topology that does not forward any frames between its → ring ports if there
are functioning connections between all other switches. As soon as a connection between
two switches is interrupted, the redundancy manager forwards frames between its ring ports
and so restores an intact connection between all switches.
RFC
"Request for Comments", the informal specification of a proposed standard for
communication, technology or method.
Ring port
Two ports in a switch via which this switch is connected to other switches to form a ring. One
switch must be configured as the → redundancy manager in the ring. This sends test frames
via the ring ports that are forwarded by all the ring ports of the other switches in the ring. This
makes sure that the ring does not have any interruptions.
RJ-45
"Registered Jack 45", a connector design with oblong jacks and 8 wires. RJ-45 connectors
are used, for example for telephones and Ethernet connections.
RMON
Remote Monitoring. RMON-compliant devices allow diagnostic data to be collected on the
device and read out by a network management station. This means that network problems
are detected early and can be eliminated. The particular advantage of RMON is that it is
596
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
independent of location. The acquired data can be analyzed at any point in the network with
suitable reporting software.
Roaming
The movement of a WLAN node from one wireless cell to the next.
RR
Acronym that identifies SCALANCE W devices that support → rapid roaming.
RSSI
"Received Signal Strength Indicator", a measure of the strength of the received wireless
signal. RSSI is generally standardized so that the value "100" represents the maximum
reception strength.
RSTP
"Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol", a protocol with which the switches of a network can
determine paths for delivering messages between end devices. If the network has a
redundant topology (in other words, if there are several different paths connecting the
relevant nodes), the failure of any component or a cable can be compensated by switching
over quickly to the alternative path. RSTP is a further development of → STP.
SC connector
A type of connector preferred for fibre-optic cables with a square connector and high packing
density.
SC RJ
A type of connector preferred for → PCF/POF fibre-optic cables with a square connector and
high packing density.
Segment
In the Ethernet bus system, transceivers connected together over the bus cable along with
the nodes connected over patch cables form a segment. Several such segments can be
connected via repeaters. When using twisted pair and fiber-optic cables, each subsection
forms a segment.
Signaling contact
Floating relay contact via which the detected error states can be signaled.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
597
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
Single mode
In single mode transmission, (and monomode transmission) the pulse is transmitted by a
straight mode (wave). Attenuation is mainly caused by physical absorption and dispersion as
well as by mechanical bending. The amount of attenuation depends, among other things, on
the wavelength of the input light. The single mode fiber typically has a core diameter of 5 to 9
µm. The outer diameter is, however, once again 125 µm (compare multimode). The smaller
core diameter degrades the pulse edges less than multimode transmission and allows
greater transmission distances.
SMTP
"Simple Mail Transfer Protocol", the de facto standard for transferring mail over the Internet.
SOFTNET Security Client
A PC application used for the connection of PGs, notebooks and other PCs to networks
secured by SCALANCE S. The PC then functions as a VPN client.
Spanning Tree
The Spanning Tree protocol (STP) allows redundant transmission paths. This prevents
circulating frames and, if a fault develops, provides an alternative path within 20 - 30
seconds (reconfiguration time).
Spoofing
A term used for various subterfuges used in computer networks to disguise one's own
identity.
Spoofing normally involves an attempt to falsify the data packets of the intruder so that they
have the sender address of a different (trustworthy) host.
SSID
"Service Set Identifier", within the framework of a → "Wi-Fi" WLAN, the name of a network
that needs to be known to all network nodes at the same time and that constitutes part of
each transferred message. SSIDs alone provide only extremely weak access protection from
third parties and should always be supplemented by other encryption methods.
SSL
"Secure Sockets Layer", a protocol for encrypted data transfer in the Internet is that obtains
its security by using "public key" algorithms.
Standby
Indicates the ability of a device to take over operation within a very short time.
598
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
Store and forward
With the store and forward mechanism, the switch stores the frames and then queues them.
The frames are then forwarded selectively to the specific port that can access the addressed
node (store and forward).
STP
"Spanning Tree Protocol", a protocol similar to → RSTP, with which the switches of a network
obtain information about the topology in which they are located. STP has various
weaknesses that can be exploited by potential attackers and that are avoided in the further
development known as RSTP ("Rapid STP").
TCP
"Transmission Control Protocol", along with → UDP a further protocol for communication over
the Internet. In contrast to UDP, TCP is connection-oriented; in other words, a dialog is
established between the sender and recipient. The advantage of this is that the correct order
and completeness of a fragmented message can be checked. The drawbacks are the
greater overheads for communication and administration.
TCP/IP
"Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol", a set of protocols governing
communication over the Internet. Alongside → TCP that provides the "elementary" functions
(exchange of data frames, etc.), the "Internet Protocol" is used to implement the more
complex protocol layers (sequence of a session).
TELNET
With this protocol, an interactive connection can be established to another device in the LAN
or on the Internet. The user then has the same options as when directly connected to this
device with a terminal.
TFTP
"Trivial File Transfer Protocol"; a simple, UDP-based protocol for data transfer. Due to its
limited size, it can also be used by network nodes with little ROM.
TKIP
"Temporary Key Integrity Protocol", a protocol for dynamic changing of the RC4 key with
which message transmission is coded in a WLAN.
TP port
Port with a TP connector (RJ-45 jack)
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
599
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
UDP
"User Datagram Protocol", along with → TCP a further protocol for communication over the
Internet. UDP does not provide any mechanisms for checking the completeness or the order
of transmitted packets but does reduce the overheads resulting from the management
functions of more complex protocols such as TCP. UDP Is suitable particularly for sending
short messages to a large number of recipients (broadcasting/multicasting).
VLAN
Virtual LAN within a physically existing network.
VPN
"Virtual Private Network", the use of a "private" network that uses a "public" network to
transfer messages. The use of the private network is transparent for the nodes of the public
network; in other words, invisible. In contrast to the nodes of the public network, however,
the private messages can be encrypted or hidden using tunnel techniques. A VPN allows the
use of a protected network embedded in an unprotected environment.
WAN
"Wide Area Network", a spatially restricted network with a greatest span than a LAN
WBM
"Web Based Management", configurations of an active node from an external Web browser
that accesses a Web browser integrated in the node via an IE connection.
WDS
"Wireless Distribution System", a method for grouping several access points to link the
access points for an Extended Service Set (ESS).
WEP
"Wired Equivalent Protocol", an encryption method for wireless data traffic.
Western plug
A colloquial for → RJ-45 connector
Wi-Fi
IWLAN product identifier introduced by the "WiFi-Alliance" manufacturers' association for
products compatible with a certain subset of the → 802.11 standards; sometimes also
(incorrectly) used as a general synonym for → "WLAN".
600
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Glossary: Terms and acronyms
WLAN
"Wireless Local Area Network", a wireless-based LAN
WPA
"WiFi Protected Access", an encryption method for wireless data traffic.
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK is a weakened form of WPA. In this method, authentication is not established by a
server but is based on a password. This password must be configured manually on the client
and server. Wherever possible, you should change to the WPA method to achieve greater
security.
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
601
Index
1
100BASE-TX, 46
5
50 µm fibers, 202
50174
Standard, 586
5e
Category for twisted-pair cable, 20
6
62.5 µm fibers, 202
8
802.11
WLAN standards, 42
A
Access point, 66, 67, 68
Access Point, 44
Active network components
in PROFINET, 33
Ad hoc
Wireless network, 67
Ad hoc networks, 67
Address Resolution Protocol, 154
Advanced Encryption Standard, 43, 152
AES, 43, 152
Antenna cables, 214
Antennas, 209
ARP protocol, 154
AS-Interface system, 22
ATEX100a, 229
Authentication
WLAN, 151
Autocrossover function, 103
Automated guided vehicle system, 70
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Automated guided vehicle systems, 71
Autonegotiation, 103
B
Backbone, 54
BFOC connectors, 505, 559
Bus cables, 555
Electrical safety, 555
Handling bus cables, 555
in plants, 555
Button, 240
C
Cabinet lighting
EMC, 569
Cable length, 104
Cabling, 573
Within buildings, 573
Within closets, 573
Carousels, 41
Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection, 43
CLI, 151
Client, 44, 66, 67, 68
Client list, 153
Collision detection, 43
Collision domain, 38
Command Line Interface, 151
Compatibility list, 129
Configuration limits
for Industrial Ethernet communications media, 31
Connectors
Fiber-optic cables, 312
Power supply, 313
Signaling contact, 315
Twisted pair cables, 308
Connectors
Power supply, 313
C-PLUG, 76, 163
Cranes, 41
CSMA/CA, 43
CSMA/CD, 43
603
Index
Cut through, 30, 111
D
Data espionage, 160
Data manipulation, 160
Data reservation, 19, 23
Degrees of protection, 579
Denial of Service, 37
Determinism, 27
Display, 241, 242
Distributed field devices, 22
Distributed intelligence, 22
DoS, 37
DSSS, 42
E
EAP, 43
E-mail, 36
EN 50173
Standard, 583, 586
Encryption
WLAN, 152
Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller, 27
Error
Reduced voltage, 241
ERTEC-ASIC, 27, 30
Espionage, 81
Extensible Authentication Protocol, 43
F
Fast Connect Twisted Pair, 186
Fast Ethernet
Common Ethernet features and differences, 20
Fast learning, 113
FastConnect, 100, 186
Fault mask, 103
FC twisted pair, 186
Festoon cable, 443
Fiber-optic cables (FO cables), 201
Fieldbus integration, 22
with PROFINET, 22
Firewall, 36, 80
Food cable, 443
Formation of loops, 104
Forwarding timeofday frames, 173
FRNC Cable GP 2x2, 442
FTP, 36
604
G
GARP, 128
Gateway
IWLAN/PROFIBUS, 73
Gigabit Ethernet, 20
Graded-index fibers, 201
Grounding, 375
H
Handover, 71, 155
Handover time, 155
Harbors, 76
High-Availability, 28
High-bay storage rack, 41
high-bay storage stacker/retriever, 213
High-speed plant networks, 132
High-speed redundancy, 63
Hub, 38
I
IE FC Festoon Cable, 443
IE FC TP Food Cable, 443
IEC 61508
Safety standard, 23
IEC 61784
Standard, 586
IEC 61918
Standard, 584
IEEE, 41
IEEE 802.3u, 46, 48
IGMP, 128
Increased port requirements, 132
Industrial Ethernet
Restrictions of, 20
industrial Point Coordination Function, 155
Industrial Twisted Pair, 186
Infrastructure mode
Wireless networks, 67
Installation, 299
Media module, 324
IP address conversion, 81
IP address filtering, 80
IP degrees of protection, 579
IP mapping table, 154
iPCF, 19, 23, 71, 155
IPSec tunnel, 161
IRT, 21, 107, 111
IRT communication, 24
ISO (H1), 28
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Index
ISO on TCP/RFC 1006, 28
ISO/IEC 11801
Standard, 583
ISO/IEC 24702
Standard, 584
Isochronous Real Time, 21, 27, 107, 111
ITP, 186
IWLAN, 40
IWLAN RCoax Cable, 213
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 66, 72, 78
L
LD, 106, 111
Leaky feeder cable, 71, 213
Learning Table, 154
LED display
System, 282
LED display - Power, 281
Lightning protection, 374
Lightning protector, 214, 346
Line
Network topology, 54
Logging functionality, 80
M
M12, 46
MAC address filtering, 80
MAC Dir filter, 156
MAC filter, 43, 155
Managed Industrial Ethernet switches, 111
Management functions, 106
Manipulation, 81
Maximum lengths
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable, 49
Multimode glass fiber-optic cable for
1 Gbps Ethernet, 50
Single mode glass fiber-optic cable, 49
Twisted-pair cable runs, 47
MDI/MDIX autocrossover function, 103
Mesh
Network topology, 84
Mesh networks
Topologies, 84
Monomode FO cables, 201
Monorail suspension track, 41, 213
Motion control, 22
Multichannel configuration
WLAN, 71
Multimode fiber-optic cable, 311
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
N
NAPT, 154
NAT, 37
NAT/NAPT
Functionality, 81
Network Address Port Translation, 154
Network Address Translation, 37
Network topologies, 128
Networking bus cables
Notes, 555
O
OFDM, 42
Omnidirectional antennas, 69
Optical Switch Module (OSM)
Functions, 172
Housing, 391
Installation, 391
Linear bus topologies, 174
Overlap AP, 152
P
Packet filter, 36
Passive network components
in PROFINET, 33
PAT, 154
Patch cable, 190
Personal firewall, 37
Plug and play, 103
POF/PCF-LWL termination kit, 506
Polarity reversal protection, 313, 314
Port, 36
Port Address Translation, 154
Port status
DMode A, 284
DMode B, 285
DMode C, 286
DMode D, 287
Power supply
Degree of protection IP65, 224
IP30, pin assignment, 231
PowerPack license
SINEMA E, 216
Primary area
Cabling buildings, 187
PROFIBUS User Organization, 24, 583
PROFIdrive, 22, 24
PROFINET
Cable assembly, 34
605
Index
Fault-tolerant systems, 28
Isochronous Real Time, 27
Real-time, 27
Ring redundancy, 28
Switching mechanisms, 29
PROFINET Cabling and Interconnection Technology
Guideline, 584
PROFINET CBA, 23
PROFINET diagnostics, 132
PROFINET IO, 23
PROFIsafe, 23, 24
Protocol filter, 156
Proxy, 22
Pseudo random numbers, 42
R
RADIUS
Network authentication protocol, 42
Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree Protocol, 132
Rapid roaming, 19, 23, 71, 144, 155
RC4 algorithm, 152
RCoax cable, 66, 213
Real Time, 21, 27
Real-time classes, 27
Real-Time Communication, 27
Redundancy manager, 39, 60, 62, 132, 176
Redundant links with the OSM/ESM, 176
Redundant ring, 39
Redundant systems, 28
Redundant Wireless LAN, 71
Remote monitoring, 177
Repeater, 38
Ring
Network topology, 59
RJ-45, 46
RJ-45 jack
Assignment, 231
RMON, 177
Roaming, 66, 70
RSSI, 153
RSTP, 128
RT, 21
RTS/CTS, 44
RWLAN, 71
S
Safety concept, 23
Safety extra low voltage, 375
Salt spray resistance, 76
606
Secondary area
Cabling buildings, 187
Security Configuration Tool, 159
Security modules, 44
SELECT / SET button, 304
Self-healing
Network, 84
SET button, 240
Shared LAN, 38
Shared medium, 67
Shield contact
Establishing, 568
Shielding cables, 567
SIENOPYR Duplex FiberOptic Marine Cable, 496
Signal recorder, 153
Signaling contact, 240, 241, 243
Assignment, 232
Silent listener
Wireless network, 41
SIMATIC iMap
Engineering tool, 24
SIMOTION Scout, 24
Single mode fiber-optic cable, 311
Slip contacts, 41
SOFTNET Security Client, 82, 83, 158
Spanning Tree Protocol, 84
Special cables
Contact person, 185, 422
Special lengths
Contact person, 185, 422
Spoofing, 43
SSH, 36
SSID, 153
Standalone network, 67
Standards for general purpose cable communications
networks
Industrial environment, 584
Standards for general-purpose cable communications
networks
Office environment, 583
Standby mode
OSM/ESM, 176
Standby redundancy, 64
Standby-sync ports, 176
Star
Network topology, 55
Star coupler, 38
Stateful packet inspection, 36, 159, 161
STEP 7, 24
Step-index fibers, 201
Store and forward, 30
Structured cabling, 186
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
Index
Switch, 38, 44, 55
Switched Ethernet, 29
Switched LAN, 38
Syslog server, 79
Media module, 325
Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet media converters, 116
Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches, 111
UV resistance, 76
T
V
TCP/IP, 21, 26
Technical specifications, 247
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, 152
Termination kit, 506
Terminator, 214
Tertiary area
Cabling buildings, 187
TIA, 26
TKIP, 152
Totally Integrated Automation, 26
TPC/IP communication, 24
Trailing cable, 41
Transitions from one media to another, 117
Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, 21
Trap, 177
Tree structure
Network topology, 58
Tunnel, 213
Tunneling, 37
Twisted Pair Cord, 186
Twisted pair interface converters
Connector pinout, 458
Virtual Private Network, 37
viruses
Computer, 36
VLAN, 128
VPN, 37
VPN tunnel, 82
U
UDP/IP, 26
Uninstalling, 300
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual
System Manual, 06, 6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
W
WBM, 151, 152, 155
WDS, 71, 144, 155
Web Based Management, 23, 151, 177
WEP, 42, 152
Western plug, 461
Wi-Fi Protected Access, 42
Wired Equivalent Privacy, 42, 152
Wireless cell, 66, 68
Wireless Distributed System, 71, 155
Wireless networks
Structured, 68
Unstructured, 67
WLAN, 40
WPA, 42
WPA (RADIUS), 152
WPA2, 43
WPA-PSK, 152
607
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Industrial Ethernet - DLE ELECTRIC SUPPLY
Accessories
Industrial Wireless Communication
Siemens_Wireless Ethernet Infrastructure Applications Whitep
Industrial WLAN communicatie
FastConnect - Quick, easy and error-free
Catalog IK PI 2012, English
SCALANCE X- Industrial Ethernet Switches
Catalog IK PI 2015, English
IKPI 2007, englisch, Kapitel 8, Netzübergänge
Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200
Industrial Wireless Communication Brochure
SCALANCE W and SCALANCE WLC Next Generation Industrial Wireless LAN December 2011
Siemens X005 User's Manual
Siemens EK 746 Series Operating instructions
Media Converters Info Sheet The ABCs of Media Converters
Short Catalog SIMATIC NET 10/2009
Siemens SCALANCE X-200 Technical data
Brochure SINEMA Server
Industrial Twisted Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
1 2 3 4
Siemens SCALANCE X-200 Specifications
Do you need a help? Ask Manualzz Experts!
Download PDF

Ask a Question

Expand

advertising

Related questions

Manualzz © 2019
Manualzz provides technical documentation library and question & answer platform. It's a community-based project which helps to repair anything.
About us DMCA / GDPR Abuse here